SIP5 7KE85 V09.20 Manual C018-A en

Preface
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC 5 Basic Structure of the Function 2
Fault Recorder
System Functions 3
7KE85
Applications 4
V9.20 and higher Power-System Data 5
Function-Group Types 6
Manual
Fault Recorder 7
Control Functions 8
Supervision Functions 9
Measured and Energy Values 10
Functional Tests 11
Technical Data 12
Appendix A
Literature
Glossary
Index
C53000-G5040-C018-A
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Subject to changes and errors. The information given in Copyright © Siemens 2022. All rights reserved.
this document only contains general descriptions and/or The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
performance features which may not always specifically document, or utilization and communication of the content
reflect those described, or which may undergo modifica- are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
tion in the course of further development of the products. including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
The requested performance features are binding only when utility model or a design, are reserved.
they are expressly agreed upon in the concluded contract.
Document version: C53000-G5040-C018-A.01 Trademarks
Edition: 04.2022
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGRA, SIGUARD, SIMEAS, SAFIR, SICAM,
Version of the product described: V9.20 and higher and MindSphere are trademarks of Siemens. Any unauthor-
ized use is prohibited.
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

This manual describes the functions of the fault recorder 7KE85.
Target Audience
System engineers, commissioning engineers, and persons entrusted with the setting, testing and mainte-
nance of fault recorder equipment, and operational crew in electrical installations and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Further Documentation
[dw_product-overview_SIP5_device-manual, 5, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 3

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Preface
[dw_product-overview_SIP5_compact-hardware, 1, en_US]
• Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed
manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.
• Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5
device family.
• Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.
• Communication protocol manual

The Communication protocol manual contains a description of the protocols for communication within
the SIPROTEC 5 device family and to higher-level network control centers.
• Security manual
The Security manual describes the security features of the SIPROTEC 5 devices and DIGSI 5.
• Process bus manual

The process bus manual describes the functions and applications specific for process bus in SIPROTEC 5.
• Product information
The Product information includes general information about device installation, technical data, limiting
values for input and output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation. This document is
provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the Engi-
neering Guide shows you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and update the
functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
4 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Preface
• DIGSI 5 online help

The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5 and CFC.
The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the basic operation of software, the DIGSI princi-
ples and editors. The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC programming, basic examples
of working with CFC, and a reference chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the SIPROTEC 5 range.
• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about important product features, more detailed infor-
mation about the individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with tasks based on practical
operation and a brief explanation.
• SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on harmonization of the laws of the Member States concerning electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU), restriction on usage of hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU), and
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council Directive
in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive), the standard
EN IEC 63000 (for RoHS directive), and with the product standard EN 60255-27 (for
Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German
standard VDE 0435.
Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.
For more information about the UL database, see ul.com
You can find the product with the UL File Number E194016.
IND. CONT. EQ.

69CA
Additional Support
For questions about the system, contact your Siemens sales partner.
Customer Support Center

Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Siemens AG
Smart Infrastructure – Protection Automation Tel.: +49 911 2155 4466
Customer Support Center E-Mail: energy.automation@siemens.com
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD Phone: +49 911 9582 7100

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Preface
Humboldtstraße 59 E-mail: poweracademy@siemens.com

90459 Nuremberg Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Germany
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given attention.
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this document are
people who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Preface
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Proper operation and maintenance

When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
Selection of Used Symbols on the Device
No. Symbol Description
1 Direct current, IEC 60417, 5031
2 Alternating current, IEC 60417, 5032
3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417, 5033
4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417, 5017
5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417, 5019
6 Caution, risk of electric shock
7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000, 0434
8 Protective Insulation, IEC 60417, 5172, Safety Class II devices
9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices
10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market
11 Mandatory Conformity Mark for Electronics and Electrotechnical Products in Morocco
OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in OpenSSL Toolkit (http://
www.openssl.org/).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................21
1.1 General.............................................................................................................................22
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 23
1.3 Properties of the Fault Recorder.........................................................................................25
1.4 Parameterization and Analysis Software............................................................................ 27
1.4.1 DIGSI 5 ....................................................................................................................... 27
1.4.2 SICAM PQS/SICAM PQ Analyzer.................................................................................... 27
1.5 Scope of Functions............................................................................................................30
2 Basic Structure of the Function.................................................................................................................. 33

2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device...............................................................................34
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope..................................................... 38
2.3 Function Control............................................................................................................... 40
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Parameter and Indications .................................42
3 System Functions....................................................................................................................................... 45
3.1 Indications........................................................................................................................ 46
3.1.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 46
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel .................................................... 46
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5............................................................... 48
3.1.4 Display of Indications .................................................................................................. 49
3.1.5 Logs............................................................................................................................ 50
3.1.5.1 General ................................................................................................................. 50
3.1.5.2 Operational Log .................................................................................................... 51
3.1.5.3 User-Defined Log .................................................................................................. 53
3.1.5.4 Sequence of Events Log......................................................................................... 56
3.1.6 Setting-History Log ..................................................................................................... 58
3.1.7 Communication Log.................................................................................................... 60
3.1.8 Security Log ................................................................................................................61
3.1.9 Device-Diagnosis Log .................................................................................................. 63
3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log ....................................................................................... 64
3.1.11 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device ................................................................ 66
3.1.12 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology ............68
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ............................................................................................. 69
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups...........................................71
3.3.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................71
3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking...................................................................................... 71
3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups..........................................................................................74

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes.............................................................................................79

3.4.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................79
3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values............................. 81
3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts.................................................. 87
3.4.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions............................ 91
3.5 Date and Time Synchronization......................................................................................... 95
3.5.1 Overview of Functions................................................................................................. 95
3.5.2 Structure of the Function............................................................................................. 95
3.5.3 Function Description....................................................................................................95
3.5.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................98
3.5.5 Information List........................................................................................................... 99
3.6 User-Defined Objects...................................................................................................... 101
3.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................101
3.6.2 Basic Data Types........................................................................................................ 102
3.6.3 Energy Metered Values ............................................................................................. 106
3.6.4 Additional Data Types................................................................................................ 106
3.6.5 External Signals......................................................................................................... 106
3.7 Other Functions.............................................................................................................. 108
3.7.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals................................................ 108
3.7.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.................................................................112
3.7.3 Persistent Commands................................................................................................ 114
3.7.4 Device Logout........................................................................................................... 115
3.7.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 115
3.7.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 116
3.7.4.3 Information List................................................................................................... 118
3.8 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Trigger Functions................................. 119
3.8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 119
3.8.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5.............................................................. 119
3.8.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device ...................... 126
3.9 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit ....................................................128
4 Applications.............................................................................................................................................. 131
4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 132
4.2 Application Template and Functional Scope of the Fault Recorder.................................... 133
5 Power-System Data...................................................................................................................................137
5.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 138
5.2 Structure of the Power-System Data................................................................................ 139
5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings............................................................ 140
5.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase (I-3ph)...................... 141
5.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 1‑Phase (I-1ph)...................... 144
5.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).....................146
5.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1‑Phase (V-1ph).....................151
5.8 Settings.......................................................................................................................... 153
5.9 Information List.............................................................................................................. 160
5.10 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.................................................................................. 163
5.10.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 163

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents
5.10.2 Function Description..................................................................................................163

5.10.3 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................164
5.10.4 Information List......................................................................................................... 165
6 Function-Group Types.............................................................................................................................. 167

6.1 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase............................................................................. 168
6.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................168
6.1.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 168
6.1.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................171
6.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase................................................................. 172
6.2.4 Write-Protected Settings............................................................................................ 176
6.2.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................176
6.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase................................................................. 177
6.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................177
6.3.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................183
6.4 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker............................................................................... 185
6.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................185
6.4.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................188
6.4.6 Trip Logic.................................................................................................................. 189
6.4.6.1 Function Description............................................................................................ 189
6.4.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 191
6.4.7 Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 191
6.4.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 191
6.4.7.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker............................................... 192
6.4.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information..............193
6.4.7.4 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression.......................................................... 195
6.4.7.5 Tripping and Opening Information....................................................................... 196
6.4.7.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 199
6.4.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions........... 200
6.4.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 200
6.4.9 Detection Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)......................................... 201
6.4.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 202

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents

6.5 Function-Group Type Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)....................................................204
6.5.4 Transmitted Data....................................................................................................... 209
6.5.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)......................................................................... 209
6.5.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI............................................................................211
6.5.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device.......................................................................222
6.5.9 Settings.....................................................................................................................227
6.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units.................................................................................. 228
6.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................228
6.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet..................................................................................................230
6.6.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 230
6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 230
6.6.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet........................................................... 231
6.6.3.5 20-mA Channel.................................................................................................... 232
6.6.3.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 236
6.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial...................................................................................................... 238
6.6.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 238
6.6.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 240
6.6.5 Communication with 20-mA Unit...............................................................................242
6.6.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit........................................................................ 242
6.6.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet....................................................................245
6.6.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs..........................................................247
6.6.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 247
6.6.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 253
6.6.7 RTD Unit Ethernet...................................................................................................... 255
6.6.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 255
6.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit......................................................................... 256
6.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor.............................................................................................258
6.6.7.6 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 259
6.6.7.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 260
6.6.8 RTD Unit, Serial..........................................................................................................262
6.6.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 262
6.6.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 263

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents
6.6.9 Communication with RTD Unit................................................................................... 265

6.6.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)..................................................... 265
6.6.9.2 Integration of an RTD Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP)................................................... 268
6.6.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors ............................................................ 270
7 Fault Recorder.......................................................................................................................................... 271

7.1 Introduction to DIGSI 5....................................................................................................272
7.1.1 General..................................................................................................................... 272
7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device .......................................... 272
7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in DIGSI 5................................................275
7.1.4 Step 3: Evaluating Recordings.................................................................................... 283
7.1.5 Working with IEC 61850............................................................................................ 286
7.2 Function-Group Type Recorder........................................................................................ 290
7.2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................290
7.2.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings....................................................... 293
7.2.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................294
7.2.7 Time Jumps............................................................................................................... 295
7.2.8 Fast-Scan Recorder.................................................................................................... 296
7.2.8.1 Overview of Functions......................................................................................... 296
7.2.8.2 Structure of the Function .................................................................................... 296
7.2.8.3 Function Description ........................................................................................... 296
7.2.8.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 300
7.2.9 Slow-Scan Recorder................................................................................................... 301
7.2.9.1 Overview of Functions .........................................................................................301
7.2.9.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 306
7.2.10 Continuous Recorder................................................................................................. 307
7.2.10.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 310
7.2.11 Trend Recorder.......................................................................................................... 311
7.2.11.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 313
7.2.12 Sequence of Events................................................................................................... 313
7.2.13 Flow Control of Fault Records (Fast-Scan and Slow-Scan Recorder)............................. 313
7.2.13.1 Function Description of the Retrigger Blocking Time............................................. 313
7.2.13.2 Triggering Without the Retrigger Blocking Time ................................................... 314

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents
7.2.13.3 Triggering With the Retrigger Blocking Time......................................................... 316

7.3 Function Description Analog and Binary Triggers............................................................. 323
7.3.2 Function Description Analog Trigger.......................................................................... 323
7.3.2.1 Structure of the Analog Trigger............................................................................ 323
7.3.2.2 Trigger Functions of the Analog Trigger ............................................................... 324
7.3.2.3 Level Trigger ....................................................................................................... 325
7.3.2.4 Gradient Trigger (dM/dt) ......................................................................................325
7.3.3 Function Description Binary Trigger........................................................................... 326
7.3.3.1 Manual Trigger Start............................................................................................ 326
7.3.3.2 External Trigger Start ...........................................................................................329
7.3.3.3 GOOSE Trigger .................................................................................................... 330
7.3.3.4 Trigger Start Using Logic Block Chart.................................................................... 330
7.3.3.5 Triggers on Indications ........................................................................................ 330
7.4 Trigger Functions 1-Phase............................................................................................... 332
7.4.1 Voltage Trigger..........................................................................................................332
7.4.1.4 Application and Setting Notes Trig V RMS (RMS Value)..........................................334
7.4.1.5 Application and Setting Notes Trig V Fund (Fundamental Component)..................335
7.4.1.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 337
7.4.2 Current Trigger.......................................................................................................... 338
7.4.2.4 Application and Setting Notes I RMS Trig.............................................................. 340
7.4.2.5 Application and Setting Notes I Fund. Trig............................................................ 342
7.4.2.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 343
7.4.3 Frequency Trigger..................................................................................................... 346
7.4.3.4 Application and Setting Notes - Frequency Trigger................................................ 348
7.4.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 349
7.4.4 Power Trigger............................................................................................................ 350
7.4.4.4 Application and Setting Notes – Trigger P............................................................. 352
7.4.4.5 Application and Setting Notes – Trigger Q............................................................ 354
7.4.4.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 356
7.5 Trigger Functions 3-Phase............................................................................................... 358
7.5.1 Voltage Trigger..........................................................................................................358
7.5.1.4 Application and Setting Notes Trig V Fund (Fundamental Component)..................360
7.5.1.5 Application and Setting Notes Trig V RMS (RMS Value)..........................................363
7.5.1.6 Application and Setting Notes - V0 Trigger (Zero-Sequence System)......................366
7.5.1.7 Application and Setting Notes - V1 Trigger (Positive-Sequence System)................. 367

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents
7.5.1.8 Application and Setting Notes - V2 Trigger (Negative-Sequence System)............... 368

7.5.1.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 369
7.5.2 Current Trigger.......................................................................................................... 374
7.5.2.4 Application and Setting Notes I Fund. Trig............................................................ 376
7.5.2.5 Application and Setting Notes Trigger I RMS......................................................... 379
7.5.2.6 Application and Setting Notes - I0 Trigger (Zero-Sequence System)....................... 381
7.5.2.7 Application and Setting Notes I1 Trigger (Positive-Sequence System).................... 382
7.5.2.8 Application and Setting Notes - I2 Trigger (Negative-Sequence System)................ 384
7.5.2.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 385
7.5.3 Frequency Trigger..................................................................................................... 393
7.5.3.4 Application and Setting Notes - Frequency Trigger................................................ 395
7.5.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 396
7.5.4 Power Trigger............................................................................................................ 397
7.5.4.4 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Psum..........................................................399
7.5.4.5 Application and Setting Notes Qsum Trig..............................................................401
7.5.4.6 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Ssum..........................................................403
7.5.4.7 Function Description Trigger Power Swing............................................................404
7.5.4.8 Application and Setting Notes, Trigger Power Swing............................................. 405
7.5.4.9 Settings............................................................................................................... 406
7.6 Measurands and Recorder Routing Functions...................................................................410
7.6.1 Measurands...............................................................................................................410
7.6.1.1 Properties of Measurands .................................................................................... 410
7.6.1.2 Using Measurands ...............................................................................................410
7.6.1.3 Routing the Measurands in DIGSI 5 for Processing in SICAM PQS........................... 416
7.6.2 Recorder Routing V.................................................................................................... 417
7.6.2.3 Indications .......................................................................................................... 417
7.6.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 418
7.6.3 Recorder Routing VI 1-Phase...................................................................................... 420
7.6.4 Recorder Routing VI 3-Phase...................................................................................... 421
7.6.4.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 422

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents
7.6.5 V/I Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs.......................................................... 424

8 Control Functions..................................................................................................................................... 427

8.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................428
8.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................428
8.1.2 Concept of Controllables............................................................................................428
8.2 Switching Devices........................................................................................................... 431
8.2.1 General Overview...................................................................................................... 431
8.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker................................................................................ 431
8.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device..................................................431
8.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker............................................................ 437
8.2.2.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 445
8.3 Control Functionality.......................................................................................................450
8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.......................................... 450
8.3.2 Command Logging.................................................................................................... 461
8.3.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................465
8.4 User-Defined Function Block [Control]............................................................................. 466
8.4.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................469
8.5 CFC-Chart Settings.......................................................................................................... 471
8.5.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................472
9 Supervision Functions.............................................................................................................................. 475

9.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 476
9.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision.................................................................................477
9.2.1 Load Model............................................................................................................... 477
9.2.2 Function Points..........................................................................................................479
9.2.3 CFC Resources........................................................................................................... 479
9.3 Supervision of the Secondary System.............................................................................. 481
9.3.1 Signaling-Voltage Supervision....................................................................................481
9.3.1.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 484
9.3.2 Voltage-Balance Supervision...................................................................................... 486

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents

9.3.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 489
9.3.3 Voltage-Sum Supervision........................................................................................... 489
9.3.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 492
9.3.4 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision........................................................................... 492
9.3.4.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 494
9.3.5 Broken-Wire Detection............................................................................................... 494
9.3.5.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 498
9.3.6 Current-Balance Supervision...................................................................................... 499
9.3.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 501
9.3.7 Current-Sum Supervision........................................................................................... 501
9.3.7.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 504
9.3.8 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision........................................................................... 505
9.3.8.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 507
9.3.9 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Supervision...........................................................................507
9.3.9.3 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Measurement.................................................................. 508
9.3.9.4 Stage Description................................................................................................. 509
9.3.9.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 511

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents
9.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware................................................................................ 513

9.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................513
9.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum......................................................514
9.5 Supervision of Device Firmware.......................................................................................518
9.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration........................................................................... 519
9.7 Supervision of Communication Connections....................................................................520
9.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures........................................................................ 521
9.8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................521
9.8.2 Defect Severity 1....................................................................................................... 522
9.8.3 Defect Severity 2....................................................................................................... 526
9.8.4 Defect Severity 3....................................................................................................... 527
9.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm).................................................................................528
9.9 Group Indications............................................................................................................529
10 Measured and Energy Values................................................................................................................... 531

10.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................... 532
10.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................................ 533
10.3 Operational Measured Values.......................................................................................... 534
10.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components....................................................................537
10.5 Average Values............................................................................................................... 538
10.5.1 Function Description of Average Values..................................................................... 538
10.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values...................................................... 538
10.6 Minimum/Maximum Values.............................................................................................541
10.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values...................................................541
10.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values.................................... 542
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring......................................................................................543
10.7.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 543
10.7.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 543
10.7.3 General Functionality................................................................................................ 544
10.7.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 544
10.7.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 546
10.7.4 ΣI*-Method Stage...................................................................................................... 547
10.7.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 547
10.7.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 549
10.7.5 2P-Method Stage....................................................................................................... 550
10.7.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 550
10.7.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 554
10.7.6 I2t-Method Stage.......................................................................................................555
10.7.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 555
10.7.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 556

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents

10.7.7 Supervision CB Make Time Stage................................................................................557
10.7.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 557
10.7.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 558
11 Functional Tests........................................................................................................................................561
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 562
11.2 Directional Test .............................................................................................................. 563
12 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 565

12.1 General Device Data........................................................................................................566
12.1.1 Supply Voltage.......................................................................................................... 566
12.1.2 Binary Inputs............................................................................................................. 567
12.1.3 Relay Outputs............................................................................................................ 568
12.1.4 Design Data...............................................................................................................571
12.1.5 Influencing Variables for Measured Values................................................................. 574
12.1.6 SDHC Memory Card .................................................................................................. 575
12.2 Date and Time Synchronization ...................................................................................... 576
12.3 Phasor Measurement Unit............................................................................................... 577
12.4 Recorder Functions......................................................................................................... 578
12.4.1 Fast-Scan Recorder.................................................................................................... 578
12.4.2 Slow-Scan Recorder................................................................................................... 578
12.4.3 Continuous Recorder................................................................................................. 579
12.4.4 Trend Recorder.......................................................................................................... 579
12.4.5 Measured Values and Binary Inputs ........................................................................... 579
12.5 Supervision Functions..................................................................................................... 581
12.5.1 Voltage-Balance Supervision ..................................................................................... 581
12.5.2 Voltage-Sum Supervision........................................................................................... 581
12.5.3 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision .......................................................................... 581
12.5.4 Broken-Wire Detection .............................................................................................. 582
12.5.5 Current-Balance Supervision...................................................................................... 582
12.5.6 Current-Sum Supervision........................................................................................... 582
12.5.7 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision ...........................................................................583
12.5.8 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ..................................................... 583
12.5.9 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Supervision...........................................................................583
12.6 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values......................................................... 585
12.7 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring .....................................................................................590
12.8 CFC.................................................................................................................................591
A Appendix.................................................................................................................................................. 595
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options.............................................................................596
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions............................................................................. 597
A.3 Standard Variants for 7KE85............................................................................................600
A.4 Connection Examples for Current Transformers............................................................... 604
A.5 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices................................. 607
A.6 Application Examples of the Fault Recorder..................................................................... 610

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table of Contents
A.7 Shielding Concept .......................................................................................................... 613

A.8 SDHC Memory Card ........................................................................................................614
A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card .............................................................................. 616
Literature.................................................................................................................................................. 617
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................... 619
Index.........................................................................................................................................................631

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
1 Introduction
1.1 General 22
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 23
1.3 Properties of the Fault Recorder 25
1.4 Parameterization and Analysis Software 27
1.5 Scope of Functions 30

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
1.1 General
1.1 General
The protection of power distribution equipment is crucial in assuring a reliable electricity supply. The user
expects full availability of electrical energy at a consistently high standard of quality. Thus, for power-system
protection, for example, it is becoming increasingly difficult to distinguish between critical load cases and
short-circuits with minimum fault currents. The demands on optimum use and the corresponding parameteri-
zation of protection devices are rising. Intensive evaluation of available information from secondary equip-
ment (using fault recorders) is therefore essential. This is the only way to ensure today's currently high levels
of reliability and availability in electricity transmission and distribution systems for the future as well.
A new era has begun for fault recording with the introduction of the SIPROTEC 5 series. The 7KE85 fault
recorder was developed especially for the requirements of the changing energy market, both current and
future. Powerful, reliable monitoring, combined with the flexible engineering and communication options,
offers the basis for maximum reliability of supply.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5

The SIPROTEC 5 devices at the bay level are compact and can be installed directly in medium- and high-voltage
switchgear. They are characterized by seamless integration of fault recorder, protection, and control functions.
General Properties
• Powerful microprocessor
• Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker
• Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing switches from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters
• Easy operation via an integrated operation and display panel, or via a connected personal computer with
user interface
• Continuous calculation and presentation of measured values on the front display
• Storage of min/max measured values and storage of long-term average values
• Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording
• Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software
• Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface
• Battery-buffered, synchronizable clock
Microcomputer System
All device functions are processed in the microcomputer system.
This includes, for example:
• Filtering and preparation of the measurands
• Constant monitoring of the measurands
• Monitoring of the trigger conditions for the individual functions
• Querying of limiting values and time-outs
• Controlling of signals for the logic functions
• Storage of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis
• Administration of the operating system and its functions, such as data storage, real-time clock, communi-
cation, interfaces, etc.
• External distribution of information
Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the entire
device series. Significant features here include:
• Modular system design in hardware, software, and communication
• The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the SIPROTEC 5 family
• Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety
• The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices
• Ability to upgrade with innovations possible at all times through libraries

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
• Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions
• Multi-layered security mechanisms in all links of the security chain
• Self-monitoring routines for reliable localization and indication of device faults
• Automatic logging of access attempts and safety-critical operations on the devices and systems
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages coming from the instrument transformers and
adapt them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5 device has current and/or voltage
transmitters. The current inputs are therefore intended for the detection of phase currents and ground
current. The ground current can be detected sensitively using a core balance current transformer. In addition,
phase currents can be detected very sensitively for a particularly precise measurement.
The voltage inputs detect the measuring voltage of device functions requiring current and voltage measured
values.
The analog values are digitized in the internal microcomputer for data processing.
Binary Inputs and Outputs

The device receives information from the system or from other devices via the binary inputs and outputs. Indi-
cations are generated for the remote signaling of important events and states.
Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or detached operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide infor-
mation on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC
display, the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting
parameters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters
changed.
USB Interface and Serial Interfaces

The USB interface in the front cover enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI 5
operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
back are used to realize various communication protocols.
Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5 devices maintain complete communication redundancy:
• Multiple redundant communication interfaces
• Redundant and independent protocols for control centers possible (such as IEC 61850, either single or
redundant)
• Redundant time synchronization (such as IRIG-B and SNTP)
Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in
the supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply, are bridged by
capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
1.3 Properties of the Fault Recorder

The 7KE85 fault recorder is built on the flexible and powerful SIPROTEC 5 modular system and can thus also be
used universally in the scope of system solutions. The 7KE85 fault recorder is able to acquire extensive data,
such as measured values and sampled values (SAV), with high precision. It features a large number of analog
and binary inputs and a high sampling frequency. All data are recorded either by way of continuous criteria or
by way of different trigger criteria. Besides storing the data on internal mass storage, they can also transmit it
to central analysis systems. Consequently, you are able to monitor systems for typical characteristics.
The fault recorder continuously records on the one side via the trend recorder and the continuous recorder.
On the other side, the fault recorder records analog and binary data during a fault, for example, a voltage
change, short circuits or ground faults, using the triggered fast-scan or slow-scan recorders. The 7KE85 fault
recorder captures this high-precision, time-stamped record, including calculated measurands (such as, for
example, power or frequency), for later evaluation. The evaluation is done after reading out from the device
through DIGSI 5 via SIGRA or via the powerful fault record and PQ data analysis system SICAM PQS/SICAM PQ
Analyzer. Recorded data is archived on internal mass storage to prevent data loss in case of a loss of supply
voltage. Fault recording ensures long recordings with outstanding accuracy. The 7KE fault recorder captures
and processes the measurands and events according to the IEC 61000-4-30 and IEC 61000-4-15 standards.
Poor power quality can lead to a power failure. Effects on power quality consist of and are created chiefly by
large loads (for example, industrial processes), changes in the current network status (switching operations)
and by external effects (for example, lightning). Power quality standards (for example, EN 50160) are used to
specify limits for electric measurands within which connected devices operate properly without large power
losses. The fault recorder is used as a power quality recorder and evaluation device to show the power quality
of an electricity-supply system.
The fault recorder has the following properties:
• Embedding in the SIPROTEC 5 family with:

– A consistent hardware concept
– Numerous expansion modules
– DIGSI 5 as configuration tool
– A broad selection of functionalities on the basis of function points
• Fault recording and continuous recording for use in medium-, high-, and ultra high-voltage systems
(substations) and in power plants:
– 1 x Fast-scan recorder
– 2 x Slow-scan recorder
– 5 x Continuous recorder
– 2 x Trend recorder
• Event recorder for binary signals for monitoring of diverse components, such as circuit breakers, discon-
nectors, etc.
• PMU communication acc. to IEEE C37.118 standard
• IEC 61850 communication
• Sampling frequencies can be set from 1 kHz to 16 kHz
• Time synchronization via IRIG-B, DCF77, and SNTP
• External mass storage (Siemens SDHC memory card only) with 16 GB
• Flexible routing:
– Any desired routing of the measured values on each recorder
– Free combination of the measuring groups for the power calculation

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
• Recorded quality code:

– Quality characteristic for each recorded value as well as display of this characteristic in SIGRA/
SICAM PQ Analyzer
• Recording GOOSE signals
• Triggering on GOOSE signals via Continuous Function Chart
• Creation of flexible trigger conditions through use of Continuous Function Charts (CFC)
• Specifying the limits for electrical measurands
• Monitoring power quality (Power Quality Monitoring) according to EN 50160
• Power-quality measurement as per standard IEC 61000-4-30, Ed. 2, Class S

The following measurands can be recorded or calculated:
– Power frequency
– Supply voltage
– Current
– Measuring flicker according to IEC 61000-4-15 (Class F3)
– Dips, swells, and interruptions of supply voltage
– Voltage unbalance
– Harmonics and interharmonics of the voltage
– Harmonics and interharmonics of the current
– Voltage and current THD (total harmonic distortion) and THDS (total harmonic distortion of the
subgroup)
• Measurements of harmonics for voltage and current (inter- and subharmonics) and the total harmonic
distortion (Total Harmonic Distortion - THD) as per standard IEC 61000-4-7
• Measurement up to the 51st harmonic/50th interharmonics of the voltage and the current
• Measurement of the total demand distortion (TDD)
• Additional functions for simple tests and for commissioning

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
1.4 Parameterization and Analysis Software
1.4.1 DIGSI 5
Description
DIGSI 5 is the versatile engineering tool for parameterization, commissioning, and operating all SIPROTEC 5
devices. Its innovative user interface includes context-sensitive user instructions. Simple connection to the
device via USB and Ethernet IF enables you to work with a device easily and efficiently. The full capabilities of
DIGSI 5 are revealed when you connect it to a network of protection devices: Then you can work with all of the
devices in a substation in one project.
DIGSI 5 offers superior usability and is optimized for your work processes. Only the information you actually
need to carry out your tasks is shown. These can be reduced further via expanded filter mechanisms. Consis-
tent use of sophisticated and standardized mechanisms in the user interfaces requires less training. DIGSI 5 is
tailored to specific requirements. The free software variant DIGSI 5 Compact offers everything that is required
for a single device. The DIGSI 5 Standard Version is suitable for complex scenarios with several devices.
DIGSI 5 Premium contains the full functionality you need to raise your productivity to a new level.
1.4.2 SICAM PQS/SICAM PQ Analyzer
Description
Siemens SICAM PQS allows all fault records and network quality data (PQ data) to be analyzed in one system.
The protection of power distribution equipment is crucial in assuring a reliable electricity supply. The user
expects full availability of electrical energy at a consistently high standard of quality. Thus, for power-system
protection, for example, it is becoming increasingly difficult to distinguish between critical load cases and
short-circuits with minimum fault currents. The demands on optimum use and the corresponding parameteri-
zation of protection devices are rising. Intensive evaluation of available information from secondary equip-
ment using fault recorders is therefore essential. This is the only way to ensure today's currently high levels of
reliability and availability in electricity transmission and distribution systems for the future as well. Addition-
ally, the growing use of power electronics often has a noticeable impact on power quality. The result is poor
power quality, which can cause interruptions, production outages, and high follow-up costs.
Compliance with the generally valid quality criteria for electricity-supply systems as defined in standards (for
example, EN 50160) is therefore vital. The basis must be reliable recording and assessment of all quality
parameters. Weak points and potential fault sources can be identified early on and systematically eliminated.
With the software solution SICAM PQS, Siemens is setting new standards: For the first time, it is possible to
evaluate and archive centrally all network quality data from the bay level with one integrated software solu-
tion in a vendor-neutral manner. This gives you a quick and uncomplicated overview of the quality of your
system. With SICAM PQS, you can keep an eye on all relevant data: Fault records as well as all network quality
measured data. For combined applications, SICAM PQS is also easy to expand to a substation automation
system.
User Benefit
• Secured power quality for the supply of your plant
• Fast, transparent analysis of the cause and development of a system incident
• Efficient personnel deployment for troubleshooting
• Intuitive usability
• Evidence of compliance with generally accepted standards in utilities
• Online comparison of sampled PQ data with standard and customer-specific transmission code templates
• Immediate information on violations of the power-quality criteria
• Automatic determination of the fault location
• Automatic analysis and report creation for violations of the power-quality criteria

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
• Structured representation and structured access to archive data
• Cumulative summary of all PQ data in a state criterion (PQ index)
• Spatially distributed options for the monitoring and evaluation of PQ measured data
• Archiving of PQ data (measured values, fault records, PDR records)
• Different communication standards and interfaces for device connection and for the acquisition of
process data (Ethernet TCP/IP, serial interfaces)
• Automatic import from third-party devices in PQDIF and COMTRADE format
• Ethernet network monitoring, for example, based on SNMP
• Data exchange via OPC for the connection to office desktop computers
• Secured data access via a user management
• Redundant structure of the system on different levels
• Test and diagnostic functions
• Export of fault records via COMTRADE
• Export of PQ data via PQDIF
• Notification via e-mail and SMS
[dw7keebe-161012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 1-1 Overview of the Advantages of SICAM PQS
Architecture
SICAM PQS is suitable for varied use in energy supply or industrial facilities due to its modular system struc-
ture.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
Thus, SICAM PQS can be set up in different variants:
• Full Server with (source) archive and SICAM PQ Analyzer
• System with
– Full servers with (Source) archive
– SICAM PQ Analyzer Clients
• System with
– Full servers
– Archive computers with (Collector) archive
– SICAM PQ Analyzer Clients
The number of components which can be used in a system depends on the individual license.
(Source) Archive
The Full Server collects PQ measured data and fault records from connected devices and stores them in its
local (source) archive. This archive data can be directly evaluated by one or several SICAM PQ Analyzer(s).
(Collector) Archive
In distributed systems with one or several Full Servers, the data in the (source) archives is collected by the
SICAM PQ Analyzer Collector and stored in a central (Collector) archive on an archive computer. This archive
data is evaluated by one or more SICAM PQ Analyzer(s).
[dwcollec-151012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 1-2 Configuration Options with SICAM PQS System with Full Servers, SICAM PQ Analyzer Clients
and (Collector) Archive

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
1.5 Scope of Functions

Registration Systems in Power Plants
In power plants, it is essential that the following problems be analyzed and evaluated and, if necessary,
counter measures implemented:
• There is a short circuit on the generator during the startup phase, before the generator has reached the
rated frequency of the power-system voltage. During this time range, the generator frequency passes
through a range of 0 Hz to the rated value frated. Use of the Fast-scan recorder is necessary in this phase.
• The circuit breaker of the generator closes. In this time range, possible errors, such as incorrect phase
sequence or insufficient synchronization, must be registered. Use of the Fast-scan recorder is necessary
in this case, too.
• There is a short circuit on the generator or in the transmission system, after the generator was coupled
with the electrical power system and ran without interruption. Use of the function Fast-scan recorder is
helpful in this case, too. The cause of the short circuit on the generator can be analyzed with the record-
ings.
• Local or entire system power swings occur. These oscillations can severely stress the generator shaft, if,
for example, the use of electronic restraint measures (Power System Stabilizer (PSS)) is not provided or
the calibration of the electronics is faulty. These failures can be recorded precisely with the functions
Slow-scan recorder and Continuous recorder. The process quantities (power, frequency, RMS values of
the fundamental component of currents and voltages and of symmetric components) form a special
characteristic with which the electronic signals of the PSS and other important quantities, such as the
excitation current of the generator, the steam pressure etc., can be recorded. Finally, these signals can be
compared and evaluated with the history of the RMS value of the voltage and the current.
• Power swing cycles between the power plant and transmission system can lead to severe damage to the
generator if they are not detected in time and shut down. This job is performed by the distance protec-
tion equipment. With the use of the Slow-scan recorder function, the network status can be precisely
recorded before, during and after the power swing cycle. If, in parallel to this, the function is activated, it
is possible to clarify, for example, whether a closer or more distant short circuit in the network was the
cause for the trip of this power swing, or load or generator shedding which put the network in this state.
• The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) function is used for monitoring large transmission systems. With
this, the phasors of the power-system voltage, the line current, and the power frequency are calculated
precisely and provided with a time stamp. The calculated data are sent continuously to a computer via a
communication channel, the Phasor-Data Concentrator (PDC). The data of several PMUs are processed
and evaluated in the PDC so that bottlenecks in the transmission system, line overloads, etc., can be
determined.
• The Continuous recorder function is used to examine the long-term stability of power-system voltage
and power frequency. With these registration functions, the long-term history of the currents and
voltages, the active and reactive power, the power frequency and other important network variables can
be recorded. With the use of the Continuous recorder registration function, it is possible to adapt the
recordings to be more comprehensive and informative.
As described previously, through the use of a modern fault recorder and proper use of the corresponding func-
tions, the electrical events in and around the power plant can be recorded precisely and then analyzed.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
Registration Systems in the Transmission Systems

Most fault recorders are installed in the switchgears for transmission systems. Even though the main applica-
tion area is still post-mortem analysis and thus the use of the Fast-scan recorder function, the use of other
functions to understand stability problems in the energy network and take the appropriate counter measures
is growing.
• Capacitor voltage dividers are used in several transmission systems. In the case of a short circuit in the
line, high-frequency fault signals can occur in the voltage map, which then lead to over or under function
of protection devices. With the use of the function Fast-scan recorder, these transient processes, as well
as the behavior of the protection devices can be extensively analyzed.
• Common-mode reactors at the beginning and end of transmission lines form a resonant circuit with the
line capacity and /or with a longitudinal condenser. If a line is shut off, then resonant oscillations can
exist, which last several network periods. For 1-pole short interruptions, these oscillations of the meas-
ured values of protection devices can be significantly corrupted and thus cause unwanted tripping. For
this reason the resonant oscillations must be recorded and analyzed after switching off the lines with the
function Fast-scan recorder.
• Inductance of voltage transformers and scatter capacities in switchgears (busbars, lines) can lead to
ferroresonance effects. These problems are not registered under normal conditions of protection devices.
If these problems are not detected and counter measures implemented in a timely manner, significant
damage can result in the switchgear, such as the explosion of voltage transformers. For registration of
these processes, the function Fast-scan recorder is necessary.
• Measurements over large areas of the transmission system (Wide Area Monitoring) can be performed
with the functions Slow-scan recorder and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). The objective of the
measurements is the detection of power fluctuations and power swing cycles as well as voltage and
frequency stability problems.
• Increasingly, the use of continuous recorders is growing. With these functions, the long-term stability
problems can be analyzed in detail. These measurements form a solid foundation for expensive invest-
ments such as the procurement of compensation systems (SVC).
• The availability and quality of the power supply is very important for power distribution utilities. To
monitor the voltage quality (also known as Power Quality (PQ)) over a long period of time, the Trend
recorder function must be used. With this function, the long-term behavior of voltages (fluctuations in
frequency, voltage, short-term voltage changes, transients, signal distortions, etc.) can be precisely
recorded. Using the Trend recorder function contributes to a high-quality and reliable energy supply. An
analysis according to EN 50160 can be mapped using the averaged values (frequency: 10 s; short-term
flicker strength over 10 minutes and long-term flicker strength over 2 hours).
Registration Systems in HVDC Switchgear

The use of modern registration systems in high-voltage DC transmission systems (HVDC) is significantly
different from the use in transmission systems or power plants.
The use of the classic function Fast-scan recorder is thus very important in connection with the process signal
inputs. With this constellation, it is possible to register alternating and direct-voltage variables together. In
some cases, it is additionally desired to register gate trigger pulses for thyristors via binary channels. Areas of
use are, for example, Flexible Alternating-Current Transmission Systems (FACTS) and thyristor-driven reactive-
power compensation systems.
In the future, it can be expected that, in HVDC and FACTS systems, the use of the functions Slow-scan
recorder, Continuous recorder, and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) will increase to monitor the function
groups of the system for stability control of the network and to register faults.
Registration Systems in Distribution Systems and Industrial Complexes

Modern registration systems are used in important transformer stations where the transition from transmis-
sion to distribution takes place. Such transformer stations are present both in the power utility area as well as
in industrial complexes. The most important function is here the Fast-scan recorder for registering short
circuits.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Introduction
Identifying the Measuring Points

The measuring points can be assigned and established for example as in the Figure 1-3. The fault record or PQ
data acquisition requires, in addition to the selection of the measuring point, also requires a definition and
establishment of the evaluation criteria at the individual measuring points. There the monitoring of the
Network Quality is a combination of data acquisition techniques, which are classified according to purpose or
use.
[dwnetzve-161012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 1-3 General Display of the Measuring Points
Table 1-1 Assignment of Measuring Points
No. Measuring Points Location

1 Infeed (line or transformer) Possible busbars
2 Power generation/decentral power Busbars, transformers or generator connection
generation
3 Forwarding, distribution system Busbars (for example, if the busbar belongs to the transmis-
sion company and is run by it.)
4 Forwarding, infeed (line or trans- Decentral line connection (for example, if the line belongs to
former) the transmission company and is run by it.)
5 Forwarding, distribution system Transformer secondary circuit or cable for adjacent trans-
former station
6 Distribution, infeed (line or trans- Distribution transformer
former)
7 Power distribution, consumers Distribution transformers (for example, if the transformer
belongs to the transmission company and is run by it.)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
2 Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device 34

2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope 38
2.3 Function Control 40
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Parameter and Indications 42

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device

General
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer great flexibility in the handling of functions. Functions can be individually loaded
into the device. Additionally, it is possible to copy functions within a device or between devices. The necessary
integration of functions in the device is illustrated by the following example.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.
Application Template
When creating the device in DIGSI 5, you must specify the hardware configuration of the device. DIGSI 5 then
automatically offers the appropriate 7KE85 application template for the selected hardware configuration.
Select one of the offered application templates.
Also see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope.
Function Groups (FG)

Functions are arranged in function groups. This simplifies handling of functions (adding and creating). The
function groups are assigned primary objects, such as feeders with current and voltage transformers. Further-
more, special function group functionalities, such as all recorders (found in DIGSI 5 under Recording), can be
summarized.
The function groups bundle functions with regard to the following basic tasks:
• Assignment of functions to current and/or voltage transformers (assignment of functions to the meas-
uring points and thus to the fault recorder)
• Exchange of information between function groups

When a function is copied into a function group, it automatically works with the measuring points assigned to
the function group. Their output signals are also automatically included in the configured interfaces of the
function group.
The selected application template Fault recorder contains 4 function groups:
• Function group Voltage
• Function group Voltage/current
• Function group Recorder
• Function group PMU

The following tables show the structure of the function groups.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table 2-1 Function Group Voltage
Function Group (FG) Function (FN) Function Block (FB)

FG 3-phase voltage Frequency trigger Frq. Trigger
Voltage trigger V Fund. Trig
V RMS Trig
V0 Trigger
V1 Trigger
V2 Trigger
Recorder routing V Routing f
Routing V
Splitter Harm VA
VB
VC
VN
IA
IB
IC
IN
Splitter Intharm VA
VB
VC
VN
IA
IB
IC
IN
Table 2-2 Function Group Voltage/Current

FG Voltage/current 3-phase Frequency trigger Frq. Trigger
V RMS Trig
V0 Trigger
V1 Trigger
V2 Trigger
Current trigger I Fund. Trig
I RMS Trig
I0 Trigger
I1 Trigger
I2 Trigger
Power trigger P Sum Trig
Q Sum Trig
S Sum Trig
Recorder routing VI Routing f
Routing I
Routing power
Routing V

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

FG Voltage/current 1-phase Frequency trigger Frq. Trigger
V RMS Trig
Current trigger I Fund. Trig
I RMS Trig
Power trigger P trigger
Q trigger
Recorder routing VI Routing f
Routing I
Routing power
Routing V
Splitter Harm VA
VB
VC
VN
IA
IB
IC
IN
Splitter Intharm VA
VB
VC
VN
IA
IB
IC
IN
Table 2-3 Function Group Recorder

FG Recorder Fast-scan Fast-scan recorder
Slow-scan Slow-scan
Continuous Continuous
Trend Trend
Table 2-4 Function Group PMU

FG Phasor Measurement Unit – –
– – –
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the
application. You can add, create, or even delete user-specific function groups. You can also adapt the func-
tional scope within a function group according to the use case. You can find detailed information in the
DIGSI 5 Online help.
Interface Between Function Group and Measuring Point

The function groups receive the measurands of the current and voltage transformers from measuring points.
For this, the function groups are connected to one or more measuring points.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The number of measuring points and the assignment of function groups to the measuring points are preset by
the selected application template in accordance with the specific application. Therefore, this specifies which
measuring point(s) and the corresponding measurands have to be used by which function within the function
group.
The user can change the assignment as needed, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
You can find a detailed description of the assignment of the measuring points to the function groups in
chapter 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in DIGSI 5.
Trigger Routing – Interface between Function Group and Recorders

You can assign the trigger building blocks, which were configured in the feeder function groups flexibly to the
configured fault recorders. Each function group for feeders contains an overview of the successful assign-
ments for this purpose. In this overview this assignment can be adapted.
You can find a detailed description of the trigger assignment in chapter 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters
and Routing in DIGSI 5 under the keyword Trigger routing.
Functions, Function Blocks

Functions can be assigned to function groups. An assignment of a function to a feeder function group defines
that, for example, this function uses the measuring points of this feeder.
Functions can be further subdivided.
Functions consist, for example, of one or more function blocks:
• Example of a function with one function block: The function Fast-scan recorder consists of the single
function block Fst-scan rec.
• Example of a function with several function blocks: The Voltage trigger function consists of the function
blocks V Fund. Trig, Trig. V RMS, V0 Trigger, V1 Trigger and V2 Trigger
Each function block and each function (without function blocks) can be individually switched into specific
operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed function control and is explained in chapter
2.3 Function Control.
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions and function blocks can be added, created,
and deleted (see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope

The application template defines the preconfigured functional scope of the device for a specific use case. A
certain number of application templates is predefined for each device type. DIGSI 5 automatically offers the
application templates for selection when a new device is installed.
The available application templates with the respective functional scope are described in more detail in Appli-
cation template 4.1 Overview.
The selection of the application template first predefines which function groups and functions are available in
the device (see also in 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device).
You can adjust the functional scope to your specific application.
NOTE
i The routing of the signals in the application templates is a recommendation. The routing can be changed or
expanded at any time.
Adjusting the Functional Scope

Adjust the functional scope based on the selected application template. You can add, create, or delete func-
tions, stages, function blocks, or complete function groups.
In the DIGSI 5 project tree, this can be done via the following Editors:
• Single-line configuration
• Information routing
• Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added func-
tionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are also
copied when you copy functionalities.
NOTE
i If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or function block from the device, all settings and
routings will be lost. The function group, function, or function block can be added again, but then, the
default settings are active.
In most cases, the adjustment of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, tripping
stages, and function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks auto-
matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
In a few cases, it may be necessary to add a feeder function group. You must still connect the voltage and the
current/voltage function groups to one or more measuring points (see 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the
Device).
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.
Function Points
Function points (FP) are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. You can find more detailed
information in the description of application templates, in Application templates 4.1 Overview.
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
In addition to function-point classes (10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 to 1400) beginning with firmware version
V09.20, any function-point values in the range from 0 to 5000 are supported as a credit in the device. Thus,
the precise function-point credit required can be loaded into the device by the Function-Point Manager. Alter-
natively, you can order classless devices with 0 points (new option beginning with V09.20) or class-bound
with the required function-point class.
The current function-point consumption can be queried in DIGSI 5 using the menu item Device information
in the tab Resource consumption. You can find information on which functions or function blocks require
how many function points in Table 4-1.
Extending the Function-Point Credit

You can reorder function points if the function-point credit for the device is not enough or if you have ordered
a classless device with 0 points. Proceed as follows:
• Determine the function-point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator.
• Create a signed license file for your device with the SIPROTEC Function-Point Manager at www.siprotec-
function-point-manager.siemens.com or order the license file from your sales partner.
• Once you have ordered the license file using the Function-Point Manager, you can download it from
there directly.
• Once you have ordered the license file from your sales partner, you will receive it by e-mail or to down-
load.
• Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file onto your device. The procedure is described in the Online Help
of DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
2.3 Function Control

Function control is used for:
• Functions, which do not contain function blocks
• Function blocks within functions
NOTE
i Simplifying Functions and Function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies
to tripping stage control and function block control.
Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter Mode to define whether you
want a function to run (On) or not (Off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function or switch it into test
mode (parameter Mode = test) for the purpose of commissioning. In test mode the fault records are marked
with a test flag.
The function shows the current status – such as an Alarm – via the Health signal.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in the following figure. It is standardized for all fault recorder
functions. Therefore, this control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.
[lo_steuer, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-1 General Control of a Recorder Function
State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode and the input Superordinate state.
You set the specified operating state of the function via the parameter Mode. The function mode can be set to
On, Off, and Test. The operating state is described in Table 2-5. You can set the parameter Mode via:
• DIGSI 5
• On-site operation at the device
• Certain systems control protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103)

The possibility to adjust the superordinate state is limited. For test purposes, the complete device can set into
test mode.
The following table shows the possible function states:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table 2-5 Possible Function States
Function State Explanation

On The function is activated and operates as defined. The prerequisite is that status of the function is OK.
Off The function is turned off. It does not create any information. The status of a selected function always
has the value OK.
Test The function is set to test mode. This state supports the commissioning. All outgoing information of
the function (indications and, if available, measured values) is provided with a test bit. This test bit
significantly influences the further processing of the information, depending on the target.
NOTE: The Test mode is not available for the continuous recorder.
Target of the information Processing
Buffer The indications are provided with the identification Test in the buffer.
Contact An indication routed to contact is not triggering the contact.
Light-emitting diode (LED) An indication routed to the LED triggers the LED (normal processing)
CFC Here, the behavior depends on the state of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is not in test state:

The chart is not triggered by a status change of an information
with set test bit. The initial state of the information (state before
test bit was set) is not processed during execution of the chart.
• CFC chart itself is in test state:
The chart continues to process the information (indication or
measured value) normally. The CFC outgoing information is
provided with a test bit. The definitions in this table apply to its
continued processing.
A CFC chart can be set to the test state only by switching the entire
device to test mode.
Protocol Indication and measured value are transmitted with set test bit,
provided that the protocol supports this functionality.
If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE indication, the test bit is set spon-
taneously and the GOOSE indication is transmitted immediately. The
receiver of the GOOSE indication is automatically notified of transmitter
test mode.
Status (Health)
The status indicates whether a selected function is capable of its designated functionality. If so, the status is
OK. If, due to the device's state or problems within the device, the functionality is possible only to a limited
extent or not at all, the status will indicate Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).
Internal self-supervision can cause the functions to assume the Alarm status (see chapter Supervision Func-
tions). If a function assumes the Alarm status, it is no longer active (indication inactive is generated).
Only a few functions can signal the Warning status. The Warning status results from function-specific moni-
toring and is - if available - described in the function description. If a function assumes the Warning status, it
will remain active, that is, the function can continue to work in a conditional manner and trip in the case of a
protection function.
Inactive
The indication Inactive signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Inactive is gener-
ated in the following cases:
• Function is switched off
• Status of the function is in Alarm state
• Function is blocked by an input signal (see Figure 2-1)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Parameter and Indications
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Parameter and

Indications
Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The
reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of the
device and the corresponding description in the manual. You can find the reference numbers in this docu-
ment, for example, in the application and setting notes, in the logic diagrams, and in the parameter and infor-
mation lists.
In order to form unique test and reference numbers, every function group, function, function block, and indi-
cation or parameter has a text and a number. This means that structured overall texts and numbers are
created.
The structure of the text and reference number is in accordance with the hierarchy, already shown in chapter
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.
• Function group:Function:Function Block:Indication
• Function group:Function:Function Block:Parameter

The colon serves as a structure element to separate the hierarchy levels. Depending on the functionality, not
all hierarchy levels are always available. Function Group and Function block are optional. Since the same type
of function groups, functions as well as function blocks can be created several times, a so-called instance
number is added to these elements
EXAMPLE
The structure of the text and reference number is shown for the parameter dM/dt rise active and the
indication Health of the function Voltage trigger in the VI 3-phase function group. Function and function
group are only present once in the device (in the DIGSI 5 library). The representation is very simplified.
[dw_lofbem, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-2 Function Voltage Trigger in the Fault Recorder Function Group
The following table shows the text and numbers of involved hierarchy elements:
Name Number of the Instance number
type
Function group VI 3-phase 2 1
Function Voltage trigger 155 1
Function block V Fund. Trig. 1 957 1
Parameter dM/dt rise active 103 –
Indication Health 53 –

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Parameter and Indications
The instance numbers result from the following:
• Function group: VI 3-phase 1

1 Instance, because only one function group VI 3-phase exists in the device
• Function: Voltage trigger 1

1 Instance, because only one function Voltage trigger exists in the VI 3-phase function group.
• Function Block: Trig. V Fund. 1

1 Instance, because 1 Trig. V Fund. 1 exist in the function Voltage trigger
This results in the following texts and numbers (including the instance numbers):
Parameter: Number
VI 3-phase: Voltage trigger: V Fund. Trig: dM/dt rise active 21:_1551:_9571:_103
Indication: Number
VI 3-phase: Voltage trigger: V Fund. Trig: Health 21:_1551:_9571:_53
The structure is simplified accordingly for parameter and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
3 System Functions
3.1 Indications 46
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 69
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups 71
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes 79
3.5 Date and Time Synchronization 95
3.6 User-Defined Objects 101
3.7 Other Functions 108
3.8 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Trigger Functions 119
3.9 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit 128

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1 Indications
3.1.1 General
During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
• Measured data
• Power-system data
• Device supervisions
• Device functions
• Function executions during testing and commissioning of the device

In addition, indications give an overview of important fault events after a failure in the network. All indications
are furnished with a time stamp at the time of their occurrence.
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. The following number of
indications are saved at least in the respective buffer (depending on the scope of the indications):
• User-defined log 200 indications
• Operational log 2000 indications
• Sequence of events 2000 entries

If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted, the oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. During
a supply voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or storage in the flash
memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device display and navigation
using keys allow you to read and analyze the logs on site.
Indications can be generated spontaneously via the communication interfaces of the device and through an
external request in the form of a general interrogation. In DIGSI 5 indications can be tracked spontaneously in
online operation in a special indication window. Indications can be made accessible to higher-level control
systems through mapping on various communication protocols.
NOTE
i All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You will find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.
Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or a PC
on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel
Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the forward slash signifies the total number of indications available. The number before the forward
slash indicates the position the selected or displayed indications has in the list. The end of the indication list is
closed with the entry ***END***.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc7kevor-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-1 On-site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)
Menu Path Log

Main menu → Indications → Operational indications
Settings change
User indications 1
User indications 2
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Security indications
Device diagnosis
Communication indications
² To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
² Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
² Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 informa-
tion routing matrix or is pre-defined.
You will find information about this in the chapter 3.1.5.1 General .
² Every indication contains date, time and its state as additional information.
² In some logs you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display.
To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log .
NOTE
i No password entry is necessary to read indications from the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5
Procedure
Menu Path (Project) Log

Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Operational log
Setting-history log
User log 1
User log 2
Sequence of events
Project → Device → Device information → Logs → Security log
Device-diagnosis log
² To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-site
operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. A direct connection to your PC can be estab-
lished via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices via a data
network from your DIGSI 5 PC.
² To reach the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. If you have not set up
the device within a project, you can also attain this via Online access.
² After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To update,
it is necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
² To execute a synchronization with the logs, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see
the following figure).
[sc7kemel-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-2 DIGSI 5 Display of an Indication List
You will find additional information about the deletion and saving of logs in chapter 3.1.10 Saving and
Deleting the Log .
² To determine a relative time for all other indications, you can reference the display of log entries, if
needed, to the real time of a certain entry. The real-time stamps of events remain unaffected.
² For this purpose, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see Figure 3-2).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Setting Relative Time Reference

² Which indications in the selected log can be displayed depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 infor-
mation routing matrix or is predefined.
You will find information about this in the chapter 3.1.5.1 General .
3.1.4 Display of Indications
Displayed indications in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel are supplemented with the following infor-
mation:
Table 3-1 Overview of additional information
Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information

Log for operational indications Time stamp (Date and time), Time stamp (Date and time),
and log for user-defined indica- Relative time, Value
tions Increasing entry number,
Value,
Message number,
Quality,
Cause
DIGSI 5: Quality Indication Column
Quality Meaning
good Indication is valid
invalid Indication is invalid
DIGSI 5: Additional Information Indication Column

The entries in the column for additional information are in the format Cause/Originator/Additional Cause:
• Cause → What was the cause?
• Originator → Who was the originator?
• Additional cause → Supplementary notes
Cause Meaning
Data change Value change in an indication
Data update Update of indication value
General interrogation General interrogation
Cyclic Cyclical general inquiry
Quality change Change of the indication quality
Initiator Meaning
Maintenance Maintenance
Process Device operation (normal)
Additional cause Meaning

Selection failed Selection failed
invalid position invalid position
Position attained Position attained
Parameter change running Parameter change running
Final position attained Final position attained
Impermissible mode Impermissible mode

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Additional cause Meaning

Command cancellation Command cancellation
Monitoring time expired Monitoring time expired
Object not selected Object not selected
No access right. No access right
Final position exceeded Final position exceeded
Target value not attained Target value not attained
Loss of connection Loss of connection
unknown unknown
Object already selected Object already selected
inconsistent parameter(s) inconsistent parameter(s)
blocked by foreign access blocked by foreign access
Select time-out Select time-out
Communication is interrupted Communication is interrupted
Fault occurred Fault occurred
3.1.5 Logs
3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow catego-
rization of indication logging based on operating states (e.g. operational and fault logs) and based on fields of
application.
Table 3-2 Log Overview
Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Setting-history log Parameter changes
User-defined log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits
Communication Log Status of communication interfaces
Administering Logs
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted, the
oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. During a supply voltage failure, recorded data are securely
held by means of battery buffering or storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the
device with DIGSI 5. The device display and the navigation allow you to read and analyze the logs on site using
keys.
Configurability of the Logs

The indication capacity that may be recorded in configurable logs (for example, ground-fault log) is laid down
in columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.
Procedure
• To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window. Access is only
through the project:
Project → Device → Information Routing
• Select the associated routing column in the matrix from:

Target → Logs → Frequency Trigger Column

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• The routing of the selected indication is done via right click. Select one of the options in the list box
shown:
– Routed (X)
– Unrouted
[sc7kekon-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-3 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5
For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).
3.1.5.2 Operational Log

Operational indications are information that the device generates during operation. This includes information
about:
• State of device functions
• Measured data
• Power-system data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values generates as an operational indication. Up to 2000 indications
can be stored in the operational log.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Logs → Operational log
• The operational log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device. To update (synchronization
with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list (see the following
figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc7kebet-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-4 Reading the Operational Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Operational indications
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[schmibet-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-5 Reading the Operational Log on the On-site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device.
Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Operational Log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.
3.1.5.3 User-Defined Log

With the user-defined log (up to 2), you have the possibility of individual indication logging parallel to the
operational log. This is helpful, for example, in special monitoring tasks but also in the classification into
different areas of responsibility of the logs. Up to 200 indications can be stored in the user-defined log.
• To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → User logon 1/2
The user-defined log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the
indication list (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scanw7ke-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-6 Reading the User-Specific Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → User log 1/2
You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the displayed
indication list.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scanwhmi-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-7 Reading the User-Specific Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted.
Read about it in the chapter 3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log .
Configuration of a User-Defined Log

The indication scope of a created user-specific log can be configured freely in the associated column of the
information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → V1 or V2

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scanwinf-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-8 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: User-Defined Log V1/2)
3.1.5.4 Sequence of Events Log

The change of the status of binary signals (SPS) is stored in chronological sequence in the Sequence of
events log.
Violation of an upper or lower limiting value is also recorded as an event. Up to 2000 entries can be stored in
the list. Upon reaching the maximum number of entries, the oldest entries will be overwritten.
• Use the project tree window to access the sequence of events for your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Project → Device → Process Data → Logs → Sequence of events
• The sequence of events log is shown to you in the last loaded state from the device. To update the device
(synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list
(see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scsoedig-040713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-9 Reading the Sequence of Events with DIGSI 5
• To access the sequence of events from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Logs → Sequence of events
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
[scsoehmi-040713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-10 Reading the Sequence of Events on the On-site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The sequence of events for your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configurability
The indication capacity of the log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Column Sequence of events
The indication General > Behavior is pre-routed in the selected application templates and functions from the
library.
3.1.6 Setting-History Log
All individual parameter changes and the downloaded files of entire parameter sets are recorded in the log for
parameter changes. This clarifies whether completed parameter changes are connected to logged events (e.g.
faults). On the other hand, it is possible to prove with fault analyses, for example, that the current status of all
settings actually corresponds to that of the time of the fault. Up to 200 indications can be stored in the
setting-history log.
• To reach the log for parameter changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Setting-history log
The setting-history log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the
indication list (see the following figure).
[scparmel-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-11 Reading the Setting-history Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Menu → Indications → Setting-history log

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scparhmi-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-12 Reading the Setting-history Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Indication Categories in the Setting-History Log

For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful parameter
changes. The following list gives you an overview of this information.
Table 3-3 Overview of indication types
Displayed Information Explanation

Selection editing+ Selection of settings group to be edited
Reject+ Rejection of all changes successful
PG activation+ PG activation through command successful
PG activation- PG activation through command failed
set+ Parameter value was changed
Acceptance+ Acceptance of change successful
Acceptance- Acceptance of change failed
DCF loaded DCF loaded into device
PG 1 Settings group 1
For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful parameter
changes.
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information from the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
• In the setting-history log you cannot route additional indication objects.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.7 Communication Log
The logging of the respective status such as ensuing faults, test and diagnosis operation, and communication
capacity utilizations is done for all hardware-based configured communication interfaces. Up to 500 indica-
tions can be stored in the communication log. Logging occurs separately for each communication port of the
configured communication modules.
• Use the project tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access → USB → Device → Test suite → Communication module
• Then click J:Onboard Ethernet → Communication log.
• The communication indications are displayed when you click the arrow under Time stamp.
The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Update in the headline of the indication list.
[sccompuf-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-13 Reading the Communication Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Communication log
operation panel.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sckomhmi-230213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-14 Reading the Communication Log on the On-site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in the chapter
3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log .
Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.
3.1.8 Security Log
Access to areas of the device with restricted access rights is recorded in the security log. Unsuccessful and
unauthorized access attempts are also recorded. Up to 500 indications can be stored in the security log.
• To reach the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Device Information → Logs → Security log
The security log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scsecuri-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Reading the Security Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Security Indication
[scsechmi-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-16 Reading the Security Log on the On-site Operation Panel of the Device

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer. cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information from the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
3.1.9 Device-Diagnosis Log
The logging and the display of concrete instructions are done in the device-diagnosis log during
• required maintenance (e.g. battery supervision)
• identified hardware defects
• compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is suffi-
cient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is assumed
by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect or
compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 in Normal Operation
• To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project tree window.
Project → Device → Device Information → Logs → Device-diagnosis log
The device-diagnosis log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
[scgerdia-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-17 Reading the Device-diagnosis Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation
• To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Indications → Device diagnosis

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scgerhmi-230213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-18 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
i • The device-diagnosis log cannot be deleted!
• The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
3.1.10 Saving and Deleting the Log
Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order
for the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after an inspection of
the system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.
NOTE
i Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.
NOTE
i Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with rele-
vance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i If the user changes the device configuration (for example, from V04.00 to V06.00) after a firmware update
and loads it into the device, the following logs are deleted automatically after restarting the device:
• Operational log
• User log
• Setting-history log
• Sequence of events log

Back up the deletable logs beforehand using DIGSI 5.
Deleting Logs on the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main Menu → Indications → Operational Indications
[scloebet-220213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel
operation panel.
• The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.
• After being prompted, enter the password and confirm with Enter.
• After being prompted, confirm the Deletion of all entries with OK.
Deleting Logs from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (for example opera-
tional log).
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational Log

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.11 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device
In your SIPROTEC 5 device you can also configure indications as stored. This type of configuration can be used
for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is acknowl-
edged. Confirmation occurs via:
• On-site operation panel
• DIGSI 5
• Binary Input
• Log of substation automation technology
Configuration of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5
• In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals, among others,
to LEDs and output contacts. For this, go to the project tree.
• Click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the routing
range of the targets by clicking the right mouse button.
You are offered the following options:
Table 3-4 Overview of Routing Options
Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description

H (active) X The signal is routed as active with voltage.
L (active) X The signal is routed as active without voltage.
U (unlatched) X X The signal is routed as unsaved. Activation and reset of
the output (LED, BO) occurs automatically via the
binary-signal value.
L (latched) X X The binary signal is latched when the output (LED) is
activated. To reset, a targeted confirmation must occur.
Confirmation of Stored Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel

Confirmation via LED Reset
Operating the button first brings about the activation of all LEDs (LED test) when pressed and when released
the resetting of all stored indications. Stored LEDs, output contacts and spontaneous fault messages (display)
are reset.
Confirmation via the operating menu
Use the navigation buttons of the on-site operation panel, in order to reach the reset functions from the main
menu.
• Select: Main menu → Device functions → Reset functions

You are offered different reset options.
• Open the corresponding submenu.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scresetu-230213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-20 Reset Functions on the On-Site Operation Panel
• Use Res. binary outputs to reset stored output contacts.
• Actuate the softkey Start in the base bar.
• As needed, enter the confirmation ID when requested and then confirm with the softkey Enter.
• Use Reset LEDs to reset stored LEDs that are not assigned to a special Function group.
Depending on device configuration, the function group(s) are displayed to you as submenus for which sepa-
rately corresponding, stored LEDs can be reset.
• Go to the submenu of the selected function group.
• Use Reset LEDs to reset stored LEDs in the selected function group.
Confirmation of Stored Indications via Binary Inputs

Confirmation via entry >LED Reset
Confirmation via binary input >LED-Reset brings about the activation of all LEDs (LED test) and, in case of
dropout of signal, the resetting of all stored indications. Stored LEDs, output contacts and spontaneous fault
messages (display) are reset.
Confirmation of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5

You can confirm stored indications via DIGSI 5 in online operation. For this, go to the project tree.
• Select Online access → Interface → Device → Device information.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scquitti-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-21 LED Reset via DIGSI 5
• Click the Log tab.
• Click the LED reset button (see the yellow line in the figure).
• Enter the confirmation ID.
• Confirm the process with OK.

Stored LEDs, output contacts and spontaneous fault messages are reset on the assigned device.
Confirmation of Stored Indications via a Protocol

Initiation of acknowledgment of stored indications can also occur through communication via a connected
substation automation technology. This can occur in conformance to standards (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103)
or via configuration (mapping) of the LED reset input signal for any protocol. Stored LEDs, output contacts,
and spontaneous fault displays (display) are reset.
NOTE
i The confirmation of stored indications then leads to the resetting of configured LEDs and output contacts,
as long as these active unstored indications are present in parallel. I.e., indications configured as unstored
are not affected by the confirmation process.
3.1.12 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology
If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks indica-
tions sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This test bit
makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test. Necessary reactions in normal opera-
tion on the basis of an indication can thus be suppressed.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition

Basic Principle
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with a powerful measured-value acquisition function. In addition to a high
sampling frequency, they have a high measurand resolution. This ensures a high degree of measuring accu-
racy across a wide dynamic range. The 24-bit sigma/delta analog-digital converter represents the core of
measured-value acquisition. In addition, the oversampling function supports the high measurand resolution.
Depending on the requirements of the individual method of measurement, the sampling frequency is reduced
(Downsampling).
In digital systems, deviations from the rated frequency lead to additional errors. In order to avoid this, 2 algo-
rithm-dependent processes are used in all SIPROTEC 5 devices:
• Sampling-frequency tracking:
The analog input channels are scanned for valid signals in cycles. The current power frequency is deter-
mined and the required sampling frequency is defined by using a resampling algorithm. The tracking is
effective in the frequency range between 10 Hz and 90 Hz.
• Fixed sampling frequency – correction of the filter coefficients:

This method operates in a limited frequency range (frated +/- 5 Hz). The power frequency is determined
and, depending on the degree of the frequency deviation, the filter coefficients are corrected.
The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values (SAV) in the measured-value acquisition
chain. Figure 3-22 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit the
bandwidth of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem) is
installed downstream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. Meaning that the magnitude,
phase, and the transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that the
current transformer terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.
[dw_mes_7ke, 3, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Measured-Value Acquisition Chain
fa Sampling frequency
SMV Sampled measured value
CMV Conventional measured value
LPIT Low-power instrument transformer

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50-Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. After the correction of magnitude, phase and
transformer time constant, the 16-kHz sampled values (SAV) are sent to the fast-scan recorder. For RMS-value
calculations, the values are reduced to 8 kHz. For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window is
adjusted on the basis of the power frequency. For numerous Measurement applications 20 samplings per
cycle are sufficient (if frated = 50 Hz: sampling every 1 ms, at frated = 60 Hz: sampling every 0.833 ms). This
sampling rate is an adequate compromise between accuracy and the parallel processing of the functions
(multi-functionality).
The 60 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups in 2
variants:
• Fixed (not resampled)
• Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 90 Hz)

Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher
sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement. You can find detailed information in the
corresponding function description.
NOTE
i The measuring points for current and voltage are in the Power-system data (starting in 5 Power-System
Data). Each measuring point has its own parameters.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
3.3.1 Overview
Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups in
SIPROTEC 5 devices.
The chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking provides the necessary hints on the operating principle of
sampling-frequency tracking and its application.
The chapter 3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups describes the principle and application of frequency tracking
groups.
3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with powerful sampling-frequency tracking as explained in the chapter
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition . This ensures high measuring accuracy over a wide frequency operating
range (10 Hz to 90 Hz).
To determine the actual sampling frequency, the voltage and current measuring points are checked for valid
input signals, the actual power frequency is determined and the tracking frequency is adapted.
During engineering, you set the parameters specifying which measuring points are used for frequency
tracking. All 3-phase voltage and current measuring points and 1-phase voltage and current measuring points
are allowed.
NOTE
i Using a measuring point for sampling-frequency tracking requires this measuring point to be suitable for
reliably determining the power frequency. This is the case, as long as the measuring point is connected to
the power system and the rated voltages and currents are measured. If the measured values for the rated
voltages and currents are unavailable, the sampling-frequency tracking must be switched off for this meas-
uring point.
Examples of these kind of conditions are as follows:
• 1-phase measuring points: Measuring points that measure zero-sequence voltages or zero-sequence
currents must not be used for frequency tracking.
• 3-phase measuring points: Measuring points that measure unbalanced currents and voltages for a
capacitor bank must not be used for frequency tracking.
The following figure shows where you set the parameters for the corresponding measuring point and activate
sampling-frequency tracking in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Settings → Power-system data.
[sc_MP_Powersys trackfreq, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-23 Using the Measuring Point to Determine the Sampling Frequency

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
If the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point is used to determine the actual tracking
frequency. If the parameter Tracking is set to active for several measuring points, the ID of the measuring
point determines the sequence in which these are checked for valid input signals. The algorithm starts with
the lowest ID number, as follows:
• First, the 3-phase measuring points are scanned. If no valid voltage is found, the selected current meas-
uring points are next. In this case, the following sequence applies:
3-phase voltage measuring point → 3-phase current measuring point → 1-phase voltage measuring point
→ 1-phase current measuring point
If a trigger signal comes from a current measuring point, the voltage measuring points are still continu-
ously scanned for valid voltages and switched immediately if a voltage is found.
• If the true RMS value is greater than 2.5 % of the set secondary device rated value, a measuring point is
valid. For example, this is 2.5 V at 100 V, 25 mA at 1 A or 125 mA at 5 A.
• A 3-phase measuring point is scanned in the sequence of phase A → phase B → phase C.

In the case of the voltage measuring points, the phase-to-phase voltage VAB, VBC, and VCA is always used
for evaluation. The phase-to-phase voltage is calculated in the event of a phase-to-ground connection.
• The tracking frequency is tracked using different interval steps. If the tracking frequency deviates only
slightly from the measured frequency, the frequency is tracked using small steps of 0.010 Hz. In the case
of greater deviations, the interval is 1 Hz. To react faster in the event of larger deviations, for example in
switchover conditions, tracking occurs in 5-Hz steps. When switching on measurands immediately the
measured tracking frequency is used.
• If no tracking frequency can be determined, the appropriate rated frequency of the electrical power
system is used as the tracking frequency. This case occurs before the measurands are switched on, after
they are switched off or when the device is powered on. If the measurands are switched on, the starting
frequency is the set power frequency, for example 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Since rated-frequency input variables
can be assumed for most applications, the measuring algorithms start with the fixed sampling frequency,
for example, 1 kHz for 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz for 60 Hz.
Figure 3-24 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking across the frequency band and at the
frequency limits.
The x-axis shows the actual power frequency (fsys) and the y-axis shows the set tracking frequency (ftrack).
Between 10 Hz and 90 Hz, the relationship is linear. If the actual power frequency is less than 10 Hz, the
tracking frequency is kept at 10 Hz. In this case, sampling occurs at 20 ⋅ 10 Hz = 200 Hz. If the power
frequency is greater than 90 Hz, the tracking frequency is kept constant at 90 Hz.
If the frequency is outside the frequency operating range (10 Hz to 90 Hz), frequency tracking generates the
indication Freq. out of range. The individual protection functions evaluate this indication. If an over-
function can occur, the protection functions are blocked internally to avoid a failure.
You can find more detailed information on the behavior of the protection functions in the chapter 12 Tech-
nical Data.
[dw_working-area_sampling-frequency-tracking, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-24 Operating Range of Sampling-Frequency Tracking

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Siemens recommends routing the calculated power frequency (fsys) and the determined tracking frequency
(ftrack) as a measured value trace in the fault record. In this way, you can document the behavior of the device
in transient conditions. The following figure shows that you find the both measured values in the information
routing under Power-system data → General:
[sc_rout meas freq, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-25 Routing of the Frequency Measured Values
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-26 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking using an example.
The voltage was reduced linearly from 57.7 V (100 V phase-to-phase) to 35 V (60.6 V phase-to-phase) and, at
the same time, the frequency was reduced from 50 Hz to 35 Hz, for example motor coasting down. Then, an
abrupt switch to the rated values of 57.7 V at 50 Hz was made.
The upper trace shows the power-system voltage on 1 phase (A) as an example. The center trace is the calcu-
lated power frequency and the lower trace is the determined tracking frequency. If you multiply the deter-
mined tracking frequency of the lower trace by 20, you can determine the sampling frequency.
[sc_example freqtrack, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-26 Example of Frequency Tracking and Reaction to a Step Change in the Input Variable

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups
In the SIPROTEC 5 devices before platform version V07.80, sampling-frequency tracking applies to the entire
device. This means that the 1st valid measuring point, for example a 3-phase voltage measuring point, deter-
mines the selected tracking frequency based on the detected frequency.
If all measuring points in a system are galvanically coupled to each other, the power frequency is identical for
all measuring points.
There are problems with electrical power system states or system states where galvanic separation is possible
and measuring points of the separated system parts are connected to the SIPROTEC 5 device. For these prob-
lematic electrical power system states or system states, different frequencies are possible for a limited time.
Depending on the measuring point set for tracking, the device selects which frequency to use. As a result,
measuring errors and a failure of protection functions are possible.
Starting with platform version V7.80, you can assign the measuring points to different frequency tracking
groups. This ensures high flexibility and high measuring accuracy for a variety of applications. In this case,
every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. In the case of galvanic separation and
different system frequencies, different sampling frequencies arise as a result. This occurs temporarily in
systems with rotating machines, for example. A way to achieve galvanic separation is to use an open circuit
breaker.
NOTE
i In the measured-value acquisition chain in Figure 3-22 in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ,
only the data stream designated as tracked is adapted. The data stream represented as fixed derives its
sampling frequency exclusively from the set rated frequency.
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-27 shows an example for the necessity of frequency tracking groups. The generator circuit breaker
(GCB) and the high-voltage circuit breaker (HVCB) are the galvanic disconnection points. In this way, different
switching states are possible. The device uses current measuring points (CTs 1 to 6) and voltage measuring
points (VTs 1 to 4) located on different sides of the circuit breakers. In addition, it is assumed that the gener-
ator is started using a starting-frequency converter. In a gas-turbine application, the starting-frequency
converter accelerates the generator from 0 Hz to about 70 % of the rated speed (roughly 35 Hz at
frated = 50 Hz). After this, the gas turbine is fired up and brings the generator to the rated speed. Then, the
voltage is built up to the rated voltage and synchronized. During this start-up operation, the GCB is open and
the HVCB is closed. As a result, the measuring points VT 1, CTs 1, 2, 4 have a frequency that deviates from the
other measuring points during start-up operation. The other measuring points are usually at the rated
frequency due of the connection to the power system.
Furthermore, protection tripping can result in a switching state where the HVCB is open and the GCB remains
closed. In this case, the generator and a generator transformer can assume a frequency that deviates from the
power frequency. In the event of load shedding, the generator accelerates before the speed controller inter-
venes. This is particularly pronounced in hydro generators.
An evaluation of the individual scenarios shows that different frequencies can occur at the different meas-
uring points for a limited time. For this reason, 3 frequency tracking groups are necessary in this example.
These groups are marked with different colors in the following figure.
NOTE
i The measuring point (CT 4) marked with 1) in the following figure will be discussed later.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[dw_example_frequency-tracking-groups, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-27 Example of the Necessity of Frequency Tracking Groups
If you wish to use frequency tracking groups, use the following engineering recommendations. Before starting
work, make sure you know how many frequency tracking groups are needed. Select only the required
number.
If you start with an application template that you have expanded by the necessary measuring points, you must
load the necessary number of additional frequency tracking groups from the Global DIGSI 5 Library into the
Power system folder.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc_loading freq group, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-28 Loading the Required Frequency Tracking Groups
If you instantiate an additional frequency tracking group, the system automatically assigns the ID of the
frequency tracking group in DIGSI using consecutive numbers. As the device already has 1 frequency tracking
group, the ID numbering for additional frequency tracking groups starts with 2.
[sc_ID freqgroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-29 ID of the Frequency Tracking Group
NOTE
i If you have activated several frequency tracking groups during engineering and you then delete a
frequency tracking group again later, the assigned ID is also deleted. All other frequency tracking groups
retain their assigned IDs.
Try to avoid discontinuities by deleting the frequency tracking group with the highest ID if possible.
You will find the frequency measured values and the indications of the corresponding frequency tracking
group in the routing matrix (see Figure 3-25).
Assign the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups in the Function-group connections Editor. As
soon as you have instantiated another frequency tracking group from the Global DIGSI 5 Library, the addi-
tional column Frequency tracking group ID appears in the routing matrix. In this column, you select the
number of the corresponding frequency tracking group for each measuring point using the list box.
[sc_routing MP to freqgroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-30 Assignment of the Measuring Point to the Frequency Tracking Group

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i When assigning the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups consider that the function groups
(FGs) can operate with only 1 frequency tracking group.
This rule is checked using scripts and infractions reported during engineering.
NOTE
i Harmonic and/or interharmonic measured values in various function groups can be calculated only on the
basis of the same frequency tracking group.
If you use several frequency tracking groups, only route measuring points from the same frequency
tracking group to the affected FGs. Otherwise, you cannot load the configuration into the device!
Now, you can select the measuring points to be used to determine the tracking frequency for the appropriate
frequency tracking group as explained in chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking. If possible, use at least
1 voltage measuring point and 1 current measuring point. Give preference to 3-phase measuring points.
When the tracking frequency has been determined, all measuring points of the frequency tracking group are
set to this frequency and the tracked sampling frequency is adapted.
NOTE
i As described in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition , the measured-value current with fixed
sampling frequency is unaffected by this.
To avoid errors, the ID of the measuring point and the ID of the assigned frequency tracking group are
displayed in the setting sheet of the measuring points in DIGSI 5 (see Figure 3-31).
[sc_MP additional setting freqgroup, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-31 Example: Settings of the 3-Phase Current Measuring Point; Additional Display of the ID for the
Frequency Tracking Group
In addition, the ID of the frequency tracking group is displayed in the function group in the General block (see
Figure 3-32). Here, you can also check the consistency.
[sc_MP additional setting FG, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-32 Display of the ID for the Frequency Tracking Group in the Block General of the Function Group
A special feature is explained using Figure 3-27 as an example.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
The measuring point marked in Figure 3-27 with 1) uses a current transformer that is located on the generator
side but is used by the transformer differential protection. As a result, this current transformer must be
assigned to the frequency tracking group 2 in accordance with the rules above. Since the generator is started
using a starting-frequency converter in the application example, the frequency at this measuring point devi-
ates from the frequency at the other measuring points of group 2. For this reason, the measuring point with
CT 4 must not be used to determine the tracking frequency.
Depending on the application, the current of the CT 4 acts as a disturbance variable when forming the Kirch-
hoff's current law. As a rule, this current is not particularly strong (< 15 % of Irated) so that the disturbance
effect remains small. If required, you must set the differential protection to be less sensitive. Decide this for
the specific application.
The following table shows the possible assignment of measuring points used to determine the tracked
sampling frequency for the example. For this purpose, the parameter Tracking = active in the corre-
sponding measuring point:
Frequency Tracking 1 2 3
Group
Recommended measuring VT 4 VT 3 VT 1
points for tracking VT 2 CT 1
CT 5

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
3.4.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to handle different appli-
cations, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects depending on these
quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following figure
also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure are
described in more detail in the following.
[lo_quali1, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-33 Data Flow within a SIPROTEC 5 Device
Supported Quality Attributes

The following quality attributes are automatically processed within the SIPROTEC 5 system.
• Validity using the values good or invalid

The Validity quality attribute shows if an object transferred via a GOOSE message is received (valid,
invalid) or not received (invalid). The invalid state can be suppressed in the receiver device by also
setting a substitute value for the object that is not received (see 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the
User for Received GOOSE Values). The substitute value is forwarded to the functions.
If the device receives one of these values, it is replaced by the invalid value and thus processed further
as invalid.
If one of the detailed quality attributes (detailQual) has the value TRUE, then Validity is set to the
invalid value, unless this was already done at the transmitter end.
• Test using the values TRUE, FALSE
The Test quality attribute indicates to the receiver device that the object received via a GOOSE message
was created under test conditions and not operating conditions.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
• OperatorBlocked using the values TRUE, FALSE

The OperatorBlocked quality attribute indicates whether an object transferred via GOOSE message origi-
nates from a device that is in a functional logoff state. When the sending device is switched off,
the object is no longer being received and assumes the invalid state. However, since the Operator-
Blocked quality was previously identified on the receiver device, the object can be treated differently at
the receiving end (see chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
At the receiving end, the object may be treated like a dropped signal.
Influencing Quality by the Operating Modes

In addition to the normal operation, the device also supports further operating modes that influence quality:
• Test mode of the device

You can switch the entire device to test mode. In this case, all data objects generated in the device (state
values and measured values) receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
The CFC charts are also in test mode and all output data receive the quality attribute Test =TRUE.
• Test mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into test mode. In this case, all data
objects generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive
the quality attribute Test = True.
• Functional logoff of the device

If you take the device out of operation and want to isolate it from the supply voltage, you can function-
ally log off the device ahead of time. Once you functionally log off the device, all data objects generated
in the device (state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked =TRUE.
This also applies to the output from CFC charts.
If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message, the receiver devices can assess the quality. The receiver
device detects a functional logoff of the transmitting device. After shutting down the sending device, the
receiver device identifies that the sending device has been logged off operationally and did not fail. Now
the receiving objects can automatically be set to defined states (see chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/
Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
• Switching off individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch off individual functions, stages, or function blocks. In this case, all data objects generated
by the function, stage, or function block (state values or measured values) receive the device-internal
quality attribute Off. The states of the inputs and measured values remain unchanged in this case; input
changes are not processed. As the quality attribute Off is not provided for in communication protocol
IEC 61850, the data objects are transferred with the quality attribute Invalid.
Influencing Quality by the Operating Modes

In addition to the normal operation, the device also supports further operating modes that influence quality:
• Test mode of the device

You can switch the entire device to test mode. In this case, all data objects generated in the device (state
values and measured values) receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
The CFC charts are also in test mode and all output data receive the quality attribute Test =TRUE.
• Test mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into test mode. In this case, all data
objects generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive
the quality attribute Test = True.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
• Functional logoff of the device

If you take the device out of operation and want to isolate it from the supply voltage, you can function-
ally log off the device ahead of time. Once you functionally log off the device, all data objects generated
in the device (state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked =TRUE.
This also applies to the output from CFC charts.
If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message, the receiver devices can assess the quality. The receiver
device detects a functional logoff of the transmitting device. After shutting down the sending device, the
receiver device identifies that the sending device has been logged off operationally and did not fail. Now
the receiving objects can automatically be set to defined states (see chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/
Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
• Switching off individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch off individual functions, stages, or function blocks. In this case, all data objects generated
by the function, stage, or function block (state values or measured values) receive the device-internal
quality attribute Off. The states of the inputs and measured values remain unchanged in this case; input
changes are not processed. As the quality attribute Off is not provided for in communication protocol
IEC 61850, the data objects are transferred with the quality attribute Invalid.
Influencing the Quality through Hardware Supervision

Supervision functions monitor the device hardware (see chapter 9.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware). If
the supervision functions identify failures in the data acquisition of the device, then all recorded data will
receive the quality attribute Validity = invalid.
Influencing the Quality by the User

You can influence the processing of data and their quality differently. In DIGSI 5, this is possible at the
following 3 locations:
• In the Information routing editor for external signals of GOOSE connections
• In the CFC chart
• In the Information routing editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options regarding this influence as well as the automatic
quality processing.
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device-internal function, you can influ-
ence processing of the quality at 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and at the input signal of the function.
This is based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device to several func-
tions. The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different functions require
customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.
3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values
The properties of quality processing have changed with the introduction of GOOSE Later Binding. You can find
information about the former quality processing in chapter Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User
for Received GOOSE Values, Page 85.
In the Information Routing Editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type. All setting options are
effective for the device receiving the data.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select either the desired signal in the External Signals group or the signal of a function activated via the
GOOSE column.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc_LB_GOOSE_2, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-34 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
Depending on the selected data type of the object, various selection options are offered to you for the Safe
state item in the Common settings section. At this point, you select the manually updated values that allow
a safe operating state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed.
• Select the property for the selected data object.

You can also set the Advanced quality attributes of the data object for GOOSE Later Binding.
The following figure shows the advanced quality attributes using the example of a DPC data type.
• Open the Properties window and select the Advanced quality attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Figure 3-35 Advanced Quality Attributes for GOOSE Later Binding
With the following advanced quality attributes, you can filter the transmitted GOOSE indications and check
and set their quality. The values that have been adapted, if necessary, are forwarded to the receiver.
For the tests, you can select from the following setting options depending on the data type.
Table 3-5 Value Definitions
Setting Value Description

Apply safe state value The value configured in the Safe state is forwarded as valid to the appli-
cation as soon as communication disturbance occurs.
Keep value The disturbed quality attribute is overwritten with good and the received
value is forwarded as valid to the application. If no value was received,
the output value is assumed being in safe state.
Keep last valid value If an invalid quality attribute is received, the last valid value is forwarded
to the application. If no value has yet been received, the output value is
assumed being in safe state.
Set value to "false" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value false to be forwarded to the applica-
tion.
Set value to "true" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value true to be forwarded to the application.
These settings of the Advanced quality attributes apply to the advanced quality attributes listed below. The
selection can vary depending on the data type.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Figure 3-36 Value Definition of a Data Object of the SPS Type
You can also forward the quality attributes unchanged. To do this, you must mark the Keep flag check box.
Functional Logoff by Operator Blocked

You have set the Operation mode to Device logoff = true in the transmitting device. As a result, every
indication issued from the functions and subject to Device logoff is transmitted with the quality informa-
tion operator blocked and Validity = good. The receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts
according to the settings (Table 3-5). A different quality processing can take place only once you have set the
Operation mode to Device logoff = false in the transmitting device.
Communication Outage
There is communication disturbance (time allowed to live) between the transmitter and the receiver indicated
by the transmitter. The indication is set in accordance with the settings (Table 3-5).
Invalidity
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = invalid. The receiver
recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-5).
Questionable
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = questionable. The
receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-5).
Test Mismatch
The transmitting device or the function in the transmitting device that issues this indication is in test mode. As
a result, the indication is transmitted with the quality information test. The receiving function block recog-
nizes this for this indication and reacts, depending on its own test-mode state (specified in IEC 61850-7-4
Annex A), according to the settings (Table 3-5).
NOTE
i Follow the sequence of tests. First, the Functional logoff by operator blocked is tested. Then comes
Communication outage and so on. If a case is recognized as active, the test chain is canceled with the
configured setting for the active case.
In the case of Invalidity, the tests are first performed for Functional logoff by operator blocked (not appli-
cable) and then for Communication outage (not applicable) and canceled with the configured action for
Invalidity.
If an indication is routed into the log, manual updating of a value is also logged based on the conditions listed
above and on the reason for the manual update. Manually updating a value based on the conditions listed
above causes a change in the Health Warning function block, inherited up to Device health (specified
in IEC 61850-7-4).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Keep Flag
The quality attributes and values indicated by the transmitter are accepted without change. Quality processing
must be performed by the user via a logic diagram. The outputs of the logic diagram following the user-
specific quality processing can be connected to the function-block inputs as before.
Data Substitute Values

Depending on the data type, different data substitute values must be used.
Data Type Possible Data Substitute Values
ACD, ACT general 0 (False), 1 (True)
(The directional information is always manually updated with
unknown.
PhsA, phsB, phsC, and neut are manually updated with the same
value just like how the general value is set.)
BAC, APC mxVal Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
BCR actVal –263 to 263 – 1
CMV mag, ang Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
DPC, DPS stVal 0, 1, 2, 3 (intermediate-state, off, on, bad-state)
INC stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
INS stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
ISC, BSC valWTr.posVal –64 to 64
valWTr.transInd 0 (False), 1 (True)
SPC, SPS stVal 0 (False), 1 (True)
MV mag Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
For controllable types, the following substitute values apply in addition to the settable state values or meas-
ured values:
ctlNum = 0
stSeld = False
origin.orIdent = Substituted by quality processing
origin.orCat = AUTOMATIC_BAY
Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values

In the Information Routing editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select the desired signal in the External Signals group.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc_GOOSE values, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-37 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid value.
• Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
without change.
• Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid is • The validity attribute is set to good and
set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). • The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked (opBlk)

• Check box is not set. The OperatorBlocked attribute and data value are
forwarded without change.
• Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked
= FALSE
Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked = • The OperatorBlocked attribute is set to FALSE
TRUE and processed further using this value.
• The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Interaction of the Quality Attribute Validity and OperatorBlocked

OperatorBlocked check box is set and receipt of Oper- Regardless of whether the validity check box is set or
atorBlocked = TRUE not, and regardless of the current validity, the validity
attribute is set to good and the substitute value of
the OperatorBlocked data object is set. That is, the
OperatorBlocked settings overwrite the Validity
settings.
OperatorBlocked check box is not set and receipt of The OperatorBlocked attribute remains set and is
OperatorBlocked = TRUE forwarded.
If the Validity check box is set and the receipt of
validity = invalid is set, the respective data object
substitute value is used.
For continued signal processing and influence, it must
be taken into account that in this configuration the
data object substitute value for validity = invalid is
set, but the quality attribute OperatorBlocked is not
yet set.
3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
In DIGSI 5, you can control the quality processing of CFC charts. In the project tree, you can find the CFC
building block (see the following figure) under Device name →, Settings → Device settings in the editor:
[sc_quali_cfc, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-38 Influencing CFC Quality Handling in DIGSI 5
With the CFC chart quality handling parameter, you control whether you want to influence the
quality of CFC charts in a Manual or Automatic (default setting) manner.
If you select Manual, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of indi-
vidual signals (Validity = good)!
Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed. If the device is in test mode or the input TEST of
the CHART_STATE CFC building block is set, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is set to Test.
If you select Automatic, the quality processing of the CFC charts is influenced as follows:
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general quality processing and certain CFC
building blocks that are specifically designed for quality processing.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
General Processing
Most of the CFC building blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these building blocks, the
following general mechanisms shall apply.
If one invalid signal is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be set to
invalid if they originate from building blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words, the
quality is not processed sequentially from building block to building block but the output data are set glob-
ally.
This does not apply to CFC output data that originate from building blocks with explicit quality processing
(see next section).
Quality Attribute: Test

CFC chart is in normal state. CFC input data with the Test = TRUE attribute are ignored. When
the CFC chart is executed, then the data value that was used
before the Test = TRUE attribute is used. The quality of this old
value is also processed.
This means that on the output side, the attribute Test = FALSE.
CFC chart is in Test1) state. If the CFC chart is executed, then the attribute Test = TRUE is set
for all data leaving the CFC chart. This does not depend on
whether the data are formed via CFC building blocks with or
without quality processing.
1)ACFC chart can be switched to the test state by switching the entire device to test mode or the input TEST of
the CFC building block CHART_STATE is set.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked
CFC chart is in normal state. In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
is ignored.
CFC chart is in functionally logged off1) In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
state . is ignored. All CFC output data are labeled as functionally logged
off.
1)This state only occurs if the device is functionally logged off. In this case, the quality attributes of all CFC
outputs are labeled as functionally logged off.
Quality Processing Building Blocks (Condition Processing)

The first 3 building blocks (x_SPS) process the quality automatically according to the stated logic. The other
building blocks are used to isolate the quality from a data object and add them back after separate logical
processing.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

OR_SPS The building blocks also process the supported quality attributes according to their logic.
The following tables describe the logic using input values in connection with the quality
AND_SPS attribute Validity. The input values are 0 or 1, the quality attribute Validity can have the
value good (=g) or invalid (=i).
NEG_SPS
x = placeholder for the input value and quality attribute Validity
OR_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 0, x 0, i
0, g 0, g 0, g
1, g x, x 1, g
1, i 0, x 1, i
1, i 1, i 1, i
The output thus has the logical value 1 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 1 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
OR operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
AND_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, g x, x 0, g
0, i 1, x 0, i
1, i 1, x 1, i
1, g 1, g 1, g
The output thus has the logical value 0 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 0 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
AND operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
NEG_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 1, i
0, g 1, g
1, i 0, i
1, g 0, g
SPLIT_SPS The building blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object.
The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end. This is the case if the
SPLIT_DPS building block is interconnected with CFC input data, or is connected downstream with a
quality processing building block (x_SPS). In other cases, the CFC editor does not allow a
SPLI_XMV
connection.
SPLIT_Q The building block performs binary separation of the quality into good, bad (= invalid),
test, off and OperatorBlocked.
These 5 attributes can then be processed individually in a binary operation. The building
block must be connected downstream to a SPLIT_(DO) building block.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

BUILD_Q The building block enters a binary value for good and bad (= invalid) in each quality
structure. Thus, with this building block the quality attributes good and bad (=invalid)
can be set explicitly, for example, as the result of a monitoring logic.
All other quality attributes are set to the default state, for instance, Test = FALSE. If, for
example, the entire CFC chart is in the test state (see Quality Attribute: Test Under General
Processing), this default status can again be overwritten on the CFC output side.
The building block is normally connected downstream to a BUILD_(DO) building block.
BUILD_ACD These building blocks merge data value and quality. The building-block output is generally
used as a CFC output.
BUILD_ACT Generally, the BUILD_Q building block is connected upstream from these building blocks.
BUILD_BSC
BUILD_DPS
BUILD_ENS
BUILD_SPS
BUILD_XMV
CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of signals. If an input signal of the CFC chart has the
quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This standard behavior is
not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing, the quality attributes
of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.
EXAMPLE: Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE

The following conditions apply to the example:
• The interlocking condition for switchgear interlocking protection is stored in the device as a CFC chart.
• The removed device sends the release signal for the interlocking condition via a GOOSE telegram.
If the communication connection has been interrupted, the release signal (GOOSEStr) incoming via the
GOOSE telegram gets the quality invalid. If the CFC chart obtains an invalid input signal, there are the
following possibilities: The last signal valid before the communication interruption is used (quality = good) or
a substitute data value with the quality good is used (True, False).
To do this, you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear inter-
locking. Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart. With the SPLIT_SPS building
block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. You can then continue to
process these signals separately in the CFC chart. Use the quality information as an input signal for a
BUILD_SPS building block and assign the quality good to the signal. You obtain an SPS signal as a result, with
the quality good. You can use this to process release messages correctly. You can process the release
messages with the quality good in the CFC chart of the actual interlocking. Therefore, the release signal for a
switch illustrated in the interlocking logic is available as a valid result with the quality good. The following
figure shows an example of the CFC chart with the building blocks for quality processing:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc_cfc_ran, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-39 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)
If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. Link
the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate). This way,
you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of the CFC
chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
3.4.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions
Figure 3-40 provides an overview for processing the quality of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.
Figure 3-40 Overview for Processing Quality within an Internal Function

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Internal Input Data

The quality processing is automatic for internal input data.
Supported Quality Attributes Description
Validity • At the receiving end, internal values can only be invalid
or good.
• If invalid, the function health is set to Alarm and the
function is reset.
Causes for invalid internal data are, for example:
• The frequency operating range of the device was left.

• The device is not calibrated.
• The A/D converter monitoring identified an error.
Routable Binary Input Signals (SPS Data Type)

The next figure shows the possible sources for connecting a binary input signal. Depending on the source,
different quality attributes can be set:
• CFC chart: See description in chapter 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
• GOOSE connection: See description in chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received
GOOSE Values
• Device hardware: No quality attributes are set and supported.
Figure 3-41 Sources for Connecting a Binary Input Signal
For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-40.
The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a recorder.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information routing.
• In the operating range, select the desired binary input signal.
• In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the item Processing quality
attributes.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc_7ke_qua, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-42 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)

The Validity attribute can have the values good or invalid (reserved and questionable were already
replaced at the input end of the device by the value invalid).
The input signal source is invalid. The current data value of the source signal is ignored. You can
select between the following options:
• Further process last valid data value of the source signal

(this is the default setting with only a few exceptions)
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 0.
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different
applications.
The function health switches to Warning.
The input signal source is good. The source signal data value is processed further.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Quality Attribute: Test

• The input signal source and The source signal data value is processed further.
processed function are in test state.
• The input signal source is not in test
state and the function to be
processed is in test state.
The input signal source is in a test state The data value of the source signal is ignored. You can select
and the function to be processed is in between the following options:
normal state.
• Further processing of the last valid source signal data value,
before the source switches to the test state (that is the
default setting)
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 0.
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different applica-
tions.
Quality Attribute OperatorBlocked

The quality cannot be influenced at this position and does not lead to a response within the logic
Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays
the conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to To the IEC 61850
the SIPROTEC 5 interface, in buffer
system, for example,
in the direction of a
CFC chart)
Functional state = Test Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
(thus, result of device operating
mode = Test or function mode
= Test)
Functional state = Off Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus, result of device operating sponding to the definition for
mode = Off) switched off
Function health = Alarm Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(for example, result of invalid sponding to the definition for
receive data) reset
Device operating mode = func- Unchanged Validity = good Validity = good
tionally logged off OperatorBlocked = detailQual =
TRUE oldData
OperatorBlocked =
TRUE

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.5 Date and Time Synchronization
3.5.1 Overview of Functions
Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology . A clock module internal to the device and having battery backup is synchronized cyclically with the
current device time so that the right device time is available and used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure.
At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring of the device time.
3.5.2 Structure of the Function
The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
• DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
• Device: Main menu → Device functions → Date & Time

Parameter:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Parameter -> Time Settings

Indications:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.
3.5.3 Function Description
Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on the
device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually necessary to
record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices. For SIPROTEC
5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.
Adjustable Synchronization Options
• None (default setting)

The device functions without any external time synchronization. The internal time synchronization
continues to work with the help of the back-up battery even when the auxiliary voltage is shut down
temporarily. The time can be adjusted manually.
• Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.
• Connection to a GPS time synchronization unit

The time synchronization takes place with the set time telegram from an external IRIG B or DCF77
receiver via the time synchronization interface of the device.
• Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations. If you enable both services during configuration of Ethernet interfaces,
these protocols are available as an option for the time synchronization.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Configurable Time Sources:
• 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.
• Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective for
the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is available
and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is indi-
cated.
• For every time source, it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or Time
zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings corre-
spond to the local time zone of the device.
NOTE
i Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick up.
Configurable Date Format

Regardless of a feed time-synchronization source, a uniform format is maintained internally within the device.
The following options are available for the customary local representation of the date format:
• Day.Month.Year: 24.12.2009
• Month/Day/Year: 12/24/2009
• Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24
Taking Local Time Zones into Account

The internal device time is maintained in universal time (UTC). To display time stamps in DIGSI and on the
device display, you can define the local time zone of the device (parameter Offset time zone for GMT),
including the applicable daylight saving times (start, end, and offset of daylight saving time) using parame-
ters. This allows the display of the local time.
NOTE
i • For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account automatically when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time
of the daylight saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into
consideration. However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the
daylight saving times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.
• For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5.An exception
is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG B.
Status, Supervision, and Indications of Time Management

Your SIPROTEC 5 device generates status and monitoring indications that provide important information
regarding the correct configuration of the time source and the status of the internal time management during
startup and device operation.
Internal time synchronization is monitored cyclically. Important synchronization processes, the status of the
time sources and errors detected are reported. A device time that has become invalid will be marked accord-
ingly so that affected functions can go to a safe state.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Indication Description
Device: This indication signals a high difference between the
Clock fail internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The pickup of the indi-
cation can point to a defect in the clock module or to
an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication signals whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication signals that the device time has been
Clock set manually set manually via the on-site operation panel or via
DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications signal whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications pick up, it
can also be an indication that an incorrect configura-
tion of the port or channel numbers was done at the
on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication signals after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
Time synchronization: This indication signals that a Leap second has
Leap second occurred during time synchronization using an
external GPS receiver (protocol variant IRIG B
005(004) with extension according to IEEE
C37.118-2005).
Time synchronization: This indication signals that the device is synchronized
High accuracy with an accuracy better than 1 μs The indication is
only of significance when the PMU function is used.
NOTE
i In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).
For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in the
project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc_time_dg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-43 Time Information in DIGSI
For every time source, you see the following:
• Last received time (with date)
• Receipt time of the last received time telegram
• Configured type of timer
• Indication of timer outage or failure
• Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.
NOTE
i All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).
3.5.4 Settings
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting

Time sync.
_:102 Time sync.:Time source • none none
1
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions

_:103 Time sync.:Time source • port J
1 port
• port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:104 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
1 channel
• Ch2
_:105 Time sync.:Time source • none none
2
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104
_:106 Time sync.:Time source • port J
2 port
• port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:107 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
2 channel
• Ch2
_:108 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 1
• local
_:109 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 2
• local
_:101 Time sync.:Fault indica- 0 s to 3600 s 600 s
tion after
3.5.5 Information List
No. Information Data Class Type

(Type)
Time managem.
_:300 Time managem.:Daylight saving time SPS O
_:301 Time managem.:Clock set manually SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions

(Type)
Time sync.
_:303 Time sync.:Status time source 1 SPS O
_:304 Time sync.:Status time source 2 SPS O
_:305 Time sync.:Time sync. error SPS O
_:306 Time sync.:Leap second SPS O
_:307 Time sync.:High accuracy SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.6 User-Defined Objects
3.6.1 Overview
With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects,
for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure).
[sc_udef_lib, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-44 User-Defined Objects in the DIGSI 5 Library
The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup indi-
cations, operate indications (ADC, ACT), single and double commands, commands with a controllable whole
number as well as measured values. You can assign the group a superordinate name (for example process
indications for a group of single-point indications which are read via binary inputs). This function can be deac-
tivated using the mode. The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed.
The user-defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level (alongside other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
In addition, there is a user-defined function block [control]. Alongside the aforementioned possibilities
presented by user-defined function blocks, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals,
for example SPC or DPC.
[sc_user, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-45 Information Routing with Incorporated User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications and
some Single-Point Indications

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.6.2 Basic Data Types
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.6.5 External Signals).
User-Defined Signals
[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-46 User-Defined Signals
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS: Single-Point Status)

The status of a binary input can be registered in the form of a single-point indication or forwarded as the
binary result from a CFC chart.
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS unsaved: Single-Point Status Unsaved)

In contrast to SPS single-point indications, the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the
device restarts.
For this purpose, go to Properties > Details > Initialization > Restart and set the Value.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc_spsfas, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-47 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status)

When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and
mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed
position).
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
Marker Command (Type SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable
(marker).
Integer Status Value (Type INS)

The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.
State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS)

The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.
Controllable Single-Point Indication (SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a single feedback.
Command with Double-Point Feedback (DPC, Double-Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via double-point indication as feedback.
Command with a Whole Number (INC, Controllable Integer Status)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a whole number as feedback.
Complex Measured Values (CMV)

This data type provides a complex measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for example.
Measured Values (MV)

This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for instance.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Metered values
Sampled Values (SAV)

In DIGSI, the current and voltage sampled values are identified as an SAV type according to IEC 61850.
Phase-to-Ground Measured Values (WYE)

This data type represents the phase-to-ground measured values of a 3-phase system.
Phase-to-Phase Measured Values (DEL, Delta)

This data type represents the phase-to-phase measured values of a 3-phase system.
Protection Activation Information (ACT)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Tripping. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information, which could also indicate Tripping.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
The status indications for the ACT data type are built as follows:
[lo_ACT-information, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-48 Building of the Status Indications ACT
Protection Activation Information with Direction (ACD)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Pickup. It is available in the library for receiving protec-
tion information, which could also indicate Pickup. In addition, both ACD and ACT, can be generated and
processed by CFC charts.
The status indications for the ACD data type are built as follows:
[lo_ACD-information, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-49 Building of the Status Indications ACD
(1) Further information, see Table 3-6

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Table 3-6 Building of the Direction Information for the Data Type ACD
Direction Information Description

forward All picked up phases have picked up in forward direction.
backward All picked up phases have picked up in backward direction.
unknown The direction could not be determined for the pickup.
both At least 1 phase has picked up in forward direction and at least 1 phase has
picked up in backward direction.
3.6.3 Energy Metered Values
Energy Metered Values

Energy metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power for reference and delivery direction in each Voltage/current 3-phase function group. The
calculation is based on the current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
3.6.4 Additional Data Types
The following data types are also used in the system, but they are not contained in the information catalog for
general use:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)

The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
• SEQ (Sequence)
3.6.5 External Signals
User-defined signals of different types (see Figure 3-50) are available for GOOSE Later Binding. After instantia-
tion in a logical node, an external reference is generated during IID export and provided to a IEC 61850 system
tool (for example, System Configurator) for GOOSE Later Binding (according to the Later-Binding procedure
specified in IEC 61850-6).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc_LB_extsign, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-50 External Signals
NOTE
i Consider the chapter on GOOSE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help. User-defined signals exist as
external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
3.7 Other Functions
3.7.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals
Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used to
prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of
changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the settings
using the example of a controllable (circuit-breaker switch position).
NOTE
i The software filtering time is available only for the circuit breaker and disconnector in the controllable
Cmd. with feedback (control function block), as this is used for logging purposes. The controllable posi-
tion (circuit breaker or disconnector function block) is used for interlocking conditions and must always
show the unfiltered position of the switching object.
[sc_lposi, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-51 Settings for Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
The setting range for the Software filter time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 100 000 ms in ms incre-
ments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether to restart the filtering time when-
ever a status change is performed within the software filtering time. When activated, the Indication
timestamp before filtering check box backdates the time stamp by the set software filtering time. In
this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal. If you activate the Suppress
intermediate position check box, the intermediate position is suppressed for the duration of this soft-
ware filtering time.
If you leave the software filtering time at 0 ms, the time for the suppression of the intermediate position is
also 0 ms. The activated Suppress intermediate position check box then remains ineffective.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
If you do not activate the Suppress intermediate position check box, the software filtering time
affects the on, off, intermediate, and disturbed positions of the circuit breaker or disconnector switch.
With the parameter Spontaneous position changes filtered by:, you set how such position
changes are to be filtered. Spontaneous position changes are caused by external switching commands, for
example. If you select the General software filter setting, the general settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command apply. The settings
for spontaneous position changes can then not be edited. A separate filtering for spontaneous position
changes is activated with the Spontaneous software filter setting and you can edit the settings for
this.
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as an input parameter, for example as a parameter of the
position in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block.
[sc_flatte, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-52 Setting Chatter Blocking
The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI. They are acces-
sible as settings in the General function group (see the following figure).
The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see also Figure 3-53 and Figure 3-54 in the exam-
ples shown in the following):
• No. permis.state changes

This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the
chatter-checking time. If this number is exceeded, the signal will be or remains blocked.
Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field. If the entry is 0, chatter blocking is essentially inactive.
• Initial test time

During this time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked. This time is started if chatter
blocking is configured for at least one signal and this signal changes its status. If the configured number
of permissible status changes is exceeded during the initial test time, the signal is temporarily blocked
and the indication Chatter blocking is set.
Enter a number from 1 to 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in seconds.
When the set time has expired, the timer restarts automatically (cycle time).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
• No. of chatter tests

This number specifies the maximum number of test cycles to be run. If the number of permissible status
changes of the signal stays exceeded during the initial test time of the last test cycle, the signal is finally
blocked. In this case, the indication Group warning (Alarm handling group and Device group) is set
additionally to the Chatter blocking indication after expiry of the set number. Restarting the devices
removes this block again.
Enter a number from 0 to 32767 in this field. The value Infinite (∞) is also permissible here.
Enter this value as character string oo.
• Chatter idle time

If the number of permissible status changes for a signal is exceeded during the initial test time or the
subsequent test time, the Chatter idle time starts. Within this time, this signal is blocked tempora-
rily and the Chatter blocking indication is set. The blocked input signal is assigned the oscillatory
quality.
Enter a number from 1 to 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in minutes. An
entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal to 0.
• Subsequent test time

During this second test time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked once again. The
time begins when the Chatter idle time expires. If the number of status changes is within the
permissible limits, the signal is released. Otherwise, an additional dead time begins, unless the maximum
number of chatter tests has been reached.
Enter a number from 2 to 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in seconds. An
entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal 0.
Example 1: Permanent Blocking

The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4
• No. of chatter tests = 2

After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original state
by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication is
added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of the
settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether the
input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of status changes of the
input signal exceeds the set No. permis.state changes, the chatter blocking detects a persistent viola-
tion of the signal stability and sets the Group warning indication. The original state of the signal is perma-
nently frozen. Only a device restart removes the chatter blocking again.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
[dw_chatter-block-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-53 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with too Important Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
(1) The input signal is permanently blocked starting from this point in time.
Example 2: Temporary Blocking

The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4
• No. of chatter tests = 2

After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original state
by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication is
added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of the
settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether the
input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of state changes of the
input signal is within the set No. permis.state changes, the temporary blocking of state changes of the
signal is removed and the actual signal state is released.
The quality bit oscillatory is removed and the Chatter blocking indication is reset. As the temporary
blocking of the signal is removed, the Group warning indication is not set. The chatter test starts again.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
[dw_chatter-block-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-54 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with Permissible Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
3.7.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating
During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical
signals and binary inputs may be useful. It allows you to manually update the status of a switching device that
is not providing feedback correctly. Before this can take place, you must first set acquisition blocking.
To set the acquisition blocking, proceed as follows:
• Using the navigation keys, move in the main menu of the device display to
Commands→Equipment→Aq.blkman. update.
• Select the appropriate device (for example, a circuit breaker) from among the several switching devices
using the navigation keys.
• Press the Change softkey.
• Enter the confirmation ID (not relevant for active role-based access control (RBAC) in the device).
• Confirm the process with the softkey marked OK in the display.

After entering the confirmation ID (only with the RBAC inactive), acquisition blocking is switched on.
[sc_detection, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-55 Activating the Acquisition Blocking

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu.
• Select Manual update (Figure 3-56) using the navigation keys.
• Select the switching device setting to be manually updated using the navigation keys (for example, off,
Figure 3-57).
• Confirm the process with the softkey marked Ok in the display.
[sc_status, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-56 Activating Manual Update
[sc_statu2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-57 Selecting Position
The manually updated position of the switching device will be displayed.
[sc_statu3, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-58 Position of the Switching Device
NOTE
i For security reasons, manual updating is possible only directly through the on-site operation panel of the
device and not through DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850
system interface.
You can set acquisition blocking also via a binary input. If you want to put in the feeder or the switching
device in revision, you can set the acquisition blocking with an external toggle switch for one or more
switching devices. For this purpose, every switching device in the Switch function block (circuit breaker or
disconnector switch) has the input signal >Acquisition blocking. This signal can also be set from the
CFC.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
[sc_beerfa, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-59 Input Signals >Acquisition Block and >Release Acquisition Block & Manual
Updating on the Switching Device
NOTE
i Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking
again manually. Otherwise, position changes of the switching device are not detected and interlockings are
ineffective.
If the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are set using the operation panel of the device
or the system interface IEC 61850, these are retained until the acquisition blocking is manually deactivated.
When you initially start the device, the acquisition blocking is deactivated.
Except for a restart, the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained.
If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal >Acquisition blocking, it is retained as long as
the binary input is active.
To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device, the following sources are possible:
• Operation panel of the device
• System interface IEC 61850
• Input signal >Acquisition blocking

All sources undergo OR operations, that is, the acquisition blocking remains set until all the sources are deacti-
vated.
After deactivation of the acquisition blocking, the actual position of the switching device is adopted and
displayed in the operation panel of the device.
NOTE
i When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire
device or the switching device is in test mode, these states are not saved. The acquisition blocking and the
manual updating are not retained after a restart.
The acquisition blocking and the manual update for the circuit breaker, the disconnector, and the tap changer
are reset by way of the >Reset AcqBlk&Subst binary input. Setting acquisition blocking and manual
update is blocked with the input activated.
3.7.3 Persistent Commands
In addition to the switching commands, which are issued as pulse commands, and stored for the standard
switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector switch), persistent commands are also possible. In this case, a
distinction must be drawn between controllables with the Continuous output operating mode and a stored
signal output that is immune to reset.
You can change a controllable from pulse to persistent command with the Command output parameter.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
[sc_command, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-60 Setting the Command Type in DIGSI 5
Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is
selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant.
3.7.4 Device Logout
3.7.4.1 Overview
In the case of multibay functions, a device uses information from one or more other devices. For some applica-
tions, it may be necessary for you to remove a device with all effective functions temporarily from the plant
and even to switch it off. These applications are, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System upgrades
• Testing the local protection functions, for example, the local line differential protection
The Device logout functionality informs the receiver devices about the imminent disconnection of the
transmitter devices. To do this, the last valid received information is stored in the receiver devices and used for
the multibay functions.
NOTE
i If you need to remove a device temporarily from the plant, you must log off the device.
Protection functions distributed to several devices operate in a healthy manner with the remaining devices
only if you have logged off the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
You can log off the device as follows:
• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via a communication interface using the Device logout (_:319) controllable
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)
You can find the controllable and the binary inputs in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Information routing in the working area in the General block.
During the log-off process, the device checks whether all conditions for a logout have been met. If the condi-
tions for the log off have not been met, the logout is rejected.
The logout is rejected under the following conditions:
• The devices are communicating via the protection interface and switching off the device leads to an
interruption in protection-interface communication.
• The Line differential protection function is operating in the device and the local circuit breaker is still
switched on.
In this case, you must switch off the local circuit breaker and repeat the log-off process for the device.
After the logout, the local Line differential protection function is removed from the summation of the
currents for the Line differential protection of the other devices. The Line differential protection func-
tion remains active in the other devices.
NOTE
i The path used to log the device off is stored in the operational log.
Even if you switch off the device after logout, the Device logged off (_:315) state is stored.
If you want to establish the initial state again after logging off the device, you must log on the device again.
To log on the device, you must use the same option used for logout. For example, if you have logged off the
device via binary inputs, you must log it on again via the binary inputs. This applies in similar manner if you
have logged off the device via DIGSI or via on-site operation.
3.7.4.2 Application and Setting Notes
Logoff Options for a Device

You can log a device off as follows:
• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via communication through the controllable Device logout (_:319)
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
Conditions for Logging off the Device
[lo_functional logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-61 Logic for Logging off the Device
The conditions for a successful logout of the device result from the conditions for every activated protection
function.
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination with Communication via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) Protocol
If devices are exchanging data using the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) protocol – for example in the case of substa-
tion interlocking – for each received data point the value of this data point can be set in the receiver device
when the transmitter device logs off. This value remains effective in the receiver device until the logout is
canceled by the transmitter device, even if the transmitter and/or the receiver are switched off in the mean-
time.
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination Using Protection Communication

If devices in a device combination communicate via the protection interface, you can only log off a device
under the following conditions:
• Logging off and switching off a device in a device combination must not result in an interruption in the
protection communication.
• For series-connected topologies, the device must be located at one end of the communication chain as
otherwise the protection communication is interrupted when the device is logged off and switched off.
For this reason, devices not at one of the ends in series-connected topologies cannot be logged off.
Logout via Binary Inputs

The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs. If you want to use push-
buttons, switch on this function as shown in the following figure. Log off the device using the push-button
Key2; log on the device again with the push-button Key1.
[lo_extta logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-62 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Device
If a switch is being used for control, route the binary input >Dev. funct.logout on as H (active with
voltage) and the binary input >Dev. funct.logout off as L (active without voltage). If the
switch S is closed, the device is logged off.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
[lo_extsx logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-63 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Device
Indications
The logged-off device reports the status ((_:315) Device logged off) and cause of the logout.
If you have logged off the device using binary inputs, the indication (_:313) Logged off via BI is
issued.
If you have logged off the device using on-site operation, via DIGSI 5 or via the protection interface,the indica-
tion (_:314) Logged off via control is issued.
The indications are stored in the operational log.
3.7.4.3 Information List

(Type)
General
_:507 General:>Dev. funct.logout on SPS I
_:508 General:>Dev. funct.logout off SPS I
_:319 General:Device logout SPC C
_:313 General:Logged off via BI SPS O
_:314 General:Logged off via control SPS O
_:315 General:Device logged off SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.8 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Trigger Functions
3.8.1 Overview
You can set the threshold values of trigger functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
• Primary
• Secondary
• Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the back-
ground. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.
Edit Mode: Primary

The parameters are set as primary values and thus refer directly to the primary system. The manual conversion
on the secondary circuit omitted.
Edit Mode: Secondary

The settings refer to the secondary circuit of the transformer. This means that the settings must be converted.
Edit Mode: Percent

The setting values can be standardized. The reference values for the percentage setting are always the
nominal variables (phase-to-phase variables) of the function groups such as FG 3-phase voltage or FG 3-
phase current / voltage. The setting values are, thus, related exclusively to the primary settings.
NOTE
i If other reference values are used, then this is documented for the respective function in the chapter Appli-
cation and Setting Notes.
Recommendation for Setting Sequence

When setting the trigger functions, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
• First set the transformation ratios of the transformers. You can find these under Power-system data.
• In addition, set the reference parameters for the percent setting. These parameters are located, for
example, in the function group 3-phase voltage/current in the General function block. .
• Next, set the parameter of the trigger functions.

If the transformer data have changed after completing the setting, remain in the setting sheet (for
example, primary setting) and change the transformer data. In the background, DIGSI 5 obtains the new
settings in the inactive setting views (for example, new secondary values).
The following section explains, by way of an example, how to modify the transformer ratios in DIGSI 5 using
the corresponding alternatives.
3.8.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5
Threshold-Value Setting in an Example of the Voltage Transformer

In the default setting, DIGSI is set to the Secondary Edit mode.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The setting is seen in the example of the
Voltage/current 3-phase function.
The following output data are assumed:
Voltage transformer: 400 kV/100 V
Threshold value dM/dt falling: 20 V
The following figure shows the setting of the trigger function Trig. V Fund. in the secondary view. The
threshold value of the stage is set to 20 V.
[sc7kemod-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-64 Trigger Setting, Display of the Active Setting Sheet
When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching
over to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.
[sc7keger-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-65 Switchover to the Desired Setting View

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
The following figures show the setting sequence in the Primary edit mode. Set the transformer data in the
Power-system data in the Measuring point V 3ph tab. In the example, the voltage transformer has a trans-
formation ratio of 400 kV/100 V.
[scwanspa-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-66 Setting Sheet: Transformer data
You set the rated current and rated voltage in the Voltage/current 3-phase function group, in the General
function block (see the following figure). Rated current and rated voltage are the reference parameters for the
percent setting.
[sc7kepro-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-67 Reference Data for Percentage Settings
The following figure shows the threshold value of the trigger function Trig. V fund. in the primary view with a
filtering time of 80 kV.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[scugrpri-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-68 Example for the Threshold Value of the Voltage Trigger Tripping Stage (Edit Mode: Primary)
The following value results when switching to the percentage view:

80 kV/400 kV x 100 % = 20 %
[scugrpr0-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-69 Example for the Threshold Value of the Voltage Trigger Tripping Stage (Edit Mode: Percent)
When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value:
80 kV/(400 kV/100 V) = 20 V

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[scugrsek-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-70 Example for the Threshold Value of the Voltage Trigger Tripping Stage (Edit Mode: Secondary)
Threshold-Value Setting in an Example of the Current Transformer

If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during
the project phase.
In the example, the following parameters are set according to the current transformer ratio of 1000 A/1 A. The
parameter dM/dt drop (/Filter time) has a setting value of 0.300 A (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc5amper-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-71 Secondary Values at a Transformer Rated Current of 1 A
Change the secondary rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data
from 1 A to 5 A in the Power-system data in the Measuring point I-3ph (Edit mode: Secondary).
[scabfrag-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-72 Switchover to the Desired Setting View
If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that will ask you for the
action desired.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[scabf7ke-130912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-73 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)
If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the filtering time (threshold value) in the
active secondary view. For the new secondary transformer current 5 A, the new secondary threshold value
obtained is 1.50 A (0.300 A x· 5 A = 1.50 A ). The primary and percent values remain unchanged.
The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc1amper-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-74 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Current Transformer Data
If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then answer the question with No. In this case all the settings in the secondary
view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary view. In the
example, the primary filtering time is then 300 A (1.5 A 1000 A/5 A = 300 A).
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. The following table
summarizes the pickup values that DIGSI 5 will recalculate in the setting view. The new values (in bold)
depend on the response to the query (see Figure 3-73).
Calculated Threshold Reply to the Question
Yes No
Threshold value, secondary (active setting view) 1,5 A 0.30 A
Threshold value, primary (covered setting view) 300 A 60 A
Changing the Transformer Ratio in the Single-Line Editor

If you want to change the primary or secondary rated currents of the current transformer in the Single-line
Editor, select the current transformer. You can view and change the currents in the Properties tab of the object
bar.
If you change the rated currents so that the currents differ between the Single-line Editor and the power-
system data, the corresponding field shows a red border to denote this. During synchronization in the Single-
line Editor, these rated currents are adopted into the power-system data.
3.8.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device
The secondary value is the default setting for the device. You may directly set only secondary values on the
device.
If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI (see
Figure 3-73). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
NOTE
i If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, you change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and not
directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850 configura-
tion of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
3.9 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit

Overview with the Distributed Busbar Protection as an Example (IEC 61850 Compliant):
• Process bus: for cross-device transmission of the measured values for current and voltage
• GOOSE: For cross-device transmission of the position information of disconnectors and circuit breakers,
their trip commands and additional signals
• Distributed busbar protection
• Further information
Process Bus:
The process bus is available for the modular SIPROTEC 5 devices. The current and voltage measured values can
be transmitted across devices using the process bus. Prerequisite: a ETH-BD-2FO communication module with
the appropriate communication protocols. In the following figure, you can see the 7SS85 as an example of the
client, and the 6MU85 and other modular SIPROTEC 5 devices as merging units.
[dw_bb8_proj-71-star, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-75 Star Structure for Distributed Busbar Protection with Merging Units Connected via Optical
Fibers
Prerequisites for the Merging Units for the Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
You can use all modular SIPROTEC 5 devices (except the railway protection devices 7ST8x and 6MD89) and
other IEC 61850 compliant devices as merging units. The following prerequisites apply:
• All clients and merging units must have the firmware version V8.0x or higher.
• All clients and merging units must be connected to the ETH-BD-2FO communication module and must
use the process-bus protocols. These include:
– Consistent use of IEC 61850 Edition 2.x. Siemens recommends IEC 61850 Edition 2.1.
– Process-bus protocol 9-2 Merging Unit for Merging Units and 9-2 Client for clients
– Joint time synchronization. Siemens recommends the IEEE 1588 protocol.
• The current and voltage transformers suitable for the target application in the client must be present in
the merging units.
GOOSE:
As an alternative to using the local binary inputs and binary outputs of a SIPROTEC 5 device, you can use the
inputs and outputs of other SIPROTEC 5 devices and transmit them via IEC 61850 including GOOSE.
Examples of binary routings for transmission using GOOSE.
• Circuit-breaker and disconnector position information from the transmitters to the receivers
• Circuit-breaker trip commands from the transmitter to the receivers

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
Distributed Busbar Protection

The distributed busbar protection is a distributed protection system with the 7SS85 as the central unit (CU)
and other SIPROTEC 5 devices, the merging units (MU) as bay units.
The distributed busbar protection provides the following advantages over the centralized busbar protection or
the distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant):
• Transmission of current measured values (SMV) as per IEC 61850-9-2 (process bus) from the merging
units
• Automatic interconnection of current measured values, disconnector-switch and circuit-breaker switch

positions
• Local functional enhancements of the merging units
• Maximum number of bays and busbar zones
Functional Enhancements in the Devices

Starting with V8.40, the merging units have the following functional enhancements that are especially
intended for use with the distributed busbar protection and evaluated there:
• End-fault protection (1-pole/3-pole, 3-pole)
• External tripping
• Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection
• Extension in circuit-breaker failure protection
• Measuring point out of service
NOTE
i You can find these functional enhancements in the Global DIGSI 5 Library in the respective device, under
FG Circuit breaker > dBBP Function extensions. You can find the function Measuring point out of
service under Measuring inputs > Current 3-phase > dBBP Function extensions in the respective device.
Functional Enhancement in DIGSI 5

If a distributed busbar protection is present in the project, the following functional enhancements especially
intended for use with the distributed busbar protection are provided in the Single-Line Editor:
• New CU – BU assignment tab with the Update central unit function.
• Additional Include in distributed busbar system check box for current transformers, circuit breakers,
and disconnectors in the Properties tab.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
System Functions
[sc_bbp8_SLE_incl, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-76 Extension in the Properties Tab if the Distributed Busbar Protection is Available
Further Information
NOTE
i Analog measured values, binary inputs, and binary outputs are routed across devices in the IEC 61850
System Configurator.
For a detailed description of how to use it as a Merging Unit/bay unit for the distributed busbar protection or
distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant), refer to the Project Engineering chapter in the Busbar
Protection 7SS85 device manual.
For further information on the process bus, GOOSE, IEC 61850 System Configurator, descriptions of stream
types, GOOSE Later Binding, VLAN priority, network redundancies, for example, PRP protocol or the sample
and time synchronization using IEEE 1588, refer to the Process Bus, Communication Protocols, IEC 61850
System Configurator and the DIGSI 5 Help manuals.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
4 Applications
4.1 Overview 132

4.2 Application Template and Functional Scope of the Fault Recorder 133

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Applications
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
The function library in DIGSI 5 provides application templates for the applications of the fault recorders. The
application template
• Contains the basic configuration for a specific use case
• Contains functions and default settings for a specific use case

Chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope describes am example for the structure of
an application template.
When using an application template, please note the following:
• Adapt the signal routings by adding and removing routings to specific recorders.
• Adapt the application template to your specific use (check/adapt default settings, delete/add functions).
You can find more detailed information in the 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional
Scope.
• Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.
• Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Applications
4.2 Application Template and Functional Scope of the Fault Recorder

Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of the fault recorder. The application
template contains the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Template 1 Fault Recorder N1: 1/3, 11 BIs, 9 BOs, 4I, 4V
Template 4 Fault Recorder N2: 1/3, 11 BIs, 3 BOs, 8V
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates for the fault recorders:
Table 4-1 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for the Fault Recorder
Function Default Setting in the Application Template

Function Points
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Hardware quantity structure expandable (I/O) – 1 1 1 1
FG Voltage (FG V) – 0 0 0 2
FG Voltage/Current (FG VI) – 1 2 5 0
FG ComModule – 1 1 1 1
FG Recording – 1 1 1 1
FG Simulation – 1 1 1 1
FG Analog units – 0 0 0 0
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 40 0 0 0 0
FG Circuit breaker 31 0 0 0 0
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring 10 0 0 0 0
Power-system data (power system) – 1 1 1 1
Voltage measuring point selection – 0 0 0 0
Fast-scan recorder – 1 1 1 1
Slow-scan recorder* 40 1 1 1 1
Continuous recorder* 25 1 1 1 1
Trend recorder* 25 0 0 0 0
Measured values, extended: Min, max, – 0 0 0 0
average
Voltage trigger – 1 2 5 2
Current trigger – 1 2 5 0
Frequency trigger – 1 2 5 2
Power trigger – 1 2 5 0
Recorder routing VI – 1 2 5 0
Recorder routing V – 0 0 0 2
PQ 10/12cyc 25 0 0 0 0
PQ 10/12cyc Har 25 0 0 0 0
1 Valid from the 5th instance

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Applications
Function Default Setting in the Application Template
Function Points
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
PQ 10/12cyc IntH – 0 0 0 0
PQ 150/180cyc Har 25 0 0 0 0
PQ 150/180cyc IntH – 0 0 0 0
PQ trend 25 0 0 0 0
PQ flicker 25 0 0 0 0
Splitter Har 10 0 0 0 0
Splitter IntH 10 0 0 0 0
Measuring inputs, 1-phase voltage – 0 0 0 0
Measuring inputs, 3-phase voltage – 1 2 5 2
Measuring inputs, 1-phase current – 0 0 0 0
Measuring inputs, 3-phase current – 1 2 5 0
Binary input – 1 1 1 1
Binary output – 1 1 1 1
Communication channel – 1 1 1 1
Process monitor2 – 1 1 1 1
Function key – 1 1 1 1
GOOSE input – 0 0 0 0
LED, multicolor – 1 1 1 1
Measuring transducers – 0 0 0 0
CFC standard – 0 0 0 0
CFC arithmetic 40 0 0 0 0
CFC logic – 1 1 1 1
CFC timer – 0 0 0 0
CFC switching sequences – 0 0 0 0
The following table shows the maximum quantity structure of the fault recorder.
Table 4-2 Maximum Possible Quantity Structures
Function Significant Feature

8 Channels
16 Channels
24 Channels
32 Channels
40 Channels
Hardware quantity structure expandable 1 1 1 1 1

(I/O)
FG Voltage (FG V) 2 4 6 8 10
FG Voltage/Current (FG VI) 2 4 6 8 10
FG ComModule 5 5 5 5 5
FG Recording 1 1 1 1 1
FG Simulation 1 1 1 1 1
FG Analog units 1 1 1 1 1
2 The process monitor provides background information such as current-flow criterion and closure detection. The user can neither set
parameters for, nor delete, this function.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Applications
Function Significant Feature
8 Channels
16 Channels
24 Channels
32 Channels
40 Channels
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 4 4 4 4 4
Power-system data (power system) 1 1 1 1 1
Fast-scan recorder 1 1 1 1 1
Slow-scan recorder 2 2 2 2 2
Continuous recorder 5 5 5 5 5
Trend recorder 2 2 2 2 2
Measured values, extended: Min, max, 9 9 9 9 9
average
Voltage trigger 2 4 6 8 10
Current trigger 2 4 6 8 10
Frequency trigger 2 4 6 8 10
Power trigger 1 2 5 7 9
Recorder routing VI 2 4 6 8 10
Recorder routing V 2 4 6 8 10
PQ 10/12cyc 2 4 6 8 10
PQ 10/12cyc Har 2 4 6 8 10
PQ 10/12cyc IntH 2 4 6 8 10
PQ 150/180cyc Har 2 4 6 8 10
PQ 150/180cyc IntH 2 4 6 8 10
PQ trend 2 4 6 8 10
PQ flicker 2 4 6 8 10
Splitter Har 16 32 32 32 32
Splitter IntH 16 32 32 32 32
Measuring inputs, 1-phase voltage 2 4 6 8 10
Measuring inputs, 3-phase voltage 2 4 6 8 10
Measuring inputs, 1-phase current 2 4 6 8 10
Measuring inputs, 3-phase current 2 4 6 8 10
Binary input 1 1 1 1 1
Binary output 1 1 1 1 1
Communication channel 9 9 9 9 9
Process monitor 9 9 9 9 9
Function key 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSE input 1 1 1 1 1
LED, multicolor 1 1 1 1 1
Measuring transducers 5 5 5 5 5
Measuring transducers, fast 5 3 5 5 5
CFC standard 1 1 1 1 1
CFC arithmetic 1 1 1 1 1
CFC logic 1 1 1 1 1
CFC timer 1 1 1 1 1
CFC switching sequences 1 1 1 1 1

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Applications
NOTE
i A maximum of 40 sampled-value channels (SAV), depending on the significant feature selected, are
supported in the 7KE85 fault recorder. If you configure more than 40 channels, the indication The number
of configured sampled-value channels (SAV) exceeds the maximum allowed appears in DIGSI 5.
If more than 40 sampled-value channels (SAV) are physically present in the device (for example, 6x IO202),
the device enters Fallback mode even if only 40 or fewer channels are configured.
A description of the function-point principle is provided in chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/
Functional Scope.
The following tables show the default settings of the signals in the application templates for the fast-scan and
slow-scan recorders:
Table 4-3 Default Settings of the User-Defined Signals in the Fast-Scan Recorder
Signal Routed in the Tab Routed as

UserSPS Binary input 1 H (active without voltage)
>Manual start Function key 1 P (trigger pulse)
Recording started LED 1 U (unbuffered)
Record made LED 2 U (unbuffered)
Table 4-4 Default Settings of the User-Defined Signals in the Slow-Scan Recorder
Signal Routed in the Tab Routed as

UserSPS Binary input 1 H (active without voltage)
>Manual start Function key 2 P (trigger pulse)
Recording started LED 3 U (unbuffered)
Record made LED 4 U (unbuffered)
The change to the function key names is described in chapter 7.3.3.1 Manual Trigger Start.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
5 Power-System Data
5.1 Overview 138

5.2 Structure of the Power-System Data 139
5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings 140
5.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase (I-3ph) 141
5.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 1‑Phase (I-1ph) 144
5.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph) 146
5.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1‑Phase (V-1ph) 151
5.8 Settings 153
5.9 Information List 160
5.10 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection 163

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.1 Overview
5.1 Overview
The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You can find them
in DIGSI under Settings → Power-system data.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.2 Structure of the Power-System Data
5.2 Structure of the Power-System Data

The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following
figure shows the structure of the Power-system data:
[dw_power_7ke, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-1 Structure of the Power-System Data
In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the Power-system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.
Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application. Possible measuring points are:
• Voltage 3-phase (measuring point V 3-ph)
• Current 3-phase (measuring point I 3-ph)

The measuring points have interfaces to the following function groups:
• VI 3-phase
• V 3-phase
• Phasor measurement unit

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings
5.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings

Parameter: Phase sequence
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Phase sequence= ABC

The parameter Phase sequence is used to set the phase sequence (ABC) or (ACB). The setting value applies
to the entire SIPROTEC 5 device.
Use the General function to set the settings in the power-system data.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase (I-3ph)
5.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase
(I-3ph)
The supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point. You can find the description
of these parameters in 9 Supervision Functions.
Parameter: CT connection
• Default setting (_:8881:115) CT connection = 3-phase + IN-separate

The parameter CT connection shows the connection type of the current transformer for the 3‑phase
current measuring point. You can find the parameter in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Settings → Power-system data → Measuring point I-3ph. You cannot change the connection type of the
current transformer in the Power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the current transformer only under measuring point routing in DIGSI 5.
Under Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Current measuring points, select the desired
connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
• 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep

Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
current measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for current transformers in A.4 Connec-
tion Examples for Current Transformers. The connection examples provide assistance when selecting the type
of connection.
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:8881:127) Tracking = active

With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
Parameter Value Description
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only
the 3-phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: If the parameter is Tracking = active , the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling
rates.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points
into Frequency tracking groups in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every
frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You can
find more information on this in 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and
Frequency Tracking Groups.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter-
mining the sampling frequency, select the setting value inactive.
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
• Default setting (_:8881:130) Measuring-point ID = 1

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
The parameter Measuring-point ID is write-protected and displays the ID of the measuring point. If you
are using several measuring points, the Measuring-point ID is continuously incremented.
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups
in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
can find more information on this in 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups.
Parameter: Rated primary current
• Default setting (_:8881:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A

With the parameter Rated primary current, you set the active rated primary current of the current trans-
former.
If you change the setting of the parameter Rated primary current from 1000 A to 500 A, for example,
via the operation panel, restart the device in order to ensure that the change of the current transformer ratios
was accepted.
Parameter: Rated secondary current
• Default setting (_:8881:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A

With the Rated secondary current parameter, you set the active rated secondary current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Current range
• Default setting (_:8881:117) Current range = 100 x IR

The Current range parameter allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input. Retain the default
setting for power-system protection applications. The current measuring range 1.6 x Irated applies for the
connection type 3-phase + IN-separate and the sensitive current input or for the measuring inputs.
Parameter: Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj
• Default setting (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj = yes

The Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter is used to set the direction of the neutral point of the
current transformer (see following figure). Often, the neutral point of the current transformer is determined
by the direction of the protected object (for example, in the direction of the line, cable, transformer). For this
reason, the default setting of the parameter was defined as yes.
When switching the parameter, the direction of the phase currents and of the ground current IN or IN-sepa-
rate is rotated device-internally.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
[dw_polstromwdl, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-2 Polarity of Current Transformers
Parameter: Inverted phases
• Default setting (_:8881:114) Inverted phases = none

The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-storage hydro-
power plants. This default setting may be retained for power-system protection applications.
Parameter: Magnitude correction
• Default setting (_:3841:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000

When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you set the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively.
The magnitude correction may be required for high-precision measurements. Use a comparison measurement
to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a primary
correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 1‑Phase
(I-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point I 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a current to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring-point routing → Current measuring points.
You can only route the current Ix.
Parameter: Rated primary current
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A

With the parameter Rated primary current, you set the active rated primary current of the current trans-
former.
If you change the setting of the parameter Rated primary current from 1000 A to 500 A, for example,
via the operation panel, restart the device in order to ensure that the change of the current transformer ratios
was accepted.
Parameter: Rated secondary current
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A

With the parameter Rated secondary current, you set the active rated secondary current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Current range
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Current range = 100 x IR

The parameter Current range allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input. Retain the default
setting for power-system protection applications.
Parameter: Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj.
• Default setting (_:2311:116) Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. = yes

With the parameter Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj., you define the direction of the current. If you set
the parameter Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. = yes, the direction of the current to the protected
object is defined as forward.
Parameter: Tracking

With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
active If the parameter Tracking is active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency.
Note: If the parameter Tracking is active, the determined sampling
rates.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data


With the parameter Magnitude correction, you set the amplitude (amplitude correction) for the current
input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively. The
magnitude correction can be required for high-precision measurements. Use a comparison measurement to
determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a primary
NOTE
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph)
5.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase
(V-3ph)
Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. You can find the
description of these settings in Supervision Functions.
Parameter: Rated primary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:101) Rated primary voltage = 400.000 kV

With the parameter Rated primary voltage, you set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
If you change the setting of the parameter Rated primary voltage from 400.000 kV to 300.000 kV using
the operation panel for example, you must restart the device to ensure that the change of the voltage trans-
former ratios was accepted.
Parameter: Rated secondary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V

With the parameter Rated secondary voltage, you set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN
• Default setting (_:8911:103) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73

With the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input. The different transmission
ratio of the voltage transformers is the cause for the deviation (see Figure 5-3).
The Matching ratio Vph / VN is equal to the ratio 3V0 sec/VN sec
with
V0 sec Calculated zero-sequence voltage
VN sec Measured residual voltage
The zero-sequence voltage is calculated as phase-to-ground voltages. The residual voltage is measured on the
broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer. For 1-phase voltage transformers, the residual voltage is
measured in the generator or the transformer neutral point.
NOTE
i The measurement residual voltage VN sec is converted to a zero-sequence voltage in the device as follows:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
EXAMPLE 1:
[dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-3 3-Phase Voltage Transformer: Connection = 3 Phase-to-Ground Voltage + VN
When the type of connection for the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT
connection) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer
(da/dn), the Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows:
When changing the neutral point according to Figure 5-3, this results in the following values:
• The calculated secondary zero-sequence voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage, then Vrated sec/√3.
• The measured residual voltage on the broken-delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the
3 sides. Expressed with the side ratio, the result is VN, sec = 3 Vrated sec /3.
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:
[fo_example_1, 2, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73.
In example 1 Vrated sec, the phase-to-ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the broken-delta winding
were identical. If these voltages are different, use the actual numerical values in the calculation.
EXAMPLE 2:
Phase-to-ground voltage Vrated sec = 100 V

Broken-delta winding (for Vrated sec = 500 V
example, grounding trans- The voltage input of the device is designed for a continuous operation,
former in generator protection) using 230 V max. Therefore, the voltage on the broken-delta winding (500
V) is reduced to a 5:2 ratio, using an ohmic divider. In order to calculate the
matching factor, the secondary voltage of 200 V will be applied.
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
[fo_example_2, 1, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 0.866.

Interpretation of the result:
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltage is 57.73 V (= 100V/√3). The meas-
ured residual voltage is 200 V. The calculated adaptation factor is 0.866. The measured residual voltage is
converted to a zero-sequence voltage inside the device:
[fo_conversion2, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i During the ground-fault test, the set adaptation factor can be checked by comparing the operational meas-
ured values. The operational measured values contain the calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 sec and the
measured residual voltage VN sec. Proceed with the compilation as follows:
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is significant for the following functions:
• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• Measured-value supervision
• Scaling of the faulty and measured values
Parameter: VT connection
• Default setting (_:8911:104) VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN

The parameter VT connection shows the connection type of the voltage transformer for the 3-phase
voltage measuring point. You can find the parameter in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Settings → Power-system data → Measuring point V 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of
the voltage transformer in the power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the voltage transformer only under measuring point routing in
DIGSI 5. Under Name of the device → Measuring-point routing → Voltage measuring points, select the
desired connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in A.5 Connec-

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
tion Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices. The connection examples provide assistance
when selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: Inverted phases
• Default setting (_:8911:106) Inverted phases = none

The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-storage hydro-
power plants. This default setting can be retained for power-system protection applications.
Parameter: Tracking

The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point shall
be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage measuring
channel. This validity of the signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to this channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
active If you set the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point will be
included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the 3-
phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: If the parameter Tracking is active, the determined sampling
rates.


With the parameter Magnitude correction, you adjust the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively.
The magnitude correction may be required for high-precision measurements. Use a comparison measurement
to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a primary

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
NOTE
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1‑Phase
(V-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point V 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a voltage to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Voltage measuring points.
You can route the following voltages:
• V A
• V B
• V C
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN3
• Vx
• VN broken-delta4
Parameter: Rated primary voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated primary voltage = 400.000 kV

The Rated primary voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
If you change the setting of the parameter Rated primary voltage from 400.000 kV to 300.000 kV using
the operation panel for example, you must restart the device to ensure that the change of the voltage trans-
former ratios was accepted.
Parameter: Rated secondary voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V

The Rated secondary voltage parameter is used to set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN
• Default setting (_:2311:108) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73

With the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input.
You can find more detailed information in 5.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage
3‑Phase (V-3ph).
NOTE
i The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is only visible in the Measuring point V-1ph if the voltage
VN broken-delta has been routed.
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Tracking = inactive
3 If you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the neutral-point displacement voltage.
4 If you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the voltage measured directly at the broken-delta winding of the
voltage transformer.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point shall
be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage metering
channel. The validity of the signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to the voltage channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
mining the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive.
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency.
Note: If the parameter is Tracking = active, the determined sampling
rates.
Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points
frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You will find
more information in 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency
Tracking Groups.

Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups in
SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
will find more information on this in 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups.

When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you adjust the magnitude (magnitude correction) for
the voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selec-
tively. The magnitude correction may be required for high-precision measurements. Use a comparison meas-
urement to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a
primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.8 Settings
5.8 Settings
General Information

General
_:2311:101 General:Phase sequence • ABC ABC
• ACB
Measuring Point I-3ph

General
_:8881:115 CT 3-phase:CT connec- • not assigned 3-phase + IN
tion
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep
_:8881:127 CT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8881:130 CT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
CT phases
_:8881:101 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:102 CT 3-phase:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current
• 5A
_:8881:117 CT 3-phase:Current • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range
• 100 x IR
_:8881:118 CT 3-phase:Internal CT • CT protection CT protection
type
• CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:8881:116 CT 3-phase:Neutr.point • no yes
in dir.of ref.obj
• yes
_:8881:114 CT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases
• AC
• BC
• AB
_:8881:107 CT 3-phase:CT error 1.00 to 10.00 1.00
changeover
_:8881:108 CT 3-phase:CT error A 0.5 % to 50.0 % 5.0 %
_:8881:109 CT 3-phase:CT error B 0.5 % to 50.0 % 15.0 %
CT IN
_:8881:104 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.8 Settings

_:8881:105 CT 3-phase:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current
• 5A
_:8881:119 CT 3-phase:Current • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range
• 100 x IR
_:8881:120 CT 3-phase:Internal CT • CT protection CT protection
type
• CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
CT 1
_:3841:103 CT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
CT 2
tion
_:3842:117 CT 2:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
CT 3
tion
_:3843:117 CT 3:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
CT 4
tion
_:3844:117 CT 4:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.8 Settings

Brk.wire det.
_:5581:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5581:101 Brk.wire det.:Mode of • blocking blocking
blocking
• auto blocking
• not blocking
_:5581:102 Brk.wire det.:Delta value 0.004 to 5.000 1.000
for autoblock
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2491:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:2491:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:2491:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2551:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. sum I
_:2431:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2431:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2431:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:2431:6 Supv. sum I:Delay failure 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
indication
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:1 Supv.ADC sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.8 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
current
_:2311:102 General:Rated secondary • 1A 1A
current
• 5A
_:2311:103 General:Current range • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
• 100 x IR
_:2311:104 General:Internal CT type • CT protection CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:2311:116 General:Term. 1,3,5,7 in • no yes
dir. of obj.
• yes
_:2311:105 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
CT 1
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
Measuring Point V-3ph

General
_:8911:101 VT 3-phase:Rated 0.200 kV to 1200.000 kV 400.000 kV
primary voltage
_:8911:102 VT 3-phase:Rated secon- 80 V to 230 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:8911:103 VT 3-phase:Matching 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
ratio Vph / VN
_:8911:104 VT 3-phase:VT connec- • not assigned 3 ph-to-gnd
tion volt. + VN
_:8911:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases
• AC
• BC
• AB

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.8 Settings

_:8911:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8911:130 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
VT 1
_:3811:103 VT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 2
tion
_:3812:108 VT 2:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 3
tion
_:3813:108 VT 3:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 4
tion

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.8 Settings

_:3814:108 VT 4:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2521:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:2521:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:2521:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2581:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. sum V
_:2461:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2461:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 25.000 V
_:2461:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 0.200 kV to 1200.000 kV 400.000 kV
voltage
_:2311:102 General:Rated secondary 80 V to 340 V 100 V
voltage
_:2311:108 General:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
_:2311:103 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.8 Settings

_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
VT 1
tion
_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
• VN broken-delta
_:3811:107 VT 1:Sequence number 1 to 2147483647 2147483647
device
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.9 Information List

General

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:2311:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:2311:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:2311:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:2311:322 General:f sys MV O
_:2311:323 General:f track MV O

(Type)
General
_:8881:319 CT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8881:320 CT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8881:321 CT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
Meas.val.dist
_:8881:325 CT 3-phase:Meas.point mult.config. SPS O
CT 1
_:3841:300 CT 1:Sampled val. current SAV O
CT 2
CT 3
CT 4
Calc.IN
_:20191:300 Calc.IN:Sampled val. current SAV O
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:5581:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:5581:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:5581:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:5581:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:5581:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:5581:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:5581:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:5581:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data

(Type)
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:2491:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:2491:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:2491:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:2491:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:2551:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:2551:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:2551:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:2551:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum I
_:2431:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2431:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2431:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2431:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:2431:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:82 Supv.ADC sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2401:54 Supv.ADC sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2401:52 Supv.ADC sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2401:53 Supv.ADC sum I:Health ENS O
_:2401:71 Supv.ADC sum I:Failure SPS O
Saturat. det.
_:17731:54 Saturat. det.:Inactive SPS O
_:17731:52 Saturat. det.:Behavior ENS O
_:17731:53 Saturat. det.:Health ENS O

(Type)
CT 1

(Type)
General
_:8911:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8911:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8911:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
VT 1
_:3811:300 VT 1:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
VT 2

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data

(Type)
VT 3
VT 4
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:2521:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:2521:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:2521:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:2521:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:2581:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:2581:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:2581:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:2581:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum V
_:2461:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:2461:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:2461:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:2461:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:2461:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
Calc.VN
_:20221:300 Calc.VN:Sampled val. voltage SAV O

(Type)
VT 1
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
5.10 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
The function block Voltage measuring-point selection can:
• Provide the ability to switchover the voltage measuring points to be applied, if various voltage measuring
points are connected to the voltage interface of the function group
• Select the correct voltage based on the switch position of the plant
If more than one voltage measuring points are connected to the same voltage interface of the function group,
use the Voltage measuring-point selection function block in the function group to select the correct voltage
based on the switch position of the plant.
The Voltage measuring-point selection is a common functionality for the function groups of the protected
objects.
The Voltage measuring-point selection function block realizes the selection of 1-phase voltage measuring
points or of 3-phase voltage measuring points by a logic block chart. The logic block chart controls the input
>MP-ID selection depending on the switch positions of disconnectors.
Example
Figure 5-4 shows an example of voltage measuring points selection for the function group Capacitor bank in
a double busbar application.
[dw_busbar_double, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-4 Double Busbar with Capacitor Bank
Connecting Measuring Points to Capacitor Bank Function Group

Figure 5-5 shows the connection of the function group Capacitor bank with several measuring points in
DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in the bracket after the name.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
[sc_connection, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-5 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Capacitor Bank Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to one voltage interface, a function block must be added to
enable the selection of the voltage measuring points.
5.10.3 Application and Setting Notes
CFC Control
The voltage measuring point is selected by logic block chart on basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than
one measuring point is connected to the interface of the function group, instantiate the function block
Voltage measuring-point selection from the library in the corresponding function group.
In order to ensure the correct measuring-point connection for the function group, a logic block chart has to
define the actual valid IDs for the input >MP-ID selection of the function block.
The following logic block chart implementation is based on the example given in Figure 5-4.
If the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is closed and no matter what the position the Disconnector 2 (QB2) is, the value 2
is the output of CFC block mux_d_1 and transferred to the input >MP-ID selection. Then, the Meas.point
V-3ph with ID 2 is selected as the reference voltage. Similarly, the Meas.point V-3ph with ID 3 is selected as
the reference voltage if the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is not closed (open or in intermediate position) while
Disconnector 2 (QB2) is closed.
[sc_lo-cfcVP, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-6 Logic Block Chart: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID
However, the disconnectors might be both open or in a transient state. In this case, the input IN3 of the block
bool_int_1 becomes true, the value 0 is used as the ID for voltage selection input ( >MP-ID selection). If
ID 0 is selected, then all voltage values of the respective function-group interface are set to 0 V immediately.
An alarm indication Selection invalid is issued and the indication Health is issued as OK. In case you
want to supply the function group with voltage values under the condition that both disconnectors are open
or in transient state from one or the other busbar, you can alter the CFC chart respectively.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Power-System Data
NOTE
i An invalid measuring-point selection (ID < 0 or an ID of a unconnected measuring point) for input >MP-ID
selection results in the following:
• The voltage measured values are displayed as failure.
• The validity of the voltage measured values is set to invalid.
• The indication Health is set to Alarm.
• The indication Selection invalid becomes true.

(Type)
V-MP selection
_:501 V-MP selection:>MP-ID selection INS I
_:53 V-MP selection:Health ENS O
_:301 V-MP selection:Selection invalid SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6 Function-Group Types
6.1 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase 168

6.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase 172
6.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase 177
6.4 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker 185
6.5 Function-Group Type Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 204
6.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units 228

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Function-Group Types
6.1 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
6.1.1 Overview
The function group Voltage 3-phase determines the operational measured values of the connected voltage
channels.
The General function block and the Voltage trigger, Frequency trigger, Recorder routing V, and Splitter
functions operate in the Voltage 3-phase function group. These functions use a 3-phase voltage measuring
point as the input.
The following function block operates in the function Frequency trigger (also see chapter 7.5.3.2 Structure of
the Function ):
• Frq. Trigger
The following function blocks operate in the function Voltage trigger (also see chapter 7.5.1.2 Structure of
the Function ):
• V base, Trig
• V RMS Trig
• V0 Trigger
• V1 Trigger
• V2 Trigger
The following function blocks work in the Recorder routing V function:
• PQ 10/12cyc
• PQ 10/12cyc Har
• PQ 10/12cyc IntH
• PQ 150/180cyc Har
• PQ flicker
• PQ trend
• Routing f
• Routing V
The recorder routings enable the routing of the individual measured values to the various recorders.
The following functions are available as splitters:
• Splitter Harm
• Splitter IntHarm
6.1.2 Structure of the Function Group
The function group Voltage 3-phase always contains the function block General that cannot be deleted.
You can load the trigger functions required for your application in the function group. These trigger functions
are available from the function library in DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage 3-phase.
[dw_fg_voltage, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-1 Structure of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
The recorder routings enable the routing of the individual measured values to the various recorders. The
following figure shows the structure of the Recorder routing V function group.
[dw_recrou, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-2 Structure/Embedding of the Recorder Routing V Function
For more information on the Recorder routing V function, refer to the chapters 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the
Parameters and Routing in DIGSI 5 and 7.6.1.2 Using Measurands .

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Interface with Measuring Points

The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 3-ph interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, for example, VA, VB, VC, Vgnd. All values that can be calculated from the
measurands are also provided via this interface.
[sc_fgucon, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-3 Assigning Measuring Points
If you add functions to the Voltage 3-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring point auto-
matically.
You connect the Voltage 3-phase function group to the voltage measuring points via the interface to the
measuring points. This assignment can only be made in DIGSI 5 via Project tree → Function group connec-
tions.
To connect the interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the desired row and column in the matrix
(refer to Figure 6-3).
Operational Measured Values

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage 3-phase function group and cannot be
deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage 3-phase function group:
Table 6-1 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secondary % with respect to

VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:9421:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary rated voltage. The parameter Rated voltage set
here is the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.1.4 Settings

Rated values
_:9421:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV

(Type)
General
_:9421:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:9421:53 General:Health ENS O
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Reset LED FG
_:4741:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:4741:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
The Voltage/current 1-phase function group determines the measured values from the connected current
and voltage channels.
The following function blocks work in the Recorder routing VI function:
• Routing f
• Routing I
• Routing Pwr
• Routing V
NOTE
i The Voltage/current 1-phase function group works with a voltage measuring point, with a current meas-
uring point, or with a voltage and current measuring point. Depending on the connected measuring points,
the voltage, frequency and power functions (measured values, trigger and recorder routing functions) are
not available.
You can find more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, in the chapter 2.1 Embed-
ding of Functions in the Device.
The entire function scope of the application templates can be found in chapter 4.2 Application Template and
Functional Scope of the Fault Recorder.
The function group Voltage/current 1-phase always contains the function block General, which cannot be
deleted.
are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library. Trigger functions that are not needed can be deleted again from the
function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage/current 1-phase:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_structure FG VI 1-phase, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-4 Structure of the Function Group Voltage/Current 1-Phase
The function group has interfaces to the voltage and current measuring points.
following figure shows the structure of the Recorder routing VI function group.
[dw_recorder routing FG VI 1-phase, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-5 Structure/Embedding of the Recorder Routing VI Function
You can find more information on the Recorder routing VI function in the chapters 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the
Parameters and Routing in DIGSI 5 and 7.6.1.2 Using Measurands .

The function group receives the required measured values via the interfaces with the measuring points. If you
add functions to the function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the respective
voltage or current measuring points. If you add functions to the function group but the measuring point
necessary for this is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the Function group connections editor. You can find more
detailed information in the chapter 7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device .

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 1-phase voltage
The 1-phase voltage is provided via this interface. All values that can be calculated from the measurands
are also provided via this interface.
• 1-phase current
The 1-phase current is provided via this interface. All values that can be calculated from the measurands
are also provided via this interface.
[sc_measuring points, 1, en_US]
[sc_routing MP to FG, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-7 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage/Current 1-Phase Function Group
Equipment Data
The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the object or the equipment are
defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage/current 1-phase function group.
Reset LED Group

Using the Reset LED group function, you can reset the stored LEDs of the functions in one specific function
group while the activated, stored LEDs of other functions in other function groups remain activated.

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage/current 1-phase function group and
cannot be removed.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage/current 1-phase function group:
Table 6-2 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage/Current 1-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referenced to

I 1-phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary
values
V 1-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of primary values/√3
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of primary values/√3
VN Residual voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of primary values/√3
The operational measured values are explained in more detail in chapter 10.3 Operational Measured Values.
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:9421:101) Rated current = 1000 A

With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current. The Rated current specified
here is the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.

With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage. The Rated voltage set here is
the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
Parameter: Rated apparent power
• Default setting (_:9421:103) Rated apparent power = 692.82 MVA.

The parameter Rated apparent power is calculated depending on other parameters and cannot be
directly changed.
Parameter: Power-sys. neutral point
• Default setting (_:9451:149) Power-sys. neutral point = grounded

With the Power-sys. neutral point parameter, you specify whether the system neutral is grounded,
isolated or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil). Currently, the parameter
does not affect any protection function; only if the Automatic reclosing function uses the voltage measure-
ment.
Parameter: P, Q sign
• Default setting (_:9421:150) P, Q sign = not reversed

The power and energy values are defined by the manufacturer such that power in the direction of the
protected object is considered positive. You can also define the power output by the protected object (for
example, as seen by the consumer) as positive. With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign for
these components. This inversion does not influence any protection function.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.2.4 Write-Protected Settings
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Rated values
_:9421:103 General:Rated apparent -1.00 MVA to -1.00 MVA 0.00 MVA
power
Power-system data
_:9421:214 General:M I-1ph uses 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
_:9421:223 General:CT mismatch M 0.00 to 100.00 0.00
I-1ph
6.2.5 Settings

Rated values
_:9421:101 General:Rated current 1 A to 100 000 A 1000 A
Measurements
_:9421:150 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.3.1 Overview
The Voltage-current 3-phase function group determines the measured values from the connected current
and voltage channels.
The current, power, voltage, and frequency triggers operate in the function group Voltage-current 3-phase.
These trigger functions use one 3-phase current and voltage measuring point as the input.
The following function blocks operate in the function Current trigger (also see chapter 7.5.2.2 Structure of
the Function):
• I Fund. Trig
• I RMS Trig
• I0 Trigger
• I1 Trigger
• I2 Trigger
The following function block operates in the function Frequency trigger (also see chapter 7.5.3.2 Structure of
the Function ):
• Frq. Trigger
The following function blocks operate in the function Power trigger (also see chapter 7.5.4.2 Structure of the
Function):
• P Sum Trig
• Q Sum Trig
• S Sum Trig
• Trigger Psw
The following function blocks operate in the function Voltage trigger (also see chapter 7.5.1.2 Structure of
the Function ):
• V Fund. Trig
• V RMS Trig
• V0 Trigger
• V1 Trigger
• V2 Trigger
The following function blocks work in the Recorder routing VI function:
• PQ 10/12cyc
• PQ 10/12cyc Har
• PQ 150/180cyc Har
• PQ flicker
• PQ trend
• Routing f
• Routing I

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
• Routing Pwr
• Routing V
The following functions are available as splitters:
• Splitter Harm
• Splitter IntHarm
NOTE
i The Voltage-current 3-phase function group works even without an assigned voltage measuring point. In
this case the voltage, frequency and power functions (measured values, trigger and recorder routing func-
tions) are not available.
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, refer to chapter 2.1 Embedding of
Functions in the Device.
For information regarding the functional scope of the application templates, refer to chapter 4.2 Application
Template and Functional Scope of the Fault Recorder.
The function group Voltage-current 3-phase always contains the function block General that cannot be
deleted.
are available from the function library in DIGSI 5. Trigger functions that are not needed can be deleted again
from the function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage-current 3-phase.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_fg_spst, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-8 Structure of the Function Group Voltage-Current 3-Phase
The function group has interfaces to the voltage and current measuring points.
following figure shows the structure of the function Recorder routing VI.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_routui, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-9 Structure/Embedding of the Recorder Routing VI Function
For more information on the Recorder routing VI function, refer to 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and
Routing in DIGSI 5 and 7.6.1.2 Using Measurands .

The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points. If you
are using an application template, the function group is already connected to the necessary measuring points.
If you add functions to the function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the
respective voltage or current measuring points. If you add functions to the function group but the measuring
point necessary for this is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the Function-group connections Editor. For more detailed
information, refer to 7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device .
The function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase voltage
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. There are various types
of transformer connections possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also
provided via this interface. The function group must always be linked to the V-3ph measuring point.
If you want to test or change the connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point,
double-click in the DIGSI 5 project tree → (Name of the device) Measuring point routing (Connection
type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
• 3-phase current (optional)

The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are, for example, IA, IB, IC, IN or 3I0. All values that can be
calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The function group must always be
connected to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current interface with a maximum of four 3-phase current measuring
points. If 2 current measuring points have been connected with the 3-phase current interface, the total
current is also determined from measured values from both measuring points in the function group. All
functions in the function group have access to these values.
[sc_measpon, 3, en_US]
NOTE
i The current measuring points are optional within the Voltage-current 3-phase function group. If you do
not interconnect to any current and power values, the current measuring points are not available.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_fguive, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-11 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
Resetting the LED Group

Using the Reset the LED group function, you can reset the stored LEDs of the functions in one specific func-
tion group while the activated, stored LEDs of other functions in other function groups remain activated.

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and
cannot be deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
Table 6-3 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence A A Rated operating current of the primary values
current
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary values
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
voltage √3
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary values
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary values
Cos φ Active factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW W Active power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

dary
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent MVA VA Apparent power of the phase
power Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
For a more detailed explanation of the operational measured values, refer to 10.3 Operational Measured
Values.
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:9451:101) Rated current = 1000 A

With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current. The Rated current set here is
the reference value for the percentage measured values and setting values using percentages.

With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage. The Rated voltage set here is
the reference value for the percentage measured values and setting values using percentages.
Parameter: Rated apparent power
• Default setting (_:91:103) Rated apparent power = 692.82 MVA.

The parameter Rated apparent power is calculated depending on other parameters and cannot be
directly changed.
Parameter: Power-sys. neutral point
• Default setting (_:9451:149) Power-sys. neutral point = grounded

With the Power-sys. neutral point parameter, you specify whether the system neutral is grounded,
isolated or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil). Currently, the parameter
does not affect any protection function; only if the Automatic reclosing function uses the voltage measure-
ment.
6.3.4 Settings

Rated values
_:9451:101 General:Rated current 1.00 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Power-system data
_:9451:149 General:Power-sys. • grounded grounded
neutral point
• suppress. coil grounded
• isolated
Measurements
_:9451:158 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group
Closure detec.
_:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.4 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
6.4.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker.
You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The
Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you can
use for this device type. The following figure shows, for example, the functional scope of the Circuit-breaker
function group.
[sc_fg_leis, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-12 Circuit-Breaker Function Group – Example of the Functional Scope
The Circuit-breaker function group includes 3 different types of circuit breakers:
• Circuit breaker
• Circuit-breaker control
• Circuit breaker [status only]

The type circuit breaker can accept additional basic function blocks for protection functions along with the
actual circuit-breaker control.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The type circuit breaker [status only] is used only for acquiring the circuit-breaker switch position. This type
can be used to model switches that can only be read but not controlled by the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The available functions are described in and 8 Control Functions.
Besides the user functions, the Circuit-breaker function group contains certain functionalities that are essen-
tial for general purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
• Trip logic
• Mapping the physical circuit breaker
• Circuit-breaker position recognition for protection functions
• Detection of manual closure
• General settings
The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit-breaker function group. The individual function blocks
in the image are described in the following chapters.
[dw_fg_stru, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-13 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
The Circuit-breaker function group has interfaces with:
• Measuring points
• Protection function groups
Interfaces with Measuring Points

The function group contains the measured values needed from the measuring points associated with this
function group.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
If an application template is used, the function group is connected to the measuring point of the 3-phase
current because this connection is essential. It can be necessary to connect additional measuring points to the
function group, depending on the nature of the user functions used. The configuration is done via the Func-
tion-group connections editor in DIGSI 5.
If a user function, for example, synchronization, is used in the function group but the required measuring
point has not linked to it, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. This inconsistency provides an indication of the
missing measuring-point connection.
The function group Circuit breaker has interfaces with the following measuring points:
• 3-phase line current

The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. The function group must
always be connected to this measuring point.
• Voltage
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are, for example, VA, VB, VC of
the line or the feeder. The connection of the function group to this measuring point is optional.
• Sync. Voltage1, Sync. Voltage2

A 1-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 1-phase connection) or a 3-
phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 3-phase connection) is supplied
via this interface.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if synchronization is used.
Interface with Protection-Function Groups

All required data are exchanged between the protection function group and the function groups Circuit
breaker via the interfaces of the function group Circuit breaker. This data includes, for example, the pickup
and operate indications of the protection functions sent in the direction of the function group circuit-breaker
and, for example, the circuit-breaker position information in the direction of the protection function groups.
If an application template is used, the function groups are connected to each other because this connection is
essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection using the Function-group connections
Editor in DIGSI 5.
If the linkage is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.

Besides the general assignments of the protection function group or groups to the Circuit-breaker function
groups, you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions are included when the trip command is generated?
• Which protection functions activate the Automatic reclosing function?
• Which protection functions activate the Circuit-breaker failure protection function?

The interface with the 3-phase current system must have been configured. Otherwise, DIGSI 5 supplies an
inconsistency message.
Interface with Protection-Function Groups

The protection-function group is connected to 2 circuit breakers (2 Circuit-breaker function groups) for 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layouts.
Parameter: I Reference for % Values
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated normal current = 1000.00 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
With the parameter Rated normal current, you set the primary current, which serves as a reference for
all current-related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational meas-
ured values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated current of the protected object here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via
Parameter: V Reference for % Values

With the parameter Rated voltage, you set the primary voltage, which serves as a reference for all voltage-
related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational measured values
and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated voltage of the protected object (for example, the line) here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via
Parameter: Current Threshold Circuit Breaker Open
• Default setting (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.10 A

With the parameter Current thresh. CB open, you specify the current threshold below which the circuit-
breaker pole or the circuit breaker is recognized as open.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the circuit-breaker pole
is open will certainly fall below the parameterized value. If parasitic currents (for example, due to induction)
are excluded with the line deactivated, you can make a secondary setting of the value with a high degree of
sensitivity, to 0.05 A for example.
If no special requirements exist, Siemens recommends retaining the setting value of 0.10 A for secondary
purposes.
6.4.4 Settings

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated normal 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
current
Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current thresh. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:136 General:Op. mode BFP • unbalancing unbalancing
• I> query

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

(Type)
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Tripping current 3I0/IN MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
6.4.6 Trip Logic
6.4.6.1 Function Description

The Trip logic function block receives the group operate indication from the Protection function group or
Protection function groups and forms the protection trip command that is transmitted to the Circuit-breaker
function block.
The Circuit-breaker function block activates the device contact and thus causes the circuit breaker to open
(see 6.4.7 Circuit Breaker). The command output time is also effective here.
The trip logic also decides when the protection trip command is reset (see Figure 6-15).
[lo_ausbef, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-14 Trip Command

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Trip-Command Reset
[lo_befe3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-15 Trip-Command Reset
Once a trip command is issued, it is stored (see Figure 6-14).

You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of
trip command. The following setting options are possible:
• with dropout
If the function that initiated tripping resets its operate indication the trip command is reset. This occurs
typically with dropout. Command reset of the trip command takes place regardless of verification of the
circuit-breaker condition.
• with I<
• with I< & aux.contact

For these criteria, the state of the circuit breaker is also taken into account as a further criterion in addi-
tion to the dropout of the tripping function (operate indication is reset by command). You can select
whether the state is determined by means of the current (with I<) or by means of the current in
conjunction with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (with I< & aux.contact). The behavior of
these setting options only differs in one situation of the circuit-breaker state. If the circuit breaker is in
the opening state, the trip command is reset in the case of the option with I<, whereas it is not reset
yet in the case of the option with with I< & aux.contact. The opening state is detected if the auxil-
iary contacts still detect the circuit breaker as being closed and opening is detected via the decreasing
current flow.
As long as the circuit breaker is detected unambiguously as closed (fully closed), the trip command will
not be reset with these setting options.
The information about the condition of the circuit breaker and the determination of the various condi-
tions is supplied by the Circuit-breaker position recognition function block. You can find further infor-
mation in chapter 6.4.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions.
Parameter: Reset of trip command
• Recommended setting value (_:5341:103) Reset of trip command = with I<

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

with I< The trip command is reset under the following conditions:
• Dropout of the tripping function

• The current falls short of the value set in the parameter
(_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open
with I< & aux.contact The trip command is reset under the following conditions:
• The current falls short of the value set in the parameter

(_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open
• The circuit-breaker auxiliary contact reports that the circuit breaker is
open.
This setting assumes that the setting of the auxiliary contact has been
routed via a binary input (for more information, see 6.4.7.3 Acquisition
of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information).
with dropout If the load current in the system cannot be interrupted during the protec-
tion device test and the test current is fed in parallel with the load current
this setting is useful.
The setting can be selected for special applications in which the trip
command does not result in complete interruption of the current in every
case. In this case, the trip command is reset if the pickup of the tripping
protection function drops out.
6.4.6.3 Settings

Trip logic
_:103 Trip logic:Reset of trip • with I< with I<
command
• with dropout

(Type)
Trip logic
_:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
6.4.7 Circuit Breaker
6.4.7.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function block represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The basic tasks of this function block are:
• Operation of the circuit breaker
• Acquisition of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
• Acquistion of other circuit-breaker information

The Circuit-breaker function block provides the following information:
• Number of switching cycles
• Breaking current, breaking voltage, and breaking frequency
• Summation breaking current

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.4.7.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

The circuit breaker is operated in the following situations:
• Tripping of the circuit breaker as a result of a protection trip command
• Opening of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations
• Closing of the circuit breaker as a result of an automatic reclosing or of control operations

Tripping is always the result of a protection function. The operate indications of the individual protection func-
tions are summarized in the Trip logic function block. The trip command that causes the tripping in the
Circuit-breaker function block is generated there.
To operate the circuit breaker, the Circuit-breaker function block provides the output signals that must be
routed to the corresponding binary outputs of the device (see Table 6-4).
[lo_ausssc, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-16 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table 6-4 Description of the Output Signals
Signal Description Routing Options

Trip/open cmd. This signal executes all tripping and opening opera- • Unlatched
tions.
• Only saved in
The Output time parameter affects the signal. the event of
The signal is pending for the duration of the output protection trip-
time, with the following exceptions: ping (not when
opened)
• Only when switched off by the control:
The signal is reset before expiration of the period
if the auxiliary contacts report that the circuit
breaker is open before expiration of the period.
• Only in the event of protection tripping:
– The signal remains active as long as the trip
command is still active after expiration of
the period (see also ).
If the trip signal is no longer active and the
auxiliary contacts report that the circuit
breaker is open before expiration of the
period, the signal is canceled before expira-
tion of the period.
– With the routing option Only saved in the
event of tripping, the signal remains
pending until it is acknowledged manually.
This only applies for protection tripping.
Close command This signal executes all closing operations. Normal routing
The Output time parameter affects the signal.
The signal is pending for the duration of the output
time, with the following exception: The signal is
canceled before expiration of the period if the auxil-
iary contacts report that the circuit breaker is closed
before expiration of the period.
Command active This signal is active if one of the following binary Normal routing
outputs is active:
• Trip/open cmd.
• Close command
The binary outputs are active as long as a switching
command is being executed by the control.
6.4.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information

To determine the circuit-breaker position, the function block Circuit breaker provides position signals. These
signals are of the Double-point indication (DPC) type. A double-point indication can be routed to 2 binary
inputs so that the open and closed circuit-breaker switch positions can be reliably acquired.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[lo_erfass, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-17 Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Information
Signal Type Description

Position DPC Acquisition of the circuit-breaker switch position
The switch position CB 3-pole open and/or the position CB 3-pole closed
can be detected by routing to 1 or 2 binary inputs.
The signals must be routed to the binary input that is with the CB auxiliary contacts. The open and closed
signals do not necessarily have to be routed in parallel. The advantage of parallel routing is that it can be used
to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. If you route only one signal (open or closed), you cannot
determine an intermediate position or a disturbed position.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and
closed positions are detected (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-
breaker position recognition and Control function blocks.
Information Type Description
Open SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is opened.
Closed SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is closed.
Intermediate position SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is in the intermediate position. The
signal open and the signal closed have not been set.
Disturbed position SPS The circuit-breaker switch position is in the disturbed position. The
signal open and the signal closed have been set simultaneously.
Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation.
The following table shows the additional input signals:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

>Acquisition SPS This is used to activate acquisition blocking of the circuit-breaker auxil-
blocking iary contacts (see Other Functions 3.7.3 Persistent Commands for a
description of acquisition blocking).
>Reset SPS This is used to reset acquisition blocking and manual update of the
AcqBlk&Subst circuit breaker. If the signal is active, acquisition blocking and manual
update are reset.
>Ready SPS The active signal indicates that the circuit breaker is ready for an Open-
Closed-Open cycle.
The signal remains active as long as the circuit breaker is unable to trip.
The signal is used in the Automatic reclosing and Circuit-breaker test
functions.
The following table shows one additional output signal:

External health SPS This can be used to indicate the health of the physical circuit breaker.
For this, all failure information of the circuit breaker must be detected
via a binary input. This failure information can set the appropriate state
of the External health signal with a CFC chart (using the
BUILD_ENS block).
The signal has no effect on the health of the function block.
6.4.7.4 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

In certain systems, the user may wish to actuate an alarm (for example, a horn) when tripping (circuit-breaker
tripping) occurs. This alarm should not be issued if it is to be reclosed automatically after tripping, or if it is to
be closed or opened via the control. The alarm is only to be issued in the event of definitive tripping.
Depending on how the alarm is generated (for example, triggered by a fleeting contact of the circuit breaker),
the Alarm suppression signal can be used to suppress the alarm.
If one of the following conditions is met, the Alarm suppression signal is generated:
• The definitive protection tripping is not present.
• The integrated automatic reclosing function executes a closure.
• The integrated control executes a closure or opening action.
• The function Manual close detects an external closing.

For further information about its use, refer to 6.4.9.2 Application and Setting Notes.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[lo_unterd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-18 Definitive Tripping and Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
6.4.7.5 Tripping and Opening Information

When a trip or opening command is issued, the breaking information shown in the next figure is saved in the
fault log.
[lo_ausloe, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-19 Breaking Information
The following statistics information is saved for the circuit breaker:
• Number of switching cycles:

All tripping, opening, and closing operations are counted.
• Number of closing operations by the automatic reclosing function
• Total of breaking currents

The statistics information can be individually set and reset via the device control. It is also possible to reset all
values via the binary input signal >Reset switch statist..
[lo_statistics information circuit-breaker, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-20 Statistics Information About the Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Routing for Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position

For certain functions of the device, it is useful to detect the circuit-breaker switch position via its auxiliary
contacts. The following shows a number of examples:
• Circuit-breaker position recognition function block
• Circuit-breaker failure protection function
• Control function block

The operating principle of the auxiliary contacts is described in the individual functions.
Siemens recommends detecting the Circuit breaker is open in 3 poles and Circuit breaker
is closed in 3 poles information via auxiliary contacts. This is the optimal configuration for the control
functionality. For purely protection applications, it is also sufficient to detect just one of the 2 circuit-breaker
switch positions. When used as a protection and control device, Siemens recommends the following analysis
of the circuit-breaker switch position:
[lo_evaluation2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-21 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
The following diagram shows the recommended routing, in which OH stands for active with voltage.
[sc_polg3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-22 Routing for Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position via 2 Auxiliary Contacts
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, that is, routing of
the auxiliary contacts is not absolutely necessary. However, this is a requirement for the control functions.
Parameter: Output Time
• Default setting (_:101) Output time = 0.10 s

The Output time parameter acts on the signals for tripping, opening, and closing of the circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control
circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
² Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.
Parameter: Indicat. of breaking values
• Default setting (_:105) Indicat. of breaking values = always

With the parameter Indicat. of breaking values, you specify whether the measured values are to be
reported if the circuit breaker is opened via the control function.
always With this setting, the measured values are reported if the circuit breaker is
opened either via the control function or via the trip command of a protec-
tion function.
with trip With this setting, the measured values are only reported if the circuit
breaker is opened via the trip command of a protection function.
Measured Values
When a protection function opens the circuit breaker, the following measured values can be stored in the fault
log:
• Break.-current phs A
• Break.-current phs B
• Break.-current phs C
• Break. current 3I0/IN
• Break. voltage phs A
• Break. voltage phs B
• Break. voltage phs C
The measured value Break. current 3I0/IN is the neutral-point current. Dependent on the connection
type of the measuring point I-3ph that is connected with the Circuit-breaker function group, the neutral-
point current differs as follows:
Connection Type of the Meas- Neutral-Point Current
uring Point I-3ph
3-phase Calculated zero-sequence current 3I0
3-phase + IN Measured neutral-point current IN
3-phase + IN-separate If the secondary ground current exceeds the linear section of the sensitive
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep measuring input (1.6 Irated) with sensitive current transformers, the
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep neutral-point current of the measured IN is switched to the calculated 3I0.
Output Signal: Indication Suppression

Whereas in the case of feeders without an automatic reclosing function every trip command is final due to a
protection function, the use of an automatic reclosing function should only cause the motion detector of the
circuit breaker (fleeting contact on the circuit breaker) to trigger an alarm if tripping of the circuit breaker is
definitive (see next figure for more details). Likewise, a tripping alarm should not be triggered for switching
operations by the control.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
For this, the alarm activation circuit should be looped via a suitably routed output contact of the device
(output signal Alarm suppression). In the idle state and when the device is switched off, this contact is
always closed. For this, an output contact with a break contact must be routed. The contact opens whenever
the output signal Alarm suppression becomes active, so that tripping or a switching operation does not
cause an alarm.
You can find more detailed information in the logic in chapter 6.4.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary
Contacts and Further Information.
[lo_schalt, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-23 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
6.4.7.7 Settings

Circuit break.
_:101 Circuit break.:Output 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:105 Circuit break.:Indicat. of • with trip always
breaking values
• always

(Type)
Circuit break.
_:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:58 Circuit break.:Position DPC C
_:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. SPS O
_:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

(Type)
_:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:317 Circuit break.:Break. current 3I0/IN MV O
_:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
6.4.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary

Functions
6.4.8.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts
and the current flow.
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional functions:
• Trip logic (see )
• Detection of manual closing (see 6.4.9.1 Function Description)
• Process monitor (see )

The specified chapters describe the way the protection-related additional functions are processing the infor-
mation of this function block.
The control does not use this information. The control evaluates the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
[lo_zust3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-24 Overview of the Circuit-Breaker Condition Position Function
Based on the link between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow, shown in
Figure 6-24, the circuit breaker can assume the following positions. The following table shows the possible
circuit-breaker conditions:
Circuit-Breaker Condition Description
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as open according to
both criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as closed according to
both criteria.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Circuit-Breaker Condition Description

Possibly open, possibly These conditions can occur if the information is incomplete due to the
closed routing of the auxiliary contacts and the condition can no longer be deter-
mined reliably. These uncertain conditions are evaluated differently
by certain functions.
Opening This is a dynamically occurring condition that results when, while a trip
command is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed, the current is
detected to have fallen below the threshold value. The reason for that is
that the current-flow criterion takes effect faster than the auxiliary contact
can open.
6.4.9 Detection Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)
Detection of Manual Closure (for Process Monitor)

The Manual closure function block detects any closure carried out by hand. This information is used in
Process monitor functions (within protection function groups).
You can find detailed information in the chapter Process monitor.
The following figure shows the logic for manual closure detection.
[lo_hand_3p, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-25 Logic for Manual Closure Detection
External Manual Closure

An external manual closure is communicated to the device via the input signal >Input. The input signal can
also be connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing coil. Detection via the input
signal >Input is also blocked if the circuit breaker is closed or if a protection trip is active.
Internal Manual Closure

Manual closure is detected in all cases if a close command is transmitted by the internal control function of
the device. This is possible because the control carries out plausibility checks itself and is also subject to inter-
locking.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Input Signals: >Input, >Blocking of Manual Closure

In practice, the input signal >Input is connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing
coil (see following figure).
[lo_steuer, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-26 Connection of the Input Signal to the Control Circuit of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Coil
Every closure of the circuit breaker is recorded in the process.

If external close commands are possible (actuation of the circuit breaker by other devices), which are not
intended to promptly detect a manual closure, this can be ensured in 2 ways:
• The input signal is connected in such a way that it is not activated in the event of external close
commands.
• The external close command is connected to the blocking input >Block manual close for manual
closure detection.
Parameter: Action time
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Action time = 300 ms

In order to ensure independence from manual activation of the input signal, the detection function is
extended for a defined length of time using the parameter Action time.
Siemens recommends an action time of 300 ms.
Parameter: CB open dropout delay
• Default setting (_:102) CB open dropout delay = 0 ms

With the CB open dropout delay parameter, you can maintain the effectiveness of internal indication CB
open for the set time. If the input signal >Input becomes active after external delayed manual closure, the
indication (_:300) Detected is output as long as the dropout delay is effective.
6.4.9.3 Settings

Manual close
_:101 Manual close:Action 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
time
_:102 Manual close:CB open 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
dropout delay

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

(Type)
Manual close
_:6541:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:6541:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:6541:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.5 Function-Group Type Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) measures the phasor values of current and voltage. These values get a high
precision time stamp and together with the values of power frequency, power frequency change rate and
optional binary data that are also time stamped are transmitted to a central analysis station. The standardized
transmission protocol IEEEC 37.118 is used to do this.
The PMU function group is activated by selecting the protocol IEEE C37.118PMU on an Ethernet module
(electrical or optical). The PMU obtains the measured values from the measuring points and the precise time
from time synchronization. The time-stamped synchrophasors for current and voltage are formed from this
and transferred together with additional values via the communication module to a server (PDC, Phasor Data
Concentrator).
[dw_strpmu, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-27 Structure/Embedding of the Function
The synchrophasors, sent from the PMU in a continuous data stream to a PDC, are provided with time stamps
and thus are comparable with the measured values of other PMUs. The power frequency, the power frequency
change rate and optional binary information are also transmitted as time-stamped measured values. There-
fore, you receive an overview of the transient processes in a distributed energy transfer system, for example
network fluctuations and compensating processes.
The following table shows the differences between the PMU measured values and the remaining measured
values of the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table 6-5 Comparison of Synchrophasors and Conventional Measured Values
Synchrophasors of the PMU Measured Values from the Measuring Points

Continuous updating (measured value of current) Slow updating (typically every 5 seconds)
with, for example, 10 values per second (reporting
rate)
Every measured value has a time stamp No time stamp for the measured values
Phasor values of current and voltage (amplitude and RMS values without phase angle
phase angle)
The following figure shows the structure of such a Wide Area Monitoring System. The data delivered from the
PMUs on the PDC are transmitted via the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol (ICCP) according to
DIN EN 60870-6 to the network control center.
[dw_strwam, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-28 Structure of a Wide-Area Monitoring System with Phasor Measurement Units
The phasor measurement units each have 2 communication interfaces: an Ethernet module for synchrophasor
communication via IEEE C37.118 and another module for communication with the substation automation
technology, for example, through the IEC 61850 protocol. If you use an ETH-BD-2FO communication module,
you can activate IEEE C37.118 and IEC 61850-8-1 on the same module.
The central evaluation system, for example SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor, receives the data, files,
archives them and graphically displays them on a User Interface. In this system, a self-checking function may
also be performed, for example, on undamped power swings. The further distribution of information to other
PDCs or to a control center is done here.
To maintain the required maximum errors (TVE) required in the standard IEEE C37.118, the time tolerance
relative to the UTC time reference (UTC = Universal Time Coordinated) may be maximum 10 μs. Therefore, the
device must be directly synchronized with a GPS precise time signal for the correct function of the PMU.
Phasors
A phasor u(t) = Uejωt can be displayed as a phasor that moves counterclockwise in the complex plane at the
angular frequency ω. Therefore, the voltage function u(t) = Re{u(t)} is obtained as a projection of the phasor
u(t) on the real axis.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_geopdc, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-29 Geometric Representation of a Phasor
Reference Point for Determining the Angle

The phase angle of a measuring signal Xm is determined relative to a cosine function having a rated frequency,
which is synchronized with the UTC time reference (see Figure 6-30).
[dw_utcphi, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-30 Determination of Phase Angle ρ of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The number of phasors that are transmitted per second is configurable. The transmission rate is defined
according to IEEE C37.118 as the reporting rate. The reporting rate defines the number of phasors that are
transmitted per second. Extremely precise time synchronization is essential so that phasor measurement can
be carried out to enable phasors from different sites to be compared via GPS.
Reporting Rate
You use the configurable reporting rate (parameter (_:10621:102) Reporting rate) to specify the
number of telegrams that are generated and sent to the PDC per second. It is adjustable, depending on the
rated frequency, and applies to all currents and voltages of the relevant PMU function group. If several PMU
function groups are created on the device, these can work with different reporting rates.
Total Vector Error (TVE)

The TVE describes the error between the actual and the measured values of the input signal. The Synchro-
phasor Standard IEEE 37.118 defines upper limiting values of 120 % VN and 200 % IN, among other things. Up
to these limiting values, the TVE of 1 % must not be exceeded for stationary signals. The standard defines the
2 performance classes, Class P and Class M, as ranges within which influencing variables are acceptable and
the TVE of ≤1 % must be maintained. The SIPROTEC 5 devices support Class P and Class M, which specify the
following influencing variables for a TVE of 1 %:
• Signal frequency (relative to fN)
• Signal magnitude (relative to 100 % nominal magnitude) for voltage and current
• Phase angle (relative to 0°)
• Harmonic distortions (relative to < 0.2 % (THD) up to the 50th harmonic

The following figure graphically represents the total vector error. As well as the amplitude, the TVE also enters
into the angle error.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_klatve, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-31 Representation of the Total Vector Error
The TVE is defined as follows:
[fo_utcphi_new, 1, en_US]
Where:
• Xr(n) = Real part of measured signal
• Xi(n) = Imaginary part of measured signal
• Xr = Real part, input signal
• Xi = Imaginary part, input signal
Variables that influence the TVE are:
• Amplitude errors
• Phase errors
• Synchronization accuracy (deviation from the UTC)

Synchronization accuracy is affected by a GPS timer and the precise correction of the time delay within the
GPS receiver module, as well as by the optimal mounting arrangement of the GPS antenna.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.5.4 Transmitted Data
The following data is transmitted from the PMU to the PDC:
• Current and voltage phasors
• Frequency
• Frequency rate of change
• Analog-channel data (active/reactive power)
• Binary information
The current and voltage channels transferred from a PMU function group are selected through the Function
group connections editor in DIGSI 5. The frequency and frequency change rate are determined once per
PMU. In this case, only the current and voltage channels selected via the Function group connections editor
for this PMU are taken into consideration. You may route the binary information in the information routing
matrix of DIGSI 5. You can instantiate the analog-channel data from the Global DIGSI 5 library in the PMU
function group.
The channel used for specifying the frequency is selected dynamically during the device runtime. Each
channel is checked for the presence of a signal in the following order:
1. 3-phase voltage measuring points
2nd 1-phase voltage measuring points
3rd 3-phase current measuring points
4th 1-phase current measuring points
The 1st measuring point found with a valid signal is used for specifying the frequency in the PMU function
group.
In the case of 3-phase measuring points, the positive-sequence system can also be transmitted instead of or in
addition to 3 individual sychrophasors. You can make the selection using the (_:10621:103) Positive
sequence parameter, see 6.5.8 Application and Setting Notes, Parameter: Positive sequence, Page 226.
6.5.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)
PMU communication according to standard IEEE C37.118 is a client-server communication format in which the
PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator) functions as both the client and the server.
Once the PDC has been successfully connected to the device PMU and the PMU configuration data has been
queried, the PDC initiates transmission of the synchrophasor data by sending a close command to the PMU. If
you use the method of spontaneous data transmission via UDP, data output starts immediately after the
device boots without a close command to the PMU.
The values and names for the values are transmitted for the phasors, binary information, and analog channels.
The names for the phasors and binary information are automatically generated by the respective PMU function
groups. You must enter the analog-channel names yourself.
If necessary, you can edit the names for the phasors, binary information, and analog-channel data and assign
your own designations for them. For more information, see chapter 6.5.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI.
As an example, the names (generated) for measuring points or binary information may be as follows:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Table 6-6 Possible Measuring-Points Names
Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point V-3ph 1[ID 1] MP-V3ph VAB ID01
MP-V3ph VBC ID01
MP-V3ph VCA ID01
MP-V3ph VA ID01
MP-V3ph VB ID01
MP-V3ph VC ID01
MP-V3ph V1 ID01
MP-V3ph VN ID01
Measuring point I-3ph 1[ID 2] MP-I3ph IA ID02
MP-I3ph IB ID02
MP-I3ph IC ID02
MP-I3ph I1 ID02
MP-I3ph IN ID02
Measuring point I-1ph 1[ID 3] MP-I1ph ID03
Measuring point V-1ph 1[ID 4] MP-V1ph ID04
Table 6-7 Possible Binary-Information Names
Path Displayed in DIGSI 5 Name Transferred to the PDC

(Can Be Edited)
PMU 1: BIN-01-INFO-6
Transf.bin.1:
>BinaryInfo.6
Transf.bin.2:
>BinaryInfo.8
Transf.bin.10:
>BinaryInfo.3
Data is transmitted continuously from the PMU to the PDC at the configured reporting rate. The transmission is
terminated by a corresponding trip command from the PDC or when the connection between the PDC and the
PMU is interrupted.
Communication between the PMU and the PDC can be passed via TCP or UDP protocols.
The following ports are used for data transmission by default:
• TCP: Port 4712
• UDP: Port 4713

You can configure the ports anyway you wish in a range of 1 to 65535 using the TCP port and UDP port
parameters.
NOTE
i When configuring the ports, do not set any ports already being used by other communication protocols.
Configuring ports used elsewhere prevents communication with the PMU. In this case, data packets from
the PDC cannot be received, and inquiries from the PMU cannot be transmitted.
If you are using the UDP protocol for communication between the PMU and the PDC, you can set either
command mode or asynchronous response mode as the communication mode. In asynchronous
response mode, data can be transmitted continuously to preset PDC destination addresses in IEEE C37.118

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
format without a PDC having to request transmission of the synchrophasor data via a close command to the
PMU.
Up to 4 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time. The IP addresses of the
maximum 4 PDCs are set in the PMU function group. If 4 device PMUs are configured, this enables support for
up to 16 PDCs.
6.5.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI
You configure and parameterize the Phasor Measurement Unit with DIGSI. After a device has been added in a
DIGSI project, one or more communication modules that support synchrophasors can be configured as PMUs.
The device module supports a maximum of 2 communication modules that can be configured as PMUs. If
more than 2 PMUs are needed, the device must be expanded with a CB202 plug-in module assembly (expan-
sion module), which can accommodate 2 more communication modules.
The following communication modules support synchrophasors:
• ETH-BA-2EL (2 x Ethernet electric, RJ45)
• ETH-BB-2FO (2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)
• ETH-BD-2FO (2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)

These modules are then freely assignable to ports E, F, N, or P of the device, see Figure 6-32. You can view the
selected port in the (_:10621:104) Port. This parameter is automatically managed by DIGSI and cannot
be changed.
[sc_commod, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-32 Placement of Communication Modules
NOTE
i Port M of the CB202 plug-in module assembly is used to accommodate measuring-transducer modules and
cannot be used for the installation of communication modules.
Addressing
You must configure the respective Ethernet address (IP address, subnet mask, etc.) for each communication
module in DIGSI. This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module in
item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_ethern, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-33 Ethernet-Address Configuration
In the Protocols – Communication menu, select the synchrophasor protocol; see the following figure.
[sc_protoc, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-34 Protocol Selection
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, a settings dialog for PMU-
specific configuration opens in Settings; see the following figure.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_wildcard, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-35 PMU-Specific Configuration
You configure the specific settings for the communication protocol in the top section of this settings dialog. In
the bottom section, you specify the corresponding PMU-specific settings.
In order to permit a better configuration of larger wide-area supervision systems, changes have been imple-
mented in the IEEE C37.118 communication configuration that permit a flexible IP configuration without the
loss of safety aspects in the networks administered.
Configurable placeholders are allowed for every PDC/IP address with the TCP PMU transmission protocol in
general and with UDP in the Communication mode Commanded operation. These placeholders allow you
to define a range of IP addresses where they are accepted within these accesses. The purpose of this is to
permit each individual device or system access within the respective network without limits with regard to
their hierarchy level. Therefore, with regard to security aspects, the limitation to individual IP addresses is
eliminated. You are thus allowed to configure complete sections of IP addresses in each PMU and, as a result,
very flexible when making changes to the configuration of the entire network, for example. The placeholder
character must follow consecutively at the bit level, starting with the bit with the lowest value.
EXAMPLE of Placeholder Characters:

Example 1:
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00101011 is not permitted
• binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00111111 is permitted

Example 2:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.1
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.127
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.1 to 192.172.16.127.
Example 3:
• The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.100
• Placeholder: 0.0.0.3
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.100 to 192.172.16.103.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
If a PDC attempts to establish a connection to the device, the PDC IP addresses and corresponding place-
holders are checked in the same order as they had been configured (IP address PDC1, IP address PDC2,
IP address PDC3). Running through the list is stopped with the first match of the IP address, placeholder, and
requested IP-address range and the connection is built-up. If there are no matches, the attempt to connect is
rejected.
If you have configured the IP address 0.0.0.0 and the placeholder 255.255.255.255, every IP address received
is accepted as valid. This could be of use in the course of commissioning measures.
NOTE
i You must have configured at least one IP address to establish a connection between the device and the
PDC.
If you set UDP as the transmission protocol, you can transmit PMU data to groups of PDCs using IP multicast.
Using multicast, considerably more PDCs can be reached via one communication module than when every
PDC connects in unicast mode. Usually, the address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used.
NOTE
i The router used must support the IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) V3 protocol.
[sc_PMU_multicast01, 1, en_US]
Make a checkmark at the Use multicast parameter. If Use multicast is checked, you can set up to
2 multicast IP addresses. If you do not put the checkmark in place, the settings for the multicast IP addresses
are not displayed.
NOTE
i DIGSI does not check the validity of the set multicast IP address. A multicast IP address of 0.0.0.0 is ignored.
You can set the settings for the multicast IP addresses and the PDC IP addresses in the Access Control List. If
Use multicast is active, all data packages of the PMU are transmitted to the parameterized multicast
IP addresses, but not to the PDC IP addresses. Commands from PDCs in the Access Control List are processed as
if operating without multicast. Responses are only transmitted by way of the multicast IP addresses. In the
Command mode UDP communication mode, you need at least one additional PDC IP address in the Access
Control List to start PMU data transmission (see Figure 6-36).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_PMU_Multicast_Access, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-36 Access Control List
EXAMPLE
Multicast Operation
[dw_PMU_multicast_config_with_whitellist_PDC, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-37 PMU Multicast Configuration in Asynchronous Response Mode
Select the communication module in the Hardware and protocols menu in DIGSI. Set the IP address of the
PMU (192.168.100.1) under Properties → Ethernet addresses.
[sc_IP_comm-mode_de, 1, en_US]
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, a settings dialog for PMU-
specific configuration opens in Settings; see the following figure. Set the communication mode to Asyn-
chronous response mode.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_general_spon_mode, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-38 PMU Settings
In the following dialog, you set the IP addresses of the multicast routers:
Figure 6-39 Additional Multicast IP Addresses During PMU Transport: UDP and Multicast
If you are using the asynchronous data transmission method, set the PMU transport parameter to UDP
and the Communication mode parameter to Spontaneous operation. The PMU data are then sent cycli-
cally via UDP to every PDC/IP address permanently configured in DIGSI. You may not configure placeholders for
PDC/IP address ranges in this communication mode.
Data output starts immediately after the device has booted. In this way, a starting signal from the PDC is not
necessary to start data transmission.
[sc_spontan, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-40 PMU Configuration for Spontaneous Transmission
The configuration dataset is transmitted 1x per minute. With the Spont. mode config type parameter,
you select the type for the configuration data record. With the Reporting rate parameter, you configure
the number of cyclic repetitions of the data packages. As UDP is a connectionless protocol, a preconfigured
destination device with its PDC/IP address is not required to be physically present and/or connected. This
allows uninterrupted provision of the data without bidirectional communication.
NOTE
i If you have not configured valid PDC/IP addresses and still activate option for spontaneous data transmis-
sion, no cyclic data telegrams are sent.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
NOTE
i It is possible to configure IP addresses for various PDCs that are not present in the same subnetwork as the
COM module. Such configurations are considered valid and can be loaded into the device. However, if the
device transmits spontaneous data and configuration packages to these IP addresses, the PDC cannot be
reached with the deviating subnetwork destination addresses.
NOTE
i Commands or requests from an invalid PMU IP address are ignored.
EXAMPLE
COM-Module Address Configuration
• IP address: 192.168.100.1
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

PDC Address Configuration
• IP address for PDC1: 192.168.100.160
• IP address for PDC2: 86.168.100.161

Only PDC1 receives the data because the IP address is in the same subnetwork as the COM module.
PDC2 cannot be reached because the subnetwork address (86.x) differs from the subnetwork address of the
COM module (192.x). The PMU cannot transmit data to this address.
In addition to the PDCs IP addresses, the port can also be configured, which ensures the communication
between the PMU and PDC. You can find the TCP or UDP port parameter in place for this purpose, depending
on the configured transmission protocol. With the parameters, you can configure the port in a range of 1 to
65 535. The setting for these parameters is stored, even when the parameter is not visible due to the configu-
ration of the transmission protocol. If, for example, TCP has been configured as a transmission protocol, the
TCP port is not visible, but the setting has been stored in the background in DIGSI and is still available for use
later on.
Measuring-Point Assignment
After adding measuring points to the device, you can assign these measuring points to each configured PMU.
Figure 6-41 shows an example of how the device configuration can be supplemented with 2 additional input/
output modules. You connect the current and voltage inputs of these I/O modules to measuring points via the
DIGSI routing matrix, see example in Figure 6-42.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_addios, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-41 Adding Additional Input/Output Modules
[sc_routin, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-42 Assignment of the Current and Voltage Inputs of the Added Input/Output Modules on Meas-
uring Points
NOTE
i Consider that the maximum amount of measuring points that can be routed is limited by the device.
The maximum numbers of measuring points that can be routed for one PMU are:
• 20 x 3-phase voltage measuring points
• 20 x 3-phase current measuring points
• 40 x 1-phase voltage measuring points
• 40 x 1-phase current measuring points

You can assign all supported measuring points to any PMU, see the following figure. Each PMU must be
connected to at least one measuring point, and the total number of phasors (a 3-phase measuring point = 4

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
phasors) must not exceed 80 per PMU. The limitation of the load model must also be considered, depending
on the device configuration.
[sc_fgconn, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-43 Connecting Measuring Points to the Configured PMU Function Groups
When these setting steps have been completed, the PMUs are fully configured. The PMU is a function group
that functions independently of all the other function groups instantiated in the device.
Changing the Channel Names of Phasors

You can edit the names of the individual phasor channels for voltages and currents in DIGSI. Clearly structured
channel designations support the testing and commissioning of PMU systems. Furthermore, only the names
visible in the IEEE C37.118 interface can be changed. The function block designations themselves cannot.
The IEEE C37.118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names. Due to the protocol, the
designation length is limited to 255 ASCII characters per channel for CFG3, and to 16 ASCII characters per
channel for CFG2.
In order to define your own channel names, firstly instantiate the required number of Phasor names function
blocks in the PMU function group. Assignment to the corresponding measuring points is performed by the
Measuring point selection. For this purpose, DIGSI shows all measuring points routed to the PMU in the
function group connections (see following figure).
[sc_phasor_edit, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-44 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Phasors

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
NOTE
i You can only rename each individual phasor when you set the parameter Positive sequence to no or
additionally in the function settings. Otherwise you will only be offered one single phasor for each 3-
phase measuring point for renaming.
Changing the Channel Names of Binary Channels

You can edit the names of the binary channels in DIGSI. Clearly structured channel designations support the
testing and commissioning of PMU systems. You can edit the names of the binary channels visible in the
IEEE C37.118 interface in DIGSI. To do this, tick the My binary info names check box in the Binary info
transmission function block (see Figure 6-45).
The IEEE C37.118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names. Due to the protocol, the
designation length is limited to 255 ASCII characters per channel for CFG3, and to 16 ASCII characters per
channel for CFG2.
[sc_PMU_bin_info_edit, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-45 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Binary Channels
Routing Binary Signals

You can connect binary inputs via DIGSI information routing to binary channels of the PMU. As an alternative,
you can also route the binary inputs via a function chart (CFC). You will find, in the Phasor Measurement
Unit (PMU) folder, the Binary information transmission function block in the DIGSI function library (see the
following figure). You can instantiate this function block up to 10 times in one PMU function group. Each of
these function blocks contains 8 options for routing binary channels.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_pmu_bif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-46 Information Routing in DIGSI 5
Routing Analog-Channel Data

In a PMU function group, you can instantiate the analog-channel data using the FBs AnalogCh 1ph or
AnalogCh 3ph. In this case, a maximum of 30 instances per function-block type can be used.
With the parameters of the FBs AnalogCh 1ph or AnalogCh 3ph, you can assign the measuring points. You
can only use the measuring points that have previously been assigned to the PMU function group.
You can also adjust whether the active or reactive power must be transmitted and assign a name to the analog
channel. Due to the protocol, the designation length is limited to 255 ASCII characters for CFG3 and to 16
ASCII characters for CFG2.
[sc_analog_channel, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-47 Routing Analog-Channel Data

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Routing Indications
The routable indication ChannelLive of the PMU log
• raises when the PMU is connected to the PDC
• clears when the connection to the PDC is interrupted.
[sc_parami, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-48 Log Indication for Display of the PMU/PDC Connection
6.5.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device
You can also change the PMU settings directly on the device. To do this, select the desired PMU instance on
the device display. By selecting menu item Settings you then access the editable setting values (see
Figure 6-49). Note that the parameter Port cannot be changed, because this corresponds to the physical slot
position of the communication module in question.
[sc_devpmu, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-49 Changing the PMU Setting Values via the Device Display
You can also change the communication settings in the same way. To do this, select the corresponding
communication port in the Communication menu on the device display. From the Channel 1 menu item, you
can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings (see Figure 6-50).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_compmu, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-50 Changing the Communication Setting Values via the Device Display
Time Synchronization
In order to ensure the time accuracy of the PMU, you must select IRIG-B as the protocol for the GPS clock
(Figure 6-51) or, if an ETH-BD-2FO communication module is present, IEEE 1588 (Figure 6-52). With other
settings, the PMU function function group indicates that it is not time synchronized.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Setting Time Synchronization – IRIG-B
[sc_setting time source, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-51 Setting Time Synchronization – IRIG-B
To detect a lack of synchronization quickly, also set the waiting time for the failure indication of the loss of
time synchronization to the smallest possible value, thus to 1 s.
Setting Time Synchronization – IEEE 1588 (Precision Time Protocol (PTP))

Activate IEEE 1588 on the ETH-BD-2FO communication module.
NOTE
i For PMU applications, use the IEEE 1588 protocol on the ETH-BD-2FO communication module, because the
IEEE 1588 protocol that can be activated on the ETH-BA-2EL and ETH-BB-2FO modules does not deliver the
required accuracy.
[sc_activate_ieee_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-52 IEEE 1588 Activation for the ETH-BD-2FO Module

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Ensure that the domain number in the IEEE 1588 settings matches that of the switch used.
[sc_para_ieee_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-53 IEEE 1588 settings on the ETH-BD-2FO module
Select IEEE 1588 as the time source in the time configuration.
[sc_choose_of_time, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-54 Selection of Time Source
When selecting the switch used, make sure it supports the PTP standard IEEE 1588. Siemens recommends the
RUGGEDCOM RSG2488.
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:10621:1) Mode = on

With the parameter Mode, you activate or deactivate the PMU, or you switch it to test mode. The possible
setting values are on, off, and test. In Test mode, the PMU data is marked as invalid.
Parameter: Reporting rate
• Default setting (_:10621:102) Reporting rate = 10 frames/s

With the parameter Reporting rate, you specify the number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to
the PDC per second.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
NOTE
i Different setting values are shown or hidden, depending on the rated frequency set. You can set a
reporting rate of 200 frames/s (50 Hz) or 240 frames/s (60 Hz) only when using an ETH-BD-2FO module.
Parameter: Positive sequence
• Default setting (_:10621:103) Positive sequence = no

With the parameter Positive sequence, you can set whether the PMU transmits the positive-sequence
system. The following setting values can be used:
Parameter Value Meaning
no The PMU only transmits the 3 individual synchrophasors for the 3-phase
measuring points.
only The PMU only transmits the positive-sequence system instead of the 3 indi-
vidual synchrophasors for the 3-phase measuring points.
additionally The PMU transmits the positive-sequence system in addition to the 3 indi-
vidual synchrophasors for the 3-phase measuring points.
The setting you make here is then valid for all PMUs with 3-phase measuring points.
Parameter: Transmit measured VN, IN
• Default setting (_:10621:104) Transmit measured VN, IN = no

This parameter is only visible if you route the Measuring point V-3ph or the Measuring point I-3ph with VN
or IN to the PMU in DIGSI 5. The routing option is in the DIGSI 5 project tree in Device Name → Function-
group connections in the Measuring points ↔ Function group settings sheet.
With this parameter, you define whether or not the PMU transmits VN and IN.
Parameter: Class
• Default setting (_:10621:101) Class = Class P

With the parameter Class, you set which performance class is used for the calculation of the measured
values. Class P is the standard case for PMUs. In this case, filters are used that provide a short response time
and that are therefore suitable for recording dynamic processes. Class M is intended for applications that are
unfavorably affected by alias effects and in which short response times are not relevant.
Parameter: Global PMU ID
• Default setting (_:10621:142) Global PMU ID = Freely editable text

With the parameter Global PMU ID, you enter a global ID for the PMU, which can contain up to 16 charac-
ters.
Parameter: PMU Latitude
• Default setting (_:10621:143) PMU Latitude = 0.00000000 °

With the parameter PMU Latitude, you set the latitude to a value between -90,00000000 ° and
+90,00000000 °.
Parameter: PMU Longitude
• Default setting (_:10621:144) PMU Longitude = 0.00000000 °

With the parameter PMU Longitude, you set the current longitude to a value between -180,00000000 ° and
+180,00000000 °.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Parameter: PMU Elevation
• Default setting (_:10621:145) PMU Elevation = 0.00 m

With the parameter PMU Elevation, you set the current height above sea level to a value between
-50 000.00 m and +50 000.00 m.
Parameter: Port
This parameter cannot be set, because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding
communication module is inserted.
6.5.9 Settings

Func. settings
_:10621:1 Func. settings:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:10621:101 Func. settings:Class • Class P Class P
• Class M
_:10621:102 Func. settings:Reporting • 1 frame/s 10 frames/s
rate
• 5 frames/s
• 6 frames/s
• 10 frames/s
• 12 frames/s
• 15 frames/s
• 20 frames/s
• 25 frames/s
• 30 frames/s
• 50 frames/s
• 60 frames/s
• 100 frames/s
• 120 frames/s
_:10621:103 Func. settings:Positive • no no
sequence
• yes

(Type)
General
_:10621:52 Func. settings:Behavior ENS O
_:10621:53 Func. settings:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
6.6.1 Overview
The Analog units function group is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are
external devices, such as RTD units, analog plug-in modules, or measuring-transducer modules.
You will find the Analog units function group for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
[sc_20_maee, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-55 Analog Unit Function Group in DIGSI
If the device has a measuring transducer, it is automatically mapped in the Analog units function group. If
one or more RTD units are connected to the device, you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit
serial functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library in order to map the RTD units.
If the device is connected to a power-plant control system or another protection device, you must load one or
more Temperature acquisition via protocols functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library to form the protocols.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_str_the, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-56 Structure of the Analog Unit Function Group
Gray: Optionally wired, optionally available

White: Always wired, always available
The Analog units function group has interfaces to protection function groups. The Analog units function
group provides, for example, measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit , a measuring
transducer or via protocols. These measured temperature values are available for all protection function
groups in which a temperature monitoring function works.
The RTD unit Ether. function is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 20 function instances
can operate simultaneously.
The structure of the function RTD unit serial is identical to the structure of the function RTD unit Ether..
The function 20-mA unit Ether. is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4 function instances
can operate simultaneously. The structure of the function 20 mA serial unit is identical to the structure of the
function 20-mA unit Ether..

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols has 2 stage types: The Temperature acquisition via
PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 and the Temperature acquisition via GOOSE. One instance of the Temperature
acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 is preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 12 instances
can operate simultaneously for both stage types.
6.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet
6.6.3.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Ether.:
• Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values meas-
ured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process tags such as temperature or gas
pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit
6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function

The function 20-mA unit Ether. can only work in the function group Analog units. A maximum of 4 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured channel function blocks.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. contains input and output channels which can be configured independently
of one another.
[dw_str_fn2, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.6.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Logic
[lo_20mtcp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-58 Logic of the Function 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Communication with 20-mA Unit

The function is used to communicate with a 20-mA unit connected via an Ethernet connection. When a
connection of the function to an external 20-mA unit via an Ethernet interface has successfully been estab-
lished, the 20-mA unit sends the measured values of all connected channels to the function 20-mA unit.
Ether.. For the connection to be established successfully, specific communication settings must be specified.
For more detailed information, refer to 6.6.3.4 Application and Setting Notes.
The 20-mA measuring unit 7XV5674 is supported.
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
Table 6-8 Error Responses
Error Description Status Health

The function 20-mA unit Ether. cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. sends TCP settings to Alarm
the communication module, which evidently would
like to connect to the 20-mA unit via a serial protocol.
This communication module does not establish a
connection to the 20-mA unit.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

The connection between the communication module Warning
and the 20-mA unit causes a time-out indication.
A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the 20-mA unit for 9 sec.
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the channel function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

With the parameter Port, you define the port connecting the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device.
Parameter: IP address
• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the IP address settings, you set the IP address of the 20-mA unit connected to the communication
module via the TCP protocol. You must assign each 20-mA unit an unambiguous IP address. The IP address to
be set depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts
with other IP addresses in the network. First set an IP address for the 7XV5674 20-mA unit. Then specify the
IP address settings for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the 20-mA Unit

The 7XV5674 20-mA unit is set with a Web browser on the laptop computer via the Ethernet interface of the
laptop computer. Set Modbus TCP as bus protocol/operating mode.
You can find detailed notes on the settings in the 7XV5674 manual that accompanies the 20-mA unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (www.support.industry.siemens.com).
6.6.3.5 20-mA Channel
Logic
[lo_20mcha, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-59 Logic Diagram of the Function 20-mA Channel

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
(1) If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not
displayed.
(2) If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation
ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed.
Measured-Value Calculation
The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the corre-
sponding channel. The 20-mA current measured value is converted into the correct physical quantities such as
temperature or pressure. In each 20-mA functional unit (Ether. and serial) there are always 12 of the 20-mA
channel function blocks, even if fewer channels are connected with the 20-mA unit. The calculated values are
available for further processing via CFC, GOOSE, protocols, and the display image.
Measured-Value Processing
The 20-mA unit typically transmits a value which represents a physical quantity, such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the 20-
mA value. If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range 0 mA to 20 mA. If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the
20-mA unit, the measured value is identified as invalid. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from
a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
[sckanumw-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-60 Settings for Example 1
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 °C and the measured value 20 mA means
a temperature of 100 °C. So enter as Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100. The resolution (decimal
place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolution = 0.1.
[dw_knges3, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-61 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 1)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameters Upper limit and
Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting. The setting of the range for the scaled value corresponds to the useable
range between Lower limit and Upper limit (see following figure).
[sckanumf-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-62 Settings for Example 2
[dw_knges2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-63 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Unit (Example 2)
In this example, the Range active setting is selected. The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA, the setting
Lower limit is at 4 mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit -
Sensor is at -33. If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA, the quality of the scaled
measured value in this example is invalid.
Each 20-mA channel makes available the scaled measured value in the information routing (these are the
temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The 20-mA values can be displayed in the display page and processed with CFC charts.
Error Responses
If the current input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output value is set to
invalid That status for Health and the defect status assume the states displayed in the table.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Error Description Status Health Error Status

The input value lies outside the OK Yes
given limits
Channel not connected OK No
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = °C

With the Unit parameter, you set the physical unit of measurement the measured values. The possible setting
values are listed in the settings table.
Parameter: Conversion factor
• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

With the Conversion factor parameter, you set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Resolution
• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

With the Resolution parameter, you set the resolution of the scaled values.
Parameter: Range active
• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the parameter Range active (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range 0 mA to 20 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to
20 mA.
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Parameter: Upper limitLower limitUpper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
• Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20.000 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4.000 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

If you activate the parameter Range active , the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameter Upper limit -
Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit
setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corre-
sponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of
the 12 channels do not differ.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.6.3.7 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

• W/s
• Wh
_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor

(Type)
General
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O
6.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial
6.6.4.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Serial:
• Provides serial communications with a 20-mA unit via the Modbus protocol and records the values meas-
ured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or
gas pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit

The function 20-mA unit Serial is structured in the same way as the function 20-mA Unit Ether.. The mode of
operation is also identical. The only difference is that the measured values are transferred to the communica-
tion module via a serial connection instead of an Ethernet connection.
You can find more information in Chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = Port J

With the Port parameter, you specify the slot for the communication module that will be used for the
connection with an external 20-mA unit.
Parameter: Channel number
• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number parameter, you
specify the channel number (1 or 2) used to connect the 20-mA unit to the device. The communication
module inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

With the Slave address parameter, you define the device address of the 20-mA unit. If only one 20-mA
unit is connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. Set the same device address as used with
the 20-mA unit. The device address is important for distinguishing several 20-mA units that are connected to a
serial bus. Set an unambiguous device address on every 20-mA unit, for example, 1, 2 and 3 when connecting
3 of the 20-mA units. On every 20-mA unit, set for the Slave address setting in the 3 functions 20-mA
Unit Serial.
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = °C

• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

Parameter: Resolution
• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

With the Resolution parameter, you set the resolution of the scaled values.
• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the Range active parameter (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range 0 mA to 20 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to
20 mA.
If you activate the Range active parameter, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit -
Parameter: Upper limitLower limitUpper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
• Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
If you activate the Range active parameter, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameter Upper limit -
Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit
setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corre-
sponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of
the 12 channels do not differ.
6.6.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 247 1

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

• W/s
• Wh
_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor

(Type)
General
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O
6.6.5 Communication with 20-mA Unit
6.6.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 6-64 shows how to connect the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug
is connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dwve20au-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-64 Connection of the 20-mA Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module must be
inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the CB202
expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[sc20ser3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-65 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the 20-mA unit.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-66 Selecting the SUP Protocol
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the 20-mA unit. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the 20-mA unit. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the
parameter Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
Figure 6-67 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA unit serial 1 (see the
following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc20ser6-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-68 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Serial 1
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
20‑mA unit. This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
For the first use of the 20-mA unit, the following device configuration must be set on the 20-mA unit:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Baud rate: 9600
• Parity: no
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-69 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Device Address
Finally, load the configuration in the device.
6.6.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Device Configuration
In DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 6-70 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_autcp1, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-70 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
Figure 6-71 Activation of the Protocol
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
Figure 6-72 Selection of the Protocol
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the 20-mA unit Ether. 1 function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_20tcp4, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-73 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Ether. 1
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit.
Figure 6-74 Setting the Port and IP Address
6.6.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs
6.6.6.1 Overview
The fast analog measuring-transducer inputs process voltage values (DC -10 V to +10 V) as well as current
values (DC -20 mA to 20 mA).
The function MT fast input:
• Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record (the maximum sampling frequency in 7KE85 is
16 kHz). The recorded sampling frequency results from the setting of the fault-recorder function.
• Calculated measured values from the sampled values. These measured values have been deduced from
the arithmetic mean values. The measuring range for the mean-value calculation is adjustable in the
interval from 10 ms to 100 ms.
• Converts the measured current or voltage values into process values, for example, temperature, gas pres-
sure, etc.
• Provides the recorded process variables for further processing by the fault recorder, the CFC, and in
GOOSE-applications for transmission via communication protocols, and for visualization

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The fast measuring-transducer inputs are located on the IO212 module with 8 inputs (optionally current or
voltage inputs), and the IO210 module with 4 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs).

The function MT fast input works in the function group Analog units and contains the number of available
measuring-transducer inputs, depending on the hardware configuration. You can configure these channels
independently from one another either as current or voltage inputs.
[dw_mu-structure, 1, en_US]

Once you have instantiated the MT fast input function, it will be visible in the project tree in the function
group Analog units. You can find the function group Analog units in DIGSI in the Settings folder.
If you open the subdirectory MT fast input, you reach the setting sheet for the respective input (for more
details, see 6.6.6.4 Application and Setting Notes).
The hardware is designed in such a way that either a current or a voltage can be processed at each input. Use
the corresponding terminals (see Hardware manual). Configure the input in accordance with the selected
connection (Parameter TD input-signal type). With the parameter Measuring window, you set the
measuring range with which the arithmetic mean value is determined. With the parameter Measuring
window, you also determine measurement speed for the input. For example, a setting of 100 ms means that
the measured value is updated every 100 ms.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[scmuio212, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-76 Parameters of the Measuring-Transducer Channels.
The fast measuring-transducer channels can be configured either as current or as voltage inputs. Apart from
this, their function corresponds to the basic function of the 20-mA channels (see chapter 6.6.3.5 20-mA
Channel).
Parameter: TD input-signal type
• Default setting (_:101) TD input-signal type = Current input

With the TD input-signal type parameter, you determine whether the measuring-transducer input
channel works as a Current input or as a Voltage input.
Make sure that the selected channel has also been wired correctly (see Hardware manual, Input and Output
Module IO212).
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:103) Unit = A

Parameter: Measuring window
• Default setting (_:142) Measuring window = 10 ms

With the Measuring window parameter, you set the measuring window that is used to determine the arith-
metic mean value from the sampled values. In case of slowly varying signals, Siemens recommends setting the
top value to 100 ms. With this value, a new, current measured value is provided every 100 ms for further
processing.
• Default setting (_:107) Range active = false

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
If you do not activate the Range active parameter, the function then assumes a range of -20 mA to +20 mA
or -10 V to +10 V. The setting of the range for the scaled value then assumes a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA or -10 V to +10 V.
If you activate the Range active parameter, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit -
Note that this setting is activated by either placing, or not placing the relevant check mark in DIGSI (see
Figure 6-76).
• Default setting (_:104) Conversion factor = 1.00

Parameter: Upper limit, Upper limit - Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor
With the following parameters, you set the scaling of the measuring variables. By that, you can scale in an
application-specific way:
• Default setting Upper limit = 20.00 mA
• Default setting Upper limit - Sensor = 1.00
• Default setting Lower limit = -20.00 mA
• Default setting Lower limit - Sensor = 1.00

With these setting parameters, you set the operating range of the measuring transducer as well as the conver-
sion of the values transmitted to the sensor values. Harmonize the operating range of the measuring trans-
ducer with the transmitter of the sensor. Using the free scalability of the system, you can meet different
requirements. The following figure shows the setting parameters in general terms.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_measured-value-scaling, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-77 Scaling Principle
If you set the lower limiting value to 4.00 mA and the upper limiting value to 20.00 mA, an input current <
2 mA leads to the Broken wire indication. If the input current is > 2.5 mA, the indication Broken wire
drops out.
Setting Example 1:
A measuring transducer transmitting a current signal of 4 mA to 20 mA is used as a transmitter. Currents well
below -25.6 mA or above +25.6 mA indicate a transmitter failure. A sensor detecting a temperature is
attached to the transmitter. The upper value corresponds to 200 °C and the lower value to -100 °C. This results
in the following characteristic. In accordance with the set characteristic curve, the function calculates the
sensor value from the measured current. The coefficients of the linear equation (gradient and foot point) are
calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are determined. A supplied current of 9.333 mA corre-
sponds to a temperature of 0 °C.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_measuring-transducer-characteristic, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-78 Characteristic Curve of Setting Example 1
NOTE
i The hardware of the measuring transducer has been designed in such a way that measured values are
transmitted and analyzed using the setting range (Upper limit orLower limit). Therefore, special
applications are possible, if necessary. The limits are at approx. +20 mA and -20 mA or +10 V and -10 V.
Setting Example 2:
For special applications, the transmitter sends a maximum of ±12 V. This voltage shall be issued accordingly as
sensor voltage.
Set the parameters as follows:
• Upper limit = 10.00 V
• Upper limit - Sensor = 10.00 V
• Lower limit = -10.00 V
• Lower limit - Sensor = -10.00 V

With this setting, a signal of 12 V is issued as a 12-V measured value (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_measuring-transducer-setting, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-79 Parameter Settings and Representation of an Input Signal Greater than 10 V
6.6.6.5 Settings

MT fast #
_:101 MT in #:TD input-signal • Voltage input Current input
type
• Current input

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

_:103 MT in #:Unit • % A
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

_:142 MT in #:Measuring • 10 ms 10 ms
window
• 20 ms
• 40 ms
• 60 ms
• 80 ms
• 100 ms
_:107 MT in #:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
factor
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 m Ato 20.00 mA 5.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
Sensor
_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 m Ato 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
Sensor

(Type)
MT in #
_:307 MT in #:Broken wire SPS O
_:302 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:306 MT in #:TD scale SAV SAV O
6.6.7 RTD Unit Ethernet
6.6.7.1 Overview
The RTD unit Ether. function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the measured
temperatures from the RTD unit
• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature monitoring function
• Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Ether. function can only work in the Analog units function group. A maximum of 20 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured sensor function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_str_fnc, 2, en_US]
6.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit
Logic
[lo_rtdtcp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-81 Logic of the RTD Unit Ether. Function

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Communication with an RTD Unit

The function is used to communicate with an RTD unit connected via an Ethernet connection. If the connec-
tion of the function is successfully established to the external RTD unit via the Ethernet interface, the RTD unit
transmits the temperatures of all connected sensors to the RTD unit Ether. function. For the connection to be
established successfully, specific communication settings must be set, see chapter 6.6.7.4 Application and
Setting Notes.
The RTD unit Ziehl TR1200 IP supports only an Ethernet connection of 10 MBit/s. A direct connection to a 100-
Mbit communication module is therefore not possible. For this reason, you must connect the RTD unit to the
communication module via a 10/100 MBit/s autosensing switch which automatically recognizes the transmis-
sion rates and adapts them accordingly. Further information can be found in the Application and setting
notes, see chapter 6.6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes.
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.

The RTD unit Ether. function cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the RTD unit causes a time-out.
A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the RTD unit for 9 sec.
The Failure signal is issued as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

Use the Port parameter to define over which port the external RTD unit is connected to the SIPROTEC 5
device.
If you want to connect the external RTD unit to the integrated Ethernet interface, set the parameter Port =
Port J. If you want to connect the external RTD unit to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port
= Port F, Port E, Port P, or Port N.
You can connect directly the RTD unit to the device via the internal 10-Mbit Ethernet port J. If you operate the
RTD unit on another port via a 100-Mbit communication module, you need an interconnected 10/100-Mbit
autosensing switch, which adapts transmission rates accordingly.
Parameter: IP address
• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the IP address parameter, you set the IP address of the RTD unit connected to the communication
module via the SUP protocol. Every RTD unit has to be assigned a unique IP address. The IP address to be set
depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts with
other IP addresses in the network. Set an appropriate IP address first at the Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit. Then
specify the IP address parameter for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the RTD Unit

The Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit is set with the front keys or in a Web browser on a laptop computer via its
Ethernet interface. Set the connection type of the sensors (3-wire connection or resistance value for 2-wire
connection), the idle state of the fault-indication relay, as well as the IP interface setting.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The code lock has to be switched off for parameterization. This is only possible using the front keys of the RTD
unit. The code lock is off (switched off) in as-delivered condition and has pin 504.
For detailed information on the settings, refer to the TR1200 IP manual that comes with the RTD unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.siprotec.de) under Accessories ->
7XV5662-xAD.
For an Ethernet connection to a SIPROTEC 5 device communicating with the RTD unit TR1200 IP via the SUP
protocol (Slave Unit Protocol), the Modbus TCP setting must be activated in the RTD unit. You can activate
the Modbus TCP protocol using the function keys under the tcP. → Mod / on menu item or with the Web
browser in the TCP/UDP Config tab. The RTD (RTD protocol) and UDP Port settings have no effect here. The
Modbus TCP port is permanently set to 502 and cannot be changed.
6.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor
Logic
[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-82 Logic Diagram of the Temperature Sensor Function Block
Measured Temperature Value

The Temperature sensor function block processes one single measured temperature value delivered from the
RTD unit for the assigned sensor. 12 temperature sensor function blocks are always available in each RTD unit
function (both via Ethernet and serial), even if fewer sensors are connected to the RTD unit.
Various temperature sensor types are supported: Pt100, Ni100, and Ni120 sensors. The function block is noti-
fied regarding the selection of connected type via the Sensor type parameter.
The function block delivers a measured temperature value in °C or °F as an output variable. The measured
temperature value is available as an operational measured value and can be monitored by the Temperature
supervision function.
Error Responses
If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output measured
temperature value is set to invalid. The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with
the following table:
Table 6-11 Error response
Error Description Health Status Error Status

Sensor or line short circuited Alarm Yes
Sensor or line interrupted Alarm Yes

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Error Description Health Status Error Status

Measured temperature value Alarm Yes
outside the valid measuring range
specified in the technical data. The
valid measuring range depends on
the sensor type.
Sensor not connected OK No
Parameter: Sensor type
• Default setting (_:11611:102) Sensor type = Pt 100

The Sensor type parameter is used to set the sensor element used. You can select between Pt 100, Ni
100 and Ni 120.
Parameter: Temperature unit

To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt the DIGSI user
default settings accordingly.
Proceed as follows:
• In DIGSI select the menu item Extras --> Settings.
• In the Settings view select the menu item DIGSI 5 User preferences.
• Under Standard unit system change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to US
units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-83 Change of the Display Between °C and °F
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
6.6.7.7 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port F port J
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port J
Sensor 1
_:11611:102 Sensor 1:Sensor type • Pt 100 Pt 100
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 2
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 3
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 4
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 5
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 6
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 7
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 8
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 9
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Sensor 10
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 11
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 12
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

(Type)
General
Sensor 1
_:11611:52 Sensor 1:Health ENS O
_:11611:60 Sensor 1:Failure SPS O
_:11611:80 Sensor 1:TmpOut MV O
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
Sensor 4
Sensor 5
Sensor 6
Sensor 7

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

(Type)
Sensor 8
Sensor 9
Sensor 10
Sensor 11
Sensor 12
6.6.8 RTD Unit, Serial
6.6.8.1 Overview
The RTD unit serial function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas-
ured temperatures from the RTD unit
• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature supervision function
• Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Serial function is set up structurally in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether. function. The
mode of operation is also identical (see 6.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit).
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = F

With the Port parameter, you set the slot for the communication module that will be used for the connection
with an external RTD unit.
If you want to connect the external RTD box to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port = Port
F , Port E, Port P, or plug-in module position.
Parameter: Channel number
• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number settings, you set the
channel number (1 or 2) through which the RTD unit is connected to the device. The communication module
inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

Use the Slave address parameter to define the device address of the RTD unit. If only one RTD unit is
connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. The same device address has to be set on the RTD
unit. The device address is important for distinguishing among several RTD units connected to a serial bus. Set
a unique device address (for example 1, 2 and 3 when connecting 3 RTD units) for each RTD unit and the same
device address for the parameter Slave address in the 3 RTD unit serial functions.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
6.6.8.3 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port F port J
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port J
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
Sensor 1
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 2
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 3
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 4
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 5
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Sensor 6
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 7
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 8
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 9
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 10
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 11
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 12
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

(Type)
General
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Sensor 3

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

(Type)
Sensor 4
Sensor 5
Sensor 6
Sensor 7
Sensor 8
Sensor 9
Sensor 10
Sensor 11
Sensor 12
6.6.9 Communication with RTD Unit
6.6.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 6-84 shows how you connect the RTD unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug is
connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-84 Connection of the RTD Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module must be
inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the CB202
expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[scauser3-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-85 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the RTD Unit.
Figure 6-86 Selecting the SUP Protocol

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the RTD box. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings
of the RTD box. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the parameter
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
Figure 6-87 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD unit serial 1 (refer to the
following figure).
[sc_auser6, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-88 Analog-Unit Instance
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
RTD box. This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box (refer to the following figure).
The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the first
time:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Baud rate: 9600
• Parity: no
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-89 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address
6.6.9.2 Integration of an RTD Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP)
Device Configuration
In the DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 6-90 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface port J.
Figure 6-90 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Figure 6-91 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
Figure 6-92 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation (Base Module)
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the RTD unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
[sc_auser6, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-93 Analog Unit Instance
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD unit (refer to the
following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD unit.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Figure 6-94 Setting the Port and IP Address
6.6.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors

Connect a resistor on the sensor terminals of the RTD unit. Using this resistor, simulate a constant tempera-
ture. The resistance value should be around 50 Ω to 200 Ω.
If you want to simulate a changeable temperature, connect an adjustable resistor of maximum 470 Ω instead
of a fixed resistor.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
7 Fault Recorder
7.1 Introduction to DIGSI 5 272

7.2 Function-Group Type Recorder 290
7.3 Function Description Analog and Binary Triggers 323
7.4 Trigger Functions 1-Phase 332
7.5 Trigger Functions 3-Phase 358
7.6 Measurands and Recorder Routing Functions 410

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.1 Introduction to DIGSI 5
7.1.1 General
DIGSI 5 is the engineering and operation tool for all SIPROTEC 5 devices.
DIGSI 5 offers you the following possibilities:
• Create system topology
• Configuring hardware
• Set fault record parameters
• Configure communication networks
• Other tasks
NOTE
i In the following are the most important steps for setting the parameters for your fault recorder. A
detailed description of DIGSI 5 can be found in the DIGSI Online Help.
7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device
Installing Device Driver, Online Help Driver, and Other Drivers

In order to create projects in DIGSI 5 successfully, you must install the device drivers on your PC (available on
the DIGSI 5 DVD and on the Siemens Homepage5).
² During installation select the device driver (for example, Devices_FaultRec_FW-V07.00_CFG-
V07.00_DDD-V07.00.ddd) as well as the driver of the communication protocol (for example, Proto-
cols_CFG-V07.00_DDD-V07.00.ddd).
² Install the driver for online help (for example, Devices_FaultRec_OnlineHelp_de-DE_DDD-V07.00.ddd) in
the language of your choice.
More detailed information regarding the installation of device drivers, the online help driver as well as other
drivers can be found on the DIGSI 5 Help, Chapter Importing device drivers.
Starting DIGSI 5
Proceed as follows to configure your fault recorder:
² Create a new project by clicking in DIGSI 5 on Project --> New.
² Give your project a project name and then click Create.
5 You can find the drivers on www.energy.siemens.com under the keyword Download Area.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_proj7k, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-1 Creating a New Project
² Double-click Add new device.
[sc_ger7ke, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-2 Add New Device
Step 1: Select a Device Type

² If you want to specify the offline configuration with a valid product code, enter the product code of the
device to be configured in this entry field (on this, see A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options).
If you want to configure the project offline, leave the entry field blank.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_pro7ke, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-3 Entering Product Code
² When you have entered a product code, click Check. If the product code is valid, the Select an applica-
tion template list box is activated.
If the product code is invalid, you receive specific error messages. Correct the product code.
When you click Configure, this closes the current dialog and changes to the manual configuration mode.
The Network view is displayed in the operating range.
More details on the product code and on the Configure button is found in the DIGSI Help, Chapter
Adding a new device.
Step 2: Select Device Characteristics

² If the device characteristics are completely specified by the product code, the check box Step 2: Select
device characteristics is dimmed and can not be edited.
You can find more details on this button in the DIGSI Help, Chapter Adding new device.
Step 3: Select an Application Template

You can carry out this step only if you have selected the device type and the device characteristics, if appli-
cable.
² Select the application template you wish to use as a basis for your engineering from the list box.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_app7ke, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-4 Select the Application Template
Step 4: Select the Communication Versions

The check box Step 4: Select the communication versions is dimmed. This selection is intended for future
activations.
You can find more details on this button in the DIGSI Help, Chapter Adding new device.
² To add your new device to the project, finally click OK.
7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in DIGSI 5
After you have added the fault recorder in DIGSI 5, you can set parameters and route signals, indications, trig-
gers, etc.
The sequence of the routing in DIGSI 5 corresponds to the signal flow direction.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_flussr, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-5 Signal Flow Direction in the Fault Recorder
In the following are the most important steps for setting the parameters for your fault recorder. A detailed
description of DIGSI 5 options can be found in the DIGSI Help.
Routing Measuring Points

You can use the Measuring-point routing matrix to route the physical inputs of a SIPROTEC 5 device to the
inputs of current and voltage measuring points.
² Double-click Measuring point routing.
² Finally, click Add. A window for selecting the phase characteristic (3-phase or 1-phase) appears.
² Select both for the current and the voltage measuring points either the 3-phase or 1-phase characteristic.
² Select the connection type.
² Route the phases on the measuring points.
[sc_mes7ke, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-6 Route Measuring Points
Detailed information on the clamp designations, for example 1A, is in the Hardware Manual and in the hard-
ware configuration.
In addition, you can use the Current measuring points and Voltage measuring points window to add other
measuring points to the application.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i An exclamation point appears in the project tree before and during the routing and indicates an inconsis-
tent routing. At the end of an error-free routing, the exclamation point disappears automatically. If the
exclamation point does not automatically disappear, you can remove it by clicking the Check consistency
icon.
[sc_consis, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-7 Checking Consistency
Instantiate Function Groups, Functions, and Function Blocks from the DIGSI 5 Library
² Using Drag & Drop, move the voltage and current function groups from the DIGSI 5 library into the
project tree.
NOTE
i This procedure also applies for the recorder functions Slow-scan recorder and Continuous recorder and
for the measured values Recorder routing with their associated measured value function blocks Routing f,
Routing I, Routing pwr, and Routing V).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_fgan, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-8 Instantiating Function Groups with the Respective Functions

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_rouins, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-9 Instantiating Recorder Routing with the Respective Function Blocks
NOTE
i Use a maximum of 57 characters6 for the channel name. Do not use either umlauts or special characters,
because these prevent healthy export to SICAM PQS and into file formats such as COMTRADE and PQDIF .
The channel name is truncated if the permissible length is exceeded.
Connecting Function Groups

You can use the Function-group connections matrix to edit the connections between the function groups
and measuring points.
² Connect each measuring point with the corresponding function group in the Connecting measuring
points with function group window.
If the cell of the measuring point line and the target column is light gray, then the measuring point is
routed to the column.
If the joint cell is dark gray, the measuring point cannot be routed to the relevant column.
If the cell is red, this indicates an inconsistency. You must route the measuring point to the affected
column.
² Click X (Routed) in the context menu in the red markers.
An X is entered into the cell. The measuring point is not connected to the function group.
6 128 initial characters of the US-ASCII/ANSI character set

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
² Repeat the process for all other measuring points to be connected

As soon as the measuring points are correctly routed, the red markers are hidden. If not, perform a
consistency check.
[sc_fgverb, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-10 Connecting Function Groups
NOTE
i You can route the current measuring points using X (transformer neutral point in the direction of the
object) or using I (transformer neutral point in the opposite direction).
Adjusting Parameters
In order to adjust the parameters, proceed as follows:
² Double-click in DIGSI 5 on Function Settings.
You will see the names of all available function groups.
² Open the function group that contains the required function.
You will see the names of all the functions that this function group contains.
² Double-click the name of the required function.
The parameter view will open in the operating range. This shows the parameters and the preset values of
the selected function.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_fast_sc, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-11 Parameter Setting in the Example of the Fast-Scan Recorder
Ensure that the parameter Mode is activated.
• Default setting (_:2731:1) Mode = on

When using the overlapping parameter Mode, the recorder is activated.
on The recorder is activated.
off The recorder is deactivated in different ways depending on the recorded type:
• The fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder are deactivated.

• The continuous recorder and the trend recorder are deactivated, but continue to record time
jumps, modes on/off, as well as disconnection and recovery of supply voltage.
PQDif recordings are still generated, even though the continuous recorder and the trend
recorder are set to the mode off. It is recommended to delete the instance in case of long-
term non-use.
test The recorder is activated for test purposes. In the test mode, the record is marked using the test
flag (true) (see the following figure).
NOTE
i The test mode is not available for the continuous recorder and the trend recorder and applies only to the
fast-scan and slow-scan recorders.
[sc_testfl, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-12 Fault Record with Activated Marking Test Record (Test Flag)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i The Mode of the individual recorder depends on the settings of the parameter Mode in the higher-level
function General.
The status of the function resulting from the parameter Mode and the superordinate state of the recorder is
shown in the following table.
Table 7-1 Resulting State of the Function (from Connection of Parameter Mode and Superordinate State)
Mode State of the Mode State of the Mode State of the

Recorder Recorder Recorder
General Function On Off Test
(Superordinate State)
Individual recorder On On On Off On Test
Individual recorder Off Off Off Off Off Off
Individual recorder Test Test Test Off Test Test
NOTE
i Every change of a recorder parameter (with the exception of changing the mode and trigger parameters)
results in a restart of the device.
NOTE
i A currently existing trigger violation does not trigger fault records if
• The device is restarted
• The device, the recording, or the mode of the recorder is switched from on to off.
Configuring Trigger Routing

You can route triggers to recorder instances. A trigger can be routed to one or more recorder instances. To
generate a fault record, assign the triggers to the recorders.
² Double-click Recorder interaction in the project tree in DIGSI 5.
² Right-click X (routed).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_trigger, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-13 Trigger Routing in the Recorder Interaction Matrix
Routing the Signals and Indications in the Information Routing

You can find a detailed description of the routings in chapter 7.2.3 Function Description.
² Rout signals, indications, etc. with the Information routing to sources and goals.
The Information routing is a device-oriented tool. A separate Information routing is available for each
offline configuration present in a project.
Routing the Measured Values in the Information Routing

² You can find more information about the measured values that can be routed as well as recommenda-
tions in chapter 7.6.1.2 Using Measurands .
7.1.4 Step 3: Evaluating Recordings
Generating the Record by the Device

The records generated by the fault recorder can be loaded and converted by DIGSI 5 or SICAM PQS. A
maximum of 3 communication connections are possible, irrespective of the type of DIGSI 5 or IEC 61850.
Depending on the recorder, the records are provided in different file formats (see the following table).
Table 7-2 File Formats Used by the Individual Recorders
Interface File Format FSR7 SSR8 CR9 TR10

DIGSI 5 SIPROTEC 5 X X X X
IEC 61850 SIPROTEC 5 X X
7 FSR: Fast-Scan Recorder

8 SSR: Slow-Scan Recorder
9 CR: Continuous recorder
10 TR: Trend recorder

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Interface File Format FSR7 SSR8 CR9 TR10

IEC 61850 COMTRADE 1999 or COMTRADE X X
2013
IEC 61850 PQDIF X X
Displaying the Record in DIGSI 5

Follow the instructions to download the records from the device into DIGSI 5.
² Open your project in the project tree.
² Click Process data (1).
² Click Records (2).
² If needed, double-click Fast-scan and Slow-scan fault records or Continuous records or Trend records
(3).
² In the menu bar, click Read records (4).
Now, the fault recorder downloads the recordings into DIGSI 5.
² You can select the records as desired (5) and download them clicking Download (6).
² With a double click, you can open the record in DIGSI 5 (8) (see also Figure 7-15).
[le_display_DIGSI, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-14 Procedure for Displaying the Record in DIGSI 5
(1) Process data

(2) Records
(3) Fast-scan and slow-scan fault records and trend records
(4) Reading the list of records
(5) Selecting recordings
7 FSR: Fast-Scan Recorder

8 SSR: Slow-Scan Recorder

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
(6) Downloading fault records

(7) Display of the record duration
(8) Double-clicking to open the record
NOTE
i The pre-trigger time is not included in the displayed record duration.
In the following table, the various statuses of the records are displayed.
Table 7-3 Description of the Status of the Records in Logical Sequence
Status Description
New After you click the Read records button, an overview of existing records in the
device is collected and those with the status New are displayed in DIGSI 5.
Download The recording is downloaded into DIGSI 5.
Downloaded The recording has been downloaded to DIGSI 5 and can be opened with SIGRA, for
example.
Deleted from the device The recording has been deleted in the device, but is still stored in DIGSI 5.
[sc_plugin, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-15 Display of the Record in DIGSI 5
NOTE
i To prevent records being lost, they must be stored regularly to DIGSI 5 if the allocated memory area is
exceeded.
Display in SIGRA
To perform additional analyses, open the record in SIGRA. SIGRA offers additional display modes and calcula-
tion methods for evaluating the recordings.
² Click the SIGRA4 button to open the record in SIGRA (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_iconsi, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-16 Procedure to Open a Record in SIGRA from DIGSI 5
[sc_sigras, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-17 Display of a Record in SIGRA
You find detailed information on SIGRA in the SIGRA Manual.
Display in SICAM PQS

² If you have connected a SICAM PQS device with the fault recorder using IEC 61850, you can also read the
recordings in SICAM PQS.
You can find detailed information on SICAM PQS in the SICAM PQS Manual.
7.1.5 Working with IEC 61850
Function Overview of the IEC 61850

IEC 61850 covers the process, field and station level as the station control protocol and defines comprehen-
sively the data exchange between devices within a switchgear. The individual participants communicate
between the levels or per GOOSE on one level.
The GOOSE service enables rapid data exchange between devices and can therefore replace the cross-wiring
between devices by communication connections. In addition IEC 61850 Service, SIPROTEC 5 supports statis-
tical and dynamic reporting. IEC 61850 guarantees the seamless interoperability of devices of various types
and origin.
A detailed description of IEC 61850 can be found in the communication manual SIPROTEC 5 IEC 61850 or in
DIGSI 5 Help.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i The protocols DNP, T103 and T104 are available in DIGSI 5, but they are not supported in the 7KE85 fault
recorder.
Siemens recommends to avoid using these protocols.
Organization of Continuous Data in PQDIF Format

The data of the continuous recorder and the trend recorder is stored in 10-minute or 2-hour intervals. Time
jumps can shorten or extend the intervals. When the date changes, these individual files of the previous day
are stored and combined into a single file. That is to say, that all 10-minute intervals, 144 files will be replaced
by a single file and all 2-hour intervals, 12 files will be replaced by a single file.
The PQDIF files will be filed according to the following nomenclature:
• Subdirectory: Identification of the continuous recorder and the recorder ID: /Cont_PQDif_fffe
• ID of the recording (for example, /00000001)
• ID of the recorder (for example, fffe)
• Date Year/Month/Day: YYYYMMTT (for example, 20130814)
• Time of the recording hour/minute/second: hhmmss (for example, 211016)

Example of a PQDIF file path: /Cont_PQDif_fffe/00000001_fffe_20130814_211016.pqd

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[le_IEC_Browser, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-18 Organization of PQDIF Files
(1) Recording of the current day

(2) Recording of the oldest day
(3) One file per recording day
NOTE
i In order to establish and display the file date, the device-internal UTC time is used.
NOTE
i In the mode off , the continuous recorder and the trend recorder no longer record any measured values,
but continue to record device statuses (time jumps, modes on/off, as well as disconnection and recovery
of the supply voltage).
PQDif recordings are still generated, even though the continuous recorder and the trend recorder are set to
the mode off. It is recommended to delete the instance in case of long-term non-use.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Organization of the Fast and Slow-Scan Records

Fast and slow-scan records are available via IEC 61850 in SIPROTEC format and COMTRADE format.
You can find the description of the different file formats in chapter 7.1.4 Step 3: Evaluating Recordings.
Description of the IEC 61850 Browser

The IEC 61850 Browser is a PC program that allows the IEC 61850 structure of a device to be displayed online.
It is supplied together with DIGSI 5 and during commissioning provides important information about the IEC
61850 structure of the device. The IEC 61850 browser displays datasets configured in the device, for example,
for static reports or GOOSE messages, as well as the data objects they contain.
You can find a detailed description of the IEC 61850 browser in the Communication Manual SIPROTEC 5 IEC
61850.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.2 Function-Group Type Recorder
7.2.1 Overview
The fault recorder has a flash memory in which records can be saved. The recording documents operations
within the power system and how devices respond to them. You can read out records from the device and
analyze them using analysis programs such as SIGRA or SICAM PQS/SICAM PQ Analyzer.
The Recorder function group consists of the following functionalities:
• General function block
• Fast-scan recorder function
• Slow-scan recorder function
• Continuous recorder function
• Trend recorder function

The following figure shows the structure of the Recorder function group and its link to other function groups.
[dw_fg_7ke8, 4, en_US]
Figure 7-19 Structure of the Recorder Function Group
The Recorder function group is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You can
individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5.
Interfaces with Measuring Points

The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points.
If you are using an application template, the Voltage/current 1-phase function group is connected to the
measuring points 1-phase voltage and 1-phase current and the Voltage/current 3-phase function group is
connected to the measuring points 3-phase voltage and the 3-phase current, since these connections are

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
required. It can be necessary to connect additional measuring points to the function group, depending on the
nature of the user functions used. The configuration is done via the Function group connections editor in
DIGSI 5.
For more detailed information on this, refer to chapter 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.
The function groups 3-phase voltage, Voltage/current 1-phase, and Voltage/current 3-phase have the
following interfaces to the measuring points:
• 3-phase voltage
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system, these are, for example, VA, VB, VC.
• Voltage/current 1-phase and Voltage/current 3-phase

The measurands from the 1-phase or the 3-phase voltage and current system are supplied via these inter-
faces. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided via these interfaces.
• Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)

The measurands from the PMU are supplied via this interface.
Power-System Data and Function Groups and Functions that cannot be Configured
The power-system data and the PMU function group are visible, but cannot be changed.
Input and Output Signals

Recordings are started on the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders if a trigger criterion is satisfied or a control
input is activated.
The fault recorder makes different input signals available, with which recordings can be specifically started
and deleted. The output signals provide information about the function status.
In the following table you can find input signals of the fault-recording functions:
Name Type Description
Control: Start record SPC Start of a recording preferably via IEC 61850
The set pre and post-trigger time are taken into
account.
Control: >External start SPS Start of a recording preferably via a binary input or a
logic block chart.
The set pre and post-trigger time are taken into
account.
Control: >Manual start SPS Start of a recording with fixed time (Manual
record time parameter), preferably using a func-
tion key
In the following table you can find output signals of the fault-recording functions:
Name Type Description
General: Mode (controllable) ENC Status feedback of the fault recording according to
General: Behavior ENS Chapter 2.3 Function Control
General: Health ENS
Control: Fault number INS Indication of the error number for current fault
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running
Control: Record made SPS End of recording

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Configuration of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5
• In the Information routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals to LEDs and
output contacts. For this open in the project tree.
• Click with the right mouse button on the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or
binary output column in the routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:
Table 7-4 Overview of Routing Options
Routing Options LED BI11 BO12 FK13 Description

(unrouted) X X X X The signal is not routed.
X (routed) X The signal is routed.
H Active with X There is a voltage applied at the routed binary input
voltage
L Active without X X There is no voltage applied at the routed binary input
voltage
V Unlatched X X The signal is routed as unsaved. Activation and reset of the output
(LED, BO) occurs automatically via the binary-signal value.
G Latched X X The binary signal is latched when the output (LED, binary output) is
activated. To reset, a targeted confirmation must occur.
V Toggle X With this routing option, the trigger rises with the first operational
handling (LED on). When the function key is activated again, the
trigger clears (LED off).
This setting applies for the controllable Start record and binary
inputs>External start and >Manual start.
P (Trigger pulse) X With this routing option, the trigger rises and clears. The LED display
illuminates approx. 200 ms.
This setting applies for the binary inputs >External start and
>Manual start.
This routing option is practical for a routing of the function key to
>Manual start.
On On X This setting applies only for the controllable Start record.
Off Off X This setting applies only for the controllable Start record.
11 Binary input
12 Binary output
13 Function key

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_trigra, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-20 Routing of the Signals in the Information Routing
7.2.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings
The following figure shows the memory splitting of the different recorders and the general settings of the FG
Recorder.
[sc_recorder general, 5, en_US]
Figure 7-21 Function Group Recording – General Settings
Parameter: Scaling COMTRADE
• Default setting (_:2701:175) Scaling COMTRADE = Secondary values

With the parameter Scaling COMTRADE, you scale the fault-record data for the COMTRADE format. Possible
setting values are Primary values or Secondary values.
Parameter: COMTRADE revision year
• Default setting (_:2701:176) COMTRADE revision year = COMTRADE 1999

With the parameter COMTRADE revision year, you select the version of the IEEE standard for the
COMTRADE format. Possible setting values are COMTRADE 1999 or COMTRADE 2013.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Memory Splitting
The maximum flash-memory size of the recorder is 15 GB.
With the parameter Flash-memory size, you change the flash-memory size of each individual recorder.
More than 1000 recordings can be stored, depending on the flash-memory size.
NOTE
i The sum of the individual memory sizes must not exceed the maximum flash-memory size. If, when setting
the parameters of the individual recorders, the maximum memory size has been reached or exceeded, a
warning indication is displayed in DIGSI 5.
Figure 7-22 Change of the Flash-Memory Size in the Example of the Fast-Scan Recorder
NOTE
i Due to the internal administration data, the complete flash-memory size for the storing of recordings is not
available. The Estimated record size is user information in order to be able to estimate how many
recordings can be stored in the reserved flash memory. The actual size of the fault record depends on the
degree of compression and the number of stored events.
7.2.5 Settings

General
_:2701:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:2701:101 General:Flash memory 0.000 GB to 15.000 GB 0.000 GB
total
_:2701:162 General:Fast-scan 0.000 GB to 15.000 GB 0.000 GB
recorder

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:2701:163 General:1st Slow-scan 0.000 GB to 15.000 GB 0.000 GB
recorder
_:2701:165 General:1st Continuous 0.000 GB to 15.000 GB 0.000 GB
recorder
_:2701:170 General:1st trend 0.000 GB to 15.000 GB 0.000 GB
recorder
_:2701:175 General:Scaling • Primary values Secondary
COMTRADE values
• Secondary values
_:2701:176 General:COMTRADE revi- • COMTRADE 1999 COMTRADE
sion year 1999
• COMTRADE 2013

(Type)
Binary IO
_:2701:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
Binary IO
_:1681:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:1681:2731:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:1681:2731:53 General:Health ENS O
Binary IO
_:1681:10741:300 Fst-scan rec.1:Start record SPC C
_:1681:10741:502 Fst-scan rec.1:>External start SPS I
_:1681:10741:503 Fst-scan rec.1:>Manual start SPS I
_:1681:10741:310 Fst-scan rec.1:Fault number INS O
_:1681:10741:311 Fst-scan rec.1:Recording started SPS O
_:1681:10741:314 Fst-scan rec.1:Record made SPS O
_:1681:10741:322 Fst-scan rec.1:Recorder formatted SPS O
7.2.7 Time Jumps
Time jumps can happen in a fault record for the following reasons:
• When the clock time is changed manually
• When the clock is corrected by an external time synchronizing device (see Date and Time Synchroniza-
tion).
Time jumps shorter than 50 ms are automatically compensated and are not visible in recordings. Time jumps
higher than 50 ms are identified in recordings using a marking line TJ14.
14 (TJ = Time jump)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.2.8 Fast-Scan Recorder
7.2.8.1 Overview of Functions

The Fast-scan recorder records individual current and voltage sampled values at a sampling rate that is high
enough for the display of network events and transients.
The fast-scan recorder records at least 1 s up to a maximum of 90 seconds. The sampled values (SAV) are
always routed automatically to the Fast-scan recorder.
The fault record generated contains the following information:
• Pre-trigger time
• Trigger point
• Fault Recording
• Trigger end mark (if a falling trigger is detected)
• Post-trigger time (if a falling trigger is detected)

In addition, the cause that trips the trigger is saved.

The function Fast-scan recorder is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the Recorder function group,
the Fast -scan recorder can only be operated once.
[dw_fast7k, 1, en_US]
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the method of function of the fast-scan recorder.
[lo_fastsc, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-24 Logic Diagram of the Fast-Scan Recorder Function

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
The function Fast-scan recorder records the following data:
• Sampled values (SAV) of all analog inputs
• Measured values calculated internally
• Binary signals
The sampling frequency is a maximum of 16 kHz. This corresponds to 320 sampled values per nominal period
at 50 Hz and 266 sampled values at 60 Hz. Binary changes are recorded at a sampling rate of 4 kHz and a
resolution of 1 ms.
The flash memory of the device is automatically updated for every recording. If the flash memory is full, the
oldest recording is automatically overwritten when the device records a new fault record.
The pre-trigger and post-trigger time is set for all recorders. The recording starts as soon as the recorder is
triggered. The trip signal (trigger cause) can be again inactive during the recording (trigger clears). In this
case, the fault record is limited by the set parameters of the post-trigger time.
Four (4) different possible triggers are available for the fast-scan recorder:
• Trigger from trigger routing
• Manual trigger start
• External trigger start
• Triggers on indications
• Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable ( Start record )

You will find additional information about the Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable in the chapters
7.3.3.4 Trigger Start Using Logic Block Chart and 7.3.3.3 GOOSE Trigger .
NOTE
i For all trigger types except >Manual start , the parameters Pre-trigger time , Post-trigger
time and Maximum record time apply.
For the trigger type >Manual start the parameter Manual record time applies.
Manual Start
Routing of the binary input >Manual start leads to a recording of fixed length. The length is set based on
the parameter Manual record time .
Triggering from Trigger Routing/External Start/Trigger on Indications/Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable
With the routing of the binary input >External start, recording is performed as long as the signal is
present and the Post-trigger time is running. The running record ends as soon as the parameters
Post-trigger time or Maximum record time have reached the set values.
Mode
The fast-scan recorder operates only if Mode is set to on .
The recording is ended if Mode is set to off during the recording.
Recording Finished/Error Number

After the recording, the indication Record made remains active for 2 s. The signal Fault number incre-
ments by 1 after each recording.
Retrigger Blocking Time

The retrigger blocking time can be activated separately for each triggered recorder. The retrigger blocking
time prevents retriggerings that lead either to a fault-record extension or to another recording.
The retrigger blocking time is started separately for each trigger source that is routed to a recorder.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Ring-Buffer Mode
While making a record on the flash memory, the device can determine whether the free space assigned to the
recorder in the recorder partition is too small. As a result of this, as many old records as needed are deleted –
starting with the oldest record – for the complete storage of the current recording. Deleting occurs even if the
record to be deleted is being read at the same moment by DIGSI 5 or a higher control level. In this case, trans-
mission is canceled.
Disconnection and Recovery of Supply Voltage
NOTE
i If the supply voltage is disconnected during a recording, this record will not be lost. The record truncated
by the disconnected supply voltage can be read out after the supply voltage is recovered.
Parameters of the Fast-Scan Recorder Function

The parameters of the fast-scan recorder are shown in the following figure.
Figure 7-25 Settings for the Fast-Scan Recorder (as an Example)
The procedure is described in chapter 7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device and in
the DIGSI Help.
Parameter: Flash-Memory Size
• Default setting (_:10741:161) Flash-memory size = 4000 MB

With the parameter Flash-memory size you specify a maximum memory capacity of the fast-scan recorder
on the mass storage.
If the flash memory becomes full while recording new fault records, the device automatically deletes the
oldest file to be able to continue recording (ring buffer).
The maximum number of storable fault records is limited only by the set flash-memory size and the size of the
individual fault records.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i If you change the capacity of the recorder or delete a recorder instance, the flash memory of the device is
re-organized and all recordings of the device – not just those of the changed recorder – are automatically
and irrevocably deleted.
Before this, save your recordings by exporting them manually in DIGSI 5 or archiving them in SICAM PQS.
Then, delete your recordings in DIGSI 5 to avoid inconsistencies between new and old recordings.
NOTE
i The setting aid Estimated record size is dimmed and thus, you cannot set or change it.
Keep in mind that the estimation refers to typical sinusoidal signals and that the size of a fault record can
increase in the event of distorted signals.
NOTE
i Due to the internal administration data, the complete flash-memory size for the storing of recordings is not
available. The Estimated record size is user information in order to be able to estimate how many
recordings can be stored in the reserved flash memory. The actual size of the fault record depends on the
degree of compression and the number of stored events.
Parameter: Maximum Record Time
• Default setting (_:10741:111) Maximum record time = 3.0 s

With the Maximum record time setting, you configure the maximum record time for a recording. When the
time configured expires, an ongoing fault recording is canceled. This parameter merely limits the duration of
the fault recording.
The maximum record duration includes the pre-trigger time.
NOTE
i The parameter Maximum record time does not apply to fault records which are tripped by manual trig-
gers (>Manual start). For these fault records, the parameter Manual record time applies.
Parameter: Pre-Trigger Time
• Default setting (_:10741:112) Pre-trigger time = 0.1 s

With the Pre-trigger time parameter, you configure the pre-trigger time for an individual fault recording.
The pre-trigger time defines that time before a trigger event.
NOTE
i The Pre-trigger time may be a maximum of 10 % of the Post-trigger time as otherwise, the
DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Parameter: Post-Trigger Time
• Default setting (_:10741:113) Post-trigger time = 1.0 s

With the Post-trigger time parameter, you configure the post-trigger time for an individual fault
recording. The post-trigger time defines that time after dropout of the trigger event.
Parameter: Manual Record Time
• Default setting (_:10741:116) Manual record time = 1.0 s

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
The parameter Manual record time determines the length of a recording if the fault recording is activated
dynamically (edge-controlled) via a separately configured input signal >Manual start.
NOTE
i The pre-trigger time, the post-trigger time, and the maximum record time have no effect in this case.
Parameter: Sampling Frequency
• Default setting (_:10741:140) Sampling frequency = 16 kHz

With the Sampling frequency parameter, you define the sampling frequency of the fault recording.
Possible setting values are 16 kHz, 8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz, and 1 kHz.
The setting value has no influence on calculated measured values.
Parameter: Retrigger Blocking Time
• Default setting (_:10741:166) Retrigger blocking time = 1.0 s

With the Retrigger blocking time parameter, a fault-record extension is prevented by repetitively
occurring identical trigger events. If another trigger is tripped during a recording, the post-trigger time is
restarted and the recording is extended. To prevent this, a retrigger blocking time can be defined. Identical
triggers, which come during the retrigger blocking time, are ignored and do not lead to an extension.
NOTE
i If you set the parameter of the retrigger blocking time longer that the record time, no trigger events are
recorded within this time!
7.2.8.5 Settings

General
• on
• test
Control
_:10741:161 Fst-scan rec.1:Flash- 0.200 GB to 15.000 GB 4.000 GB
memory size
_:10741:102 Fst-scan rec.1:Estimated 0.000 MB to 200.000 MB 0.000 MB
record size
_:10741:111 Fst-scan rec.1:Maximum 1.0 s to 90.0 s 3.0 s
record time
_:10741:112 Fst-scan rec.1:Pre-trigger 0.0 s to 3.0 s 0.1 s
time
_:10741:113 Fst-scan rec.1:Post- 1.0 s to 90.0 s 1.0 s
trigger time
_:10741:116 Fst-scan rec.1:Manual 1.0 s to 90.0 s 1.0 s
record time

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:10741:140 Fst-scan rec.1:Sampling • 16 kHz 16 kHz
frequency
• 8 kHz
• 4 kHz
• 2 kHz
• 1 kHz
_:10741:166 Fst-scan rec.1:Retrigger 0.0 s to 3600.0 s 1.0 s
blocking time

(Type)
Binary IO
_:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) C
_:2731:52 General:Behavior O
_:2731:53 General:Health O
Binary IO
_:10741:300 Fst-scan rec.1:Start record C
_:10741:502 Fst-scan rec.1:>External start I
_:10741:503 Fst-scan rec.1:>Manual start I
_:10741:310 Fst-scan rec.1:Fault number O
_:10741:311 Fst-scan rec.1:Recording started O
_:10741:314 Fst-scan rec.1:Record made O
_:10741:322 Fst-scan rec.1:Recorder formatted O
7.2.9 Slow-Scan Recorder

The Slow-scan recorder is, just like the Fast-scan recorder, a triggered recorder. It records measured values
with the set averaging time. SPS indications can still be recorded. Longer record times are possible using the
Slow-scan recorder.
The fault record generated contains the following information:
• Trigger point
• Fault recording
• Trigger end mark (if a falling trigger is detected)
• Post-trigger time (if a falling trigger is detected)

In addition, the cause that trips the trigger is saved.

The function Slow-scan recorder is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the Recorder function group,
the Slow-scan recorder can be operated at a maximum of 2 times.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_slow7k, 3, en_US]
Logic
The following logic diagram shows how the slow-scan recorder functions.
[lo_slow_scan, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-27 Logic Diagram of the Slow-Scan Recorder Function
The slow-scan recorder can record fault records up to a length of 90 min. Measured values are acquired based
on half periods and averaged over a configurable averaging time. The averaging time can be set from 1 period
to 3000 periods. Binary changes are recorded at a sampling rate of 4 kHz and a resolution of 1 ms.
The flash memory of the device is automatically updated for every recording. If the flash memory is full, the
oldest recording is automatically overwritten when the device records a new fault record.
The pre-trigger and post-trigger time is set for all recorders. The recording starts as soon as the recorder is
triggered. The trip signal (trigger cause) can be again inactive during the recording (trigger clears). In this
case, the fault record is limited by the set parameters of the post-trigger time.
4 different possible triggers are available for the slow-scan recorder:
• Trigger from trigger routing
• Manual trigger start
• External trigger start
• Triggers on indications
• Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable (Start record)

You can find additional information about the Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable in 7.3.3.4 Trigger
Start Using Logic Block Chart and 7.3.3.3 GOOSE Trigger .

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i Consider that the maximum record duration and the post-trigger time at high averaging times can be
shorter than expected, since these parameters act as a multiple of the averaging time.
EXAMPLE
Averaging time: 3000 periods (equal to 60 s)
Maximum record duration: 200 s
Resulting fault record length: 180 s
NOTE
i For all trigger types except >Manual start , the parameters Pre-trigger time, Post-trigger
time and Maximum record time apply.
For the trigger type >Manual start the parameter Manual record time applies.
Manual Start
Routing of the binary input >Manual start leads to a recording of fixed length. The length is set based on
the parameter Manual record time.
Triggering from Trigger Routing/External Start/Trigger on Indications/Trigger via IEC 61850 Controllable
With the routing of the binary input >External start, recording is performed as long as the signal is
present and the Post-trigger time is running. The running record ends as soon as the parameters
Post-trigger time or Maximum record time has reached the set values.
Mode
The recorder operates only if the Mode is set to on.
The recording is ended if Mode is set to off during the recording.
Recording Finished/Error Number

After the recording, the indication Record made remains active for 2 s. The signal Fault number incre-
ments by 1 after each recording.

The retrigger blocking time can be activated separately for each triggered recorder. The retrigger blocking
time prevents retriggerings that lead either to a fault-record extension or to another recording.
The retrigger blocking time is started separately for each trigger source that is routed to a recorder.
Ring-Buffer Mode
While making a record on the flash memory, the device can determine whether the free space assigned to the
recorder in the recorder partition is too small. As a result of this, as many old records as needed are deleted –
starting with the oldest record – for the complete storage of the current recording. Deleting occurs even if the
record to be deleted is being read at the same moment by DIGSI 5 or a higher control level. In this case, trans-
mission is canceled.
NOTE
i If the supply voltage is disconnected during a recording, this record will not be lost. The record truncated
by the disconnected supply voltage can be read out after the supply voltage is recovered.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Parameter of the Slow-Scan Recorder Function
[sc_slow-scan, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-28 Settings Group of the Slow-Scan Recorder
The procedure is described in 7.1.2 Step 1: Creating a New Project and Adding a New Device and in the DIGSI
Help.
• Default setting(_:10081:161) Flash-memory size = 1500 MB

With the Flash-memory size parameter, you specify a maximum memory size of the slow-scan recorder on
the mass storage.
oldest file to be able to continue recording (ring buffer).
The maximum number of storable fault records is limited by the set flash-memory size and the size of the indi-
vidual fault records.
NOTE
i If you change the flash-memory size of the recorder, the flash memory of the device is reorganized. Mean-
while, all recordings (not just those of the changed recorder) of the device are automatically and irrevo-
cably deleted.
Therefore, before changing the flash-memory size, save your recordings by exporting them manually in
DIGSI 5 or archiving them in SICAM PQS. Then, delete your recordings in DIGSI 5 to avoid inconsistencies
between new and old recordings.
NOTE
i The setting aid Estimated record size is dimmed and thus, you cannot set or change it.
The estimation refers to typical sinusoidal signals and the size of a slow-scan record can increase if there
are distorted signals.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i Due to the internal administration data, you cannot use all the flash memory to store the records. The
parameter Estimated record size provides information that helps to estimate how many records can
be stored in the reserved flash memory. The actual size of a continuous record depends on the degree of
the compression and the number of stored events.
Parameter: Maximum Record Time
• Default setting (_:10081:111) Maximum record time = 2 min

With the Maximum record time parameter, you set the maximum record time for an individual fault
recording. When the time configured expires, an ongoing fault recording is canceled. This parameter merely
limits the duration of the fault recording.
The maximum record duration includes the pre-trigger time.
Parameter: Pre-Trigger Time
• Default setting (_:10081:112) Pre-trigger time = 5.0 s

With the Pre-trigger time parameter, you configure the pre-trigger time for an individual fault recording.
The pre-trigger time defines that time before a trigger event.
NOTE
i The Pre-trigger time must be a maximum of 10 % of the Post-trigger time, as otherwise, DIGSI
5 reports an inconsistency.
Parameter: Post-Trigger Time
• Default setting (_:10081:113) Post-trigger time = 1 min

With the Post-trigger time parameter, you configure the post-trigger time for an individual fault
recording. The post-trigger time defines that time after dropout of the trigger event.
Parameter: Manual Record Time
• Default setting (_:10081:116) Manual record time = 1 min

The fault recording can be activated dynamically (edge-controlled) via a separately configured input signal
>Manual start. In this case, the parameter Manual record time determines the length of the
recording.
NOTE
i The pre-trigger time, the post-trigger time, and the maximum record time have no effect in this case.
Parameter: Averaging Time
• Default setting (_:10081:140) Averaging time = 1 cycle

With the Averaging time parameter, you determine the number of periods for which an average value is
generated and stored in the memory.
The average value is always formed over the entire averaging time.
NOTE
i The actual record time can differ from the configured record time since the actual record time is deter-
mined by the configured averaging time. The longer the averaging time, the larger the deviation can be.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i If a fault record is recorded with a slow-scan recorder over a long averaging time, brief trigger events are
detected. But the detected trigger events are not visible in the fault record.
NOTE
i The complex types (CMV) can be routed in the slow-scan recorder.

The angles are not determined but rather used at the end of the averaging time with the current value.
Parameter: Retrigger Blocking Time
• Default setting (_:10081:166) Retrigger blocking time = 1 min

With the Retrigger blocking time parameter, a fault-record extension is prevented by repetitively
occurring identical trigger events. If another trigger is tripped during a recording, the post-trigger time is
restarted and the recording is extended. To prevent the retrigger, a retrigger blocking time can be defined.
Identical triggers, which come during the retrigger blocking time, are ignored and do not lead to an extension.
All other active channels can retrigger the fault recorder and thus extend the recording.
NOTE
i If you set the parameter of the retrigger blocking time longer that the record time, no trigger events are
recorded within this time!
7.2.9.5 Settings

General
• on
• test
Control
_:10081:161 Slow-scan 1:Flash-memory 0.200 GB to 14.800 GB 1.500 GB
size
_:10081:102 Slow-scan 1:Estimated 0 KB to 200000 KB 48 KB
record size
_:10081:111 Slow-scan 1:Maximum 1 min to 90 min 2 min
record time
_:10081:112 Slow-scan 1:Pre-trigger 0 s to 90 s 5s
time
_:10081:113 Slow-scan 1:Post-trigger 1 min to 90 min 1 min
time
_:10081:116 Slow-scan 1:Manual record 1 min to 90 min 1 min
time
_:10081:140 Slow-scan 1:Averaging time 1 cycles to 3000 cycles 1 cycles
_:10081:166 Slow-scan 1:Retrigger 0 min to 240 min 1 min
blocking time

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

(Type)
Binary IO
_:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) C
_:2731:52 General:Behavior O
_:2731:53 General:Health O
Binary IO
_:10081:300 Slow-scan 1:Start record C
_:10081:502 Slow-scan 1:>External start I
_:10081:503 Slow-scan 1:>Manual start I
_:10081:310 Slow-scan 1:Fault number O
_:10081:311 Slow-scan 1:Recording started O
_:10081:314 Slow-scan 1:Record made O
_:10081:322 Slow-scan 1:Recorder formatted O
7.2.10 Continuous Recorder

Continuous recorders are used for data acquisition of the measured values over a longer time range. Thus,
long-time analysis of the power-system behavior can be performed. The continuous recorder forms the arith-
metic mean value over the averaging time.

The function Continuous recorder is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the Recorder function group,
the Continuous recorder can be operated a maximum of 5 times.
[dw_cont7k, 3, en_US]

The continuous recorder is not a triggered recorder, runs constantly and has large averaging times. The
continuous recorder saves the arithmetic mean value of the following process quantities:
• Power
• Frequency
• RMS values of the fundamental component of currents, voltages, and symmetric components
During parameterization, specify a maximum storage capacity for the recordings. The continuous recorder is
organized as a ring buffer. When the memory is filled completely, the oldest data are overwritten automati-
cally.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Mode
The continuous recorder operates only if the parameter Mode is set to on.
The recording is interrupted if the parameter Mode is set to off during the recording. Recording starts again if
the parameter Mode is set again to on.
NOTE
i In the mode off, the continuous recorder no longer records any measured values, but continues to record
the following device statuses:
• Time jumps
• Mode on/off
• Disconnection and recovery of the supply voltage

PQDIF recordings are still generated, even though the continuous recorder is set to the mode off.
If the recorder instance is not used for a longer time, Siemens recommends deleting it.
Averaging of the Continuous Recorder

If the parameter Averaging time is configured to 600 s or 900 s, the data are made available cyclically
after 2 hours. At this setting, the time frame is defined in 2-hour cycles. That is, the activation occurs at 00:00,
02:00, 04:00 UTC, etc. If the averaging time is less than 600 s, the cycle time is 10 minutes.
NOTE
i If you route harmonics or interharmonics to a continuous recorder, the Averaging time is limited.
For storage capacity reasons, set the parameter Averaging time to only 600 s or 900 s. Other setting
values result in an inconsistency indication.
Ring-Buffer Mode
With the continuous recorder, data are stored on the flash memory in blocks. With an averaging time up to
and including 300 seconds, these blocks cover a time span of 10 minutes. With longer averaging times, the
blocks cover a time span of 2 hours. When recording a record, if the device determines that the free space
remaining on the record partition is too small, the oldest data block is deleted automatically. During this
process, complete time segments in the specified grid are always lost.
NOTE
i If the supply voltage of the device is disconnected intentionally or by mistake, measuring gaps appear for
the period of the disconnection. However, the recorded data remains stored and can be read after recovery
of the supply voltage.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Parameters of the Continuous Recorder Function
[sc_contiu, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-30 Parameters of the Continuous Recorder (as an Example)
the DIGSI Help.
Parameter: Flash-memory size
• Recommended setting value (_:10111:161) Flash-memory size = 1000 MB

With the parameter Flash-memory size, you specify a maximum storage capacity of the continuous
recorder on the mass storage.
oldest data to continue recording (ring buffer).
The record time is limited by the set flash memory size, number of routed tracks and by the averaging time.
NOTE
i If you change the flash-memory size of the recorder, the flash memory of the device is reorganized. Mean-
while, all recordings (not just those of the changed recorder) of the device are automatically and irrevo-
cably deleted.
Therefore, before changing the flash-memory size, save your recordings by exporting them manually in
DIGSI 5 or archiving them in SICAM PQS. Then, delete your recordings in DIGSI 5 to avoid inconsistencies
between new and old recordings.
NOTE
i The setting aid Estimated record time is dimmed and thus, you cannot set or change it.
NOTE
i Due to the internal administration data, you cannot use all the flash memory to store the records. The
Estimated record time provides information that helps to estimate how many records can be stored
in the reserved flash memory. The actual size of a continuous record depends on the degree of the
compression and the number of stored events.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Parameter: Averaging time
• Recommended setting value (_:10111:112) Averaging time = 600 s

With the parameter Averaging time, you determine the time range over which an average value is formed
and stored in the flash memory.
The average value is always formed over the entire averaging time.
NOTE
i The angles are not determined but rather used at the end of the averaging time with the current value.
7.2.10.5 Settings

General
• on
Control
_:10111:161 Continuous 1:Flash- 0.200 GB to 14.800 GB 1.000 GB
memory size
_:10111:102 Continuous 1:Estimated 0.0 day(s) to 214748364.7 0.0 day(s)
record time day(s)
_:10111:112 Continuous 1:Averaging • 1s 600 s
time
• 2s
• 3s
• 5s
• 10 s
• 30 s
• 60 s
• 120 s
• 150 s
• 300 s
• 600 s
• 900 s

(Type)
Binary IO
Binary IO
_:10111:322 Continuous 1:Recorder formatted SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.2.11 Trend Recorder

Trend recorders are used for long-term recording and monitoring the process of voltage change within toler-
ance ranges that can be set using parameters. The flicker measurement can also be determined and stored in
the trend recorder.

The Trend recorder function is not preconfigured at the factory. Within the Recorder function group, the
Trend recorder can be operated a maximum of 2 times.
[dw_trend7k, 1, en_US]

The trend recorder ensures capture and long-term supervision of frequency and voltage when the voltage and
frequency change. If a change occurs in the measurand with respect to the last captured RMS value during the
parameterized measuring interval, and this change exceeds the set tolerance range, the new RMS value is
recorded.
[dw_trend_def, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-32 Operation of the Trend Recorder, Voltage Interruption
For the parameterization, specify a maximum memory capacity for the storage of recordings. The trend
recorder is organized as a ring buffer. When the memory is filled completely, the oldest data are overwritten
automatically.
Mode
The trend recorder operates only if the Mode is set to on .
Recording is interrupted if Mode is set to off during recording. Recording starts again if Mode is set again to
on .

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i In the mode off , the continuous recorder no longer records any measured values, but continues to record
device statuses (time jumps, modes on/off, as well as disconnection and recovery of the supply voltage).
PQDif recordings are still generated, even though the trend recorder is set to the mode off. It is recom-
mended to delete the recorder instance in case of long-term non-use.
Ring-Buffer Mode
With the trend recorder, data is stored on the flash memory in blocks. The new data of the last 10-minute
interval are available every 10 minutes. If, while recording of a record, the device determines that the free
space remaining on the recorder partition is too small, the oldest data block is erased automatically. During
this process, complete time segments in the specified grid are always lost.
NOTE
i If the supply voltage of the device is disconnected intentionally or by mistake, measuring gaps will appear
for the period of the disconnection. However, the recorded data remains stored and can be read after
recovery of the supply voltage.
Settings of the Trend-Recorder Function
[sc_trend, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-33 Settings of the Trend Recorder
the DIGSI Help.
• Recommended setting value (_:10111:161) Flash-memory size = 1000 MB

With the parameter Flash-memory size, you specify a maximum memory capacity of the trend recorder on
the mass storage.
oldest data in order to continue recording (ring buffer).
The record time is limited by the set flash-memory size and the number of events occurring.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i If you change the capacity of the recorder or delete a recorder instance, the flash memory of the device is
reorganized and all recordings of the device – not just those of the changed recorder – are automatically
and irrevocably deleted.
Before this, save your recordings by exporting them manually in DIGSI 5 or archiving them in SICAM PQS.
Then, delete your recordings in DIGSI 5 to avoid inconsistencies between new and old recordings.
You can find the description for routing the measurand in chapter 7.6.1.2 Using Measurands .
You can find the description on setting the tolerances (frequency and voltage) in the chapters 7.6.2.4 Applica-
tion and Setting Notes and 7.6.4.3 Application and Setting Notes.
7.2.11.5 Settings

General
• on
Control
_:15361:161 Trend 1:Flash-memory 0.200 GB to 14.800 GB 1.000 GB
size

(Type)
Binary IO
Binary IO
_:15361:322 Trend 1:Recorder formatted SPS O
7.2.12 Sequence of Events

The sequence of events is described in more detail in Chapter 3.1.5.4 Sequence of Events Log.
7.2.13 Flow Control of Fault Records (Fast-Scan and Slow-Scan Recorder)
7.2.13.1 Function Description of the Retrigger Blocking Time
General
You can make the following settings in the fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder:
• Post-trigger time
• Maximum record time
• Retrigger Blocking Time
• Manual record time

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
You can find detailed information about the settings in chapters 7.2.8.1 Overview of Functions and
7.2.9.1 Overview of Functions .
There are more settings required in the recorders in addition to the settings for the time flows of the trigger,
for example memory used.
You can find more detailed information on this in chapter 7.2.8.3 Function Description .

The retrigger blocking time prevents a fault-record extension with repetitively occurring identical trigger
events. If another trigger is tripped during a recording, the post-trigger time is restarted and the recording is
extended. To prevent this, a retrigger blocking time can be defined. Identical triggers, which come during the
retrigger blocking time, are ignored and do not lead to an extension.
The retrigger blocking time is started together with the incoming trigger and is channel-specific. If the triggers
repeat, the retrigger blocking time is restarted.
NOTE
i If you configure the setting of the retrigger blocking time to be longer that the record time, no trigger
events are recorded within this time!
7.2.13.2 Triggering Without the Retrigger Blocking Time
Trigger with Pre-Trigger and Post-Trigger Times
[dw_trig01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-34 Trigger with Pre-Trigger and Post-Trigger Times
a Trigger rising edge

b Trigger falling edge
c End of recording
t Time line
When a trigger event occurs, the start trigger (a) trips a fault record.
The first part of the recording records the signal profile before the trigger event (Pre-trigger time). After-
wards, the fault (a) to (b) is recorded. To evaluate the signal behavior even after the failure, the further signal
profile up to the end of the post-trigger time (c) is registered.
Trigger with Maximum Record Time

The maximum record time is used for the limit of the fault-record length.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dwtrig02, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-35 Trigger with Pre-trigger Time and Maximum Recording Time

c End of recording
t Time line
The first part of the recording of the fault record captures the signal profile before the trigger event (Pre-
trigger time). Afterwards the recording of the trigger events (a) to (b) is done. By setting the maximum
record time, the trigger event cannot be completely recorded and the maximum record time (c) ends the
recording.
The configured post-trigger time is disregarded in this case.
Trigger with Post-Trigger Time and Maximum Record Time

The maximum record time is used for the limit of the fault-record length. The recording is ended before
reaching the maximum record time when the post-trigger time expires.
Figure 7-36 Trigger with Pre-Trigger Time, Post-Trigger Time, and Maximum Record Time


C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
c End of recording of the 1st post-trigger time

d End of recording of the 2nd post-trigger time
e Maximum record time
t Time line
The trigger event is not recorded. The second trigger event extends the recording.
The recording is ended when the post-trigger time expires.
7.2.13.3 Triggering With the Retrigger Blocking Time
Other Triggers During the Retrigger Blocking Time

The figure below shows that the second trigger does not extend the recording.
[dw_triwei, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-37 Other Triggers During the Retrigger Blocking Time
a Trigger rising edge: Start of the recording of the pre-trigger time and the retrigger blocking time
b Trigger falling edge: Start of the post-trigger time
c End of the retrigger blocking time
d End of recording
t Time line
The trigger event does not extend the recording due to the retrigger blocking time.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Trigger with Ineffective Retrigger Blocking Time
Figure 7-38 Trigger with Pre-Trigger Time, Post-Trigger Time, Maximum Record Time, and Ineffective
a Trigger rising edge: Start of the recording of the pre-trigger time and the retrigger blocking time,
as well as with the 1st trigger event start of the maximum record time
b Trigger falling edge: Start of the post-trigger time
d End of the post-trigger time
e End of the maximum record time
t Time line
The retrigger blocking time is ineffective with both trigger events because the duration of the failure is longer
than the configured retrigger blocking time.
Trigger events can result in a recording or in extending the recording. After expiration of this post-trigger time,
the recording continues, because the 2nd trigger event is already detected and recorded.
The configured maximum record time has no influence on the recording because it is longer than all profiles.
Repeated Triggers
To avoid repeated triggers of the device due to limit violations within the shortest time, you can configure a
retrigger block.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_trigka, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-39 Example 1: Repeated Triggers in the Same Channel
c End of the repeated retrigger blocking time
d End of the maximum record time
t Time line
When a trigger event occurs, the start trigger (a) trips a fault record. The recording is done in the same way as
in the previous example.
If another limit violation of the same channel (d) occurs within the retrigger blocking time, this does not
extend the fault record but rather only restarts the channel-specific retrigger blocking time.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_trigwi, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-40 Example 2: Triggers in 2 Channels
c End of the retrigger blocking time, channel 1
d End of the retrigger blocking time, channel 2
e End of the post-trigger time
f End of the maximum record time
t Time line
When a trigger event occurs, the start trigger (a) trips a fault record. Another limit violation of the second
channel occurs within the retrigger blocking time of the first channel (c). This extends the fault record (e)
because the retrigger block acts only on the appropriate channel.
Each individual channel can trip a retrigger. The retrigger blocking time can be activated separately for each
analog input.
Retrigger Blocking Time with Trigger Reason

Each threshold (Max. trigger, Min. trigger, dM/dt rise (/Filter time) or dM/dt drop (/
Filter time)) of a channel has its own retrigger blocking time. That is, for example, one Min. trigger
can extend the recording started by the Max. trigger once (see the figure below).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_mintri, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-41 A New Trigger Reason (Min. Trigger) Extends the Fault Record

c End of the retrigger blocking time (Max. trigger)
d End of the retrigger blocking time (Min. trigger)
t Time line
If the identical trigger reason (for example, Iph rms: C) occurs again during the retrigger blocking time, the
retrigger blocking time restarts. The fault record is not extended. A new recording is only possible once a
trigger occurs outside the expired retrigger blocking time (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_maxtri, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-42 The Fault Record is not Extended with the Same Trigger Reason and Within a Retrigger
Blocking Time

d End of the newly started retrigger blocking time
g Start of a new recording
t Time line
All other active channels can retrigger the fault recorder and thus extend the recording.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
i • A shortened record results when the device is in the ramp-up phase, a trigger occurs and the pre-
trigger time buffer is not filled by this.
• If the device is in the ramp-up phase and a failure has already occurred, the trigger is ignored.
• If a time jump occurs during the pre-trigger time and before triggering, the recorded pre-trigger time
is reduced to the time interval between the time jump and the trigger time.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.3 Function Description Analog and Binary Triggers
The fast-scan and slow-scan recorders have analog and binary triggers.
Each analog trigger can be configured as primary, secondary, or percentage value, relative to the rated value,
and switched into the mode ON, OFF, or Test.
Fault records generated in test mode are marked with the Test (Test flag) identifier.
Many trigger combinations can be implemented using a CFC chart. To do this, various indications in CFC
blocks are processed into one CFC output signal that can then, for example, be routed to the External Start.
Analog Triggers
Table 7-5 Description of Analog Triggers
Analog Triggers Description

Frequency trigger 1-phase (Also see 7.4.3.1 Overview of Functions)
Frequency trigger 3-phase (Also see 7.5.3.1 Overview of Functions)
Voltage trigger 1-phase (Also see 7.4.1.1 Overview of Functions)
Voltage trigger 3-phase (Also see 7.5.1.1 Overview of Functions )
Current trigger 1-phase (Also see 7.4.2.1 Overview of Functions)
Current trigger 3-phase (Also see 7.5.2.1 Overview of Functions )
Power trigger 1-phase (Also see 7.4.4.1 Overview of Functions)
Power trigger 3-phase (Also see 7.5.4.1 Overview of Functions)
In these function blocks, level triggers (Min/Max) and gradient trigger (dM/dt) can be configured.
Binary Triggers
Table 7-6 Using Binary Triggers
Binary Triggers Use

Manual start Function key (via >Manual start)
Binary inputs Via >External start
GOOSE trigger Via >External start
CFC trigger Via >External start
Manual start and External start are each described in the chapters 7.3.3.1 Manual Trigger Start and
7.3.3.2 External Trigger Start .
Manual start and External start are 2 inputs on each recorder that can be used to start recording. The func-
tion is identical for both triggers. Manual Start is primarily used during commissioning and maintenance.
External Start is of universal use.
7.3.2 Function Description Analog Trigger
7.3.2.1 Structure of the Analog Trigger

There are 4 trigger functions available in the fault recorder:
• Frequency trigger 1-phase (also see 7.4.3.1 Overview of Functions)
• Frequency trigger 3-phase (also see 7.5.3.1 Overview of Functions)
• Voltage trigger 1-phase (also see 7.4.1.1 Overview of Functions)
• Voltage trigger 3-phase (also see 7.5.1.1 Overview of Functions )

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
• Current trigger 1-phase (also see 7.4.2.1 Overview of Functions)
• Current trigger 3-phase (also see 7.5.2.1 Overview of Functions )
• Power trigger 1-phase (also see 7.4.4.1 Overview of Functions)
• Power trigger 3-phase (also see 7.5.4.1 Overview of Functions)
[dw_fnreco, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-43 Structure of the Trigger Functions
7.3.2.2 Trigger Functions of the Analog Trigger

For a trigger detection, the trigger blocks compare the applied actual value (measured value) with the config-
ured trigger criteria (threshold values). The appropriate trigger starts a fault record in the fast-scan and/or
slow-scan recorder with the detection of a trigger criterion (exceeding or dropping below a set parameter
threshold value). The threshold values are checked on a half-period cycle for all measured values.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
You can set different threshold values and record-time settings for the fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan
recorder. The duration of the fault recording depends on the configured record times (pre-trigger time, post-
trigger time, maximum record time). The duration can be extended by repeatedly exceeding or dropping
below the threshold value within the record time (retriggering).
The fault record is ended after reaching the maximum record time in any case.
7.3.2.3 Level Trigger

Triggering occurs as soon as the measurands exceed (Max. trigger) or drop below (Min. trigger) the
corresponding limiting value. The max level trigger is available for all measurands. The min level trigger
cannot be selected for negative-sequence and zero-sequence systems.
Hysteresis
If a measurand reaches precisely the magnitude of the maximum or minimum limiting value for level triggers
without hysteresis with slight fluctuations, there are repeated, undesirable fault recordings or undesirable
extended recordings due to retriggering. For this reason, hysteresis is permanently set for all level trigger vari-
ables. This hysteresis is 0.2 % for frequency triggers and usually 2 % of the configured threshold value for all
other trigger variables in each channel. The hysteresis is permanently set for very small threshold values.
After the limiting value is exceeded or dropped below, the signal must have left the hysteresis range. Only
afterwards can triggering again take place with a repeated exceeding or dropping below a limiting value.
[dw_hyst01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-44 Hysteresis
• Start: At this time, a threshold-value violation is detected.
• End: At this time, a detected threshold-value violation is canceled.
7.3.2.4 Gradient Trigger (dM/dt)

The gradient of a signal is the level change over time. The gradient-trigger condition complies with alternating
variables when the difference of 2 measured values is greater than the configured threshold in the interval of
the configured filter time. Differentiation is made between an increasing gradient (dM/dt rise) and a
decreasing gradient (dM/dt drop).
The gradient trigger cannot be selected for negative-sequence or zero-sequence systems.
The figure below shows a typical profile of the power frequency.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_grad01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-45 dM/dt
dM Change of the measurand

dt Change of the filter time
7.3.3 Function Description Binary Trigger
7.3.3.1 Manual Trigger Start

The fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder can be manually triggered.
They can trigger the start of the recording as follows:
• Manually by the fault recorder (function key on the operation panel)
• Via DIGSI 5
• Via any IEC 61850 client (e.g., SICAM PQS with IEC 61850)
NOTE
i The manual trigger is started by pressing the function keys routed to the >Manual start. In the applica-
tion templates, Function key 1 is the default for the fast-scan recorder and Function key 2 is the default
for the slow-scan recorder (see Figure 7-49).
The record time depends on the configured value Manual record time for the manual trigger start.
Manual Start of the Trigger with Information Routing

For the fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder, you route the manual trigger start in the Information
routing in the matrix row >Manual start to the inputs that can be assigned binary signals.
[sc_mantrm, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-46 Routing the Manual Trigger Start

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
If you want to manually start the recording using a function key, you can assign the keys with S (switchover)
or P (trigger pulse).
Siemens recommends to preferably use the setting P (trigger pulse), also see 7.2.3 Function Description).
Recording is started by pressing the routed function key on the operation panel and the activated recorder
records the current signal profile.
EXAMPLE of Setting the Manual Trigger
• Open the information routing
• Open the function group Recording-> Function Fast-scan recorder.-> Function block Fst-scan rec..
Route the signal >Manual start.
• For example, set the trigger pulse (P) in the tab Function keys to the function key F1. Then route the
signals Recording started and Recording ended to LED1 and LED2.
This is already the default in the application template.
[sc_handdi, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-47 Routing the Signal >Manual Start
The assignments for the function key and the LEDs are completed with these steps.
• The signal Recording started lights up as long as the recording is running.

The signal Recording finished lights briefly after the recording is finished.
Manual Trigger Tripping by DIGSI 5

You can start the manual trigger tripping from the DIGSI 5 interface by proceeding as follows in your project:
• Place the mouse cursor on your project and right-click Connect with Device.
• Next, go to the project tree and open the Online access tab.
• Click 7KE85 (assigned).
• Click Fast and slow-scan fault records.
• In the menu bar, click Start fault records.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
• A dialog window opens: Select the relevant fault records (Fast Scan, Slow Scan).
• The fault records can now be displayed in SIGRA.
[sc_mantrd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-48 Manual Trigger Tripping via DIGSI 5
Manual Trigger Start via IEC 61850 Clients

The manual triggering of a fault record is possible from all connected IEC 61850 clients, e.g., SICAM PQS.
Information on this can be found in the manual of the appropriate device.
Changing the Function-Key Names in DIGSI 5

In the application templates, the manual trigger is the default on Function key 1 for the fast-scan recorder
and Function key 2 for the slow-scan recorder.
On the display in the device, Man. start fast-scan appears for F1 and Man. start slow-scan1 for F2.
If the signals for the function keys are re-routed, we recommend changing the names.
You can change the name of the manual trigger in DIGSI 5 using the following procedure:
• Open your project in the project tree.
• Double-click Hardware and protocols.
• Click at the top right on the large device display.
• Then click at the bottom on Properties, next on the function key of your choice and change the name.
[sc_fnkeys, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-49 Procedure When Changing the Function-Key Names

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
You can find more information on the default setting of function keys in the application templates in chapter
4.2 Application Template and Functional Scope of the Fault Recorder.
7.3.3.2 External Trigger Start

An external start (>External start) of the fault recording is possible for the fast-scan recorder and the slow-
scan recorder. The record time is made up of the pre-trigger time, the trigger time and the post-trigger time.
The recording is limited by the maximum record time (the same as with analog trigger).
NOTE
i Only one routing is possible to the external start, that is:
• Either one binary input
• Or one CFC output
• Or one function key
External Start of the Trigger with Information Routing

For the fast-scan recorder and the slow-scan recorder, you route the manual trigger start in the Information
routing in the matrix row >Manual start to the inputs that can be assigned binary signals.
[sc_exttri, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-50 Routing the External Trigger Start
Route the external trigger start according to the same principle as the manual trigger (refer to 7.3.3.1 Manual
Trigger Start).
If you want to manual start the recording via a binary input, you can assign the inputs with either H (active
with voltage) or with L (active without voltage).
In the Information routing the indication on the tripping of the external trigger can be routed to a binary
output or an LED (refer to 7.2.3 Function Description).
The external start is also required for triggering via a CFC chart (see 7.3.3.4 Trigger Start Using Logic Block
Chart).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.3.3.3 GOOSE Trigger

To start a fault record in the fast-scan recorder or in the slow-scan recorder, the status of the binary variables
and the analog values in the GOOSE message can be used as the trigger condition. You may connect each IEC
GOOSE data type in a CFC chart to one trigger source. You can select the indications and their trigger condi-
tions on the basis of the imported SCD file (see IEC61850 Communication Protocol Manual).
For the GOOSE trigger, you preferably use the Boolean data type.
So that the indication can, for example, be routed to >External start, the GOOSE input must be routed via a
logic block chart (refer to the DIGSI 5 manual and following chapter).
7.3.3.4 Trigger Start Using Logic Block Chart

This function enables a modular, flexible combination of the trigger criteria. The following inputs and outputs
are supported:
• Single-point and double-point indications
• Analog values (absolute values or phases)
• Boolean signals
• GOOSE messages
The creation of CFC charts is described in detail in the DIGSI 5 manual. The CFC chart can be created in the
project tree under Plans.
The trigger, that you select, for example, for the external or manual start of the fault record in the logic block
chart must in all cases be an AND operation.
[sc_cfctri, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-51 Example of a Logic Block Chart with AND Operation Trigger for External Start of the Fault
Record.
NOTE
i If you have AND operation signals in the logic block chart, then avoid a single interconnection of these
signals in the Trigger routing, because this will remove this AND-operation.
7.3.3.5 Triggers on Indications

In the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders, it is possible to trigger on SPS indications and to record them.
The following routing options are available in the information routing:
Routing Symbol Description
X The SPS indication is only routed.
T Triggering is done on the SPS indication.
XT Triggering is done on the SPS indication. The SPS indication is also recorded.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
For triggering on binary inputs, the following procedure is recommended:
• Open the DIGSI library.
• Instantiate a user-defined function group.
• Then add a user-defined function block to the user-defined function group.
• Open the User-defined signals folder and add an SPS indication to the user-defined function block.
• Open the information routing.
• Route the SPS indication to a binary input by selecting the routing option H. The SPS signal is thereby
routed as active with voltage.
• Move the menu bar from left to right and route the SPS indication to the recorder as desired.
[sc_trig_dev_ind, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-52 Procedure: Trigger on SPS Indication

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.4 Trigger Functions 1-Phase
7.4.1 Voltage Trigger

Voltage triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger) in
the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders. It is triggered by fundamental values, RMS values, or on symmetrical
components.

The Voltage trigger function can be configured in the Voltage/current 1-phase function group. The structure
of the Voltage trigger function is shown in the following figure:
[dw_voltage trigger 1-phase, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-53 Structure/Embedding of the Function Voltage Trigger
A maximum of 3 function blocks of the same type can be entered or removed within the function. In order to
distinguish the function blocks, they automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the function
block, for example, Trig V fund. 1, Trig V fund. 2, and Trig V fund. 3.
Each function block contains the level triggers Max. trigger and Min. trigger, as well as the gradient
triggers dM/dt rise (/Filter time) and dM/dt drop active of the corresponding measurand.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating principle of a voltage trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_voltage trigger, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-54 Logic Diagram of a Voltage Trigger
The function Voltage Trigger is subdivided into Level and Gradient trigger.
The Level trigger monitors the measurand for minimum and maximum limit violations. The Gradient trigger
monitors the positive slope (increasing) and the negative slope (decreasing) of the measurand for a limit viola-
tion. The gradient is formed based on the set filtering time.
A hysteresis of 2 % of the setting value is preset for the level and gradient triggers. This is equal to 0.980 p.u.
for the max. and gradient trigger and 1.020 p.u. for the Min. trigger.
Exceeding or dropping below one of the set threshold values leads to trigger tripping. The trigger tripping is
however first effective on the recorders, if you have routed the trigger to the recorder.
Function Blocks
Function blocks of the Voltage trigger function:
• Trig V Fund.: Setting of the trigger for the fundamental-component value of the measured voltage
• Trig V RMS: Setting the trigger for the RMS value of the measured voltage
NOTE
i The thresholds can be set in the primary, secondary, and percentage view. All subsequent setting values
are shown in the secondary view.
Mode
The trigger is switched on, off, or in test mode. In test mode, the fault records are marked with a test flag.
You can find more detailed information on the mode in 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in
DIGSI 5.
Switching on Trigger Max./Trigger Min.

With the parameters Max. trigger active and Min. trigger active, you define whether the respec-
tive level trigger is active or inactive.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Trigger Max. / Trigger Min.

With the parameters Max. trigger and Min. trigger, you define from which threshold value the acti-
vated level trigger starts a fault record.
Switch on dM/dt Rise - dM/dt Drop

With the dM/dt rise active and dM/dt drop active parameters, you define whether the respective
gradient trigger is active or inactive.
Filtering Time
With the Filter time parameter, you define the number of periods with which the gradient is determined.
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Voltage

With the parameters dM/dt rise (/Filter time) and dM/dt drop (/Filter time), you define
from which threshold value within the set filtering time a fault record is started.
7.4.1.4 Application and Setting Notes Trig V RMS (RMS Value)
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:9601:1) Mode = off

With the Mode parameter, you activate the trigger for normal operation (On) or the test mode (Test).
on The function block Trig. V RMS is activated and the RMS value of the
voltage will be monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameter.
off The function block Trig. V RMS is deactivated.
test The function block Trig. V RMS is activated for test purposes.
Parameter: Max. Trigger Active/Max. Trigger/Max. Trigger Hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9601:101) Max. trigger active = yes
• Default setting (_:9601:105) Max. trigger = 120.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:113) Max. trigger hysteresis = 0.980 p.u.

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS value
of the voltage and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The RMS value of the voltage is monitored for overvoltage.
no The RMS value of the voltage is not monitored for overvoltage.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.980 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter Max. trigger and can
be adjusted.
Parameter: Min. Trigger Active/Min. Trigger/Min. Trigger Hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9601:102) Min. trigger active = yes
• Default setting (_:9601:106) Min. trigger = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:114) Min. trigger hysteresis = 1.020 p.u.

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS value
of the voltage and to prevent it from dropping below the set value.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

yes The RMS value of the voltage is monitored for undervoltage.
no The RMS value of the voltage is not monitored for undervoltage.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 1.020 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter Min. trigger and can
be adjusted.
Parameter: dM/dt Rise Active - dM/dt Rise (/Filter Time) - dM/dt Rise Hysteresis - Filter Time
• Default setting (_:9601:103) dM/dt rise active = no
• Default setting (_:9601:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:115) dM/dt rise hysteresis = 0.980 p.u.
• Default setting (_:9601:112) Filter time = 2 periods

With the dM/dt rise active parameter, you activate the gradient trigger in order to monitor the positive
gradients of the RMS value of the voltage using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is not monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.980 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter dM/dt rise (/Filter
time) and can be adjusted.
Parameter: dM/dt Drop Active - dM/dt Drop (/Filter Time) - dM/dt Drop Hysteresis - Filter Time
• Default setting (_:9601:104) dM/dt drop active = no
• Default setting (_:9601:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:116) dM/dt drop hysteresis = 0.980 p.u.

With the dM/dt drop active parameter, you activate the gradient trigger in order to monitor the negative
gradients of the RMS value of the voltage using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is not monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.980 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter dM/dt drop (/Filter
7.4.1.5 Application and Setting Notes Trig V Fund (Fundamental Component)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block Trig V Fund. is activated and the fundamental compo-
nent is monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameter.
off The function block Trig V Fund. is deactivated.
test The function block Trig V Fund. is activated for test purposes.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage of
the fundamental component and prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The voltage of the fundamental component is monitored for overvoltage.
no The voltage of the fundamental component is not monitored for over-
voltage.
be adjusted.

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage of
the fundamental component for dropping below the set values.
yes The voltage of the fundamental component is monitored for undervoltage.
no The voltage of the fundamental component is not monitored for under-
voltage.
be adjusted.

gradients of the voltage of the fundamental component using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is not
monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

gradients of the voltage of the fundamental component using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is
monitored.
no The negative gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is not
monitored.
7.4.1.6 Settings

Trig. V RMS 1
_:9601:1 Trig. V RMS 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9601:101 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:9601:105 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
trigger
_:9601:113 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9601:102 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:9601:106 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
trigger
_:9601:114 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9601:103 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:9601:107 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt rise 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(/Filter time)
_:9601:115 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9601:104 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active
• yes
_:9601:108 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt drop 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(/Filter time)
_:9601:116 Trig. V RMS 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9601:112 Trig. V RMS 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trig. V fund 1
_:9571:1 Trig. V fund 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9571:101 Trig. V fund 1:Max. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:9571:105 Trig. V fund 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
trigger
_:9571:113 Trig. V fund 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9571:102 Trig. V fund 1:Min. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:9571:106 Trig. V fund 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
trigger
_:9571:114 Trig. V fund 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9571:103 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:9571:107 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt rise 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(/Filter time)
_:9571:115 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9571:104 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt • no no
drop active
• yes
_:9571:108 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
drop (/Filter time)
_:9571:116 Trig. V fund 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
drop hysteresis
_:9571:112 Trig. V fund 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles

(Type)
Trig. V RMS 1
_:9601:54 Trig. V RMS 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9601:52 Trig. V RMS 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9601:53 Trig. V RMS 1:Health ENS O
_:9601:301 Trig. V RMS 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trig. V fund 1
_:9571:54 Trig. V fund 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9571:52 Trig. V fund 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9571:53 Trig. V fund 1:Health ENS O
_:9571:301 Trig. V fund 1:Trigger active SPS O
7.4.2 Current Trigger

Current triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger) in
components.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

The Current trigger function can be configured in the Voltage/current 1-phase function group. The structure
of the Current trigger function is shown in the following figure:
[dw_current trigger 1-phase, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-55 Structure/Embedding of the Function Current Trigger
A maximum of 3 function blocks of the same type can be entered or removed within the function. For unam-
biguous differentiation the function blocks automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the func-
tion block, for example, Trig I RMS 1, Trig I RMS 2, and Trig I RMS 3.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating principle of the current trigger.
[dw_lotrii, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-56 Logic Diagrams of the Current Trigger
The function Current trigger is subdivided intoLevel and Gradient trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
for the max. and gradient trigger and to 1.020 p.u. for the Min. trigger.
however effective on the recorders only if you have routed the trigger to the recorder.
NOTE
i The threshold values can be set in the primary, secondary, and percentage view. All subsequent setting
values are shown in the secondary view.
Function Blocks
Function blocks of the Current trigger function:
• Trig. I Fund.: Setting of the trigger for the fundamental-component value of the measured current
• Trig. I RMS: Setting of the trigger for the RMS value of the measured current
NOTE
Mode
You can find more information on the mode in 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in DIGSI 5.
Max. Trigger Active/Min. Trigger Active

Max. Trigger/Min. Trigger

dM/dt Rise Active – dM/dt Drop Active

With the parameters dM/dt rise active and dM/dt drop active, you define whether the respective
Filter Time
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Current

from which threshold value the parameterized filtering time starts a fault record.
7.4.2.4 Application and Setting Notes I RMS Trig
Parameter: Mode

With the Mode parameter, you activate the trigger for normal operation (On) or for the test mode (Test).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

on The function block I RMS Trig is activated and the RMS value of the current
is monitored according to the set trigger parameter.
off The function block I RMS Trig is deactivated.
test The function block I RMS Trig is activated for test purposes.
• Default setting (_:9781:105) Max. trigger = 1.200 A

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS value
of the current and to prevent exceeding the set values..
yes The RMS value of the current is monitored for overcurrent.
no The RMS value of the current is not monitored for overcurrent.
The hysteresis is preset the factory to 0.980 p.u. of the parameterMax. trigger and can be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9781:106) Min. trigger = 0.800 A

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS value
of the current and to prevent it from dropping below the set values.
yes The RMS value of the current is monitored for undercurrent.
no The RMS value of the current is not monitored for undercurrent.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9781:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 0.300 A

gradients of the RMS value of the current, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the RMS value of the current is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the RMS value of the current is not monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Parameter: dM/dt Drop Active - dM/dt Drop (/Filter Time) - Filter Time
• Default setting (_:9781:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 0.300 A

gradients of the RMS value of the current, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the RMS value of the current is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the RMS value of the current is not monitored.
7.4.2.5 Application and Setting Notes I Fund. Trig
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting Mode = off

on The function block Trig. I fund. is activated and the fundamental compo-
nent monitored according to the set trigger parameters.
off The function block Trig. I fund. is deactivated.
test The function block Trig. I fund. is activated for test purposes.

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current
of the fundamental component and prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The current of the fundamental component is monitored for overcurrent.
no The current of the fundamental component is not monitored for overcur-
rent.
be adjusted.

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current of
the fundamental component and prevent it from dropping below the set values.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

yes The current of the fundamental component is monitored for undercurrent.
no The current of the fundamental component is not monitored for undercur-
rent.
be adjusted.

gradients of the current of the fundamental component, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the current of the fundamental component is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the current of the fundamental component is not
monitored.

gradients of the current of the fundamental component, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the current of the fundamental component is
monitored.
no The negative gradient of the current of the fundamental component is not
monitored.
7.4.2.6 Settings

Trig. I RMS 1
_:9781:1 Trig. I RMS 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9781:101 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. • no yes
trigger active
• yes

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9781:105 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
trigger 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9781:113 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9781:102 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:9781:106 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9781:114 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. trigger 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9781:103 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:9781:107 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt rise (/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9781:115 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9781:104 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active
• yes
_:9781:108 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt drop 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
(/Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9781:116 Trig. I RMS 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9781:112 Trig. I RMS 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trig. I fund 1
_:9751:1 Trig. I fund 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9751:101 Trig. I fund 1:Max. • no yes
trigger active
• yes

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9751:105 Trig. I fund 1:Max. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9751:113 Trig. I fund 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9751:102 Trig. I fund 1:Min. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:9751:106 Trig. I fund 1:Min. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9751:114 Trig. I fund 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9751:103 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:9751:107 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt rise 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9751:115 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9751:104 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active
• yes
_:9751:108 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt drop 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9751:116 Trig. I fund 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9751:112 Trig. I fund 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles

(Type)
Trig. I RMS 1
_:9781:54 Trig. I RMS 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9781:52 Trig. I RMS 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9781:53 Trig. I RMS 1:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

(Type)
_:9781:301 Trig. I RMS 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trig. I fund 1
_:9751:54 Trig. I fund 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9751:52 Trig. I fund 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9751:53 Trig. I fund 1:Health ENS O
_:9751:301 Trig. I fund 1:Trigger active SPS O
7.4.3 Frequency Trigger

Frequency triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger)
in the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders. It is triggered on the power frequency.

The Frequency trigger function can be configured in the Voltage/current 1-phase function group.
The structure of the function Frequency trigger is shown in the following figure:
[dw_frequency trigger 1-phase, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-57 Structure/Embedding of the Function Frequency Trigger
biguous differentiation, the function blocks automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the
function block, for example, Frq. Trigger 1, Frq. Trigger 2, Frq. Trigger 3.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating principle of the frequency trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_lotrif, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-58 Logic Diagram of the Frequency Trigger
The function Frequency trigger is subdivided intoLevel and Gradient trigger.

A hysteresis of 0.2 % of the setting value is preset for the level and gradient triggers. This is equal to
0.998 p.u. for the max. and gradient trigger and to 1.002 p.u. for the Min. trigger.
Exceeding or dropping below one of the set threshold value leads to trigger tripping. The trigger tripping is
however effective on the recorders only if you have routed the trigger on the recorder.
Function Block
The Frequency trigger contains the function block Frq. Trigger 1, with which you can set the trigger for
monitoring the power frequency.
NOTE
Mode
DIGSI 5.
Max. Trigger Active/Min. Trigger Active

With the parameters Max. trigger active and Min. trigger active, you can define whether the
respective level trigger is active or inactive.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Max. Trigger/Min. Trigger

With the parameters Max. trigger and Min. trigger, you can define from which threshold value the
activated level trigger starts a fault record.
dM/dt Rise Active - dM/dt Drop Active

With the parameters dM/dt rise active and dM/dt drop active, you can define whether the respec-
tive gradient trigger is active or inactive.
Filter Time
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Power Frequency
7.4.3.4 Application and Setting Notes - Frequency Trigger
Parameter: Mode

on Function block Trigger f is activated and the power frequency monitored
according to the set trigger parameters.
off Function block Trigger f is deactivated.
test Function block Trigger f is activated for test purposes.
• Default setting (_:9721:102) Max. trigger = 50.200 Hz

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the power
frequency and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The power frequency is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The power frequency is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.998 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter Max. trigger and can
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9721:104) Min. trigger = 49.600 Hz

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the power
frequency and prevent it from dropping below the set value.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

yes The power frequency is monitored for dropping below the set value.
no The power frequency is not monitored for dropping below the set value.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 1.002 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter Min. trigger and can
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9721:106) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 0.100 Hz

gradients of the sum apparent power using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the power frequency is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the power frequency is not monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.998 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter dM/dt rise (/
Filter time) and can be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9721:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 0.100 Hz

gradients of the power frequency using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the power frequency is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the power frequency is not monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.998 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter dM/dt drop (/
7.4.3.5 Settings

Trigger f 1
_:9721:1 Trigger f 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9721:101 Trigger f 1:Max. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:9721:102 Trigger f 1:Max. trigger 50.000 Hz to 60.000 Hz 50.200 Hz
_:9721:113 Trigger f 1:Max. trigger 0.990 p.u. to 0.999 p.u. 0.998 p.u.
hysteresis

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9721:103 Trigger f 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:9721:104 Trigger f 1:Min. trigger 25.000 Hz to 50.000 Hz 49.600 Hz
_:9721:114 Trigger f 1:Min. trigger 1.001 p.u. to 1.010 p.u. 1.002 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:105 Trigger f 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:9721:106 Trigger f 1:dM/dt rise (/ 0.005 Hz to 60.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Filter time)
_:9721:115 Trigger f 1:dM/dt rise 0.990 p.u. to 0.999 p.u. 0.998 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:107 Trigger f 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active
• yes
_:9721:108 Trigger f 1:dM/dt drop (/ 0.005 Hz to 60.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Filter time)
_:9721:116 Trigger f 1:dM/dt drop 0.990 p.u. to 0.999 p.u. 0.998 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:112 Trigger f 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles

(Type)
Trigger f 1
_:9721:54 Trigger f 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9721:52 Trigger f 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9721:53 Trigger f 1:Health ENS O
_:9721:301 Trigger f 1:Trigger active SPS O
7.4.4 Power Trigger

Power triggers start for the group triggers with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and
gradient trigger) in the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders. It is triggered on active and reactive power.

The Power trigger function is found in the Voltage/current 1-phase function group, which is connected to a
1-phase voltage and a 1-phase current measuring point.
The structure of the Power trigger function is shown in the following figure:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_power trigger 1-phase, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-59 Structure/Embedding of the Function Power Trigger
function block, for example, Trigger P 1, Trigger P 2, Trigger P 3.
Each function block of the group of triggers contains the level triggers Max. trigger and Min. trigger
as well as the gradient triggers dM/dt rise (/Filter time) and dM/dt drop active of the corre-
sponding measurand.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating principle of the power trigger.
[dw_lotrip, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-60 Logic Diagram of the Power Trigger
The Power trigger function is subdivided into Level and Gradient trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
for the max. and gradient trigger and to 1.020 p.u. for the Min. trigger.
Function Blocks
Function blocks of the Power trigger function:
• Trigger P: Setting of the triggers for the active power
• Trigger Q: Setting of the triggers for the reactive power
NOTE
Mode
You can find more detailed information on the mode in chapter 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and
Routing in DIGSI 5.

Trigger Max./Trigger Min.


Filter Time
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Active, Reactive, and Apparent Power
7.4.4.4 Application and Setting Notes – Trigger P
Parameter: Mode

on The Trigger P function block is activated and the sum active power is moni-
tored according to the set trigger parameters.
off The Trigger P function block is deactivated.
test The Trigger P function block is activated for test purposes.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Parameter: Power Direction
• Default setting (_:19411:111) Power direction = positive

With the Power direction parameter, you can trigger on negative powers if the parameter is set to nega-
tive.
positive This setting value has no influence on the trigger thresholds.
negative This setting value multiplies the trigger threshold by -1.
NOTE
i The setting of the parameter (_:9451:158) P, Q sign in Measurements only influences the display
of the power values in records and on the HMI, but has no effect on the Power trigger function. The power
direction of the Power trigger function is determined by the setting of the parameter (_:9901:111)
Power direction.
• Default setting (_:19411:105) Max. trigger = 0 W

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum
active power and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The sum active power is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The sum active power is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:19411:106) Min. trigger = 0 W

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum
active power for dropping below the set values.
yes The sum active power is monitored for dropping below the set values.
no The sum active power is not monitored for dropping below the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:19411:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 0 W

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
gradients of the sum active power using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the sum active power is monitored for exceeding
the set values.
no The positive gradient of the sum active power is not monitored for
exceeding the set values.
• Default setting (_:19411:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 0 W

yes The negative gradient of the sum active power is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the sum active power is not monitored.
7.4.4.5 Application and Setting Notes – Trigger Q
Parameter: Mode

on The Trigger Q function block is activated and the sum reactive power moni-
off The Trigger Q function block is deactivated.
test The Trigger Q function block is activated for test purposes.

tive.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
Power direction.
• Default setting (_:19441:105) Max. trigger = 0 var

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum reac-
tive power for exceeding the set values.
yes The sum reactive power is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The sum reactive power is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:19441:106) Min. trigger = 0 var

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum reac-
tive power for dropping below the set values.
yes The sum reactive power is monitored for dropping below the set values.
no The sum reactive power is not monitored for dropping below the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:19441:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 0 var

gradients of the sum reactive power using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the sum reactive power is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the sum reactive power is not monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
• Default setting (_:19441:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 0 var

yes The negative gradient of the sum reactive power is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the sum reactive power is not monitored.
7.4.4.6 Settings

Trigger P 1
_:19411:1 Trigger P 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:19411:111 Trigger P 1:Power direc- • negative positive
tion
• positive
_:19411:101 Trigger P 1:Max. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:19411:105 Trigger P 1:Max. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.20 W to 20000.00 W 120.00 W
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.60 W to 100000.00 W 600.00 W
_:19411:113 Trigger P 1:Max. trigger 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:19411:102 Trigger P 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:19411:106 Trigger P 1:Min. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.20 W to 20000.00 W 80.00 W
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.60 W to 100000.00 W 400.00 W
_:19411:114 Trigger P 1:Min. trigger 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
hysteresis
_:19411:103 Trigger P 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:19411:107 Trigger P 1:dM/dt rise (/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.20 W to 20000.00 W 20.00 W
Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.60 W to 100000.00 W 100.00 W
_:19411:115 Trigger P 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:19411:104 Trigger P 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active
• yes
_:19411:108 Trigger P 1:dM/dt drop (/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.20 W to 20000.00 W 20.00 W
Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.60 W to 100000.00 W 100.00 W
_:19411:116 Trigger P 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:19411:112 Trigger P 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

Trigger Q 1
_:19441:1 Trigger Q 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:19441:111 Trigger Q 1:Power direc- • negative positive
tion
• positive
_:19441:101 Trigger Q 1:Max. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:19441:105 Trigger Q 1:Max. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.20 var to 20000.00 var 120.00 var
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.60 var to 100000.00 var 600.00 var
_:19441:113 Trigger Q 1:Max. trigger 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:19441:102 Trigger Q 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:19441:106 Trigger Q 1:Min. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.20 var to 20000.00 var 80.00 var
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.60 var to 100000.00 var 400.00 var
_:19441:114 Trigger Q 1:Min. trigger 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
hysteresis
_:19441:103 Trigger Q 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:19441:107 Trigger Q 1:dM/dt rise (/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.20 var to 20000.00 var 20.00 var
Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.60 var to 100000.00 var 100.00 var
_:19441:115 Trigger Q 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:19441:104 Trigger Q 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active
• yes
_:19441:108 Trigger Q 1:dM/dt drop (/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.20 var to 20000.00 var 20.00 var
Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.60 var to 100000.00 var 100.00 var
_:19441:116 Trigger Q 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:19441:112 Trigger Q 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles

(Type)
Trigger P 1
_:19411:54 Trigger P 1:Inactive SPS O
_:19411:52 Trigger P 1:Behavior ENS O
_:19411:53 Trigger P 1:Health ENS O
_:19411:301 Trigger P 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger Q 1
_:19441:54 Trigger Q 1:Inactive SPS O
_:19441:52 Trigger Q 1:Behavior ENS O
_:19441:53 Trigger Q 1:Health ENS O
_:19441:301 Trigger Q 1:Trigger active SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.5.1 Voltage Trigger

Voltage triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger) in
components.

The function Voltage trigger is configurable in the Voltage 3-phase and Voltage/current 3-phase function
groups. The structure of the function Voltage trigger is shown in the following figure:
[dw_fnvolt, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-61 Structure/Embedding of the Function Voltage Trigger
A maximum of 3 function blocks of the same type can be entered or removed within the function. In order to
distinguish the function blocks, they automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the function
block, for example, V Fund. Trig 1, V Fund. Trig 2, and V Fund. Trig 3.
Each function block contains the level trigger Max. trigger and Min. trigger, as well as the gradient
trigger dM/dt rise (/Filter time) and dM/dt drop active of the corresponding measurand.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating principle of a voltage trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_voltage trigger, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-62 Logic Diagram of a Voltage Trigger
The function Voltage Trigger is subdivided into Level and Gradient trigger.
monitors the positive slope (increasing) and the negative slope (decreasing) of the measurand for limit viola-
for the max. and gradient trigger and 1.020 p.u. for the Min trigger.
however first effective on the recorders, if you have routed the trigger to the recorder.
Function Blocks
Function blocks of the Voltage Trigger function:
• V Fund. Trig: Setting of the trigger for the fundamental-component value of the measured voltage
• Trig. V RMS: Setting the trigger for the RMS value of the measured voltage
• Trigger V0: Setting of the trigger for the zero-sequence components of the measured voltage
• Trigger V1: Setting of the trigger for the positive-sequence components of the measured voltage
• Trigger V2: Setting of the trigger for the negative-sequence components of the measured voltage
NOTE
i The triggers V Fund. and V RMS are 3-phase building blocks (VA, VB, VC, VAB, VBC, VCA). The set threshold
values have the same effect on all phases.
NOTE

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Mode
Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the function block analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC. This parameter can be adjusted in
the function blocks V Fund. Trig and V RMS Trig.
NOTE
i Take into account that the setting of the trigger in percent always related to the connection type phase-
to-phase.



Filtering Time
With the Filter time parameter, you define the number of the periods with which the gradient is deter-
mined.
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Voltage

7.5.1.4 Application and Setting Notes Trig V Fund (Fundamental Component)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block Trig. V fund 1 is activated and the fundamental
component is monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameter.
off The function block Trig. V fund 1 is deactivated.
test The function block Trig. V fund 1 is activated for test purposes.
Parameter: Measured Value
• Default setting (_:9571:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define, independently of the connection type, whether to trigger
on phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground variables.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

phase-to-ground The triggering is done on the basis of phase-to-ground variables.
phase-to-phase The triggering is done on the basis of phase-to-phase variables.
Parameter: Phase-selective
• Default setting (_:9571:117) Phase-selective = no

With the Phase-selective parameter, you define whether you want to set the threshold values of the level
triggers and of the gradient trigger phase-selectively or not.
no You do not adjust the threshold values for the level trigger and for the
gradient trigger phase-selectively.
The following threshold values apply to all 3 phases:
• Max. (Non-phs sel.)

• Min. (Non-phs sel.)
• +dM/dt (Non-phs sel.)
• -dM/dt (Non-phs sel.)
The phase-selective parameters can be set for each trigger, but are not
effective.
yes You adjust the threshold values for the level triggers and for the gradient
trigger phase-selectively.
The phase-selective parameters are then in effect for the following triggers:
• Max. trigger
• Min. trigger
• dM/dt rise (/Filter time)
• dM/dt drop (/Filter time)
Parameter: Max. active/Max. Trigger/Max. hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9571:101) Max. active = yes
• Default setting (_:9571:105) Max. (Non-phs sel.) = 120.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:118) Max. phs A(AB) = 120.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:119) Max. phs B(BC) = 120.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:120) Max. phs C(CA) = 120.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:113) Max. hysteresis = 0.980 p.u.

With the Max. active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage of the funda-
mental component and prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The voltage of the fundamental component is monitored for overvoltage.
no The voltage of the fundamental component is not monitored for over-
voltage.
If the Max. trigger does not operate phase-selectively, the set threshold value of the parameter Max.
(Non-phs sel.) applies to all phases.
If the Max. trigger operates phase-selectively, set the threshold values for the Max. trigger separately
for each phase. Then, the parameters Max. phs A(AB), Max. phs B(BC), and Max. phs C(CA) are
effective.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.980 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter Max. (Non-phs sel.)
and can be adjusted.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Parameter: Min. active/Min.Trigger/Min. hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9571:102) Min. active = yes
• Default setting (_:9571:106) Min. (Non-phs sel.) = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:121) Min. phs A(AB) = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:122) Min. phs B(BC) = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:123) Min. phs C(CA) = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:114) Min. hysteresis = 1.020 p.u.

With the Min. active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage of the funda-
mental component for dropping below the set values.
yes The voltage of the fundamental component is monitored for undervoltage.
no The voltage of the fundamental component is not monitored for under-
voltage.
If the Min. trigger does not operate phase-selectively, the set threshold value of the parameter Min.
If the Min. trigger operates phase-selectively, set the threshold values for the Min. trigger separately
for each phase. Then, the parameters Min. phs A(AB), Min. phs B(BC), and Min. phs C(CA) are
effective.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 1.020 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter Min. (Non-phs sel.)
Parameter:+dM/dt active/+dM/dt/+dM/dt hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9571:103) +dM/dt active = no
• Default setting (_:9571:107) +dM/dt (Non-phs sel.) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:124) +dM/dt phs A(AB) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:125) +dM/dt phs B(BC) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:126) +dM/dt phs C(CA) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:115) +dM/dt hysteresis = 0.980 p.u.

With the +dM/dt active parameter, you activate the gradient trigger in order to monitor the positive gradi-
ents of the voltage of the fundamental component using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is not
monitored.
If the gradient trigger does not operate phase-selectively, the set threshold value of the parameter +dM/dt
If the gradient trigger operates phase-selectively, set the threshold values for the gradient trigger separately
for each phase. Then, the parameters +dM/dt phs A(AB), +dM/dt phs B(BC), and +dM/dt phs C(CA)
are effective.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.980 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter +dM/dt (Non-phs
sel.) and can be adjusted.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Parameter: -dM/dt active/- dM/dt/-dM/dt hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9571:104) -dM/dt active = no
• Default setting (_:9571:108) -dM/dt (Non-phs sel.) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:127) -dM/dt phs A(AB) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:128) -dM/dt phs B(BC) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:129) -dM/dt phs C(CA) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9571:116) -dM/dt hysteresis = 0.980 p.u.

With the -dM/dt active parameter, you activate the gradient trigger in order to monitor the negative gradi-
ents of the voltage of the fundamental component using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is
monitored.
no The negative gradient of the voltage of the fundamental component is not
monitored.
If the gradient trigger does not operate phase-selectively, the set threshold value of the parameter -dM/dt
for each phase. Then, the parameters -dM/dt phs A(AB), -dM/dt phs B(BC), and -dM/dt phs C(CA)
are effective.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.980 p.u. (equal to 2 %) of the parameter -dM/dt (Non-phs
7.5.1.5 Application and Setting Notes Trig V RMS (RMS Value)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block Trig. V RMS 1 is activated and the RMS value of the
voltage is monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameter.
off The function block Trig. V RMS 1 is deactivated.
test The function block Trig. V RMS 1 is activated for test purposes.
Parameter: Measured value
• Default setting (_:9601:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define independently of the connection type, whether to trigger
on phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground variables.
phase-to-ground The triggering is done on the basis of phase-to-ground variables.
phase-to-phase The triggering is done on the basis of phase-to-phase variables.


C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

no You do not adjust the threshold values of the level triggers and of the

effective
yes You adjust the threshold values of the level triggers and of the gradient
The phase-selective parameters are then effective for the following triggers:
• Max. trigger
• Min. trigger
Parameter: Max. active/Max. Trigger./Max. hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9601:105) Max. (Non-phs sel.) = 120.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:118) Max. phs A(AB) = 120.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:119) Max. phs B(BC) = 120.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:120) Max. phs C(CA) = 120.000 V

With the Max. active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS value of the
voltage and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The RMS value of the voltage is monitored for overvoltage.
no The RMS value of the voltage is not monitored for overvoltage.
for each phase. Then, the parameters Max. phs A(AB), Max. phs B(BC), and Max. phs C(CA) are
effective.
Parameter: (_:9601:102) Min. active/Min. Trigger/Min. hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9601:106) Min. (Non-phs sel.) = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:121) Min. phs A(AB) = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:122) Min. phs B(BC) = 80.000 V

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
• Default setting Min. phs C(CA) = 80.000 V

With the Min. active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS value of the
voltage and to prevent it from dropping below the set value.
yes The RMS value of the voltage is monitored for undervoltage.
no The RMS value of the voltage is not monitored for undervoltage.
for each phase. Then, the parameters Min. phs A(AB), Min. phs B(BC), and Min. phs C(CA) are
effective.
Parameter: +dM/dt active/+dM/dt/+dM/dt hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9601:107) +dM/dt (Non-phs sel.) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:124) +dM/dt phs A(AB) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:125) +dM/dt phs B(BC) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:126) +dM/dt phs C(CA) = 20.000 V

ents of the RMS value of the voltage using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is not monitored.
for each phase. Then, the parameters +dM/dt phs A(AB), +dM/dt phs B(BC), and +dM/dt phs C(CA)
are effective.
Parameter: -dM/dt active/- dM/dt/-dM/dt hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9601:108) -dM/dt (Non-phs sel.) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:127) -dM/dt phs A(AB) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:128) -dM/dt phs B(BC) = 20.000 V
• Default setting (_:9601:129) -dM/dt phs C(CA) = 20.000 V

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
ents of the RMS value of the voltage using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the RMS value of the voltage is not monitored.
for each phase. Then, the parameters -dM/dt phs A(AB), -dM/dt phs B(BC), and -dM/dt phs C(CA)
are effective.
7.5.1.6 Application and Setting Notes - V0 Trigger (Zero-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block V0 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the zero-
sequence system is monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameter.
off The function block V0 Trigger is deactivated.
test The function block V0 Trigger is activated for test purposes.

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor in the zero-
sequence system the voltage and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The voltage in the zero-sequence system is monitored for overvoltage.
no The voltage in the zero-sequence system is not monitored for overvoltage.
be adjusted.

gradients of the voltage in the zero-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

yes The positive gradient of the voltage in the zero-sequence system is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the voltage in the zero-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.5.1.7 Application and Setting Notes - V1 Trigger (Positive-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block V1 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the positive-

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage in
the positive-sequence system and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The voltage in the positive-sequence system is monitored for overvoltage.
no The voltage in the positive-sequence system is not monitored for over-
voltage.
be adjusted.
Parameter: Min. Trigger Active/Min. Trigger/Min Trigger Hysteresis

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the voltage in
the positive-sequence system and to prevent ut from dropping below the set value.
yes The voltage in the positive-sequence system is monitored for undervoltage.
no The voltage in the positive-sequence system is not monitored for under-
voltage.
be adjusted.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

gradients of the voltage in the positive-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the voltage in the positive-sequence system is
monitored.
no The positive gradient of the voltage in the positive-sequence system is not
monitored.

gradients of the voltage in the positive-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the voltage in the positive-sequence system is
monitored.
no The negative gradient of the voltage in the positive-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.5.1.8 Application and Setting Notes - V2 Trigger (Negative-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block V2 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the negative-

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor in the nega-
tive-sequence system the voltage for exceeding the set values.
yes The voltage in the negative-sequence system is monitored for overvoltage.
no The voltage in the negative-sequence system is not monitored for over-
voltage.
be adjusted.

gradients of the voltage in the negative-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the voltage in the negative-sequence system is
monitored.
no The positive gradient of the voltage in the negative-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.5.1.9 Settings

General
_:9571:1 Trig. V fund 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9571:9 Trig. V fund 1:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
_:9571:117 Trig. V fund 1:Phase- • no no
selective
• yes
_:9571:112 Trig. V fund 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Max. trigger
_:9571:101 Trig. V fund 1:Max. • no yes
active
• yes
_:9571:105 Trig. V fund 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
(Non-phs sel.)
_:9571:118 Trig. V fund 1:Max. phs 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
A(AB)
B(BC)
C(CA)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9571:113 Trig. V fund 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
Min. trigger
_:9571:102 Trig. V fund 1:Min. active • no yes
• yes
_:9571:106 Trig. V fund 1:Min. (Non- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
phs sel.)
_:9571:121 Trig. V fund 1:Min. phs 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
A(AB)
B(BC)
C(CA)
_:9571:114 Trig. V fund 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
hysteresis
dM/dt rise (/Filter time)
_:9571:103 Trig. V fund 1:+dM/dt • no no
active
• yes
_:9571:107 Trig. V fund 1:+dM/dt 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(Non-phs sel.)
phs A(AB)
phs B(BC)
phs C(CA)
_:9571:115 Trig. V fund 1:+dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
dM/dt drop (/Filter time)
_:9571:104 Trig. V fund 1:-dM/dt • no no
active
• yes
_:9571:108 Trig. V fund 1:-dM/dt 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(Non-phs sel.)
_:9571:127 Trig. V fund 1:-dM/dt phs 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
A(AB)
B(BC)
C(CA)
_:9571:116 Trig. V fund 1:-dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
General
_:9601:1 Trig. V RMS 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9601:9 Trig. V RMS 1:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
_:9601:117 Trig. V RMS 1:Phase- • no no
selective
• yes

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9601:112 Trig. V RMS 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Max. trigger
_:9601:101 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. • no yes
active
• yes
_:9601:105 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. (Non- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
phs sel.)
_:9601:118 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. phs 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
A(AB)
B(BC)
C(CA)
_:9601:113 Trig. V RMS 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
Min. trigger
_:9601:102 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. active • no yes
• yes
_:9601:106 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. (Non- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
phs sel.)
_:9601:121 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. phs 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
A(AB)
B(BC)
C(CA)
_:9601:114 Trig. V RMS 1:Min. hyste- 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
resis
_:9601:103 Trig. V RMS 1:+dM/dt • no no
active
• yes
_:9601:107 Trig. V RMS 1:+dM/dt 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(Non-phs sel.)
phs A(AB)
phs B(BC)
phs C(CA)
_:9601:115 Trig. V RMS 1:+dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9601:104 Trig. V RMS 1:-dM/dt • no no
active
• yes
_:9601:108 Trig. V RMS 1:-dM/dt 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(Non-phs sel.)
_:9601:127 Trig. V RMS 1:-dM/dt phs 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
A(AB)
B(BC)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

C(CA)
_:9601:116 Trig. V RMS 1:-dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
Trigger V0 1
_:9631:1 Trigger V0 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9631:101 Trigger V0 1:Max. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:9631:105 Trigger V0 1:Max. trigger 0.300 V to 340.000 V 120.000 V
_:9631:113 Trigger V0 1:Max. trigger 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9631:103 Trigger V0 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:9631:107 Trigger V0 1:dM/dt rise (/ 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
Filter time)
_:9631:115 Trigger V0 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9631:112 Trigger V0 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trigger V1 1
• on
• test
active
• yes
hysteresis
_:9661:102 Trigger V1 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:9661:106 Trigger V1 1:Min. trigger 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
_:9661:114 Trigger V1 1:Min. trigger 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
hysteresis
active
• yes
Filter time)
hysteresis
_:9661:104 Trigger V1 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active
• yes
_:9661:108 Trigger V1 1:dM/dt drop 0.300 V to 340.000 V 20.000 V
(/Filter time)
_:9661:116 Trigger V1 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

Trigger V2 1
• on
• test
active
• yes
hysteresis
active
• yes
Filter time)
hysteresis

(Type)
Trig. V fund 1
_:9571:54 Trig. V fund 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9571:52 Trig. V fund 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9571:53 Trig. V fund 1:Health ENS O
_:9571:301 Trig. V fund 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trig. V RMS 1
_:9601:54 Trig. V RMS 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9601:52 Trig. V RMS 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9601:53 Trig. V RMS 1:Health ENS O
_:9601:301 Trig. V RMS 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger V0 1
_:9631:54 Trigger V0 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9631:52 Trigger V0 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9631:53 Trigger V0 1:Health ENS O
_:9631:301 Trigger V0 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger V1 1
Trigger V2 1

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.5.2 Current Trigger

Current triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger) in
components.

The Current trigger function can be configured in the Voltage/current 3-phase function group. The structure
of the function Current trigger is shown in the following figure:
[dw_fncurr, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-63 Structure/Embedding of the Function Current Trigger
biguous differentiation the function blocks automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the func-
tion block, for example, Trig I RMS 1, Trig I RMS 2, and Trig I RMS 3.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating principle of the current trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_lotrii, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-64 Logic Diagrams of the Current Trigger
The function Current trigger is subdivided into Level and Gradient trigger.
for the max. and gradient trigger and to 1.020 p.u. for the Min trigger.
NOTE
Function Blocks
Function blocks of the Current trigger function:
• I Ground. Trig: Setting of the trigger for the fundamental-component value of the measured current
• Trig. I RMS: Setting of the trigger for the RMS value of the measured current
• Trigger I0: Setting of the trigger for the zero-sequence component of the measured current
• Trigger I1: Setting of the trigger for the positive-sequence component of the measured current
• Trigger I2: Setting of the trigger for the negative-sequence component of the measured current
NOTE
i The triggers I Ground. Trig and Trig. I RMS are 3-phase building blocks (I1, I2, I3). The set threshold values
have the same effect on all phases.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
NOTE
Mode
Max. trigger active/Min. trigger active

Max. trigger/Min. trigger

dM/dt rise active – dM/dt drop active

Filter Time
mined.
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Current

from which threshold value the parameterized filtering time starts a fault record.
7.5.2.4 Application and Setting Notes I Fund. Trig
Parameter: Mode

on The function block Trig. I fund 1 is activated and the fundamental
component monitored according to the set trigger parameters.
off The function block Trig. I fund 1 is deactivated.
test The function block Trig. I fund 1 is activated for test purposes.


C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder


effective
The phase-selective parameters are then effective for the following triggers:
• Max. trigger
• Min. trigger
• Default setting (_:9751:105) Max. (Non-phs sel.) = 1.200 A
• Default setting (_:9751:118) Max. phs A = 1.200 A
• Default setting (_:9751:119) Max. phs B = 1.200 A
• Default setting (_:9751:120) Max. phs C = 1.200 A

With the Max. active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current of the funda-
mental component and prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The current of the fundamental component is monitored for overcurrent.
no The current of the fundamental component is not monitored for overcur-
rent.
for each phase. Then, the parameters Max. phs A, Max. phs B, and Max. phs C are effective.
Parameter: Min. active/Min. Trigger/Min. hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9751:106) Min. (Non-phs sel.) = 0.800 A
• Default setting (_:9751:121) Min. phs A = 0.800 A
• Default setting (_:9751:122) Min. phs B = 0.800 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
• Default setting (_:9751:123) Min. phs C = 0.800 A

With the Min. active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current of the funda-
mental component and prevent it from dropping below the set values.
yes The current of the fundamental component is monitored for undercurrent.
no The current of the fundamental component is not monitored for undercur-
rent.
for each phase. Then, the parameters Min. phs A, Min. phs B, and Min. phs C are effective.
Parameter:+dM/dt active/+dM/dt/+dM/dt hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9751:107) +dM/dt (Non-phs sel.) = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9751:124) +dM/dt phs A = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9751:125) +dM/dt phs B = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9751:126) +dM/dt phs C = 0.300 A

ents of the current of the fundamental component, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the current of the fundamental component is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the current of the fundamental component is not
monitored.
for each phase. Then, the parameters +dM/dt phs A, +dM/dt phs B, and +dM/dt phs C are effective.
Parameter: -dM/dt active/-dM/dt/
• Default setting (_:9751:108) -dM/dt (Non-phs sel.) = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9751:127) -dM/dt phs A = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9751:128) -dM/dt phs B = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9751:129) -dM/dt phs C = 0.300 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
ents of the current of the fundamental component, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the current of the fundamental component is
monitored.
no The negative gradient of the current of the fundamental component is not
monitored.
for each phase. Then, the parameters -dM/dt phs A, -dM/dt phs B, and -dM/dt phs C are effective.
7.5.2.5 Application and Setting Notes Trigger I RMS
Parameter: Mode

on The function block Trig. I RMS 1 is activated and the RMS value of the
current is monitored according to the set trigger parameter.
off The function block Trig. I RMS 1 is deactivated.
test The function block Trig. I RMS 1 is activated for test purposes.


effective
The phase-selective parameters are then effective for the following triggers
• Max. trigger
• Min. trigger

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
• Default setting (_:9781:105) Max. (Non-phs sel.) = 1.200 A
• Default setting (_:9781:118) Max. phs A = 1.200 A
• Default setting (_:9781:119) Max. phs B = 1.200 A
• Default setting (_:9781:120) Max. phs C = 1.200 A

With the Max. active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS value of the
current and to prevent exceeding the set values.
yes The RMS value of the current is monitored for overcurrent.
no The RMS value of the current is not monitored for overcurrent.
for each phase. Then, the parameters Max. phs A, Max. phs B, and Max. phs C are effective.
The hysteresis is preset the factory to 0.980 p.u. of the parameter Max. (Non-phs sel.) and can be
adjusted.
Parameter: Min. active/Min. Trigger/Min. hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9781:106) Min. (Non-phs sel.) = 0.800 A
• Default setting (_:9781:121) Min. phs A = 0.800 A
• Default setting (_:9781:122) Min. phs B = 0.800 A
• Default setting (_:9781:123) Min. phs C = 0.800 A

With the Min. active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the RMS value of the
current and to prevent it from dropping below the set values.
yes The RMS value of the current is monitored for undercurrent.
no The RMS value of the current is not monitored for undercurrent.
for each phase. Then, the parameters Min. phs A, Min. phs B, and Min. phs C are effective.
Parameter: +dM/dt active/+dM/dt/+dM/dt hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9781:107) +dM/dt (Non-phs sel.) = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9781:124) +dM/dt phs A = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9781:125) +dM/dt phs B = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9781:126) +dM/dt phs C = 0.300 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

ents of the RMS value of the current, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the RMS value of the current is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the RMS value of the current is not monitored.
for each phase. Then, the parameters +dM/dt phs A, +dM/dt phs B, and +dM/dt phs C are effective.
Parameter: -dM/dt active/-dM/dt/-dM/dt hysteresis
• Default setting (_:9781:108) -dM/dt (Non-phs sel.) = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9781:127) -dM/dt phs A = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9781:128) -dM/dt phs B = 0.300 A
• Default setting (_:9781:129) -dM/dt phs C = 0.300 A

ents of the RMS value of the current, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the RMS value of the current is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the RMS value of the current is not monitored.
for each phase. Then, the parameters -dM/dt phs A, -dM/dt phs B, and -dM/dt phs C are effective.
7.5.2.6 Application and Setting Notes - I0 Trigger (Zero-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block I0 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the zero-
off The function block I0 Trigger is deactivated.
test The function block I0 Trigger is activated for test purposes.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current in
the zero-sequence system and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The current in the zero-sequence system is monitored for overcurrent.
no The current in the zero-sequence system is not monitored for overcurrent.
be adjusted.

gradients of the current in the zero-sequence system, using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the current in the zero-sequence system is moni-
tored.
no The positive gradient of the current in the zero-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.5.2.7 Application and Setting Notes I1 Trigger (Positive-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block I1 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the positive-
sequence system is monitored on the basis of the set trigger parameters.

the positive-sequence system and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

yes The current in the positive-sequence system is monitored for overcurrent.
no The current in the positive-sequence system is not monitored for overcur-
rent.
be adjusted.

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the current in
the positive-sequence system and to prevent it from dropping below the set values.
yes The current in the positive-sequence system is monitored for undercurrent.
no The current in the positive-sequence system is not monitored for undercur-
rent.
be adjusted.

gradients of the current in the positive-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the current in the positive-sequence system is
monitored.
no The positive gradient of the current in the positive-sequence system is not
monitored.
• Default setting (_:9841:104) dM/dt drop active = yes

gradients of the current in the positive-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

yes The negative gradient of the current in the positive-sequence system is
monitored.
no The negative gradient of the current in the positive-sequence system is not
monitored.
7.5.2.8 Application and Setting Notes - I2 Trigger (Negative-Sequence System)
Parameter: Mode

on The function block I2 Trigger is activated and the voltage in the negative-

the negative-sequence system and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The current in the negative-sequence system is monitored for overcurrent.
no The current in the negative-sequence system is not monitored for overcur-
rent.
be adjusted.

gradients of the current in the negative-sequence system using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The positive gradient of the current in the negative-sequence system is
monitored.
no The positive gradient of the current in the negative-sequence system is not
monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.5.2.9 Settings

General
_:9751:1 Trig. I fund 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9751:117 Trig. I fund 1:Phase- • no no
selective
• yes
_:9751:112 Trig. I fund 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Max. trigger
_:9751:101 Trig. I fund 1:Max. active • no yes
• yes
_:9751:105 Trig. I fund 1:Max. (Non- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
phs sel.) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9751:118 Trig. I fund 1:Max. phs A 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9751:119 Trig. I fund 1:Max. phs B 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9751:120 Trig. I fund 1:Max. phs C 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9751:113 Trig. I fund 1:Max. hyste- 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
resis
Min. trigger
_:9751:102 Trig. I fund 1:Min. active • no yes
• yes
_:9751:106 Trig. I fund 1:Min. (Non- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9751:121 Trig. I fund 1:Min. phs A 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9751:122 Trig. I fund 1:Min. phs B 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9751:123 Trig. I fund 1:Min. phs C 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9751:114 Trig. I fund 1:Min. hyste- 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
resis
_:9751:103 Trig. I fund 1:+dM/dt • no no
active
• yes
_:9751:107 Trig. I fund 1:+dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
(Non-phs sel.) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9751:124 Trig. I fund 1:+dM/dt phs 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
B 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
C 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9751:115 Trig. I fund 1:+dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9751:104 Trig. I fund 1:-dM/dt • no no
active
• yes
_:9751:108 Trig. I fund 1:-dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9751:127 Trig. I fund 1:-dM/dt phs 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
B 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
C 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9751:116 Trig. I fund 1:-dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
General
_:9781:1 Trig. I RMS 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9781:117 Trig. I RMS 1:Phase- • no no
selective
• yes
_:9781:112 Trig. I RMS 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Max. trigger
_:9781:101 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. active • no yes
• yes
_:9781:105 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. (Non- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9781:118 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. phs A 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9781:119 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. phs B 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9781:120 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. phs C 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9781:113 Trig. I RMS 1:Max. hyste- 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
resis
Min. trigger
_:9781:102 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. active • no yes
• yes
_:9781:106 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. (Non- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9781:121 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. phs A 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9781:122 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. phs B 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9781:123 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. phs C 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9781:114 Trig. I RMS 1:Min. hyste- 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
resis
_:9781:103 Trig. I RMS 1:+dM/dt • no no
active
• yes
_:9781:107 Trig. I RMS 1:+dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9781:124 Trig. I RMS 1:+dM/dt phs 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
B 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
C 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9781:115 Trig. I RMS 1:+dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9781:104 Trig. I RMS 1:-dM/dt • no no
active
• yes
_:9781:108 Trig. I RMS 1:-dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9781:127 Trig. I RMS 1:-dM/dt phs 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
A 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

B 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
C 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9781:116 Trig. I RMS 1:-dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
Trigger I0 1
_:9811:1 Trigger I0 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9811:101 Trigger I0 1:Max. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:9811:105 Trigger I0 1:Max. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:9811:113 Trigger I0 1:Max. trigger 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9811:103 Trigger I0 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:9811:107 Trigger I0 1:dM/dt rise (/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9811:115 Trigger I0 1:dM/dt rise 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9811:112 Trigger I0 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles
Trigger I1 1
• on
• test
active
• yes

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
hysteresis
_:9841:102 Trigger I1 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:9841:106 Trigger I1 1:Min. trigger 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 4.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.800 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 4.000 A
_:9841:114 Trigger I1 1:Min. trigger 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
hysteresis
active
• yes
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
hysteresis
_:9841:104 Trigger I1 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active
• yes
_:9841:108 Trigger I1 1:dM/dt drop 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A 0.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
_:9841:116 Trigger I1 1:dM/dt drop 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
hysteresis
Trigger I2 1
• on
• test
active
• yes

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 500.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
hysteresis
active
• yes
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 50.000 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 250.00 A 1.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.500 A
hysteresis

(Type)
Trig. I fund 1
_:9751:54 Trig. I fund 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9751:52 Trig. I fund 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9751:53 Trig. I fund 1:Health ENS O
_:9751:301 Trig. I fund 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trig. I RMS 1
_:9781:54 Trig. I RMS 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9781:52 Trig. I RMS 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9781:53 Trig. I RMS 1:Health ENS O
_:9781:301 Trig. I RMS 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger I0 1
_:9811:54 Trigger I0 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9811:52 Trigger I0 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9811:53 Trigger I0 1:Health ENS O
_:9811:301 Trigger I0 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger I1 1
Trigger I2 1

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

(Type)
7.5.3 Frequency Trigger

Frequency triggers start with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and gradient trigger)
in the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders. It is triggered on the power frequency.
NOTE
i Frequency triggers are not available if there are no voltage measuring values assigned to the function
group Voltage-current 3-phase.

The function Frequency trigger is configurable in the Voltage 3-phase and voltage/current 3-phase func-
tion groups.
The structure of the function Frequency trigger is shown in the following figure:
[dw_fnfreq, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-65 Structure/Embedding of the Function Frequency Trigger
biguous differentiating the function blocks automatically receive a sequential number in the name of the func-
tion block, for example, Frq. Trigger 1, Frq. Trigger 2, Frq. Trigger 3.
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating principle of the frequency trigger.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_lotrif, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-66 Logic Diagram of the Frequency Trigger
The function Frequency trigger is subdivided into Level and Gradient trigger.
A hysteresis of 0.2 % of the setting value is preset for the level and gradient triggers. This is equal to
0.998 p.u. for the max. and gradient trigger and to 1.020 p.u. for the Min trigger.
Function Block
The Frequency trigger contains the function block Frq. Trigger 1 with which you can set the trigger for moni-
toring the power frequency.
NOTE
Mode
You can find more information on the mode in chapter 7.1.3 Step 2: Setting the Parameters and Routing in
DIGSI 5.
Max. trigger active/Min. trigger active

With the parameters Max. trigger active and Min. trigger active, you can define whether the
respective level trigger is active or inactive.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Max. trigger/Min. trigger

With the parameters Max. trigger and Min. trigger, you can define from which threshold value the
activated level trigger starts a fault record.
dM/dt rise active - dM/dt drop active

With the parameters dM/dt rise active and dM/dt drop active, you can define, whether the respec-
tive gradient trigger is active or inactive.
Filter Time
mined.
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Power Frequency
7.5.3.4 Application and Setting Notes - Frequency Trigger
Parameter: Mode

on Function block Trigger f is activated and the power frequency monitored
according to the set trigger parameters.
off Function block Trigger f is deactivated.
test Function block Trigger f is activated for test purposes.
• Default setting (_:9721:102) Max. trigger = 50.200 Hz

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the power
frequency and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The power frequency is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The power frequency is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.998 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter Max. trigger and can
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9721:104) Min. trigger = 49.600 Hz

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the power
frequency and prevent it from dropping below the set value.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

yes The power frequency is monitored for dropping below the set value.
no The power frequency is not monitored for dropping below the set value.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 1.002 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter Min. trigger and can
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9721:106) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 0.100 Hz

yes The positive gradient of the power frequency is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the power frequency is not monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.998 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter dM/dt rise (/
• Default setting (_:9721:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 0.100 Hz

gradients of the power frequency using the set filtering time (input in periods).
yes The negative gradient of the power frequency is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the power frequency is not monitored.
The hysteresis is preset at the factory to 0.998 p.u. (equal to 0.2 %) of the parameter dM/dt drop (/
7.5.3.5 Settings

Trigger f 1
_:9721:1 Trigger f 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9721:101 Trigger f 1:Max. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:9721:102 Trigger f 1:Max. trigger 50.000 Hz to 60.000 Hz 50.200 Hz
_:9721:113 Trigger f 1:Max. trigger 0.990 p.u. to 0.999 p.u. 0.998 p.u.
hysteresis

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9721:103 Trigger f 1:Min. trigger • no yes
active
• yes
_:9721:104 Trigger f 1:Min. trigger 25.000 Hz to 50.000 Hz 49.600 Hz
_:9721:114 Trigger f 1:Min. trigger 1.001 p.u. to 1.010 p.u. 1.002 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:105 Trigger f 1:dM/dt rise • no no
active
• yes
_:9721:106 Trigger f 1:dM/dt rise (/ 0.005 Hz to 60.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Filter time)
_:9721:115 Trigger f 1:dM/dt rise 0.990 p.u. to 0.999 p.u. 0.998 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:107 Trigger f 1:dM/dt drop • no no
active
• yes
_:9721:108 Trigger f 1:dM/dt drop (/ 0.005 Hz to 60.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Filter time)
_:9721:116 Trigger f 1:dM/dt drop 0.990 p.u. to 0.999 p.u. 0.998 p.u.
hysteresis
_:9721:112 Trigger f 1:Filter time 2 cycles to 250 cycles 2 cycles

(Type)
Trigger f 1
_:9721:54 Trigger f 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9721:52 Trigger f 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9721:53 Trigger f 1:Health ENS O
_:9721:301 Trigger f 1:Trigger active SPS O
7.5.4 Power Trigger

Power triggers start for the group triggers with exceeding or dropping below the set limiting values (level and
gradient trigger) in the fast-scan and slow-scan recorders. It is triggered on active power, reactive power,
apparent power, and power swing.

The Power trigger function is found in the Voltage/current 3-phase function group, which is connected with
a 3-phase voltage and a 3-phase current measurment.
The structure of the Power trigger function is shown in the following figure:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_fnpower, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-67 Structure/Embedding of the Function Power Trigger
function block, for example, Trigger Psum 1, Trigger Psum 2, or Trigger Psum 3.
Each function block of the group of triggers contains the level triggers Max. trigger and Min. trigger
as well as the gradient triggers dM/dt rise (/Filter time) and dM/dt drop active of the corre-
sponding measurand.
You can find the description of the power-swing trigger in 7.5.4.7 Function Description Trigger Power Swing
Logic
The following logic diagram shows the operating principle of the group of power triggers.
[dw_lotrip, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-68 Logic Diagram of the Power Trigger
The Power trigger function is subdivided for the group of triggers into Level and Gradient triggers.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
for the Max. and gradient trigger and to 1.020 p.u. for the Min. trigger.
Function Blocks
Function blocks of the Power trigger function:
• Trigger Psum: Setting of the trigger for the sum active power
• Trigger Qsum: Setting of the trigger for the sum reactive power
• Trigger Ssum: Setting of the trigger for the sum apparent power
• Trigger Pswing: Setting of the triggers for the power swing
NOTE
You can find the setting values for the power-swing trigger in 7.5.4.8 Application and Setting Notes, Trigger
Power Swing.
Mode
DIGSI 5.



Filter Time
With the parameter Filter time, you define the number of periods with which the gradient is determined.
Gradient Trigger for Rising and Dropping Gradients of the Active, Reactive, and Apparent Power
7.5.4.4 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Psum
Parameter: Mode

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
on The Trigger Psum function block is activated and the sum active power is
monitored according to the set trigger parameters.
off The Trigger Psum function block is deactivated.
test The Trigger Psum function block is activated for test purposes.

tive.
NOTE
Power direction.
• Default setting (_:9901:105) Max. trigger = 138.564 W

active power and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The sum active power is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The sum active power is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9901:106) Min. trigger = 138.564 W

active power for dropping below the set values.
yes The sum active power is monitored for dropping below the set values.
no The sum active power is not monitored for dropping below the set values.
be adjusted.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Parameter: dM/dt Rise Active - dM/dt Rise (/Filter Time) dM/dt Rise Hysteresis - Filter Time
• Default setting (_:9901:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 34.641 W

yes The positive gradient of the sum active power is monitored for exceeding
the set values.
no The positive gradient of the sum active power is not monitored for
exceeding the set values.
• Default setting (_:9901:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 34.641 W

yes The negative gradient of the sum active power is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the sum active power is not monitored.
7.5.4.5 Application and Setting Notes Qsum Trig
Parameter: Mode

on The Trigger Qsum function block is activated and the sum reactive power is
monitored according to the set trigger parameters.
off The Trigger Qsum function block is deactivated.
test The Trigger Qsum function block is activated for test purposes.

tive .

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

NOTE
Power direction.
• Default setting (_:9961:105) Max. trigger = 207.846 var

With the Max. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum reac-
tive power for exceeding the set values.
yes The sum reactive power is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The sum reactive power is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9961:106) Min. trigger = 138.564 var

With the Min. trigger active parameter, you activate the level trigger in order to monitor the sum reac-
tive power for dropping below the set values.
yes The sum reactive power is monitored for dropping below the set values.
no The sum reactive power is not monitored for dropping below the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:9961:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 34.641 var

yes The positive gradient of the sum reactive power is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the sum reactive power is not monitored.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
• Default setting (_:9961:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 34.641 var

yes The negative gradient of the sum reactive power is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the sum reactive power is not monitored.
7.5.4.6 Application and Setting Notes Trigger Ssum
Parameter: Mode

on The Trigger Ssum function block is activated and the sum apparent power
is monitored according to the set trigger parameters.
off The Trigger Ssum function block is deactivated.
test The Trigger Ssum function block is activated for test purposes.
• Default setting (_:10021:105) Max. trigger = 207.846 VA

apparent power and to prevent it from exceeding the set values.
yes The sum apparent power is monitored for exceeding the set values.
no The sum apparent power is not monitored for exceeding the set values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:10021:106) Min. trigger = 138.564 VA

apparent power for dropping below the set values.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

yes The sum apparent power is monitored for dropping below the set values.
no The sum apparent power is not monitored for dropping below the set
values.
be adjusted.
• Default setting (_:10021:107) dM/dt rise (/Filter time) = 34.641 VA

yes The positive gradient of the sum apparent power is monitored.
no The positive gradient of the sum apparent power is not monitored.
• Default setting (_:10021:108) dM/dt drop (/Filter time) = 34.641 VA

yes The negative gradient of the sum apparent power is monitored.
no The negative gradient of the sum apparent power is not monitored.
7.5.4.7 Function Description Trigger Power Swing
Power Swings
Power swings are created by temporary angle deviations of the supplying generators, for example, due to
faults or load shedding. The following figure shows the network section involved with the supplying genera-
tors A and B and the power-swing center. The term “power-swing center” describes the location on a line at
which the voltage dip is greatest during a power swing.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[dw_powerswing_center, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-69 Power-Swing Center
Power-swing detection operates on a phase-segregated basis in the event of power-swing currents ≥ 10 % of

the rated current and power-swing frequencies between 0.1 Hz and 8 Hz.
7.5.4.8 Application and Setting Notes, Trigger Power Swing
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting Mode = off

With the parameter Mode, you activate the trigger for normal operation (on) or the test mode (test).
on The Trigger Psw # function block is activated and the power swing is moni-
off The Trigger Psw # function block is deactivated.
test The Trigger Psw # function block is activated for test purposes.
Parameters: X reach, R (ph-g), and R (ph-ph)
• Default setting X reach = 100
• Default setting R (ph-g) = 100
• Default setting R (ph-ph) = 200

With the parameters X reach, R (ph-g), and R (ph-ph), you set the parameters of a power-swing
polygon within which power-swing-typical resistance changes cause triggering. Resistance changes outside
this polygon do not cause triggering. You can adapt the sensitivity of power-swing detection by changing the
default values (see the following calculation example).
Calculation Example:
If triggering occurs using the default settings even during non-critical power swings, for example, you can
adapt the sensitivity. This calculation example serves as orientation.
For a given line, the following data are known:
3-phase short-circuit current on the left line 20 kA/-72°
3-phase short-circuit current on the right line 12 kA/-83
Line impedance (5.17 + 19.31i) Ω

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Primary rated voltage 110 kV

Primary rated current 800 A
Calculation of the source impedances of the left and right side of the supplying line:
Zs-b = (1.1 • 110 kV) / (√3 • 20 kA) • ei 72° = 1.08 + 3.32i Ω
Zs-a = (1.1 • 110 kV) / (√3 • 12 kA) • ei 83° = 0.71 + 5.77i Ω
Calculation of the total impedances between the generators:

ZΣ = Zs-a + Zs-b + Zline = (1.08 + 3.32i + 0.71 + 5.77i + 5.17 + 19.31i) Ω = 6.96 + 28.41i Ω
Calculation of the distance to the power-swing center:

ZReach-A = 0.5 • ZΣ - Zs-a = 0.5 • (6.96 + 28.41) - (0.71 + 5.77i) Ω = 2.77 + 8.44i Ω
ZReach-B = 0.5 • ZΣ - Zs-a = 0.5 • (6.96 + 28.41) - (1.08 + 3.32i) Ω = 2.40 + 10.88i Ω
NOTE
i The power-swing trigger starts operating at a minimum current of 10 % Irated. Power-swing detection
drops out once the current is below the minimum current. Power-swing frequencies between 0.1 Hz and
8 Hz are detected.
For the setting value X reach, use a safety margin of at least 20 %, yielding this result:
X reach = 1.2 • 8.5 Ω = 10.2 Ω.
Use the same setting value for R (ph-g).
Use double the value of X reach for R (ph-ph).
7.5.4.9 Settings

Trigger Psum 1
_:9901:1 Trigger Psum 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9901:111 Trigger Psum 1:Power • negative positive
direction
• positive
_:9901:101 Trigger Psum 1:Max. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:9901:105 Trigger Psum 1:Max. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 Wto 6000.00 W 207.85 W
trigger 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 W to 300000.00 W 1039.23 W
_:9901:113 Trigger Psum 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9901:102 Trigger Psum 1:Min. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:9901:106 Trigger Psum 1:Min. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 Wto 6000.00 W 138.56 W
trigger 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 W to 300000.00 W 692.82 W
_:9901:114 Trigger Psum 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9901:103 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt • no no
rise active
• yes
_:9901:107 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 Wto 6000.00 W 34.64 W
rise (/Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 W to 300000.00 W 173.21 W

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:9901:115 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
rise hysteresis
_:9901:104 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt • no no
drop active
• yes
_:9901:108 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 Wto 6000.00 W 34.64 W
drop (/Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 W to 300000.00 W 173.21 W
_:9901:116 Trigger Psum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
drop hysteresis
_:9901:112 Trigger Psum 1:Filter 2cyclesto250 cycles 2 cycles
time
Trigger Qsum 1
_:9961:1 Trigger Qsum 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:9961:111 Trigger Qsum 1:Power • negative positive
direction
• positive
_:9961:101 Trigger Qsum 1:Max. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:9961:105 Trigger Qsum 1:Max. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 var to 60000.00 var 207.85 var
trigger 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 var to 300000.00 var 1039.23 var
_:9961:113 Trigger Qsum 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9961:102 Trigger Qsum 1:Min. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:9961:106 Trigger Qsum 1:Min. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 var to 60000.00 var 138.56 var
trigger 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 var to 300000.00 var 692.82 var
_:9961:114 Trigger Qsum 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:9961:103 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt • no no
rise active
• yes
_:9961:107 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 var to 60000.00 var 34.64 var
rise (/Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 var to 300000.00 var 173.21 var
_:9961:115 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
rise hysteresis
_:9961:104 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt • no no
drop active
• yes
_:9961:108 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 var to 60000.00 var 34.64 var
drop (/Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 var to 300000.00 var 173.21 var
_:9961:116 Trigger Qsum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
drop hysteresis
_:9961:112 Trigger Qsum 1:Filter 2cyclesto250 cycles 2 cycles
time
Trigger Ssum 1
_:10021:1 Trigger Ssum 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

_:10021:101 Trigger Ssum 1:Max. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:10021:105 Trigger Ssum 1:Max. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 VA to 60000.00 VA 207.85 VA
trigger 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 VA to 300000.00 VA 1039.23 VA
_:10021:113 Trigger Ssum 1:Max. 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:10021:102 Trigger Ssum 1:Min. • no yes
trigger active
• yes
_:10021:106 Trigger Ssum 1:Min. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 VA to 60000.00 VA 138.56 VA
trigger 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 VA to 300000.00 VA 692.82 VA
_:10021:114 Trigger Ssum 1:Min. 1.010 p.u. to 1.100 p.u. 1.020 p.u.
trigger hysteresis
_:10021:103 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt • no no
rise active
• yes
_:10021:107 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 VA to 60000.00 VA 34.64 VA
rise (/Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 VA to 300000.00 VA 173.21 VA
_:10021:115 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
rise hysteresis
_:10021:104 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt • no no
drop active
• yes
_:10021:108 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.36 VA to 60000.00 VA 34.64 VA
drop (/Filter time) 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.80 VA to 300000.00 VA 173.21 VA
_:10021:116 Trigger Ssum 1:dM/dt 0.900 p.u. to 0.990 p.u. 0.980 p.u.
drop hysteresis
_:10021:112 Trigger Ssum 1:Filter 2cyclesto250 cycles 2 cycles
time
Trigger Psw #
_:1 Trigger Psw #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:100 Trigger Psw #:X reach 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 100.000 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 20.000 Ω
_:101 Trigger Psw #:R (ph-g) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 100.000 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 20.000 Ω
_:102 Trigger Psw #:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 Ω to 600.000 Ω 200.000 Ω
5A 0.020 Ω to 120.000 Ω 40.000 Ω

(Type)
Trigger Psum 1
_:9901:54 Trigger Psum 1:Inactive SPS O
_:9901:52 Trigger Psum 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9901:53 Trigger Psum 1:Health ENS O
_:9901:301 Trigger Psum 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger Qsum 1
_:9961:54 Trigger Qsum 1:Inactive SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

(Type)
_:9961:52 Trigger Qsum 1:Behavior ENS O
_:9961:53 Trigger Qsum 1:Health ENS O
_:9961:301 Trigger Qsum 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger Ssum 1
_:10021:54 Trigger Ssum 1:Inactive SPS O
_:10021:52 Trigger Ssum 1:Behavior ENS O
_:10021:53 Trigger Ssum 1:Health ENS O
_:10021:301 Trigger Ssum 1:Trigger active SPS O
Trigger Psw #
_:54 Trigger Psw #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Trigger Psw #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Trigger Psw #:Health ENS O
_:301 Trigger Psw #:Trigger active SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
7.6 Measurands and Recorder Routing Functions
7.6.1 Measurands
7.6.1.1 Properties of Measurands

With the SIPROTEC 5 device, various recording options are available for supervision and evaluation of the
power-system voltage quality. Measurands are measured or calculated in 3-phase systems.
To achieve the best power-quality supervision, the following tables contain recommendations on routing the
measurands in DIGSI 5.
7.6.1.2 Using Measurands
Function Description
The sampled values (SAV) are automatically routed to the Fast-scan recorder and cannot be changed by the
user. The measured values, on the other hand, are formed from the sampled values. You can route the meas-
ured values manually in Information routing.
NOTE
i The Voltage/current 3-phase function group works even without an assigned voltage measuring point. In
this case the voltage, frequency and power functions (measured values, trigger, and recorder routing func-
tions) are not available.
After you have instantiated the Recorder routing function and the desired function blocks, you can assign the
measured values to the individual recorders in the Information routing.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_infora, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-70 Routing Measured Values in the Information Routing
NOTE
i The measured values under the Recorder routing V and Recorder routing VI 1-phase/3-phase functions
are optimized specifically for recording. Preferably use these measured values for routing to the various
recorders.
Operational measured values can also be recorded. However, this is not recommended because of the low
refresh rate for the 7KE85 fault recorder.
Frequency
Long-term supervision can be performed using the measurand Routing f:f.
You can find information about the average value, the refresh rate, and the recommended routing of the
frequency measurands in the following table.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Table 7-7 Using the Frequency Measurand
Measurand Refresh Rate Use in

FSR15 SSR16 CR17 TR18
Routing f:f 10 ms X X X
NOTE
i The frequency is calculated based on the positive-sequence system components. The calculated frequency
is always 0 for a zero-sequence or negative-sequence system.
Voltage, Current, and Power Measurands

The following measurands can be recorded to evaluate power-quality problems: voltage, current, and power.
voltage, current, and power measurands in the following table.
Table 7-8 Using Voltage Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
Routing V:Vph rms Half periods X X X
Routing V:Vpp rms Half periods X X X
Routing V:VN rms Half periods X X X
Routing V:Vph fd. Half periods X X X
Routing V:Vpp fd. Half periods X X X
Routing V:VN fd. Half periods X X X
Routing V:V0 Half periods X X X
Table 7-9 Using Current Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
Routing I:Iph rms Half periods X X X
Routing I:IN rms Half periods X X X
Routing I:Iph fd. Half periods X X X
Routing I:IN fd. Half periods X X X
Routing I:I0 Half periods X X X
Table 7-10 Using Power Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
Routing Pwr:P tot Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:Q tot Half periods X X X
15 FSR: Fast-scan recorder

16 SSR: Slow-scan recorder

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

FSR SSR CR TR
Routing Pwr:S tot Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:PF tot Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:P Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:Q Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:S Half periods X X X
Routing Pwr:PF Half periods X X X
Measuring-Transducer Measurands – I/O Modules (for Example, IO212)

You can find information about the refresh rate and the possible routings of the measuring-transducer meas-
urands in the following table.
Table 7-11 Using Measuring-Transducer Measurands – I/O Modules (for Example, IO212)
Measurand Refresh Rate 19 Use in

FSR SSR CR TR
TD scale MV 1 to 8 10 ms X X X
Measuring Transducer – Measuring-Transducer Module (for Example, ANAI-CA-4EL)

You will find information about the refresh rate and the possible routings of the measuring-transducer meas-
urands in the following table.
Table 7-12 Using Measuring-Transducer Measurands – Transformers (for Example, ANAI-CA-4EL)

FSR SSR CR TR
TD scale MV 1 to 4 200 ms X X X
TD direct MV 1 to 4 200 ms X X X
PQ 10/12 Cycles
The measurement determines the values over a 10-cycles time interval for 50-Hz distribution systems and over
a 12-cycles time interval for 60-Hz distribution systems. All 10/12-cycles time intervals are captured without
gaps and without overlaps.
PQ 10/12 cycles in the following tables.
Table 7-13 Using PQ 10/12 Cycles Measurands
Measurand Refresh Use in Recom-

Rate FSR SSR CR TR mended
Average
Value CR
PQ 10/12cyc:f 200 ms X X 10 s
PQ 10/12cyc:Vph rms 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc:Vpp rms 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc:VN rms 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc:u0 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc:u2 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc Har:Vph 200 ms X X 10 min
19 Can be set in measurement window parameter: 10 ms; 20 ms; 40 ms; 60 ms; 80 ms; 100 ms

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

Average
Value CR
PQ 10/12cyc Har:Vpp 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc Har:VN 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc Har:Iph 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc Har:IN 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc Har:THDS-Vph 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc Har:THDS-Vpp 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc Har:THDS-I 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc Har:TDD-I 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc IntH:Vph 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc IntH:Vpp 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc IntH:VN 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc IntH:Iph 200 ms X X 10 min
PQ 10/12cyc IntH:IN 200 ms X X 10 min
NOTE
i If you route harmonics or interharmonics to a continuous recorder, the Averaging time is limited.
For storage capacity reasons, set the parameter Averaging time to only 600 s or 900 s. Other setting
values will result in an inconsistency indication.
NOTE
i Harmonic and/or interharmonic measured values in various function groups can be calculated only on the
basis of the same frequency tracking group.
If you use several frequency tracking groups, only route measuring points from the same frequency
tracking group to the affected FGs. Otherwise, you cannot load the configuration into the device!
NOTE
i If you instantiate the splitter functions, the calculation of the measured values of harmonics and interhar-
monics is based on the PQ 10/12 cycles.
Splitter
Capturing the harmonics, the interharmonics and the subharmonics is possible. Internally, the whole
frequency range from 5 Hz to 2500 Hz is recorded with a resolution of 5 Hz. From the frequency portions,
subgroups for the harmonics und interharmonics are formed. There is exactly one group for the subhar-
monics. The classification is defined by the PQ standard IEC 61000-4-7.
Table 7-14 Using Splitter Measurands

Average
Value CR
Splitter Harm: 200 ms X
Splitter Har:H1 to H51
Splitter IntHarm:Splitter IntH 200 ms X

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
PQ 150/180 Cycles
The measurement determines the values over a 150-cycles time interval for 50 Hz distribution systems and
over a 180-cycles time interval for 60 Hz distribution systems. All 150/180-cycles time intervals are captured
without gaps and without overlaps.
You will find information about the average value, the refresh rate, and the recommended routing of the PQ
150/180 cycles in the following tables. The measured values serve only to evaluate algorithms and not for PQ
evaluation.
Table 7-15 Using PQ 150/180 Cycles Measurands

Average
Value CR
PQ 150/180cyc Har:Vph 3s X
PQ 150/180cyc Har:Vpp 3s X
PQ 150/180cyc Har:VN 3s X
PQ 150/180cyc Har:Iph 3s X
PQ 150/180cyc Har:IN 3s X
PQ 150/180cyc IntH:Vph 3s X
PQ 150/180cyc IntH:Vpp 3s X
PQ 150/180cyc IntH:VN 3s X
PQ 150/180cyc IntH:Iph 3s X
PQ 150/180cyc IntH:IN 3s X
PQ Trend
Table 7-16 Using PQ Trend Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
PQ trend:f Event-based X X
PQ trend:Vph rms Event-based X X
PQ trend:Vpp rms Event-based X X
PQ Flicker
The short-term flicker severity Pst PQ flicker and the long-term flicker severity Plt PQ flicker are determined for
phase-to-ground and delta voltages (depending on the type of connection). The flicker is measured in all 3
voltage channels of the corresponding feeder. Flickers appear with a frequency between 0.005 Hz and 35 Hz.
The flicker severity is determined as follows:
• Short-term flicker severity Pst: over 10 minutes (short-term flicker), permanently set
• Long-term flicker severity Plt: over 2 hours (12 Pst values), permanently set
• Instantaneous value of flicker perception Pinst 20
• Pimx: Maximum value of flicker perception Pinst
NOTE
i Pinst and Pimx serve as the qualification of the flicker algorithm and are not available for long-term recording.
20 Pinst is designated as output 5 in the former version of the standard.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
You will find information about the average value, the refresh rate, and the recommended routing of the
flicker measurands in the following table.
Table 7-17 Using Flicker Measurands

FSR SSR CR TR
PQ flicker:Pst ph 10 min X X
PQ flicker:Plt ph 2h X X
PQ flicker:Pinst ph 12 ms X
PQ flicker:Pimx ph 12 ms X
PQ flicker:Pst pp 10 min X X
PQ flicker:Plt pp 2h X X
PQ flicker:Pinst pp 12 ms X
PQ flicker:Pimx pp 12 ms X
Other Measured Values (No Recorder Routing Measured Values)
Table 7-18 Using Other Measured Values

FSR SSR CR TR
For example, operational For example, 180 ms X
measured values
7.6.1.3 Routing the Measurands in DIGSI 5 for Processing in SICAM PQS
NOTE
i SICAM PQS allows you, among others, to analyze power quality data. Different routing modules are avail-
able for recorder routing in DIGSI 5. These modules can have different calculation methods and the refresh
rates of the measurands.
If you record the same measurands using different calculation methods and refresh rates, Siemens recom-
mends routing these measurands to different recorders so that SICAM PQS can process these measurands.
EXAMPLE:
The Routing f and PQ 10/12 cyc routing modules record the measurands with different refresh rates.
Route the same measurands having different calculation methods and refresh rates to different recorders. The
following figure shows an example for suitable routing of similar measurands.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
[sc_pq, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-71 Example for Routing
7.6.2 Recorder Routing V

The Recorder routing V function starts when there is an exceedance of the set frequency and voltage toler-
ance values.
You can find more information on the Recorder routing V function in chapter 6.1.2 Structure of the Function
Group.

The Recorder routing V function is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the function group Voltage 3-
phase, the Recorder routing V function can be operated only once.
You can find more information on the Recorder routing V function in 6.1.2 Structure of the Function Group
and 7.6.1.2 Using Measurands .
7.6.2.3 Indications
Indications can be routed on recorders that are available via the GOOSE configurator.
Only SPS indications can be routed in DIGSI 5.
Table 7-19 Using SPS Indications

FSR SSR CR TR
SPS indications Event-based X X X

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Settings of the Recorder Routing V Function
[sc_recrou, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-72 Settings of the Recorder Routing V
This representation applies in a similar manner to the Recorder routing VI function.

The Recorder routing V function can only be added to the Voltage 3-phase function group.
Help.
Parameter: Tol. trend frequency
• Default setting (_:15271:101) Tol. trend frequency = 0.200 %

Using the parameter Tol. trend frequency, you set the tolerance range for the frequency measured
value at which a new RMS value is recorded following an exceedance.
The setting value refers to the rated frequency set as a parameter.
Parameter: Tol. trend voltage
• Default setting (_:15271:102) Tol. trend voltage = 2.000 %

Using the parameter Tol. trend voltage, you set the tolerance range for the voltage measured value at
which a new RMS value is recorded following an exceedance.
The setting value refers to the rated voltage set as a parameter.
7.6.2.5 Settings

General
_:15271:101 General:Tol. trend 0.010 % to 1.000 % 0.200 %
frequency
voltage

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Frequency

(Type)
Routing f
_:301 Routing f:f MV O
Voltage

(Type)
Routing V
_:300 Routing V:Vph rms WYE O
_:301 Routing V:Vpp rms DEL O
_:302 Routing V:VN rms MV O
_:303 Routing V:Vph fd. WYE O
_:304 Routing V:Vpp fd. DEL O
_:305 Routing V:VN fd. CMV O
_:306 Routing V:V0 CMV O
PQ 10/12 Cycles

(Type)
PQ 10/12cyc
_:300 PQ 10/12cyc:f MV O
_:301 PQ 10/12cyc:Vph rms WYE O
_:302 PQ 10/12cyc:Vpp rms DEL O
_:303 PQ 10/12cyc:VN rms MV O
_:304 PQ 10/12cyc:u0 MV O
_:305 PQ 10/12cyc:u2 MV O
PQ 10/12cyc Har
_:300 PQ 10/12cyc Har:Vph HWYE O
_:301 PQ 10/12cyc Har:Vpp HDEL O
_:302 PQ 10/12cyc Har:VN HMV O
_:305 PQ 10/12cyc Har:THDS-Vph WYE O
_:306 PQ 10/12cyc Har:THDS-Vpp DEL O
PQ 10/12cyc IntH
_:300 PQ 10/12cyc IntH:Vph HWYE O
_:301 PQ 10/12cyc IntH:Vpp HDEL O
_:302 PQ 10/12cyc IntH:VN HMV O
PQ 150/180 Cycles

(Type)
PQ 150/180cyc Har

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

(Type)
PQ 150/180cyc IntH
PQ Trend

(Type)
PQ trend
_:300 PQ trend:f MV O
_:301 PQ trend:Vph rms WYE O
_:302 PQ trend:Vpp rms DEL O
PQ Flicker

(Type)
PQ flicker
_:300 PQ flicker:Pst ph WYE O
_:301 PQ flicker:Plt ph WYE O
_:302 PQ flicker:Pinst ph WYE O
_:303 PQ flicker:Pimx ph WYE O
_:304 PQ flicker:Pst pp DEL O
_:305 PQ flicker:Plt pp DEL O
_:306 PQ flicker:Pinst pp DEL O
_:307 PQ flicker:Pimx pp DEL O
7.6.3 Recorder Routing VI 1-Phase

You can find more information on the Recorder routing VI function in chapter 6.2.2 Structure of the Function
Group.

Within the Voltage/current 1-phase function group, the Recorder routing VI function can be operated only
once.
You can find more information on the Recorder routing VI function in 6.2.2 Structure of the Function Group
Parameters of the Recorder Routing VI Function

The Recorder routing VI function can only be added to the Voltage/current 1-phase function group.
Help.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Frequency

(Type)
Routing f
Current

(Type)
Routing I
_:300 Routing I:Iph rms MV O
_:306 Routing I:Iph fd. CMV O
Voltage

(Type)
Routing V
_:302 Routing V:Vph rms MV O
_:306 Routing V:Vph fd. CMV O
Power

(Type)
Routing Pwr
_:305 Routing Pwr:P MV O
_:306 Routing Pwr:Q MV O
7.6.4 Recorder Routing VI 3-Phase

You can find more information on the Recorder routing VI function in chapter 6.3.2 Structure of the Function
Group.

The Recorder routing VI function is preconfigured once at the factory. Within the function group Recorder
routing VI, the Recorder routing VI function can be operated only once.
You can find more information on the Recorder routing VI function in 6.3.2 Structure of the Function Group
Settings of the Recorder Routing VI Function

The Recorder routing VI function can only be added to the Voltage/current 3-phase function group.
Help.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Parameter: Tol. trend frequency
• Default setting (_:15241:101) Tol. trend frequency = 0.200 %

Using the parameter Tol. trend frequency, you set the tolerance range for the frequency measured
value at which a new RMS value is recorded following an exceedance.
The setting value refers to the rated frequency set as a parameter.
Parameter: Tol. trend voltage
• Default setting (_:15241:102) Tol. trend voltage = 2.000 %

Using the parameter Tol. trend voltage, you set the tolerance range for the voltage measured value at
which a new RMS value is recorded following an exceedance.
The setting value refers to the rated voltage set as a parameter.
7.6.4.4 Settings

General
frequency
voltage
Frequency

(Type)
Routing f
Current

(Type)
Routing I
_:300 Routing I:Iph rms WYE O
_:301 Routing I:IN rms MV O
_:302 Routing I:Iph fd. WYE O
_:303 Routing I:IN fd. CMV O
_:304 Routing I:I0 CMV O
Voltage

(Type)
Routing V
_:300 Routing V:Vph rms WYE O
_:301 Routing V:Vpp rms DEL O
_:302 Routing V:VN rms MV O
_:303 Routing V:Vph fd. WYE O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder

(Type)
_:304 Routing V:Vpp fd. DEL O
_:305 Routing V:VN fd. CMV O
Power

(Type)
Routing Pwr
_:300 Routing Pwr:P tot MV O
_:301 Routing Pwr:Q tot MV O
_:302 Routing Pwr:S tot MV O
_:303 Routing Pwr:PF tot MV O
_:305 Routing Pwr:P WYE O
_:306 Routing Pwr:Q WYE O
_:307 Routing Pwr:S WYE O
_:308 Routing Pwr:PF WYE O
PQ 10/12 Cycles

(Type)
PQ 10/12cyc
_:300 PQ 10/12cyc:f MV O
_:301 PQ 10/12cyc:Vph rms WYE O
_:302 PQ 10/12cyc:Vpp rms DEL O
_:303 PQ 10/12cyc:VN rms MV O
_:304 PQ 10/12cyc:u0 MV O
_:305 PQ 10/12cyc:u2 MV O
PQ 10/12cyc Har
_:303 PQ 10/12cyc Har:Iph HWYE O
_:304 PQ 10/12cyc Har:IN HMV O
_:305 PQ 10/12cyc Har:THDS-Vph WYE O
_:306 PQ 10/12cyc Har:THDS-Vpp DEL O
_:307 PQ 10/12cyc Har:THDS-I WYE O
_:308 PQ 10/12cyc Har:TDD-I WYE O
PQ 10/12cyc IntH
_:303 PQ 10/12cyc IntH:Iph HWYE O
_:304 PQ 10/12cyc IntH:IN HMV O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
PQ 150/180 Cycles

(Type)
PQ 150/180cyc Har
_:303 PQ 150/180cyc Har:Iph HWYE O
_:304 PQ 150/180cyc Har:IN HMV O
PQ 150/180cyc IntH
_:303 PQ 150/180cyc IntH:Iph HWYE O
_:304 PQ 150/180cyc IntH:IN HMV O
PQ Trend

(Type)
PQ trend
_:300 PQ trend:f MV O
_:301 PQ trend:Vph rms WYE O
_:302 PQ trend:Vpp rms DEL O
PQ Flicker

(Type)
PQ flicker
_:300 PQ flicker:Pst ph WYE O
_:301 PQ flicker:Plt ph WYE O
_:302 PQ flicker:Pinst ph WYE O
_:303 PQ flicker:Pimx ph WYE O
_:304 PQ flicker:Pst pp DEL O
_:305 PQ flicker:Plt pp DEL O
_:306 PQ flicker:Pinst pp DEL O
_:307 PQ flicker:Pimx pp DEL O
7.6.5 V/I Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs

You can find a detailed description of the function V/I measuring-transducer unit with fast inputs in chapter
Analog Units 6.6.6.1 Overview.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Fault Recorder
Measuring-Transducer Measurands – I/O Modules (for example, IO212)

(Type)
MT in #
_:306 MT in #:TD scale SAV SAV O
Measuring-Transducer Measurands – Measuring-Transducer Module (for example, ANAI-CA-4EL)

(Type)
MT in #
_:302 MT in #:TD direct MV MV O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
8 Control Functions
8.1 Introduction 428

8.2 Switching Devices 431
8.3 Control Functionality 450
8.4 User-Defined Function Block [Control] 466
8.5 CFC-Chart Settings 471

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
8.1 Introduction
8.1 Introduction
8.1.1 Overview
The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func-
tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when
providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making the
SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication
protocol. In view of the function blocks necessary for the control functions, other logs are also used.
8.1.2 Concept of Controllables
The concept of so-called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850. Controllables are
objects that can be controlled, such as a switch with feedback. The model of a transformer tap changer, for
example, contains controllables. The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type (for
example, DPC = Double Point Controllable/Double Command with feedback or BSC = Binary-Controlled Step
Position Indication / transformer tap command with feedback).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
8.1 Introduction
[sc_control, 1, en_US]
(1) Position (connect with binary inputs)

(2) Signalization of the current condition
(3) Command output (connect with relay)
The trip, opening, and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice
between saved and unsaved output is possible. The position is connected with 2 binary inputs (double-point
indication). In addition, signals are available that display the current state of the switch (not selected, off, on,
intermediate position, disturbed position). These signals can be queried in CFC, for example, in order to
build interlocking conditions.
Control Models
You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
8.1 Introduction
4 different control models are available:
• Direct without feedback monitoring (direct w. normal secur.)
• With reservation (SBO)21 without feedback monitoring (SBO w. normal secur.)
• Direct with feedback monitoring (direct w. enh. security)
• With SBO with feedback monitoring (SBO w. enh. security)

The next figure shows the command sources, command types, and control models.
[dw_steuer, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-1 Command Sources, Command Types, and Control Models
The figure shows the control models (right) with the respective control mechanisms (center). The standard
control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring
(SBO w. enh. security). This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices.
21 SBO: Select Before Operate

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
8.2 Switching Devices
8.2.1 General Overview
The following switching devices can be found in the DIGSI 5 library in the Circuit-breaker and Switching-
devices function groups (see following figures).
[sc_swi. device FG CB 7SJ81, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-2 Selecting the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device Using the DIGSI Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Menu
8.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker
8.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device

This chapter describes the control properties of the Circuit-breaker switching device.
The Circuit-breaker switching device contains the following function blocks that are needed for control:
• Function block Circuit breaker
• Function block Control
• Function block Interlocking

This corresponds to the logical nodes XCBR, CSWI, and CILO in IEC 61850.
In the case of protection devices or combined protection and control devices, additional functions can be
contained in the Circuit-breaker switching device, for example, Synchrocheck, the Automatic reclosing
(AREC), the Trip logic, or Manual On function. However, these are not relevant for the control function. You
can find the description of these functions in the chapter Protection and Automatic Functions. In addition,
other functions can be initialized. You can find the description of these functions in the chapter Protection
Functions.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[dw_breake, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-3 Control Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device
The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via information
routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching
commands.
NOTE
i When setting the parameters of a device, you will find 2 circuit-breaker types in the DIGSI 5 library:
- 3-pole circuit breaker or 1-pole circuit breaker, depending on the device type selected (3-pole or 1-pole
tripping)
- Circuit breaker (status only)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
Function Blocks of the Circuit Breaker
Table 8-1 Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Function Description Parameter Function

Block
Circuit The Circuit-breaker function Output time The circuit breaker forms the
breaker block in the SIPROTEC 5 switch position from the posi-
device represents the physical tions of the binary inputs and
switch. also outputs the command via
the binary outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command check, communica-
SBO time-out tion with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the function
block Circuit breaker
Check switching
authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Check blk. by protection
Inter- Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (depos- The Interlocking functionality
locking protection ited in CFC) generates the releases for
switchgear interlocking
protection.
The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 8.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Additional Setting Options of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Element

The setting options of the circuit breaker are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance.
Additional setting options of the circuit breakers that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function
blocks are nevertheless available:
Table 8-2 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker.
Properties Function To Be Found in

Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Control function
detection block 22
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Control function
filtering time on/off by changing block22
the position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control function
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection block22
time stamp
Suppress intermediate When activated, only the inter- Position of the Control function
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed by block22
the duration of the software
filtering time.
22 First click Position and then click the Details key in the Properties window (below).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions

Treatment of spontaneous If you select the General soft- Position of the Control function
position changes (Gen. Soft- ware filter setting, the general block22
ware Filt./Spont. Software Filt.) settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and
for position changes caused by a
switching command apply. By
selecting Spontaneous soft-
ware filter, a separate filtering
is activated for spontaneous posi-
tion changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the Control function
filtering time neous position changes block22
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the Control function
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- block22
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control function
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection block22
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Inhibit intermediate posi- When activated, only the sponta- Position of the Control function
tion for a spontaneous neous change to the intermediate block22
chng. (yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.
Table 8-3 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Circuit-breaker
function block22
Table 8-4 Additional Settings in the Device Settings Having Effects on the Circuit Breaker

Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
status changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Number of chatter tests
Chatter idle time
Chatter check time
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Circuit-breaker and Control function blocks are
described in the next section (see 8.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker).
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see the general chapter
8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
Circuit Breaker
The Circuit-breaker function block in the SIPROTEC 5 device represents the physical switch device. The task of
the circuit breaker is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.
[dw_func_ls, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-4 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Blocks
Table 8-5 and Table 8-6 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
EXAMPLE
If the signal >Ready has the Quality = invalid, then the value is set to cleared. In problematic operating
states, the circuit breaker should signal that it is not ready for an Off-On-Off cycle.
Table 8-5 Inputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
>Ready The signal >Ready indicates that the OFF-ON-OFF SPS Going
cycle is possible with the circuit breaker.
This signal is used for the AREC standby status.
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting the acquisition blocking and the substi-
tution is blocked.
>Reset switch Among other things, the binary input sets the opera- SPS Unchanged
statist. tion counter for the switch to the value 0.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
External health The binary input External health reflects the ENS Unchanged
circuit-breaker status (EHealth).
This input will be set by the CFC using the BUILD_ENS
block. In turn, BUILD_ENS can query binary inputs that
represent the conditions OK, Warning, or Alarm (as
a result of the function Trip-circuit supervision).
Position The signal Position can be used to read the circuit- DPC Unchanged
breaker position with double-point indication.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (EHealth) of the
Circuit-breaker function block is set to Warning.
Table 8-6 Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type

Definitive trip Protection has finally been tripped. SPS
Alarm suppression The signaling contact for external alarm inhibition is suppressed during SPS
the runtime of automatic reclosing (optional) as well as during the
command output of switching commands.
Op.ct. The information counts the number of switching cycles of the circuit INS
breaker.
Trip/open cmd. This logic output is responsible for the command output Off. SPS
Close command This logic output is responsible for the command output On. SPS
Command active The binary output Command active is responsible for signaling a SPS
running command (relay active or selected switching device (SEL)).
CB open hours The statistical value counts the hours the circuit breaker is open. INS
Operating hours The statistical value counts the hours where at least one phase current is INS
greater than the Current thresh. CB open parameter.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the circuit breaker. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation23), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These 2 options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security24 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
23 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
24 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values

(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 1.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
(_:4201:107) Check blk. by protection yes no
yes
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Control function block.
[dw_steue1, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-5 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Control Function Block
Table 8-7 Control Function Block Input and Output
Signal Description Type Value if Signal

Name Quality=Invalid
Cmd. with With the Cmd. with feedback signal, the circuit- Controllable Unchanged
feedback breaker position is accepted via the double-point indi- (DPC)
cation of the Circuit-breaker function block and the Unchanged
command is issued.
In the information routing of DIGSI 5, you may select a function key as a possible command source. In addi-
tion, it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC. The logging is routed here.
8.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker

For each switching device, you can establish the number of poles (for example, 1-pole, 1.5-pole or 2-pole)
that are switched with or without feedback. This results in the necessary amount of information to be
processed, thus establishing the command type.
Whether the circuit breaker is triggered 1-, 1.5-, or 2-pole, depends on the design of the auxiliary and control-
voltage system. In most cases, the activation of the opening coil of the circuit breaker is 1-pole.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
Table 8-8 Meaning of the Abbreviations of the Connection Variants
Abbreviation Meaning of the Abbreviation of the Connection Variants

BO Binary output
L+; L- Control voltage
A Trip command
Gnd Close command
Table 8-9 Meaning of the Abbreviations in DIGSI
Abbreviation Description of the Input in DIGSI

V Unsaved trip command
Click the right mouse button and enter V.
X Close Command
Click the right mouse button and enter X for the respective binary output.
OH The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter OH.
OL The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (L).
Click the right mouse button and enter OL.
CH The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CH.
CL The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CL.
TL Trip command stored
Click the right mouse button and enter TL.
Connection Variant: 3-Pole Circuit Breaker

This is the standard type for the control function. All 3 individual poles of the circuit breaker are triggered
together by a double command.
[dw_3-pole_ls, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-6 3-Pole Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
1-Pole Triggering
[dw_1-pole, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-7 1-Pole Triggering
[sc_rang1p_cb1p, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-8 1-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another. The
letter U represents an unlatched command. Alternatively, TL (latched tripping) can be selected.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
1.5-Pole Triggering
[dw_5-pole, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-9 1.5-Pole Triggering
[sc_rang_1p_cb15p, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-10 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
2-Pole Triggering
[dw_2-pole-open, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-11 2-Pole Triggering
[sc_rang_1p_cb13p, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-12 2-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
Connection Variant: 1-Pole Circuit Breaker

The 1-pole circuit breaker is used for separate activation and acquisition of the individual poles of a circuit
breaker. It is intended for common use by 1-pole protection and control functions.
NOTE
i The wiring of the Circuit-breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs once per
device.
The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
The protection functions can switch off 1-pole. The close command is always 3-pole. Optionally, only the open
poles are closed.
[dw_1polls, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-13 Circuit Breaker with 1-Pole Triggering
For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip
command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).
[dw_1panls, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-14 1-Pole Connection of a Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_rang_1p_cb13pz, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-15 Routing in DIGSI
In the previous figure, the switch is connected 1-pole. The protection trip command is routed individually for
the 3 phases (Trip only pole A to Trip only pole C). The protection trip command is routed for the
3 phases (Trip/open cmd. 3-pole). The control always switches off the 3 poles of the switch. In addition,
the 3 U (Unlatched) routings of the trip and open command are set to 3-pole. This routing is also used by
protection functions that trip 3 poles. The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases.
Example: Trip Command during Transition from 1-Pole to 3-Pole

During a transition from 1-pole to 3-pole tripping, Trip only pole A remains active. To inform, for
example, an external AREC whether it is a 1-pole or 3-pole trip, you can use the indication Trip
logic:Trip indication:1-pole and Trip logic:Trip indication:3-pole.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[dw_trip-command_between_1p-3p, 1, en_US]
Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Position

The binary inputs for feedback of the switch position are routed as shown in the previous figure (also see
chapter 6.4.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information ).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_rang_1p_cb_Hk, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-16 Routing of the 1-Pole in DIGSI
You can find the meaning of the abbreviations in Table 8-8 and Table 8-9.
The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if
either a close or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.
8.2.2.4 Settings

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
normal current
_:2311:102 General:Rated 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
thresh. CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:113 General:1-pole • no yes
operate allowed
• yes

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions

_:2311:136 General:Op. mode • unbalancing unbalancing
BFP
• I> query
Trip logic
_:5341:101 Trip logic:Trip at • 3-pole 3-pole
2ph short circuit
• 1-pole, leading phase
• 1-pole, lagging phase
_:5341:102 Trip logic:3-pole • with pickup with trip
coupling
• with trip
_:5341:103 Trip logic:Reset of • with I< with I<
trip command
• with dropout
Circuit break.
_:4261:101 Circuit 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
break.:Output time
_:4261:105 Circuit • with trip always
break.:Indicat. of
breaking values
• always
Manual close
_:6541:101 Manual 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
close:Action time
_:6541:102 Manual close:CB 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
open dropout delay
Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control • status only SBO w. enh.
model security
• direct w. normal secur.
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
out
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
monitoring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:4201:105 Control:Check if • no yes
pos. is reached
• yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check • no yes
double activat. blk.
• yes
_:4201:107 Control:Check blk. • no yes
by protection
• yes
Switching authority
_:4201:151 Control:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:4201:152 Control:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities
• 1

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions

_:4201:115 Control:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:4201:153 Control:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:4201:155 Control:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 1
sw.auth. 2
sw.auth. 3
sw.auth. 4
sw.auth. 5
_:4201:154 Control:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth.
• 1
CB test
_:6151:101 CB test:Dead time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
_:6151:102 CB test:Trip only • 0 false
• 1
_:6151:103 CB test:Consider • 0 false
current criterion
• 1
_:6151:104 CB test:Current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

(Type)
Trip logic
_:5341:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready PLC I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking PLC I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. PLC I
_:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst PLC I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position 3-pole DPC C
_:4261:459 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsA DPC C
_:4261:460 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsB DPC C
_:4261:461 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsC DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole PLC O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions

(Type)
_:4261:401 Circuit break.:Trip only pole A PLC O
_:4261:402 Circuit break.:Trip only pole B PLC O
_:4261:403 Circuit break.:Trip only pole C PLC O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command PLC O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active PLC O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip PLC O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression PLC O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:407 Circuit break.:Op.ct. A INS O
_:4261:408 Circuit break.:Op.ct. B INS O
_:4261:409 Circuit break.:Op.ct. C INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Break. current 3I0/IN MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
Manual close
_:6541:501 Manual close:>Block manual close PLC I
_:6541:500 Manual close:>Input PLC I
_:6541:300 Manual close:Detected PLC O
Reset LED Group
_:13381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset PLC I
_:13381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset PLC O
Control
_:4201:503 Control:>Sw. authority local PLC I
_:4201:504 Control:>Sw. authority remote PLC I
_:4201:505 Control:>Sw. mode interlocked PLC I
_:4201:506 Control:>Sw. mode non-interl. PLC I
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
_:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:4201:308 Control:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:4201:313 Control:Switching authority ENS O
_:4201:314 Control:Switching mode ENS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions

(Type)
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening PLC I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing PLC I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening(fixed) PLC I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) PLC I
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
CB test
_:6151:53 CB test:Health ENS O
_:6151:301 CB test:Test execution ENS O
_:6151:302 CB test:Trip command issued ENS O
_:6151:303 CB test:Close command issued ENS O
_:6151:304 CB test:Test canceled ENS O
_:6151:311 CB test:3-pole open-close SPC C
_:6151:312 CB test:Pole A open-close SPC C
_:6151:313 CB test:Pole B open-close SPC C
_:6151:314 CB test:Pole C open-close SPC C

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
8.3 Control Functionality
8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection
Before switching commands can be issued by the SIPROTEC 5 device, several steps are used to check the
command:
• Switching mode (interlocked/non-interlocked)
• Switching authority (local/DIGSI/station/remote)
• Switching direction (set=actual)
• Bay interlocking and substation interlocking
• 1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking)
• Blocking by protection function
Confirmation IDs (with Inactive RBAC)

SIPROTEC 5 devices can operate using role-based access control (RBAC). If RBAC is active in the device, the
authorizations to execute various actions are linked directly to the role concept.
If RBAC is inactive in the device, various actions are secured using the confirmation IDs. The following confir-
mation IDs from the Safety menu apply to the control functions:
[sc_conf, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-17 Confirmation IDs in DIGSI 5: Settings Menu
The following table identifies the meanings of the confirmation IDs:
Table 8-10 Relevant Confirmation IDs for Controls
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Set/operate Changing settings The confirmation ID is requested before device
parameters can be changed..
Operation (function keys) Process data access via Access to process data is possible with the help of
function buttons push-buttons and function buttons. The confirma-
tion ID of Set/operation is requested.
Control (process) General release for control The confirmation ID is usually not needed for bay
of switching devices controllers. In the case of protection devices, this
confirmation ID can be used to safeguard control
of switching devices.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Control (non-interlocked) Switching non-interlocked Switching mode:
Release for switching without querying the inter-
locking conditions (S1 operation). The fixed
interlocking conditions (for example, >Enable
opening(fixed) and >Enable closing
(fixed)) are still queried if this is set in the
parameters.
The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
Switching authority Release for switching The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
authority Local without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
The confirmation IDs are preset with the following values:
• Set/operate 222222
• Control (process, interlocked) 333333
• Control (not-interlocked) 444444
• Switching authority local 666666

If you have configured a device with key switches, the confirmation IDs for non-interlocked switching and
switching authority are not displayed or editable in DIGSI; the function is handled by the position of the key
switch.
To increase security, change these codes with DIGSI.
Switching Mode (Interlocked/Non-Interlocked)

The switching mode determines whether or not the switchgear interlocking that has been configured in the
CFC is checked before the command is output.
You can change the switching mode with the key switch S1 (interlocking off/normal). For devices without a
key switch, you can change the switching mode with a corresponding menu item on the display (after
entering a confirmation ID). You can also set the switching mode for switching commands from the sources
DIGSI, station or remote.
! DANGER
If the switching mode = non-interlocked, the switchgear interlocking protection is shut off.
Erroneous switching operations can lead to severe or fatal injuries.
² Ensure manually that all checks have been implemented.
In addition, you can set the switching mode directly with a binary input or CFC. Use the General function
block (see next figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_moscha, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-18 Switching Mode in Function Block General
The following table shows the effects of changing the switching mode to use command checks.
Table 8-11 Relationship Between Switching Mode and Command Checks
Command Check Switching Mode

Interlocked Non-Interlocked
Switching authority Checked Checked
Switching direction (set=actual) Checked Checked
Fixed interlocking conditions Checked Checked
Interlocking conditions Checked Not checked
1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking) Checked Not checked
Blocking by protection function Checked Not checked
Switching Authority
The switching authority determines which command source is allowed. The following command sources are
possible:
• Local:
A switching command from the local control (cause-of-error source Local) is possible only if the
switching authority is set to Local and the device is capable of on-site operation. Setting the switching
authority to Local is typically accomplished with key switch S5 (Local/Remote). In this case, commands
from all other sources are rejected. If the switching authority is set to Local, the setting cannot be
changed remotely.
• DIGSI:
A switching command from DIGSI (connected via USB or Ethernet, cause-of-error source Maintenance) is
accepted only if the switching authority in the device is set to Remote. Once DIGSI has signed on the
device for command output, no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be
executed.
• Station:
This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block. A switching
command from the station level (cause-of-error source Station or Automatic station) is accepted if the
switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is set. This is
accomplished by a command from the substation automation technology. Switching commands from the
device or from outside the station (cause-of-error source Local, Remote or Automatic remote) are
rejected.
Full support of the this switching authority level is assured only when using the IEC 61850 protocol.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
• Remote:
This switching authority level stands from remote control directly from the network control center or (if
the switching authority level Station is not activated) generally for Remote control. The cause-of-error
source is Automatic remote. Commands from this level are accepted if the switching authority is set to
Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is not set. Switching commands from the
device or from the station (cause-of-error source Local, Station or Automatic station) are rejected.
[sc_authority, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-19 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in Information Routing (in Function Block
General)
Sw. authority key/set and Sw.mode key/set indicate the current state of the key switch or parameter for
switching authority or switching mode and provide this information for further processing in the CFC. In the
CFC, for example, it is possible to set up an automatic routine to ensure that the switching authority is auto-
matically set to Local when the key switch is set to non-interlocked.
The following table shows the dependency of the switching mode on the key-switch position and the
switching authority. In the case of switching commands from Remote, the information on whether a locked
or non-interlocked switching should take place is also sent. For this reason, the position of the key switch is
irrelevant for the switching mode in these cases. The information in the table assumes that, in the case of
remote switching commands or those from the station, the switching mode is interlocked in each case.
Table 8-12 Dependency of the Switching Mode on the Key-Switch Position and Switching Authority
Switching Authority
Key Switch for Switching Mode Local Remote Station
Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked
Not interlocked Non-interlocked Interlocked Interlocked

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
The signals shown in Figure 8-19 in DIGSI 5 information routing have the following relationship:
• In terms of switching authority and switching mode, the respective key switch position serves as the
input signal and the input signals in the matrix.
• The state of the switching authority and switching mode is indicated by corresponding output signals.
• The Switching authority and Switching mode functions link the input signals and in this way establish
the output signals (see Figure 8-20 and Figure 8-21).
[dw_authority, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-20 Establishing Switching Authority
[dw_modsch, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-21 Establishing Switching Mode
In the case of both functions, the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch. This allows external
inputs to also set the switching authority or switching mode, if desired (for instance, by querying an external
key switch).
The Station switching authority exists only if it has been enabled in the settings of the General function block
(see the following figure). By activating the Several switching authority levels check box at this point, you

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
can specify that switching commands from several command sources are allowed when Remote switching
authority is set in the device.
NOTE
i This is determined in Edition 2 of IEC 61850.
[sc_akt_hoh, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-22 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching-Authority
Levels
Table 8-13 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching-Authority Levels Are Enabled and the
Station Switching Authority Is Activated
Release Several Switching Status of DIGSI Station State of the Resulting

Switching Authority in the in the Device Switching Station Switching
Authority Device Authority Acti- Switching Authority
Levels vated Authority
Local – – – Local
No Signed on – – DIGSI
Remote No – Station and

Not signed on
remote
Yes Set Station
Not set Remote
Local – – – Local
Yes Signed on – – DIGSI
Remote No – Local and station

Not signed on
and remote
Yes Set Local and station
Not set Local and station
and remote
The following table presents an overview of the result of a switching-authority check based on the set
switching authority and the cause of the command.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
Table 8-14 Result of a Switching-Authority Check
Cause Source Switching Authority

Local DIGSI Station Remote
Local Release Blocked Blocked Blocked
Station Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
Remote Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
Local automatic Release Release Release Release
operation
Station automatic Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
operation
Remote automatic Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
operation
DIGSI Blocked Release Blocked Blocked
Switching Direction (Set = Actual)

With this check, you avoid switching a switching device into a state that has already been achieved. For
instance, before a trip command is issued to a circuit breaker, its current position is determined. If this circuit
breaker is already in the Off position, no command is issued. This is logged accordingly.
Switchgear Interlocking Protection

Switchgear interlocking protection means avoiding maloperation by checking the bay and substation inter-
locking and thus preventing equipment damage and personal injury. The interlocking conditions are always
system-specific and for this reason are stored as CFC charts in the devices.
SIPROTEC 5 devices recognize 2 different types of interlocking conditions:
• Normal interlocking conditions:

These can be revoked by changing the switching mode to non-interlocked.
• Non-revocable (fixed) interlocking conditions:

These are still checked even if the switching mode is set to non-interlocked.
Application: Replacing mechanical interlocking, for example, that prevent actuation of a medium-
voltage switch.
Each of the 2 categories has 2 release signals (for the On and Off switching directions) that represent the
result of the interlocking plan, so that interlocking is in effect during the command check (see the figure
below). The default setting for all release signals is TRUE, so that no switchgear interlocking checks take place
if no CFC charts have been prepared.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_verrie, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-23 Interlocking Signals in Function Block Interlocking
EXAMPLE
For interlocking
For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 (see the figure below), it is necessary to check
whether the disconnectors QB1, QB2, and QB9 are in the defined position, that is, either On or Off. Opening
the circuit breaker QA should be possible at any time.
The interlocking equations are: QA_On = ((QB1 = On) or (QB1 = Off)) and ((QB2 = On) or (QB2 = Off)) and
((QB9 = On) or (QB9 = Off)). There is no condition for opening.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_abgang, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-24 Feeder Bay for a Double Busbar System
The CFC chart that is required to implement the interlocking equation is shown in the next figure.
[sc_verpla, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-25 Interlocking Chart for Bay Interlocking
Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off, the exclusive OR gate XOR is
not necessary for the linkage. A simple OR suffices.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
As can be seen in the CFC chart, the result of the check is connected to the >Release on signal in the
Interlocking function block in the Circuit breaker QA function group (see Figure 8-25).
EXAMPLE
For system interlocking

This example considers the feeder = E01 from the previous example (bay interlocking) and additionally the
coupler bay = E02 (see the figure below).
[sc_system, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-26 System with Feeder and Coupler Bays
The circuit breaker QA in coupler bay = E02 will be considered next. As the multibay interlocking condition,
you must provide the bus-coupler circuit-breaker command block at the end:
If the 2 busbars in bay = E01 are connected, that is, if the 2 disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay =E01 are
closed, the circuit breaker QA in bay = E02 is not allowed to be switched off. Accordingly, bay = E01 in the CFC
of the device generates the indication Bus coupler closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and
QB2 and, using IEC 61850-GOOSE, transmits it to bay = E02 in the device. You must then store the following
interlocking condition in bay = E02:
QA_Off = NOT (= E01/Bus coupler closed)
In the CFC chart for the coupling device = E02, you must create the following CFC chart (see the figure below).
[sc_planve, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-27 Interlocking Chart for Substation Interlocking

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
1-Out-of-n Check (Double-Activation Blocking)

The double-activation blocking prevents 2 commands from being executed in the device simultaneously. You
can set the device-internal check for each switching device as a parameter in the Control function block.
The default setting is Yes, that is, double-activation blocking is active (see the figure below).
[sc_double, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-28 Activating the Double-Activation Blocking
With SIPROTEC 5, it is also possible to achieve multibay double-activation blocking.

In this case, send the signal not selected to other devices for analysis using IEC 61850-GOOSE. This signal
is available under Position in every Circuit-breaker or Disconnector function block in the switching device
function groups (see figure below).
[sc_notselected, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-29 Signal Not selected in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used
to generate the release signal (for example, >Release on).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
8.3.2 Command Logging
All commands in the sequence are logged. The command log contains:
• Date and time
• Name of the switching device (or function group)
• Reason for the transmission (SEL = Selected, OPR = Operate, CMT = Command execution end, SPN =
Spontaneous)
• Status or switching direction
EXAMPLE
The following example illustrates control of a disconnector QB1 for various cases.
• Successful command output
• Interrupted command
• Command interrupted by switchgear interlocking
• Command ended due to missing feedback
• Spontaneous change of switch position without command output

Figure 8-30 to Figure 8-36 indicates command logging for various scenarios of the standard control model
SBO with feedback monitoring.
[sc_poscas, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-30 Positive Case (Display 1)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_posca2, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-31 Positive Case (Display 2)
[sc_poscan, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-32 Positive Case with Command Cancellation

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_negint, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-33 Negative Case (Blocked by Switchgear Interlocking)
[sc_negtim, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-34 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 1)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_negti2, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-35 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 2)
[sc_sponta, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-36 Spontaneous Status Change
Depending on the transmission reason, the desired control value or the actual state value of the controllable
and the switching device can be contained in the log.
The following table shows the relationship.
Table 8-15 Relationship between the Reason for Transmission and the Value Logged
Reason for Transmission Value

Selected (SEL) Desired value
Operate (OPR) Desired value

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
Reason for Transmission Value

Command cancellation (CNC) Desired value
Command execution and termination (CMT) Actual value
Spontaneous change (SPN) Actual value
8.3.3 Settings

Control
_:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
• direct w. normal secur.
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
toring time
_:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority
• yes
_:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached
• yes
_:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
_:107 Control:Check blk. by • no yes
protection
• yes

(Type)
Control
_:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
8.4 User-Defined Function Block [Control]
The User-defined function block [control] allows the switching-authority check of a control command, the
check of whether the position has been reached, a double-activation blocking, and the definition of inter-
locking conditions for user-defined controllables.
The User-defined function block [control] is located in the folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5
Library.
You can instantiate the user-defined function blocks on the top level (in parallel to other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
The task of the function block is to check the switching authority and the interlocking conditions for the user-
defined control commands instantiated within it. For these control commands, the function block checks
whether the required switch position is equal to the current switch position (actual/set point comparison). If
you activate the double-activation blocking, commands from switching objects and user-defined control
signals will be rejected as long as a command is still being performed for one of the other switching objects
for which double-activation blocking has also been set.
With the binary release signals, you can determine a switchgear interlocking protection for all the user-defined
control signals instantiated in the function block. Unlike the switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector),
there is only one release input here, since there is only one switching direction for the signal types INC and
APC. The signal types DPC, SPC, and BSC have 2 switching directions, but still only one release input. This
release input can be operated based on the result of a logic created in the CFC, or can be directly connected to
a binary input or a variable. If the input >Enable is activated, the switching command can be performed. If it
is not activated, the switching command is rejected, with the reason Interlocking violation.
This applies in a similar way to the input >Enable (fixed), although with this input, the interlocking
cannot be revoked by key switch S1 or an unlocked switching authority.
The following table shows the reaction of the function to the assignment of its inputs.
Input >Enable Input >Enable (fixed) Effect on control command
1 0 Rejected
0 1 Successful if device mode = unlocked
Rejected if device mode = locked
1 1 Successful
0 0 Rejected
NOTE
i The default setting for the state of the inputs is 1, that is, the switching commands are not locked.
You can instantiate every user-defined signal (for example, SPS, DPC, INC) in the function block and route the
corresponding indications (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_user_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-37 Information Routing with Inserted User-Defined Function Block [Control]: Process Indications
and Some Single-Point Indications
The function block contains the parameters (_:104) Check switching authority, (_:105) Check
if pos. is reached, (_:106) Check double activat. blk., and (_:150) Check swi.auth.
for Mode. The parameter settings Check switching authority and Check if pos. is reached
affect all controllables instantiated in the function block. Other signal types are not affected by these parame-
ters and objects.
On the other hand, the parameter setting Check swi.auth. for Mode affects the controllable Mode
(controllable) of the function block.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
[sc_user_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-38 Parameterization Options of the User-Defined Function Block [Control]
Parameter: Check switching authority
• Default setting (_:104) Check switching authority = yes

With the Check switching authority parameter, you determine whether the command source of
switching commands must be checked (see chapter 8.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking
Protection).
Parameter: Check if pos. is reached
• Default setting (_:105) Check if pos. is reached = yes

With the Check if pos. is reached parameter, you check at a switching command whether the
switching direction equals the current position.
Parameter: Check double activat. blk.
• Default setting (_:106) Check double activat. blk. = no

With the Check double activat. blk. parameter, you check whether commands from switching
objects and user-defined control signals should be rejected, as long as a command is still being executed for
one of the other objects.
Parameter: Check swi.auth. for Mode
• Default setting (_:150) Check swi.auth. for Mode = no

With the Check swi.auth. for Mode parameter, you specify whether the switching authority for the
command source must be checked when switching the controllable Mode (controllable) to the mode
On, Off, or Test. If you set the parameter Check swi.auth. for Mode to yes, the switching command
is only executed with the appropriate switching authority (see chapter 8.3.1 Command Checks and Switch-
gear Interlocking Protection).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
8.4.4 Settings

U-def.FB ctl.#
_:104 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:105 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check if • no yes
pos. is reached
• yes
_:106 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no no
double activat. blk.
• yes
Switching authority
_:150 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check • no no
swi.auth. for Mode
• yes
_:151 U-def.FB ctl.#:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:152 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific • 0 true
sw. authorities
• 1
_:115 U-def.FB ctl.#:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:153 U-def.FB ctl.#:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:155 U-def.FB ctl.#:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 1
sw.auth. 2
sw.auth. 3
sw.auth. 4
sw.auth. 5
_:154 U-def.FB ctl.#:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth.
• 1

(Type)
U-def.FB ctl.#
_:501 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Enable SPS I
_:502 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Enable (fixed) SPS I
_:503 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:504 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:505 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:506 U-def.FB ctl.#:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:51 U-def.FB ctl.#:Mode (controllable) ENC C

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions

(Type)
_:52 U-def.FB ctl.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 U-def.FB ctl.#:Health ENS O
_:302 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:308 U-def.FB ctl.#:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:313 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching authority ENS O
_:314 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching mode ENS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
8.5 CFC-Chart Settings
If you want to process a parameter in a CFC chart and this parameter is to be changeable during runtime using
DIGSI or HMI, you can use the function blocks CFC chart of Boolean parameters, the CFC chart of integer
parameters and the CFC chart of floating-point parameters. Instantiate the appropriate function block
depending on the parameter value needed (logical, integer, or floating point). In this way, the current value of
the parameter can then be used in the CFC chart at runtime.
You can find the CFC-chart parameters Chrt sett.Bool, Chart setting Int, and Chrt sett.real in
the DIGSI library in the User-defined functions folder. Drag and drop the desired function block into a func-
tion group or a function. Set the appropriate parameter value of the function block in DIGSI using the param-
eter editor or via HMI under the Settings menu item. You can then use the parameter as an input signal in CFC
charts.
With Exp. options, you define the range and the unit of the value. This prevents users from entering incorrect
setting values.
NOTE
i The user-defined function groups and the user-defined functions can be used to group the CFC-chart
parameters. You can rename for the function block and change the parameter value in the DIGSI Informa-
tion routing matrix to suit your specific application.
[sc_cfc_param, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-39 CFC-Chart Parameters within Information Routing

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions
Parameter: Chrt sett.Bool
• Default setting Chrt sett.Bool = False

You can use the parameter Chrt sett.Bool in a CFC chart as an input signal with a Boolean value. This
input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
Parameter: Chart setting Int
• Default setting Chart setting Int = 10

You can use the parameter Chart setting Int in a CFC chart as an input signal with an integer value.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
Parameter: Chrt sett.real
• Default setting Chrt sett.real = 100.000

You can use the parameter Chrt sett.real in a CFC chart as an input signal with a floating-point number.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
8.5.4 Settings

Chrt sett.Bool
_:105 Chrt sett.Bool:Value • 0 false
• 1

Chart setting Int
_:105 Chart setting Int:Value -2147483648 to 10
2147483647

Chrt sett.real
_:105 Chrt sett.real:Value -10000000000.000 % to 100.000 %
10000000000.000 %

(Type)
Chrt sett.Bool
_:305 Chrt sett.Bool:Setting value SPS O

(Type)
Chart setting Int
_:305 Chart setting Int:Setting value INS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Control Functions

(Type)
Chrt sett.real
_:305 Chrt sett.real:Setting value MV O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9 Supervision Functions
9.1 Overview 476

9.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision 477
9.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 481
9.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware 513
9.5 Supervision of Device Firmware 518
9.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration 519
9.7 Supervision of Communication Connections 520
9.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 521
9.9 Group Indications 529

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Supervision Functions
9.1 Overview
9.1 Overview
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous supervi-
sion:
• Ensures the availability of the technology used
• Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device
• Protects persons and primary technical devices
• Offers effective assistance during commissioning and testing

The following areas are monitored:
• Supervision the resource consumption of the application
• Supervision of the secondary system, including the external auxiliary power supply
• Supervision of device hardware
• Supervision of device firmware
• Supervision of hardware configuration
• Supervision of communication connections

When the supervision functions pick up, that will be displayed and also indicated. Error responses are defined
for the device. The error responses are grouped in defect severities.
The supervision functions work selectively. When the supervision functions pick up - as far as possible - only
the affected parts of the hardware and firmware are blocked. If this is not possible, the device goes out of
operation into a secure state (fallback mode). In addition to safety, this warrants a high degree of availability.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
9.2.1 Load Model
SIPROTEC 5 Compactdevices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model
prevents you from overloading the device with an excessively large application.
The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that
an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into
the device.
In this rare case, you must then reduce the application in order to be able to load it into the device.
The load model can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Device information. In
the operating range, select the Resource consumption setting sheet. The following figure shows an example
of the view of the load model in DIGSI 5:
[sc_ressou_n, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-1 Visualization of the Load Model in DIGSI
A green total display for the processor response time indicates that the device is not overloaded by the present
application. On the other hand, if you see a red exclamation mark, the planned application is overloading the
device.
The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas. These areas combine functions with the
same real-time requirements in groups. A green display in front of an area (see Figure 9-1) indicates that the
response times of the functions grouped in this area can be maintained. A red exclamation point indicates that
functions may have longer response times than are specified in the Technical data for the device. In such a
case, loading of the application into the device is blocked.
The following table provides an overview of the functional areas and the most important influencing quanti-
ties on device utilization:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Functional Brief Description Change in Load

Area
CFC event-trig- CFC-charts, which must be Adding or removing CFC charts in the fast event-triggered
gered, fast processed especially fast process range
• Create CFC chart

• Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the fast event-trig-
gered process area
Measuring Provision of measured values Adding or removing
points for measuring functions
• Measuring points (in the Measuring-points routing
Editor)
• Function groups that provide measured-value prepro-
cessing for insertable functions
• FG • Interaction between indi- Adding or removing
connec- vidual function groups, for
tions example, between the FG
• Recorder Functions
• Fast VI 3-phase and the FG • Current and voltage functions
GOOSE recorder • Fast GOOSE connections
• Fast GOOSE communica-
tion
CFC event-trig- CFC charts with a maximum Adding or removing CFC charts in the event-triggered
gered, processing time of 40 ms process range
standard
GOOSE
• Create CFC chart
• Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the event-triggered
process area
• Control • Control and interlocking Adding or removing
• Other • CFC charts in the area of • CFC charts in the control area
Contin- control, measured-value
uous preprocessing, and event-
• Operational measured values
Function controlled • CFC charts in the measured values area
Chart
• Operational measured
• Opera- values
tional
measured
values
If the load model displays a warning, bear in mind the following general instructions:
The areas named in the table are listed in descending order of real-time requirements. If a warning appears to
the effect that the guaranteed response times may be exceeded in an area, you can return to the permitted
area by taking the following measures:
• Reduce the functional scope in the marked area (red exclamation mark)
• Reduce the functional scope in another area with higher real-time requirements
When you have reduced the application, check the display in resource consumption! If a function has been
switched off, it will continue to represent a load for the area. If you do not need the function, delete it rather
than switching it off.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9.2.2 Function Points
When you order a SIPROTEC 5 Compactdevice, you are also ordering a function-points account for use of addi-
tional functions.
The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the
existing function-points account.
[sc_fpunkt, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-2 Resource Overview: Function-Points Consumption
The remaining white bar shows the function points that have not yet been used up by your configuration. The
number of function points available in a device depends on the device purchase order (position 20 of the
product code). You can also order function points subsequently, and so increase the function-points account
for the device.
NOTE
i Find out the function-points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device. For this,
you can use the device configurator. Alternatively, you order the device with 0 function points and create
the license file with the required point credits ad hoc using the SIPROTEC function point manager (see
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope).
9.2.3 CFC Resources
Task Levels of the CFC Function

A CFC chart, and thus the configured CFC function, runs in the SIPROTEC 5 device on exactly one of the 4 task
levels. The individual task levels differ, on the one hand, in the priority of processing tasks and, on the other,
in the cyclic or event-triggered processing of the CFC charts.
You can select between the following task levels:
Task Level Description
High priority Event- Use the High priority Event-triggered task level for time-critical
triggered tasks, for example, if a signal should block a protection function within 2 ms
to 3 ms. Functions on this task level are processed in an event-triggered
way with the highest priority. Each change to a logical input signal is imme-
diately processed. Processing can interrupt the execution of protection func-
tions and functions on the Event-Triggered task level.
Event-triggered Use the Event-triggered task level preferably for logic functions that
need not be executed with highest priority. Each change to a logical input
signal is immediately processed. Protection functions or functions on the
High priority Event-triggered task level can disrupt processing.
Functions on the Event-triggered task level are typically processed
within a maximum of 5 ms in all devices. For busbar protection or line
protection, the functions on the Event-triggered task level are
processed within a maximum of 10 ms.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Task Level Description

Low priority Cyclic- Use the Low priority Cyclic-triggered task level for processing
triggered measured values. Functions on this task level are processed cyclically every
500 ms.
Low priority Event- Use the Low priority Event-triggered task level preferably for logic
triggered functions that should be executed with lower priority than functions in the
Event-triggered task level. If the available ticks of the Event-trig-
gered task level shown in the following figure are sufficient for the
required CFC functionality, you do not need to use the Low priority
Event-triggered task level.
All CFC function blocks can be assigned to all the task levels. There are no device-specific function blocks. If
enough ticks are available, all CFC charts can be created in the same task level. A tick is the measure of the
performance requirement of CFC blocks.
The number of available ticks for each task is calculated depending on the created device configuration. This
calculation is based on the previously described load model. In this process, it is recommended to create all
selected functions and objects first followed by configuration of the CFC charts so that a realistic information
about the remaining system capacitance for CFC charts is available. Significantly exceeding the typical
response time is prevented by the load model by limiting the number of CFC function blocks in the corre-
sponding task level via the number of ticks available.
The typical response times for CFC tasks are listed in the Technical Data.
The following figure shows an example of the CFC chart capacitances in DIGSI calculated by the load model.
The ticks available for each task are shown here. The green bars represent the ticks used in the task levels. You
reach this dialog with the following call: Device → Device information → Resource consumption.
[sc_cfc-statistic, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-3 CFC Statistics
NOTE
i High priority Event-triggered CFC charts have the highest priority and are processed before all other tasks.
At this level, a considerable smaller number of ticks are available than at all other tasks. It is recommended
to configure only very-high-priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in
any other level.
NOTE
i Empty CFC charts also consume system resources. Empty charts that are not required any more should be
deleted.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
9.3.1 Signaling-Voltage Supervision

Signaling-voltage supervision is used to evaluate the validity of binary signals connected to the SIPROTEC
device via binary inputs. For this purpose, one binary input is used to monitor the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, the associated binary signals are marked as invalid and a Signaling-voltage malfunc-
tion indication is issued.
Several signaling-voltage supervision groups can be created in one SIPROTEC device. Each of these groups
monitors an adjustable area with binary inputs.

The Signaling-voltage supervision function group contains, besides the general functionality, one preinstan-
tiated Supervision group stage. The Supervision group stage can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dw_ivsstr, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-4 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group

You can instantiate the Signaling-voltage supervision function group in the Global DIGSI 5 library. It
contains 1 pre-instantiated Superv.Grp. function block (see the following figure). You can instantiate a
maximum of 25 supervision groups.
[sc_ivslib, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-5 Entry in the Global Library
Following the instantiation of the function group in the DIGSI project tree, it appears in the information
routing of DIGSI (see the following figure). The status indications of the supervision groups can be routed
here, for example, to existing binary outputs and/or logs.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_ivsrou, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-6 Information Routing
Set the binary input used for signaling-voltage supervision within one input/output module using the setting
option (see the following figure). This binary input monitors the presence of the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, this sets the quality attribute for all other binary inputs of the parameterized input/
output module to invalid. The signal status of each of these binary inputs is frozen with its last valid value
prior to the occurrence of the fault. The quality attribute of the binary inputs for other input/output modules
are not taken into consideration by this.
If the signaling voltage again exceeds the binary threshold, the quality attribute of the binary inputs is reset to
valid.
[sc_ivsgrp, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-7 Parameterization Menu of the Supervision Group (I)
NOTE
i Each status change of the monitored binary inputs is delayed by 3 ms.
You can also combine binary inputs across modules in one Superv.Grp. function block and define any
binary input within this group for supervision of the signaling voltage. For this purpose, place a check mark at
the parameter (_:102) Enable variable group when configuring the supervision group. This extends
the parameterization menu by the sections Supervis. grp. start and Supervis. grp. end (see the
following figure).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[sc_gruppe_de, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-8 Parameterization Menu of the Supervision Group (II)
There, for example, you are able to combine 1 to n different binary inputs into one supervision group. When
doing so, the binary inputs on the input/output modules assignable to a supervision group must be related
logically. With 3 input/output modules, for example, this allows only consecutive binary inputs to be grouped
on the modules 1 and 2 or 2 and 3, but no binary inputs on modules 1 and 3. The binary inputs used for super-
vision can be located on any input/output module within the group defined in this manner.
If you have to monitor several binary inputs that, for example, work with different signaling voltages from
different sources, then you can also instantiate and configure several Superv.Grp. function blocks within
the Signaling-voltage supervision function group accordingly.
Within different supervision groups, only those consecutive binary inputs that are not already assigned to
another supervision group can be grouped. The overlapping of binary inputs in different supervision groups is
not permitted.
Error parameters are displayed to you by inconsistency indications in DIGSI.
Example
There are 4 input/output modules available.
Binary inputs of input/output modules 1 and 2 are already combined in supervision group 1. The 2 last binary
inputs on module 2 are not included in the grouping.
In supervision group 2, only these 2 binary inputs of the input/output module 2 not used in supervision group
1 as well as further consecutive binary inputs of the input/output modules 3 and 4 can be combined.
Parameter (General): Mode
• Default setting (_:1) Mode = on

With the Mode parameter, you specify whether you want to activate, deactivate, or test the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the appropriate group. If you put the group into test mode, the Sig. volt.
disturbed indication is given a test flag.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): I/O module ID
• Default setting (_:104) I/O module ID = I/O module 1

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Using the I/O module ID parameter, you specify the I/O module for which you want to activate signaling-
voltage supervision. Counting of the I/O modules starts in increasing order with the binary inputs of the base
module. The binary inputs of the PS201 power-supply module permanently installed in the base module count
as the 2nd I/O module followed by additional I/O modules (3 to n) on the expansion boards of the device.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Binary input
• Default setting (_:105) Binary input = 1

Using the Binary input parameter, you specify the binary input responsible for the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the parameterized I/O module. The quality attribute of all other binary inputs for this
module are set to valid or invalid depending on the presence of the signaling voltage at the parameterized
binary input.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Enable variable group
• Default setting (_:102) Enable variable group = untrue

You can activate the parameter Enable variable group by placing the checkmark. If you have not set the
check mark (default setting), only these 2 parameters are available for the configuration of the supervision
signal. If you have set the check mark, the parameter menu is extended by the areas Start supervision group
and End supervision group. You can then use that to carry out the grouping of binary inputs for supervision
groups explained in the function description.
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the first I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the lowest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): Binary input

Parameter Binary input is used to define the lowest binary input for the first I/O module (see (_:106)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the last I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the highest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): Binary input

Parameter Binary input is used to define the highest binary input for the last I/O module (see (_:108)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
9.3.1.5 Settings

General
_:1 Superv.Grp.#:Mode • off on
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Superv. signal
_:104 Superv.Grp.#:I/O module • I/O module 1 I/O module 1
ID
• I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
_:105 Superv.Grp.#:Binary 1 to 256 1
input
_:102 Superv.Grp.#:Enable • 0 false
variable group
• 1
Supervis. grp. start
ID
• I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
input

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Supervis. grp. end
ID
• I/O module 2
• I/O module 3
• I/O module 4
• I/O module 5
• I/O module 6
• I/O module 7
• I/O module 8
• I/O module 9
• I/O module 10
• I/O module 11
• I/O module 12
• I/O module 13
• I/O module 14
• I/O module 15
input

(Type)
Superv.Grp.#
_:52 Superv.Grp.#:Behavior ENS O
_:55 Superv.Grp.#:Sig. volt. disturbed SPS O
9.3.2 Voltage-Balance Supervision

In healthy system operation, a certain balance between voltages can be assumed.
The Voltage-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase-to-phase voltages in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Voltage-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase voltage
measuring point.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_strusy, 2, en_US]

The voltage balance is checked by a magnitude supervision function. This function relates the smallest phase-
to-phase voltage to the largest phase-to-phase voltage. Unbalance is detected if
|Vmin| / |Vmax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Vmax > Release threshold
[lo_kenuns, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-10 Characteristic of the Voltage-Balance Supervision

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Logic
[lo_sp_asym, 5, en_US]
Figure 9-11 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which a phase-to-phase voltage unbalance is meas-
ured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum (Vmax) phase-to-phase
voltage.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage (Vmax) with the parameter Release
threshold. This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.
Delay failure indication

If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase-to-phase
voltage exceeds the Release threshold, the delay of the failure indication (parameter: Delay failure
indication) starts. If both conditions persist during this time, the indication Failure is generated.
Blocking the Function

The following blockings reset the picked up function completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block function
• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.75

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum
(Vmax) phase-to-phase voltage. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 50 V

With the Release threshold parameter you set the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage
(Vmax). Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Delay failure indication
• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s

Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
9.3.2.5 Settings

Supv. balan. V
_:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. balan. V
_:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
9.3.3 Voltage-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all voltages at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Voltage-sum supervision monitors the sum of all voltages of one measuring point in the secondary circuit. It
detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit. For
summation of the voltages, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages and the residual voltage (da-dn - voltage of an
open-circuited delta winding) are required.
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
NOTE
i For the Voltage-sum supervision, the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th
voltage measuring input.
For the Voltage-sum supervision to work correctly, the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter must be
set accordingly.

The Voltage-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data function group of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.
[dw_strvss, 2, en_US]

The voltage sum is generated by addition of the voltage phasors. Errors in the voltage circuits are detected if
VF = |VA + VB + VC - Vph/VN • VN| > Threshold, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN
parameter.
[lo_kenvss-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-13 Characteristic of the Voltage-Sum Supervision

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Logic
[lo_volt-sum-supervision, 5, en_US]
Figure 9-14 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Sum Supervision
The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The
sum of the 4 voltages must be 0.
Threshold
If the calculated fault voltage (VF) exceeds the Threshold the parameter Delay failure indication
triggers the indication Failure.
The device calculates the fault voltage (VF) with the formula:
VF = |VA + VB + VC - Vph/UN • UN|, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter.
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter takes into account the differing transformation ratios between
the residual voltage input and the phase-voltage inputs.
You can find more information in this respect in chapter 9.3.3.1 Overview of Functions ).

When the threshold value for the delay of the failure indication (parameter: Delay failure indication)
is exceeded, the indication Failure is generated.


C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Parameter: Threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 25 V

The Threshold parameter is used to set the voltage which the device uses to recognize the calculated fault
voltage (VF) as a failure of the voltage sums. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

9.3.3.5 Settings

Supv. sum V
_:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 43.300 V
_:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. sum V
_:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
9.3.4 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
voltages by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the voltages. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[dw_strvrs, 3, en_US]
Logic
[lo_volt-phs-rotation-supervision, 5, en_US]
Figure 9-16 Logic Diagram of the Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see chapter 5 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the voltages to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. The connec-
tion diagrams are shown in chapter A Appendix.
Release Condition
The supervision of the voltage phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase-to-phase voltages are
greater than 40 V.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Blocking of the Function

The following blockings reset the function completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block function from an external or internal source
• Via a protection pickup

The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

When the device detects an inverted phase-rotation direction for the duration of the Delay failure indi-
cation, the indication Failure is generated.

9.3.4.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.V
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
9.3.5 Broken-Wire Detection

The purpose of the Broken-wire detection is to detect interruptions in the secondary circuit of the current
transformers during steady-state operation. In addition jeopardizing the secondary circuit due to high
voltages, such interruptions can mimic the presence of differential currents for the differential protection, as
caused by short circuits in the protected object. To prevent overfunctions due to faulty current values, the
affected protection functions are blocked, for example the Line differential protection and the Distance protec-
tion.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

The Broken-wire detection function is structurally anchored in the power-system data as well and in various
protection function groups.
[dw_bwsjsk, 3, en_US]
The Broken-wire detection function consists of several stages.

1. Broken wire suspected
• The instantaneous values of all current measuring points are checked on a phase-selective basis for
implausible values.
• The affected phases are marked with Broken wire suspected and the following indications are generated:
(_:301) Phs A BW suspected, (_:302) Phs B BW suspected and/or (_:303) Phs C BW
suspected and (_:307) Broken wire suspected.
• Depending on the supervision mode, you can add a marker for blocking protection functions for the
affected phases.
• After 10 ms of broken-wire check, a detected wire break is signaled with the following indications:
(_:304) Phase A broken wire, (_:305) Phase B broken wire and/or (_:306) Phase C
broken wire and (_:308) Broken wire confirmed) .
2. Broken-wire check
• Current phases suspected to have a broken wire are tested for plausibility using exclusion criteria.
• A valid exclusion criterion resets the broken-wire suspicion and cancels any existing blocking of protec-
tion functions.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
3. Blocking the protection
• The Broken-wire blocking marker immediately leads to blocking of some protection functions.
[lo_bw_str1, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-18 Stages of the Broken-Wire Detection Function Using the Example of Differential Protec-
tion
Broken Wire Suspected

The Broken-wire detection function monitors the dynamic behavior of the currents of each phase and of all
measuring points. For this purpose, the instantaneous values of the currents are checked for their plausibility.
Each expected violation must be confirmed by additional criteria before a wire break can be detected and
signaled with assurance.
NOTE
i If the secondary circuits of the current transformers are accidentally opened while the broken-wire detec-
tion is on, functions like the differential protection are blocked phase-segregated and no longer initiate trip-
ping. Hazardous overvoltages can be generated at the open circuit of the current transformer in this condi-
tion which are not eliminated because the differential protection is blocked.
The detection of the local broken wire suspected is performed on each 3-phase current measuring point of the
device selectively for each phase. Depending on the protected object, the detection is based on permanent
(line differential protection) or frequency-adjusted instantaneous values (transformer differential protection).
Detection:
A wire break initially manifests itself as a sudden decrease of the current below the minimum threshold of
0.06 I/Irated. A plausibility test on one period of past instantaneous values confirms this condition. If the criteria
for the local wire break are satisfied, the affected phase is marked with Broken wire suspected.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Resetting:
The broken wire suspected is reset by phase current flowing again , by a reset criterion of the broken-wire
check or by a binary input signal. Binary resetting can be useful during laboratory tests among other applica-
tions.
Indication
If the broken-wire detection by the broken-wire check has not been reset within 10 ms, it will be indicated.
The indication is held stable for the duration of at least 3 periods.
Broken-Wire Check
To prevent unwanted pickup of this monitoring function caused by special operating conditions, for example
fault, maintenance, test, etc., a local broken wire suspected must be confirmed by additional other criteria.
These criteria are checked on the level of the protection functions (Protection function group).
If at least one of the following criteria contradicting wire break is satisfied, the locally set broken wire
suspected is reset including any associated protection blocking.
Local resetting criteria:
• At least one protection function has picked up.
• An assigned circuit breaker is open.
• A wire break is simultaneously detected at a different local current channel.
• Jump detection on a local voltage channel (if voltage transformers exist)
• Jump detection of the associated zero-sequence current

This reset criterion applies only for CT connection = 3-phase + IN-separate.
• Jump detection on a different local current channel of the same phase without broken wire suspected
• Local overcurrent, that is, for at least one phase applies Iph > 2· Irated
Reset criteria at the opposite end:

For the line differential protection, there are additional criteria of the opposite end that can contradict a local
broken wire suspected and cause resetting. The request to reset is transmitted via the protection interface.
• A wire break is simultaneously detected at a current channel of the opposite end.
• Jump detection on a voltage channel of the opposite end (if voltage transformers exist)
• Jump detection on a current channel of the opposite end
• Local overcurrent at the opposite end, that is true for at least one phase Iph > 2· Irated
Blocking the Protection

The decision to block the protection and the determination of the local broken wire suspected is performed
phase-segregated for each 3-phase current measuring point of the device. A central mode parameter of the
broken-wire detection (Mode) in the power-system data decides the blocking behavior.
• No blocking
– Wire break is only signaled
• Blocking
– Each broken wire suspected must cause the affected protection functions to be blocked. Affected
phases are marked with “protection blocked”.
• Automatic blocking
– In addition to broken wire suspected, you can make the blocking dependent on the criterion that the
maximum differential current of all phases does not exceed a settable threshold value Delta
value for autoblock for the differential protection. The phases to be blocked are marked.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Differential protection functions and protection functions that pick up on unbalanced currents are blocked.
Each individual protection function is responsible for the actual blocking and is described there, too.
When using the fast measuring transducer inputs as 4 mA to 20 mA inputs, broken-wire detection is active.
With a < 2 mA current, wire breaks are detected and the wire break indication is set. The measured values
display remains unaffected.
Parameter: Mode
• Recommended setting value (_:1) Mode = off

The Mode parameter is used to switch the broken-wire detection to on, off and test.
Parameter: Mode of blocking
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Mode of blocking = blocking

The Mode of blocking parameter enables you to define the blocking condition (see Blocking the protec-
tion). Siemens recommends using the default setting. The setting options are blocking, auto blocking
and not blocking.
Parameter: Delta value for autoblock
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Delta value for autoblock = 1.00 I/IN
With the Delta value for autoblock parameter you can make the blocking decision for protection func-
tions dependent on the amount of the differential current.
9.3.5.5 Settings

Brk.wire det.
_:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Brk.wire det.:Mode of • blocking blocking
blocking
• auto blocking
• not blocking
_:102 Brk.wire det.:Delta value for 0.004 to 5.000 1.000
autoblock

(Type)
Brk.wire det.
_:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

(Type)
_:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O
9.3.6 Current-Balance Supervision

In healthy network operation, a certain balance between currents can be assumed.
The Current-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase currents in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current
measuring point.
[dw_str_sym, 3, en_US]

The current balance is checked by a magnitude monitoring function. This function relates the smallest phase
current to the largest phase current. Unbalance is detected if
|Imin| / |Imax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Imax > Release threshold.
[lo_symmke, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-20 Characteristic of the Current-Balance Supervision

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Logic
[lo_cb_symm, 4, en_US]
Figure 9-21 Logic Diagram of the Current-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which unbalance in the phase currents is measured.
The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax) phase current.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax) with the parameter Release threshold. This
specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.

If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max at the same time as the maximum phase current
exceeds the Release threshold, the operate delay of the failure indication (parameter Delay failure
indication) starts. If both conditions persist during this time, the indication Failure is generated.

The following blockings completely reset the picked up function:
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the indication Failure.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.5

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum
(Imax) phase current.
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 0.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.5 A for Irated
=5A
The Release threshold parameter is used to set the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax).

switching operations) are avoided.
9.3.6.5 Settings

Supv. balan. I
_:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. balan. I
_:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
9.3.7 Current-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all currents at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Current-sum supervision function monitors the sum of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary
circuit. It detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
For summation of the currents, the device requires the phase currents and the ground current of the current
transformer neutral point or of a separate ground-current transformer at this measuring point. Select the
following connection variant:
• Current-transformer connections connected to 3 current transformers and the neutral point (see
Figure A-6 in the Attachment)
NOTE
i For current-sum supervision, the ground current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th
current measurement input (IN).

The Current-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current meas-
urement point.
[dw_str_css, 3, en_US]

The current sum is generated by addition of the current phasors. Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN| > Threshold + Slope factor •Σ | I |.
[lo_kensum, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-23 Characteristic of the Current-Sum Supervision

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Logic
[lo_cs_summ, 4, en_US]
Figure 9-24 Logic Diagram of the Current-Sum Supervision
Slope of the Characteristic Curve

The Slope factor • Σ | I | part takes into account permissible current-proportional transformation errors of
the transformer, which can occur in the case of high short-circuit currents.
The Slope factor and Threshold parameters are used to set the fault-current limit (IFmax) for the current-
sum supervision. The device calculates this fault current limit with the formula:
IFmax = Threshold + Slope factor • Σ| I |
The device uses the current inputs (IA, IB, IC and IN) to calculate:
• The fault current IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN|
• The maximum current Σ| I | = | IA| + |IB| +| IC| + |kl• IN|

with kI taking into account a possible difference from the transformation ratio of a separated ground-current
transformer (IN), for example, cable type current transformer.
• Transformation ratio of zero-sequence current converter: RatioN
• Transformation ratio of phase-current converter: Ratioph

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[fo_glchki, 1, en_US]
Threshold
The Threshold parameter is the lower limit of the operating range of the Current-sum supervision func-
tion.

When the calculated fault current (IF) exceeds the calculated fault current limit (IFmax), the delay of the failure
indication (parameter: Delay failure indication) starts. If the threshold-value violation persists for
that time, the Failure indication is generated.

Parameter: Slope factor
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Slope factor = 0.1

The Slope factor parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax)
phase current. This function calculates the RMS values.
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or 0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current (Imax).

switching operations) are avoided.
9.3.7.5 Settings

Supv. sum I
_:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

_:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:6 Supv. sum I:Delay failure 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
indication

(Type)
Supv. sum I
_:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
9.3.8 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Current phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
currents by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the currents. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase
current measurement point.
[dw_str_crs, 4, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Logic
[lo_cr_symm, 6, en_US]
Figure 9-26 Logic Diagram of the Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see 5 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. For connection
diagrams see A Appendix.
Release Condition
The supervision of the current phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase currents are greater than
the value of the Release threshold parameter.
Blocking of the Function

The following blockings reset the function completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block function from an external or internal source
• Via a protection pickup

The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

When the device detects an inverted phase sequence for the duration of the Delay failure indication,
the indication Failure is generated.
• Default setting (_:102) Release threshold = 0.500 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.50 A for Irated = 5 A
With the Release threshold parameter, you specify the lower limit of the phase current for phase-rotation
supervision.
• Default setting (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s

9.3.8.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.I
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
delay

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
9.3.9 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Supervision

The function Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision:
• Measures the auxiliary direct-voltage of a substation battery system
• Provides sampled values for fault recording
• Monitors the battery direct-voltage by checking whether the measured voltage is greater or smaller than
the specified threshold
The direct-voltage input is located on the plug-in module type ANAI-CE-2EL (1 input per module).
Once you have configured the plug-in module ANAI-CE-2EL, the function Auxiliary direct-voltage supervi-
sion is visible under the function group Analog units. You can find the function group Analog units in the
Settings folder of the device in the DIGSI 5 project tree.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

The function Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision can work only in the function group Analog units.
The function comes factory-set with 1 fixed function block Auxiliary direct-voltage measurement, 1 stage
Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - overvoltage, and 1 stage Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision -
undervoltage.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function:
• 3 stages Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - overvoltage
• 3 stages Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - undervoltage

Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure. The stages are identical in struc-
ture.
[dw_DC supervision_Structure, 1, en_US]
9.3.9.3 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Measurement
Logic
[lo_DC voltage measurement, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-28 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Measurement
Calculation of Average Direct-Voltage Values

The FB Auxiliary direct-voltage measurement receives the sampled direct-voltage values from the interface
of the plug-in module ANAI-CE-2EL and calculates an average value by a settable time interval (via the param-
eter Measuring window).
The calculation formula is:
[fo_DC_volt_supervision, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Where
Vavg Average direct-voltage value
Vn Sampled direct-voltage value in a measuring window
m Number of sampled values in a measuring window
Functional Measured Value
Value Description
Average value Average value calculated from the sampled direct-voltage values
9.3.9.4 Stage Description
Logic
The logic of the stage Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - overvoltage is the same as that of the stage
Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - undervoltage. The following figure shows the logic of the stage Auxil-
iary direct-voltage supervision - overrvoltage as an example.
[lo_DC supervision, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-29 Logic Diagram of the Stage Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Supervision - Overvoltage
(1) For the stage Auxiliary direct-voltage supervision - undervoltage, the symbol is:
Measurand
The stage obtains the average direct-voltage value from the FB Auxiliary direct-voltage measurement.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Pickup, Operate, Dropout

The stage compares the average direct-voltage value with the Threshold:
• Overvoltage stage
If the average direct-voltage value exceeds the Threshold, the pickup delay (specified by the parameter
Pickup delay) starts. If the value keeps exceeding the Threshold during the pickup delay, the pickup
signal is issued.
• Undervoltage stage
If the average direct-voltage value falls below the Threshold, the pickup delay (specified by the param-
eter Pickup delay) starts. If the value stays below the Threshold during the pickup delay, the pickup
signal is issued.
Once the pickup signal is issued, the operate delay (specified by the parameter Operate delay) starts. After
the expiration of the operate delay, the operate signal is issued.
With the parameter Dropout ratio, you can define the ratio of the dropout threshold to the Threshold.
NOTE
i The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.
Blocking of the Stage

You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage is reset.
Recording of Sampled Direct-Voltage Values

The recording of sampled direct-voltage values cannot be started via the pickup of stages. If you want to
record the sampled direct-voltage values, you could use other starting methods. For more information about
the methods, refer to 7 Fault Recorder.
Parameter: Measuring window
• Default setting (_:24781:142) Measuring window = 20 ms

With the parameter Measuring window, you set the measuring window that is used to determine the
average value from the sampled values. If this parameter is set to 20 ms, the average value is calculated from
the sampled values in the measuring window of 20 ms.
Extending the measuring window can improve the measurement accuracy but will increase the pickup time. If
there are no specific requirements, Siemens recommends using the default setting of 20 ms.
• Default setting (_:24691:3) Threshold = 264.0 V (for the Overvoltage stage)
• Default setting (_:24721:3) Threshold = 176.0 V (for the Undervoltage stage)

Set the parameter Threshold for the specific application.
Parameter: Dropout ratio
• Default setting (_:24691:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95 (for the Overvoltage stage)
• Default setting (_:24721:4) Dropout ratio = 1.05 (for the Undervoltage stage)
For the Overvoltage stage, the recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To
achieve high-precision measurements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, for example, to 0.98.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
For the Undervoltage stage, the recommended setting value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To
achieve high-precision measurements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, for example, to 1.02.
Parameter: Pickup delay
• Default setting (_:24691:102) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

With the parameter Pickup delay, you define a time interval during which a pickup is not generated if the
voltage exceeds the threshold (for the Overvoltage stage) or falls below the threshold (for the Under-
voltage stage).
With the pickup delay, you can achieve that a short auxiliary-voltage disturbance will not be reported. If you
want to detect all disturbances, use the default value of 0.00 s.
Parameter: Operate delay
• Default setting (_:24691:6) Operate delay = 1.00 s

The parameter Operate delay determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.
NOTE
i The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.
9.3.9.6 Settings

V-DC measurem.
_:24781:142 V-DC measurem.:Meas- • 10 ms 20 ms
uring window
• 20 ms
• 40 ms
• 60 ms
• 80 ms
• 100 ms
Aux.V sup. V>1
_:24691:1 Aux.V sup. V>1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:24691:3 Aux.V sup. 10.0 V to 295.0 V 264.0 V
V>1:Threshold
_:24691:4 Aux.V sup. V>1:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:24691:102 Aux.V sup. V>1:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:24691:6 Aux.V sup. V>1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay
Aux.V sup. V<1
_:24721:1 Aux.V sup. V<1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:24721:3 Aux.V sup. 10.0 V to 295.0 V 176.0 V
V<1:Threshold

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

_:24721:4 Aux.V sup. V<1:Dropout 1.01 to 1.10 1.05
ratio
_:24721:102 Aux.V sup. V<1:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:24721:6 Aux.V sup. V<1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay

(Type)
V-DC measurem.
_:24781:302 V-DC measurem.:Average value MV O
_:24781:306 V-DC measurem.:Sampled values SAV O
Aux.V sup. V>1
_:24691:81 Aux.V sup. V>1:>Block stage SPS I
_:24691:51 Aux.V sup. V>1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:24691:54 Aux.V sup. V>1:Inactive SPS O
_:24691:52 Aux.V sup. V>1:Behavior ENS O
_:24691:53 Aux.V sup. V>1:Health ENS O
_:24691:55 Aux.V sup. V>1:Pickup ACD O
_:24691:57 Aux.V sup. V>1:Operate ACT O
Aux.V sup. V<1
_:24721:81 Aux.V sup. V<1:>Block stage SPS I
_:24721:51 Aux.V sup. V<1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:24721:54 Aux.V sup. V<1:Inactive SPS O
_:24721:52 Aux.V sup. V<1:Behavior ENS O
_:24721:53 Aux.V sup. V<1:Health ENS O
_:24721:55 Aux.V sup. V<1:Pickup ACD O
_:24721:57 Aux.V sup. V<1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
9.4.1 Overview
The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure
or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions.
The following modules of the device hardware are monitored:
• Base module
• Expansion modules
• Plug-in modules on the interface locations
• Synchronous digital hierarchy-memory card (SDHC)

The error responses result, depending on type and degree of the error, as follows:
Hardware errors where the device remains in operation.
The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example:
• Communication-module failure (module x)
• Measuring-transducer module failure (module x)
• USB interface
• Integrated Ethernet interface
• Real-time clock device
• A/D converter (fast current sum)
• Battery voltage
• Faulty or missing compensation values (magnitude/phase)
• Synchronous digital hierarchy-memory card (see A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card )
Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of opera-
tion.
Such errors are, for example:
• Memory error (RAM) in the base module
• Defective module
• Module-connection error (PCB Link)
• Control circuit error binary output
• Outage of an internal auxiliary voltage
NOTE
i If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts, the system automatically recognizes it as a
severe device malfunction. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Fatal device errors with outage of central components: The device goes permanently out of operation
into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Memory error (flash) in the base module
• CPU/Controller/FPGA error in the base module
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there.
Device Operating Hours

The Device operating hours statistical value counts the operating hours of the physical device. The
starting time and the time in Fallback mode are not considered.
You can neither reset nor change the statistical value.
9.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum

The function Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters it performs the following tasks:
• Supervision of the correct functioning of the device-internal analog-digital converters, based on the sum
of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary circuit.
• Detection of failures in the device-internal measuring circuits (for example, analog-digital converter)
• Blocking of protection and control functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection). This avoids an overfunction of the device.
The supervision principle is based on fast current-sum supervision with connection of the neutral-point current
to the 4th current measuring input. In order to ensure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection
functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup, the fast current measurement is based on instanta-
neous values.
For Analog-digital converter supervision, the neutral-point current of the line to be protected must be
connected to the 4th current measuring input (IN). The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the
current-transformer neutral point (IN neutral point) (see next figure).
[ti_phase_2, 4, en_US]
Figure 9-30 Connection to a 3-Phase Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Conductor)
NOTE
i The analog channel supervision via fast current sum is only available when the 4th current input is a
protection-class current transformer. In the DIGSI 5 project tree, under Device → Measuring-point
routing, set the connection type 3-phase + IN for the current measuring point. When using this func-
tion, check the correct connection of the neutral conductor/ground current by supplying an asymmetrical
current. Otherwise, a 1-pole or 2-pole fault could result in an unwanted blocking of the protection.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

The Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters function is located in the Power-system
data function group of each 3-phase current measuring point.
[dw_schstr, 1, en_US]

Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN| > Threshold value + Slope of the characteristic 1 •Σ| i | and
IF > Slope of the characteristic 2 • (Σ| i | - Base point 2)
The device uses the current inputs (iA, iB, iC, and iN) to calculate:
• Fault current IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN|
• Maximum current Σ| i | = |iA|+|iB|+|iC|+ |iN|
[lo_kenisu, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-32 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Logic
[lo_sumsch, 4, en_US]
Figure 9-33 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid
failures (see 12.5.8 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ).
NOTE
i The parameters are fixed in the device and cannot be changed.

It is not necessary to change the parameters depending on the application.
Threshold Value
The threshold value is the lower limit of the operating range of the Supervision of the device-internal
analog-digital converters function.
The threshold value is permanently set to 10 % of the device rated current.
Slope of the Characteristic 1

The component Slope of the characteristic 1 • Σ | i | takes into account permissible errors of the current input
that can occur in the case of small overcurrents.
The Slope of the characteristic 1 is permanently set to 0.1.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Slope of the Characteristic 2

The component Slope of the characteristic 2 takes into account permissible errors of the current input that
can occur in the case of high overcurrents (high short-circuit currents).
The Slope of the characteristic 2 is permanently set to 0.95. The base point of the Slope of the character-
istic 2 is permanently set to 10.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9.5 Supervision of Device Firmware
9.5 Supervision of Device Firmware

The device firmware determines essentially the functionality of the device.
The following supervisions ensure the stable function of the device:
• Supervisions of the data and version consistency
• Supervision of the undisturbed sequential activity of the device firmware
• Supervision of the available processor performance

When you start the device, load data via the interfaces and these supervisions of the device firmware will be in
effect during the continuous operation. Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error
responses will result:
Firmware failures where the device remains in operation.

The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in time synchronization
(loss and errors).
Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of
operation.
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. The old parameter set is still present.
• Overloading of the processor
• Program-sequence error
Fatal firmware error. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. No usable parameter set is present.
• Device startup with version error
• CFC-runtime error
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the fault responses at the end of chapter 9.8 Error
Responses and Corrective Measures. You will find corresponding corrective measures there.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration
9.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration

The modular hardware concept requires adherence to some rules within the product family and the modular
system. Configuration errors show that the hardware configuration saved in the device does not agree with
the hardware actually detected. Impermissible components and unallowed combinations must be detected
just as missing configured components are.
Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error responses will result: The identified hardware
configuration errors are assigned to the defect severities as follows:
Configuration errors for which the device remains in operation.

The failure is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in the IE converter config-
uration (normal/sensitive).
Fatal configuration error: The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
• Missing hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware combination
• Incorrect plug-in module (module x)

You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there. You can resolve configuration errors through another synchro-
nization with DIGSI.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9.7 Supervision of Communication Connections
9.7 Supervision of Communication Connections

SIPROTEC 5 Compactdevices offer extensive communication possibilities via fixed and optional interfaces.
Beyond the hardware supervision, the transferred data must be monitored with respect to their consistency,
failure, or outage.
Supervision
With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
• Failures are detected and indicated via the operational log. The device remains in operation!
• Each port additionally is equipped with a separate communication log, with which details of the failures
(for example, error rate) are displayed.
Marking Fault Signals/Data

The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected protection functions
can go into a secure state. In the following, some examples are named:
• GOOSE signals can automatically be set to defined values in case of disturbed IEC 61850 communication.
• Disturbed time-synchronization signals can lead to an automatic change of the source of time synchroni-
zation.
Normally, you can correct communication failures by checking the external connections or by replacing the
affected communication modules. In chapter to 9.8.4 Defect Severity 3 you will find the detailed description,
in tabular form, of the error responses. Corresponding corrective measures can also be found there.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
9.8.1 Overview
When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the device
and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals are marked
and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state. If the supervision func-
tions pick up, this will lead to defined error responses.
How Do Device Errors Make Themselves Noticeable

In case of a device error the supervision functions of the device pickup. The device responds according to the
type and severity of the error. To report an error, supervision functions use outputs on the device and indica-
tions.
Run LED (green) The external auxiliary voltage is present. The device is ready for operation.
Error LED (red) The device is not ready for operation. The life contact is open.
Life contact Signaling of device readiness following successful device startup.
Group-warning indication The device remains in operation and signals an error via the prerouted LED
Group warning and the log.
Log of the device Indications of causes for defects and corrective measures
Determination of Causes for Defects and Corrective Measures

To determine the cause for defect and the corresponding corrective measure, proceed step by step.
Step 1: Pick up of supervisions leads to one of the following defect severities in all cases.
• Defect severity 1:
Internal or external device error that is reported. The device remains in operation.
Severe device failure, the device restarts (reset) to correct the cause for defect.
Severe device failure, the device goes to a safe condition (fallback mode), as the
correction of defects cannot be implemented by a restart. In fallback mode, the
protection and automated functions are inactive. The device is out of operation.
Severe device-external failure, the device switches the protection and automatic
functions to inactive for safety, but remains in operation. Normally, the user can
correct the fault by himself.
Step 2: For every defect severity, you will find detailed tables with information about causes
for defects, error responses, and corrective measures in the following chapters.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
All Protection and Automation Functions

Group-Warning Indication
Device-Diagnosis Log
Indication of the
Operational Log
Group Warning
Fallback Mode
Device restart
Indication in
Indication in
Life Contact
are inactive
(Reset)
Defect Severity 1 x x x – – – –
Defect Severity 2 – – x x During the x –
starting time of
the device
Defect Severity 3 – – x x x – x
Defect Severity 4 – x – x x – –
9.8.2 Defect Severity 1
Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated.
The device remains in operation.
When the supervision functions pick up, corrupted data and signals are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected functions can go into a secure state. Whether functions are blocked is decided in the appropriate
function itself. For more detailed information, refer to the function descriptions.
Life contact Remains activated
Red error LED Is not activated
Log
For every device fault, a corresponding supervision indication is generated. The device records these indica-
tions with a real-time stamp in the operational log. In this way they are available for further analyses. If super-
visions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up, there is a separate communication log
available for each port. Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there. The device-
diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recommendations of corresponding
corrective measures for each detected device error.
There is further information on handling the logs in 3.1 Indications.
Group-Warning Indication Group Warning

As delivered, all monitoring indications of Defect Severity 1 are routed to the signal (_:301)Group
warning. In this way, a device error can be indicated with only one indication. The majority of supervision
indications are permanently connected to the Group warning (Group warning column = fixed). However,
some supervision indications are routed flexibly to the Group warning via a logic block chart (Group
warning column = CFC). If necessary, the routings via a CFC chart can be taken from the group indication
again.
In delivery condition, the Group warning is routed to an LED.
The following logic diagram shows the correlation.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[lo_warning_indication, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-34 Forming the Warning Group Indication Group Warning
Overview of Errors
Indication Type Group Explanation

Warning
General:
(_:53) Health ENS CFC If the Health of an individual function block, for example
(_:53) Health = Warning SPS a protection stage or an individual function, goes to the
Warning or Alarm state, this state generates up to the
(_:53) Health = Alarm SPS
general group indication Health (_:53) via the associated
function group.
Check from the operational log from which function or
function block the error originates. In the associated func-
tion description, there is additional information as to why
the Standby of the function or a function block can
change.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Warning
Device:
_:320 Auxiliary Power Fail SPS Fixed Fault with the auxiliary power supply:
Check the external power supply.
This message does not appear if the device has a redun-
dant PS204 power supply module, and is replaced by the
messages described below for a device with PS204.
(_:305) Battery failure SPS Battery fault:
Replace the device battery.
To avoid data loss, Siemens recommends replacing the
device battery with the device supply voltage switched on.
You can find more information on battery disposal in the
hardware manual from version V07.80 (order number:
C53000-G5040-C002-D).
_:312 Compensation error x ENS Calibration error in module x:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the quality
attribute of questionable (measured value display with
≈).
_:314 Offset error x ENS Offset error on module x:
If this indication persists after the device start, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the quality
attribute of questionable (measured value display with
≈).
_:306 Clock fail SPS Internal time failure
• Check the time settings first.

• Then replace the device battery.
• If the fault is not remedied, contact the Customer
Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked with the quality
attribute of Clock Failure.
(_:319) Error memory SPS Checksum (cyclic redundancy check) error in monitored
memory areas of the device
Measuring transducer error ENS Hardware failure on the measuring-transducer module on
(x) plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Warning
Device with redundant PS204 power supply module:
_:330 Power sup. Module INS CFC Internal device error on the power supply module at posi-
fail. x tion x25:
• The device remains in operation because it has a

redundant power supply module, provided it is intact.
• Exchange the defective power supply module so that
redundancy is reestablished!
_:331 Power sup. Module OK x INS No internal device error in the power supply module at
position x25.
_:332 Pow. sup. aux. pow. INS Error in the external auxiliary power supply module at posi-
fail. x tion x25:
• The device remains in operation because it has a

redundant power supply module, provided it is intact.
• Check the auxiliary power supply module.
_:333 Power sup.aux.pow.OK x INS The external auxiliary power supply module at position x25
is OK.
_:334 Power sup. Module SPS Fixed At least one power supply module has an internal device
fail. x error
_:335 Pow. sup. aux. pow. SPS Fixed At least one power supply module does not have an
fail. x adequate auxiliary power supply
Handling an alarm:
(_:504) >Group Warning SPS Fixed Input signal for user-defined generation of group warning
Time sync.:
(_:305) Time sync. error SPS Fixed Time synchronization error, the timing master is faulty:
• Check the external time source first.

• Check the external connections.
Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked with the quality
attribute of Clock not synchronized.
Power-system data:meas. point Current balance failure (see 9.3.6.1 Overview of Func-
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv. Bal. I: tions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the current phase-rotation supervision system
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv. Phsseq.I: (see 9.3.8.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the current sum (see 9.3.7.1 Overview of Func-
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv. Sum I tions )
(_:71) Failure
25 x refers to the PCB assembly slot (x =1,2,3...)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

Warning
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the fast current sum (see 9.4.2.1 Overview of
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv.ADC sum.I: Functions)
(_:71) Failure The failure indication indicates a fault in the analog-digital
converter at the power input.
• Check the exterior wiring.

Support Center.
Quality: The internally managed current measured values
are marked with the invalid quality attribute.
Blocking: The protection functions based on current meas-
urement are blocked.
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is open.
SPS CFC
Volt.Trans.Cir.B: Blocking: Appropriate functions are either blocked defi-
(_:500) >Open nitely or the blocking can be set individually.
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage balance (see 9.3.2.1 Overview of
SPS CFC
Superv. of Bal. V: Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage phase-rotation supervision (see
SPS CFC
Superv. Phsseq.V: 9.3.4.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage sum (see 9.3.3.1 Overview of Func-
SPS CFC
Superv. of Sum V: tions )
(_:71) Failure
Device: SPS SEU memory fault:
(_:343) SEU happened Cosmic radiation can result in a Single Event Upset, which
can be detected through bit flips (changes in the status of
a bit) in the memory blocks. A reset to reinitialize the
memory is initiated. You will find additional explanations
on the physical background in a special SEU whitepaper.
Faults of defect severity 2 are fatal device faults that lead to an immediate restart of the device (reset).
This occurs when the device data is corrupted (for example, RAM memory), if a restart prevents restoration of
data consistency. The device goes briefly out of operation, a failure is avoided.
Life contact Is terminated during the restart
Red error LED Is activated during the restart
NOTE
i If the fault of defect severity 2 has not been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is auto-
matically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode.
Log
For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational log.
The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detec-
tion and before the restart. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available for
later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you also receive recom-
mendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
For further information on handling the logs, refer to chapter 3.
Overview of Errors
Number Device-Diagnosis Log

826 Processor error on the base module:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.
830 FPGA hardware error on the base module:
834 Memory error (short term):
Reset initiated.
3823 Program run error:
826 CPU overload:
11160 SEU memory fault (short term): Reset initiated
Miscellaneous Internal firmware error:
Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode.
The signal (_:301) Device status goes to the Alarm state. The Warning state is not supported for this
signal.
Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device. In this case, contact the
Customer Support Center. The device goes permanently out of operation, a failure is avoided. In the fallback
mode, minimal operation of the device via the on-site operation panel and DIGSI is possible. In this way, for
example, you can still read out information from the device-diagnosis log.
Life contact Is terminated in the fallback mode
Red error LED Is activated in the fallback mode
Log
For every device error that immediately leads to entry into the fallback mode, entries from supervision
messages and from the signal (_:301) Device status into the operational log are not possible. The
actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detection,
that is, before entry into the fallback mode. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus
available for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you are
offered recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
Overview of Errors

2822 Memory error (continuous)
4727, 5018-5028 Hardware failure at module 1-12:
4729 Device bus error (repeated):
• Check the module configuration and the module connections.

• Contact the Customer Support Center.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

4733 Incorrect hardware configuration:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.
5037-5048 Wrong module 1-12 detected:
5031-5035 Identified wrong plug-in module on plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:
Wrong application configuration:
Search for the cause in the operational log and load a valid configuration to the device.
3640, 4514 Data-structure error:
956 Firmware-version error:
2013, 2025 Signature error:
CFC error:
In DIGSI, check your CFC chart for the cause.
5050-5061 Binary-output error in module 1 - 12:
5088, 5089 A missing display configuration was established:
9.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)
Errors of defect severity 4 are not device failures in the classical meaning. These errors do not affect the device
hardware and are not detected or reported by internal device supervision functions. The condition of the
defect severity 4 – the group alarm – is set user-specifically by the binary input signal (_:503) >Group
alarm. If the binary input signal is reset, the device is no longer in the Group alarm condition and all func-
tions return to the normal operating state.
If the group alarm is generated, the device reacts as follows:
• The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is generated and recorded in the operational log.
• The life contact is terminated.
• The red Error LED is activated.
• All protection and automation functions are blocked.
• The device remains in operation, does not carry out any restart (reset), and does not switch to the safe
condition (Fallback mode).
• The signals managed internally are marked with the invalid quality attribute. Signals managed inter-
nally are, for example, measured values, binary input and output signals, GOOSE and CFC signals.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the Group
alarm (see chapter 9.9 Group Indications).
Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm
Red error LED Is initiated in case of Group alarm
Log
The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is recorded in the operational log. Depending on the cause of
the initiation, further information can be found in the operational log.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
9.9 Group Indications

The following group indications are available:
• (_:300) Group alarm

• (_:301) Group warning
• (_:302) Group indication
You can find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Information routing. In the
operating range, you can find the signals under Alarm handling (see the following figure).
[sc_grwarn, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-35 Group Monitoring Indication in the DIGSI 5 Information Routing Matrix
Group Indication Group Alarm

The indication (_:300) Group alarm is the group indication for defect severity 4 monitoring. This moni-
toring has a special purpose, as it is set user-specifically by a binary input signal and not by internal device
supervision. Nevertheless, the response of the device is serious, such as blocking all protection and automatic
functions (see chapter 9.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)).
If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is set, the group indication (_:300) Group alarm
becomes active. If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is reset, the signal (_:300) Group
alarm is also reset and the device returns to the normal operating state.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the >Group
Alarm. This CFC chart checks whether the device is still accidentally in the simulation or commissioning
mode.
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.
Group Indication Group Warning

The indication (_:301) Group warning is the group indication for defect severity 1 monitoring. Some
error messages of defect severity 1 are firmly linked to the signal (_:301) Group warning, others are
connected flexibly in the device delivery condition via a CFC chart. This assignment is described in chapter
9.8.2 Defect Severity 1.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Group warning, that initiates the Group warning.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.
The group-warning indication (_:301) Group warning is prerouted to an LED of the base module.
Group Indication
The Group indication is exclusively for user-specific purposes. There is no internal device supervision
function that activates this indication. If the binary input signal (_:505) >Group indication is set, the
indication (_:302) Group indication becomes active and is recorded in the operational log. This
warning indication does not result in blocking a protection function. If the binary input signal is reset, the
signal (_:302) Group indication drops out. Using a CFC chart, you can define when the binary input
signal (_:505) >Group indication is to be set.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10 Measured and Energy Values
10.1 Overview of Functions 532

10.2 Structure of the Function 533
10.3 Operational Measured Values 534
10.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components 537
10.5 Average Values 538
10.6 Minimum/Maximum Values 541
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring 543

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Measured and Energy Values
10.1 Overview of Functions
10.1 Overview of Functions

The measurands are recorded at the measuring points and forwarded to the function groups.
Within the function groups, further measurands are calculated from these measured values, which are
required for the functions of this function group. This is how, for example, the electric power is calculated
from the voltage and current measurands.
Basic instructions for acquisition and editing process data can be found in the chapter Basic Functional Struc-
ture 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.
[dw_om_verf, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-1 Structure of Measured-Value Acquisition and Processing
For the display, the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups:
• Fundamental and symmetrical components

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.2 Structure of the Function
10.2 Structure of the Function

Depending on the interconnection of the function groups, these can contain different measured-value groups.
2 typical function groups are displayed below.
3-Phase Voltage and Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Groups

In the simplest version, the 3-phase voltage and Voltage/current 3-phase function groups obtain the meas-
ured values of the 3-phase voltage and current system and contain the following measured-value groups:
[dw_om_vstr, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-2 Structure of Measured Values in Function Groups
The Operational measured values and Fundamental components measured-value groups can be inserted
from the DIGSI 5 library into the 3-phase voltage and Voltage/current 3-phase function groups.
Details regarding the individual measured-value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters.
Inversion of Power-Related Measured Values

The calculated, directional values in the operational measured values (power, power factor, energy and
minimum, maximum, and average values based on these) are normally defined as positive in the direction of
the protected object. This requires that the connection polarity for the used measuring points be correctly set
(see also parameter Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj for the measuring point current, 3-phase). It is,
however, possible, to set the "forward" direction for the protection functions and the positive direction for the
powers, etc., differently, for example, such that the active power consumption (from the line to the busbar) is
displayed positively. Then set the option reversed in the affected function groups at the parameter P, Q
sign. With the setting not reversed (default setting), the positive direction for the powers etc. corre-
sponds to the "forward" direction for the protection functions.
The affected values are given in detail in chapter 10.3 Operational Measured Values.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.3 Operational Measured Values

Operational measured values are assigned to different function groups.
The values can be displayed as primary and secondary values and as percentage values. They are updated
every 180 ms.
The frequency is calculated using the filter algorithm, which is derived from the voltage or current. The
voltage input has higher priority than the current input. If no voltage or current is present, the value contains
the last valid frequency. – is displayed on the user interface.
The operational measured values are calculated according to the following definition equations:
RMS values
Active power (per phase)
With x = 1 to 3
vphsx(t) – Instantaneous value of the phase voltage, that is, vA, vB, vC
iphsx(t) – Instantaneous value of the phase current, that is, iA, iB, iC
Active power (total)
Apparent power (per phase)
With Vphsx – RMS value of the phase-to-ground voltage (true RMS):
With x = A to C
Iphsx – RMS value of the phase current (true RMS); with x = A to C
Apparent power (total)
Reactive power (per phase)
With:
n – Harmonic order (up to n = 50)
φn – Angle difference between voltage and current of the nth harmonic
Reactive power (total)
Power factor
Active factor

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Operational Measured Values of the Function Groups

The following table describes the operational measured values of the Voltage 3-phase and Voltage/current
3-phase function groups.
All recorder functions have access to the values.
Table 10-1 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Group

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence A A Rated operating current of the primary values
current
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary values
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Calculated zero-sequence kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
voltage √3
VN Measured neutral-point kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
displacement voltage √3
P Active power MW W Active power of the primary values
Q Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary values
S Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary values
Cos φ Active factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW W Active power of the phase
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent MVA VA Apparent power of the phase
power Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
Wp+, Wp- Output and consumed active MWh Wh
energy
See 10.3 Operational Meas-
ured Values
Wq+, Wq- Output and consumed reac- Mvarh varh
tive energy

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
NOTE
i With the parameter P, Q sign in the function block General of the respective function group, the sign of
the following measured values can be inverted:
• Active power (total): P total
• Active power (phase-related): PA, PB, PC
• Reactive power (total): Q total
• Reactive power (phase-related): QA, QB, and QC

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components
10.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components

The fundamental components are calculated from the frequency-tracked instantaneous values through a
Fourier filter (integration interval: one period). The results are phasor values that are described by way of the
amount and phase angle.
In accordance with the transformation matrix, the symmetrical components are calculated from the voltage
and current phasors. These are also phasor quantities.
Fundamental Components
Table 10-2 Fundamental Components
Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to

dary Angle
V A, V B, V C Phase-to-ground voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
values/√3
VN Measured neutral-point displace- kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
ment voltage values/√3
V 12, V 23, Phase-to-phase voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of the
V 31 primary values
I A, I B, I C Phase currents A A ° Rated operating current of the

primary values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A ° Rated operating current of the
primary values
Symmetrical Components
Table 10-3 Symmetrical Components
Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to

dary Angle
V0 Zero-sequence component of the kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
V1 Positive-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
V2 Negative-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
I0 Zero-sequence component of the A A ° Rated operating current of the
current primary values
I1 Positive-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values
I2 Negative-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.5 Average Values
10.5 Average Values
10.5.1 Function Description of Average Values
Average values can be formed based on different measurands:
• Symmetrical components
Through the settings, you can set how and when the average values are formed. The settings describe:
• Time slot over which the average value is formed

(Parameter: Average calc. interval )
• Update interval for the display of the average values

(Parameter: Average update interval )
• Synchronization time for establishing the date of commencement updating information, for example, at
the top of the hour (hh:00) or at one of the other times (hh:15, hh:30, hh:45).
(Parameter: Average synchroniz. time )
Average values are formed through the following measurands:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components

You reset the average value formation via the
• Binary input >Reset average value
• DIGSI
• The integrated operation panel
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 10.2 Structure of the Function Structure of
the Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active power (total): P total
• Reactive power (total): Q total
10.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values
The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with the devices in the function group. If you
use the functionality, you must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the average values can be set with DIGSI and at the device.
You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Average calc. interval
• Default setting: (_:104) Average calc. interval = 60 min

1 min to 60 min Time slot for averaging, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average update interval
• Default setting: (_:105) Average update interval = 60 min

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.5 Average Values

1 min to 60 min Update interval for displaying the average value, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average synchroniz. time
• Default setting: (_:106) Average synchroniz. time = hh:00

The parameter describes the synchronization time for average value formation.

hh:00 The parameter Average update interval will be
effective on the full hour
effective 15 minutes after the full hour
NOTE
i The average value calculation restarts after
• Changing one of the 3 settings for the average-value calculation
• Resetting the device (initial or normal reset)
• Changing the time
• Resetting the average values

The average values are reset immediately. The display changes to "---".
The following examples explain how to set parameters and to make a change.
Average calc. interval = 60 min

Average update interval = 30 min
Average synchroniz. time = hh:15.
A new average value is formed every 30 min, at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour) and hh:45 (15 min
before the top of the hour). All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value
formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
In this example, the Average synchroniz. time = hh:45 acts as described above for = hh:15.

A new average value is formed every 60 min at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour). All measured values
obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation.


C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.5 Average Values
A new average value is formed every 10 min at hh:00, hh:10, hh:20, hh:30, hh:40, hh:50. All measured
values obtained during the last 5 min are used to form the average value.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.6 Minimum/Maximum Values
10.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values
Minimum and maximum values can be formed based on different measured or calculated measurands:
• Symmetrical components
• Selected values
You can set which measurand will be used. The measurands for the minimum/maximum formation are loaded
from DIGSI.
Calculation and resetting of the minimum and maximum values are controlled through settings. The settings
describe the following points:
• Memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0 cyclically or not at all.

(Setting Min/Max cyclic reset )
• Point in time when the memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0.
(Setting Min/Max reset each and setting Min/Max reset minute )
• Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum/maximum values begins (after the
parameterization)
(Setting Min/Max days until start )
The following figure shows the effect of the settings.
[dw_min_max, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-3 Minimum and Maximum-Value Formation
Minimum and maximum values are time-stamped.

Minimum/maximum values are formed through:
• Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
• Amounts of the symmetrical components
• Average values
The minimum and maximum values are reset on a regular basis or via the
• Binary input >Reset min/max
• DIGSI
• The integrated operation panel

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 10.2 Structure of the Function Structure of
the Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Minimum/maximum values of the active and reactive power:

Min:Ptotal, Max:Ptotal, Min:Qtotal, Max:Qtotal
• Minimum/maximum values of the average values of the active and reactive power:
AverageMin:Ptotal, AverageMax:Ptotal, AverageMin:Qtotal, AverageMax:Qtotal
10.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values
The minimum/maximum values functionality is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you
must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the minimum/maximum values can be set with DIGSI or at
the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Min/Max cyclic reset
• Default setting: (_:107) Min/Max cyclic reset = yes

Yes Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is acti-
vated
No Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is deacti-
vated
None of the following parameters are visible
Parameter: Min/Max reset each
• Default setting: (_:108) Min/Max reset each = 1 day

1 day to 365 days Resetting of the minimum value and the maximum value, cyclically on all
specified days, for example each day (1 day)
Parameter: Min/Max reset minute
• Default setting: (_:109) Min/Max reset minute = 0 min

0 min to 1439 min Resetting the minimum value and the maximum value at the specified
minute of the day, which is stated in the parameter Min/Max Reset
takes place every, for example 0 min 0 min (= 00.00)
Parameter: Min/Max days until start
• Default setting: (_:110) Min/Max days until start = 1 day

1 day to 365 days Indication of when the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum values and
maximum values begins, for example in 1 day (after the parameterization)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function:
• Records the wear of circuit breakers
• Allows maintenance intervals of the CB poles to be carried out when their actual degree of wear makes it
necessary
• Sends a warning signal when the wear of a circuit breaker reaches a specified degree
• Allows the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time

Savings on maintenance and servicing costs is one of the main benefits this functionality offers.
10.7.2 Structure of the Function
The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
The function offers 4 independent operating stages with different measuring methods:
• ΣIx-method stage
Sum of tripping current powers
• 2P-method stage
2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles
• I2t-method stage
Sum of all squared fault-current integrals
• Supv.CB make time stage

Supervision of the circuit-breaker make time
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 ΣIx-method stage. A maximum of 1 ΣIx-method
stage, 1 2P-method stage, 1 I2t-method stage, and 1 Supv.CB make time stage can be operated simultane-
ously within this function.
The general functionality is available across stages and provides a uniform start criterion for the stages.
[dw_CB_wear, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.7.3 General Functionality
10.7.3.1 Description
Logic
As the wear on the circuit breaker depends on the current amplitude and duration of the actual switching
action, including arc deletion, determination of the start and end criteria is important. The following general
functionality provides starting and further timing information to the different stages (methods).
The general functionality operates phase-selectively. The following figure shows the logic of the functionality
across stages.
[lo_cb_wear, 3, en_US]
Figure 10-5 Logic Diagram of the Functionality Across Stages of the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Func-
tion
Start Criterion for the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Function

The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function starts when any of the following criteria is fulfilled:
• Internal protection-function tripping signal from the function block Trip logic is received
• Open command signal from the internal Control function is received.
• Binary input signal >Start calculation is initiated, for example, from external.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
• Closed position signal of circuit breaker is going

This signal is derived form the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. In this way, opening the circuit-breaker
manually is detected.
Logic Input Signals for Stages

As soon as the start criterion has been fulfilled, the timers of the parameterized opening time and break time
are started. With the parameter CB opening time, the time when the circuit-breaker pole begins to open is
defined. With the parameter CB break time, the time of the pole being open including the arc extinction is
defined. The following figure shows the relationship between these circuit-breaker times.
[dw_CB-time, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-6 Circuit-Breaker Times
In order to prevent an incorrect calculation in case of a circuit-breaker failure, the parameter Current
thresh. CB open is used to verify whether the current actually returns to 0 after 2 additional cycles. Funda-
mental components are used for comparing the threshold values. When the current criterion fulfills the
requirement of the phase-selective logic release, the calculation and evaluation of the respective methods are
initiated.
End Criterion for the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Function

After calculation and evaluation have been completed, the end criterion of the circuit-breaker maintenance is
fulfilled. The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function is ready for a new initiation.
Parameter: CB opening time
• Default setting value (_:2311:101) CB opening time = 0.065 s

You use the CB opening time parameter to define the time span from energizing the shunt release of the
circuit breaker until the start of opening of switching poles.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker. Also refer to
Figure 10-6.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Parameter: CB break time
• Default setting (_:2311:102) CB break time = 0.080 s

You use the CB break time parameter to define the time span from energizing the shunt release of the
circuit breaker to the instant of arc extinction (and switching pole open).
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker. Also refer to
Figure 10-6.
Parameter: CB make time
• Default setting (_:2311:103) CB make time = 0.080 s

With the parameter CB make time, you define the typical time interval between the activation of the closing
procedure for the circuit breaker and the point in time when the first current flows.
You can find more information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.
10.7.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:CB opening time 0.001 s to 0.500 s 0.065 s
_:2311:102 General:CB break time 0.001 s to 0.600 s 0.080 s
_:2311:103 General:CB make time 0.001 s to 0.600 s 0.080 s

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Start calculation SPS I

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.7.4 ΣI*-Method Stage
Logic of the Stage
[lo_cb_WIxS, 4, en_US]
Figure 10-7 Logic of the ΣIx-Method Stage
Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value

RMS values of the fundamental components are stored for each phase in a buffer during the time between the
start criterion and the pole-opening-starts criterion. With the coming pole-opening-starts criterion, the latest
value in the buffer is searched for whose value is above the setting of parameter Current thresh. CB
open. The 20 ms prior value is used as tripping/opening current for further calculation.
If no value within the buffer is above the setting value, this circuit-breaker opening affects only the mechan-
ical lifetime of the circuit breaker and is consequently not considered by this method.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
[lo_cb_wixf, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-8 Logic of the Determination of the Tripping Current Value
(1) Current-flow criterion fulfilled

(2) 20 ms prior value
Calculation of the Wear

If the ΣIx-method stage receives the logic release signal, the determined tripping current is used in the calcula-
tion of wear. The calculation results are then added to the existing statistic values of the ΣIx method as
follows, with phase A as example.
[fo_CBWIxA, 1, en_US]
Where:
x Parameter exponent
q No. of circuit-breaker switching cycle
Tripping/opening current of phase A to the power of x in the qth circuit-breaker operation
Rated normal current to the power of x
Statistic value of current phase A calculated with the ∑Ix method
m Total number of switching cycles
The phase-selective ΣIx value is available as statistical value. You can reset or preset the statistics according to
the specific application.
To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers, the values are set in relation to the
exponentiated rated normal current Irated of the circuit-breaker (see also Setting notes).
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning

If the summated ΣIx value of any phase is greater than the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is
generated.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Parameter: Exponent
• Default setting (_:11371:101) Exponent = 2.0
You use the Exponent parameter to specify the exponent for the ΣIx method.
A typical value is the default setting of 2. However, due to practical experiences with individual circuit
breakers, slightly different values may be requested.
• Default setting (_:11371:102) Threshold = 10 000.00

You use the parameter Threshold to define the threshold of the statistic value.
The relation of the tripping current powers to the exponentiated rated normal current Irated allows the limiting
value of the ΣIx method to correspond to the maximum number of make-break operations. For a circuit
breaker, whose contacts have not yet been worn, the maximum number of make-break operations can be
entered directly as limiting value.
10.7.4.3 Settings

ΣIx-method
_:11371:1 ΣIx-method:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11371:101 ΣIx-method:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:11371:102 ΣIx-method:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000

(Type)
ΣIx-method
_:11371:54 ΣIx-method:Inactive SPS O
_:11371:52 ΣIx-method:Behavior ENS O
_:11371:53 ΣIx-method:Health ENS O
_:11371:301 ΣIx-method:ΣIx A BCR O
_:11371:302 ΣIx-method:ΣIx B BCR O
_:11371:303 ΣIx-method:ΣIx C BCR O
_:11371:304 ΣIx-method:Warning ACT O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.7.5 2P-Method Stage
Logic of the Stage
[lo_cb_W2PS, 3, en_US]
Figure 10-9 Logic of the 2P-Method Stage
Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value

For the description to determine the tripping/opening current value, refer to chapter 10.7.4.1 Description.
Calculation of Remaining Switching Cycles

A double-logarithmic diagram provided by the circuit-breaker manufacturer illustrates the relationship of
permitted switching cycles and the tripping/opening current, see the following figure. According to the
example, this circuit breaker can operate approximately 1000 times at a tripping current of 10 kA.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
2 points and their connecting line determine the relationship of switching cycles and tripping current. Point P1
is determined by the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current Irated. Point P2 is deter-
mined by the maximum number of switching cycles at rated short-circuit breaking current Isc. The 4 associated
values can be configured with the parameters Rated normal current, Switching cycles at Ir,
Rated short-circ.cur. Isc, and Switching cycles at Isc.
[dw_CB_WOpC, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-10 Diagram of Switching Cycles for the 2P Method
As shown in the preceding figure, a double-logarithmic diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be
expressed by the following exponential function:
[fo_CBW2P1, 1, en_US]
Where:
Itrip Tripping/opening current
Irated Rated normal current
m Slope coefficient
b Switching cycles at rated normal current
n Number of switching cycles
The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func-
tion and leads to the coefficients b and m.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
NOTE
i Since a slope coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of incorrect
settings, the slope coefficient is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function in
the switching-cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of switching cycles with Isc is used
instead as the calculation result for the current number of switching cycles, as the dashed line with m =
-4.48 shows in following figure.
[dw_CB_WSlo, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-11 Value Limitation of Slope Coefficient
(1) Applied function from m < -4

(2) Parameterized function with m = -4.48
(3) Parameterized function with m = -1.77
If the 2P-method stage receives the logic release signal, the current number of used up switching cycles (in
relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current) is calculated based on the determined trip-
ping current. This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime (switching cycles). The remaining life-
time is available as statistic value. For better understanding, refer to the example below.
You can reset or preset the statistical values according to the specific application. The reset operation changes
the statistic values to 0, and not to their default values of 10 000.
The statistic value of the residual switching cycles is calculated according to the following formula:

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Where:
i No. of latest circuit-breaker switching cycle
Endur.i Residual switching cycles with rated normal current, after the ith switching cycle
nrated Overall permissible switching cycles at rated normal current
ntrip Overall permissible switching cycles at tripping current Itrip
nrated/ntrip Lost switching cycles referring to rated normal current
EXAMPLE
For calculating the residual switching cycles of a circuit breaker, the following is assumed:
P1 (2.5 kA, 10 000)
P2 (50.0 kA, 50)
The circuit breaker has made 100 opening operations with rated normal current, 2 tripping operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current, and 3 tripping operations with 10 kA tripping current. Then, the residual
switching cycles with rated normal current are:
There are still 9465 possible break operations at rated normal current.

If the residual switching cycles of any phase lie below the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is gener-
ated.
Parameter: Switching cycles at Ir
• Default setting (_:101) Switching cycles at Ir = 10 000

You use the Switching cycles at Ir parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated normal current.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.
Parameter: Rated short-circ.cur. Isc
• Default setting (_:102) Rated short-circ.cur. Isc = 25 000 A

You use the Rated short-circ.cur. Isc parameter to define the rated short-circuit breaking current.
Parameter: Switching cycles at Isc
• Default setting (_:103) Switching cycles at Isc = 50

You use the Switching cycles at Isc parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated short-circuit breaking current.
• Default setting (_:104) Threshold = 1000

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
You use the Threshold parameter to define the threshold of residual switching cycles with rated normal
current. A warning signal is generated when the statistic is less than the Threshold.
Example
Here is an example that shows you how to set the Threshold parameter. Assuming a circuit breaker with the
same technical data as provided in the example for residual switching cycles, 50 breaking operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current are permitted.
A warning signal should be issued when the number of possible breaking operations with rated short-circuit
breaking current is less than 3. For that condition, you set the Threshold value based on the following calcu-
lation:
10.7.5.3 Settings

2P-method
_:1 2P-method:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 2P-method:Switching 100 to 1000000 10000
cycles at Ir
_:102 2P-method:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:103 2P-method:Switching 1 to 1000 50
cycles at Isc
_:104 2P-method:Threshold 0 to 10000000 100

(Type)
2P-method
_:54 2P-method:Inactive SPS O
_:52 2P-method:Behavior ENS O
_:53 2P-method:Health ENS O
_:301 2P-method:Endur.A INS O
_:302 2P-method:Endur.B INS O
_:303 2P-method:Endur.C INS O
_:304 2P-method:Warning ACT O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.7.6 I2t-Method Stage
Logic of the Stage
[lo_cb_WI2t, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-12 Logic of the I2t-Method Stage
Calculation of the Wear

The I2t method evaluates the wear of a circuit breaker based the sampled measuring values of the phase
currents during the arc time. The duration of the arc time is defined by the difference between the 2 settings
of parameters CB break time and CB opening time (see also Figure 10-6). The stage determines the
ending point of the arc time by searching backward the zero-crossing point of the phase currents after it
receives the logic release signal. Then, the squared fault currents during the arc time are integrated phase-

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
selectively. The integrals are referred to the squared rated normal current of the circuit breaker as shown in
the following formula, with phase A as example.
[fo_CBWI2T, 1, en_US]
Where:
Irated Rated normal current
iA(t) Sampled measured current value of phase A
The calculated squared tripping current integrals are added to the existing statistic values.You can reset or
preset the statistic value according to the specific application.

If the statistic value of any phase lies above the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is generated.
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 10 000.00 I/Ir*s

You use the Threshold parameter to specify the maximum permitted integral of squared sampled measured
values of the phase currents.
10.7.6.3 Settings

I2t-method
_:1 I2t-method:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 I2t-method:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/Ir*s 10000.00 I/Ir*s

(Type)
I2t-method
_:54 I2t-method:Inactive SPS O
_:52 I2t-method:Behavior ENS O
_:53 I2t-method:Health ENS O
_:301 I2t-method:ΣI²t A BCR O
_:302 I2t-method:ΣI²t B BCR O
_:303 I2t-method:ΣI²t C BCR O
_:304 I2t-method:Warning ACT O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
10.7.7 Supervision CB Make Time Stage
Logic of the Stage
[lo_sup-cb-make-time, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-13 Logic of the Supv.CB Make Time Stage
Operating Mode
The stage for the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time calculates the time between the circuit-breaker
closing command and the point in time when the current from at least one phase exceeds the
Oper.current threshold. If this threshold has not been exceeded after 2.5 times the value of the param-
eter CB make time, the measurement is canceled and the output value Make time is set to 0 and marked
with the quality invalid.
If at least one phase of the current has exceeded the parameter Oper.current threshold or the param-
eter Current thresh. CB open at the time of the circuit-breaker closing command, the measurement is
canceled and the output value Make time is marked with the quality invalid.
You can define 2 independent thresholds for the supervision of the measured make time. When these thresh-
olds are exceeded, the corresponding outputs Warning 1 and Warning 2 are activated for 100 ms. These
can be routed in the log.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Parameter: Level of warning 1
• Default setting (_:101) Level of warning 1 = 5 %

With the parameter Level of warning 1, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed the parameter CB make time at the output Make time, before the output Warning 1 is set. The
output Warning 1 then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Level of warning 2
• Default setting (_:102) Level of warning 2 = 10 %

With the parameter Level of warning 2, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed the parameter CB make time at the output Make time, before the output Warning 2 is set. The
output Warning 2 then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Oper.current threshold
• Default setting (_:103) Oper.current threshold = 0.100 A

With the parameter Oper.current threshold, you define the current threshold. If the measured value
exceeds this threshold, the measured value is detected as flowing operating current. As soon as an operating
current flows, the end of the time interval Make time is detected.
Parameter: Delay correction time
• Default setting (_:104) Delay correction time = 0.000 s

With the parameter Delay correction time, you define a correction value which will be subtracted from
the Make time during calculation. This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system, for example,
relay residual times, if necessary.
10.7.7.3 Settings

Supv.CB mak.t.
_:1 Supv.CB mak.t.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv.CB mak.t.:Level of 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning 1
_:102 Supv.CB mak.t.:Level of 1 % to 100 % 10 %
warning 2
_:103 Supv.CB 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
mak.t.:Oper.current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
threshold
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:104 Supv.CB mak.t.:Delay -0.050 s to 0.050 s 0.000 s
correction time

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

(Type)
Supv.CB mak.t.
_:54 Supv.CB mak.t.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv.CB mak.t.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv.CB mak.t.:Health ENS O
_:301 Supv.CB mak.t.:Make time MV O
_:302 Supv.CB mak.t.:Warning 1 SPS O
_:303 Supv.CB mak.t.:Warning 2 SPS O

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
11 Functional Tests
11.1 Overview 562

11.2 Directional Test 563

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Functional Tests
11.1 Overview
11.1 Overview
Various tests have to be performed for commissioning to warrant the correct function of the device.
For tests using secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurands are locked in and trip and
close commands to the circuit breakers are interrupted, unless otherwise indicated.
Secondary tests can never replace primary tests because they cannot include connection faults. They provide a
theoretical check of the setting values only.
Primary tests may be done only by qualified personnel who are familiar with the commissioning of protection,
monitoring and fault recording systems, with the operation of the system, and with safety regulations and
provisions (switching, grounding, etc.).
Switching operations also have to be performed for the commissioning. The described tests require that these
be capable of being performed safely. They were not conceived for operational checks.
Functional tests must be repeated at regular intervals and include:
• Current and voltage measured values
• Binary Inputs and Outputs
• Trigger settings
• Communication interfaces
• Fault recording and failure indications

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Functional Tests
11.2 Directional Test
11.2 Directional Test

The proper connection of the current and voltage transformer is checked with load current via the line to be
monitored or the monitored object. Switch the line off for this. A load current of at least 0.1 IN has to flow via
the line; it should be ohmic to ohmic inductive. The direction of the load current has to be known. In case of
doubt, meshed and ring systems should be unraveled. The line remains switched on the for the duration of
the measurements.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured value. First make sure that the power
measured values correspond to the power direction. Normally, it can be assumed that the forward direction
(measuring direction) goes from the busbar toward the line.
Using the power measured values at the device or DIGSI 5, make sure that it corresponds to the power direc-
tion:
• P is positive if the active power flows in the line or in the monitored object.
• P is negative if the active power flows to the busbar or out of the monitored object.
• Q is positive if the lagging reactive power flows in the line or in the monitored object.
• P is negative if the lagging reactive power flows to the busbar or out of the monitored object.
If the power measured values have a different sign than expected, then the power flow is opposite to the
current-direction definition. This can be the case, for example, at the opposite end of the line. The set of
current transformers then points in the direction of the monitored object (such as the line).
If the values are not as expected, it may be due to a polarity reversal at the voltage connection.
As a final step, switch off the system.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
12 Technical Data
12.1 General Device Data 566

12.2 Date and Time Synchronization 576
12.3 Phasor Measurement Unit 577
12.4 Recorder Functions 578
12.5 Supervision Functions 581
12.6 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values 585
12.7 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring 590
12.8 CFC 591

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.1 General Device Data
12.1.1 Supply Voltage
Integrated Power Supply

For modular devices, the following modules contain a power supply:
PS201 – Power supply of the base module and of the 1st device row
PS203 – Power supply of the 2nd device row
PS204 – Redundant power supply
CB202 – Plug-in module assembly with integrated power supply, for example, to accommodate communica-
tion modules
Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to DC 300 V
ranges AC 80 V to AC 265 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
(PS201, PS203, PS204,
CB202)
Auxiliary rated voltage VH DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/DC 125 V/DC 220 V/
(PS201, PS203, PS204, DC 250 V or
CB202) AC 100 V/AC 115 V/AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to 150 V DC 88 V to DC 300 V
ranges (PS101) AC 80 V to AC 265 V,
Only for non-modular 50 Hz/60 Hz
devices
Auxiliary rated voltage VH DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/ DC 110 V/ DC 125 V/
(PS101) DC 125 V DC 220 V/DC 250 V
Only for non-modular or
devices AC 100 V/AC 115 V/
AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Superimposed alternating ≤ 15 % of the DC auxiliary rated voltage (applies only to direct voltage)
voltage, peak-to-peak,
IEC 60255-11,
IEC 61000-4-17
Inrush current ≤ 18 A
Recommended external Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, characteristic C according to IEC 60898
protection
Internal fuse
– DC 24 V to DC 48 V DC 60 V to DC 125 V DC 24 V to DC 48 V
AC 100 V to AC 230 V
PS101 4 A inert, AC 250 V, 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
Only for non-modular DC 150 V, SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
devices UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or
Schurter type SPT 5x20
PS201, PS203, CB202 4 A inert, AC 250 V, 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
(to device version xA) DC 150 V, SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Integrated Power Supply

PS201, PS203, PS204 4 A inert, AC 250 V, 3.15 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
(Device version xB and DC 150 V, SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
higher) UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or
Power consumption (life relay active)
– DC AC 230 V/50 Hz AC 115 V/50 Hz
1/3 module, non-modular 7 W 16 VA 12.5 VA
Without plug-in modules
1/3 base module, modular 13 W 55 VA 40 VA
Without plug-in modules
1/6 expansion module 3W 6 VA 6 VA
1/6 plug-in module 3.5 W 14 VA 7 VA
assembly without plug-in
modules (modules CB202)
Plug-in module for base <5W < 6 VA < 6 VA
module or plug-in module
assembly (for example,
communication module)
Stored-energy time for auxiliary voltage outage or For V ≥ DC 24 V ≥ 50 ms
short circuit, modular devices For V ≥ DC 110 V ≥ 50 ms
IEC 61000-4-11 For V ≥ AC 115 V ≥ 50 ms
IEC 61000-4-29
Stored-energy time for auxiliary voltage outage or For V ≥ DC 24 V ≥ 20 ms
short circuit, non-modular devices For V ≥ DC 60 V ≥ 50 ms
IEC 61000-4-11 For V ≥ AC 115 V ≥ 200 ms
IEC 61000-4-29
12.1.2 Binary Inputs
Standard Binary Input
Rated voltage range DC 24 V to 250 V

The binary inputs of SIPROTEC 5 are bipolar, with the exception of the
binary inputs on the modules IO230, IO231, and IO233.
Current consumption, excited Approx. DC 0.6 mA to 2.5 mA (independent of the control voltage)
Power consumption, max. 0.6 W
Pickup time Approx. 3 ms
Dropout time26 Capacitive load (supply-line capaci- Dropout time
tance)
< 5 nF < 4 ms
< 10 nF < 6 ms
< 50 nF < 10 ms
< 220 nF < 35 ms
26 For time-critical applications with low-active signals, consider the specified dropout times. If necessary, provide for active discharge
of the binary input (for example, a resistor in parallel to the binary input or using a change-over contact).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Control voltage for all modules Adapt the binary-input threshold to be set in the device to the control
with binary inputs, except voltage.
module IO233 Range 1 for 24 V, 48 V, and 60 V Vlow ≤ DC 10 V
Control voltage Vhigh ≥ DC 19 V
Range 2 for 110 V and 125 V Vlow ≤ DC 44 V
Range 3 for 220 V and 250 V Vlow ≤ DC 88 V
Control voltage for binary inputs of Range for 125 V Vlow ≤ DC 85 V
the IO233 module Control voltage Vhigh ≥ DC 105 V
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. To ensure EMC immunity, use the terminals
shown in the terminal diagrams/connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common potential.
Special Binary Input with Maximized Robustness against Electrical Disturbances and Failures (IO216)
Rated voltage range DC 220 V

The special binary inputs of the SIPROTEC 5 with maximized robustness
against electrical disturbances and failures are bipolar and available only
on the module IO216.
Input impedance 50 kΩ to 60 kΩ
Rejection pulse charge > 200 µC
Current consumption, excited Approx. DC 1.2 mA to 2.0 mA (additionally to the current consumption
of the input impedance)
Power consumption, max. 1.5 W at DC 242 V
Pickup time Approx. 3 ms
Dropout time27 Capacitive load (supply-line capaci- Dropout time
tance)
< 5 nF < 3 ms
< 10 nF < 4 ms
< 50 nF < 5 ms
< 220 nF < 10 ms
Control voltage for the module Range for 220 V control voltage
IO216 Threshold pickup 158 V to 170 V
Threshold dropout 132 V to 154 V
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. To ensure EMC immunity, use the terminals
shown in the terminal diagrams/connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common potential.
12.1.3 Relay Outputs
Standard Relay (Type S)
Rated voltage (AC and DC) 250 V

Rated current (continuous) and total permissible 5A
current for contacts connected to common potential
27 For time-critical applications with low-active signals, consider the specified dropout times. If necessary, provide for active discharge
of the binary input (for example, a resistor in parallel to the binary input or using a change-over contact).

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s (make contact only)
holding)
Short-time current across closed contact 250 A for 30 ms
Breaking capacity Max. 30 W (L/R = 40 ms)
Max. 360 VA (power factor ≥ 0.35, 50 Hz to 60 Hz)
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Make time: typical: 8 ms; maximum: 10 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used Break time: typical: 2 ms; maximum: 5 ms
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance DC 24 V, 5 A, general purpose
with UL certification DC 48 V, 0.8 A, general purpose
DC 240 V, 0.1 A, general purpose
AC 240 V, 5 A, general purpose
AC 120 V, 1/6 hp
AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
B300
R300
Interference suppression capacitors across the 4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
contacts
Safety/monitoring 2-channel activation
Fast Relay (Type F)

Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s (make contact only)
holding)
Max. 360 VA (power factor ≥ 0.35, 50 Hz to 60 Hz)
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Make time: typical: 4 ms; maximum: 5 ms
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance DC 24 V, 5 A, general purpose
with UL certification DC 48 V, 0.8 A, general purpose
DC 240 V, 0.1 A, general purpose
AC 240 V, 5 A, general purpose
AC 120 V, 1/6 hp
AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
B300
R300
contacts
Safety/monitoring 2-channel activation with cyclic testing (for make
contact only)
High-Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration (Type HS)
Rated voltage AC 200 V, DC 250 V

Rated current (continuous) 5 A (in accordance with UL approval)
10 A (not UL approved; AWG 14 / 2.5 mm2copper
conductors necessary)
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s
holding)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data

Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Make time: typical: 0.2 ms; maximum: 0.2 ms
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance B150
with UL certification Q300
contacts
Power Relay (for Direct Control of Motor Switches)

Switching power for permanent and periodic opera- 250 V/4.0 A
tion 220 V/4.5 A
In order to prevent any damage, the external protec- 110 V/5.0 A
tion circuit must switch off the motor in case the rotor 60 V/5.0 A
is blocked.
48 V/5.0 A
24 V/5.0 A
Turn on switching power for 30 s, recovery time until 100 V/9.0 A
switching on again is 15 minutes. 60 V/10.0 A
For short-term switching operations, an impulse/ 48 V/10.0 A
pause ratio of 3 % must be considered. 24 V/10.0 A
In order to prevent any damage, the external protec-
tion circuit must switch off the motor in case the rotor
is blocked.
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s
holding)
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) ≤ 16 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance DC 300 V, 4.5 A – 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
with UL certification DC 250 V, 1 hp Motor – 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
DC 110 V, 3/4 hp Motor – 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
DC 60 V, 10 A, 1/2 hp Motor – 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
contacts
The power relays operate in interlocked mode, that is, only one relay of each switching pair picks up at a time
thereby avoiding a power-supply short circuit.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.1.4 Design Data
Masses
Device Size
Weight of the Modular Devices
Type of construction 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
Flush-mounting device 4.4 kg 7.2 kg 9.9 kg 12.7 kg 15.5 kg
Surface-mounted device with inte- 7.4 kg 11.7 kg 15.9 kg 20.2 kg 24.5 kg
grated on-site operation panel
Surface-mounted device with 4.7 kg 7.8 kg 10.8 kg 13.9 kg 17.0 kg
detached on-site operation panel
Devices with IO240 weigh 0.9 kg more.

Size Weight
Detached on-site operation panel 1/3 1.9 kg
Detached on-site operation panel 1/6 1.1 kg
Device Size
Weight of the Non-Modular Devices 7xx81, 7xx82
Type of construction 1/3
Flush-mounting device 3.6 kg
Bracket for non-modular surface- 1.9 kg
mounting version
Dimensions of the Base and Expansion Modules
Type of Construction Max. Total Width x Max. Total Height x

Max. Total Depth28, Each Rounded up to
the Next Full mm (in Inches)
Flush-mounting device Base module 150 mm x 266 mm x 231 mm
(5.91 x 10.47 x 9.09)
Base module with IO240 150 mm x 266 mm x 277 mm
(5.91 x 10.47 x 10.91)
(5.91 x 10.47 x 9.57)
Expansion module 75 mm x 266 mm x 231 mm
(2.95 x 10.47 x 9.09)
Expansion module with IO240 75 mm x 266 mm x 277 mm
(2.95 x 10.47 x 10.91)
(2.95 x 10.47 x 9.57)
Surface-mounted device with Base module 150 mm x 315 mm x 341 mm
integrated on-site operation (5.91 x 12.4 x 13.43)
panel Expansion module 75 mm x 315 mm x 341 mm
(2.95 x 12.4 x 13.43)
28 Including current terminal, excluding USB port cover

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Type of Construction Max. Total Width x Max. Total Height x

Max. Total Depth28, Each Rounded up to
the Next Full mm (in Inches)
Surface-mounted device with Base module 150 mm x 315 mm x 231 mm
detached on-site operation (5.91 x 12.4 x 9.09)
panel Base module with IO240 150 mm x 315 mm x 277 mm
(5.91 x 12.4 x 10.91)
(5.91 x 12.4 x 9.57)
Expansion module 75 mm x 315 mm x 231 mm
(2.95 x 12.4 x 9.09)
(2.95 x 12.4 x 10.91)
(2.95 x 12.4 x 9.57)
Dimensions of the Device Rows
Type of Max. Total wWidth x Max. Total Height x Max. Total Depth29, Rounded to full mm
Construction
Device width 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
Flush-mounting 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
device 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x
231 mm 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm
device with 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x
IO240 277 mm 277 mm 277 mm 277 mm 277 mm
device with 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x 266 mm x
IO111 243 mm 243 mm 243 mm 243 mm 243 mm
Surface- 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
mounted device 315 mm x 315 mm x 315 mm x 315 mm x 315 mm x
with integrated 341 mm 343 mm30 343 mm30 343 mm30 343 mm30
on-site operation
panel
with detached 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm 231 mm
on-site operation
panel

30 Including connecting rail

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Type of Max. Total wWidth x Max. Total Height x Max. Total Depth29, Rounded to full mm
Construction
on-site operation
panel with
IO240
on-site operation
panel with
IO111
Plug-In Module Dimensions
Type of Construction Max. Width x Max. Height x Max. Depth

USART-Ax-xEL, ETH-Bx-xEL 61 mm x 45 mm x 121 mm
USART-Ax-xFO, ETH-Bx-xFO (without protective cover) 61 mm x 45 mm x 133 mm
ANAI-CA-4EL, ANAI-CE-2EL 61 mm x 45 mm x 120 mm
ARC-CD-3FO 61 mm x 45 mm x 121 mm
Minimum Bending Radii of the Connecting Cables Between the On-Site Operation Panel and the Base Module
Fiber-optic cable R = 50 mm
Pay attention to the length of the cable protection
sleeve, which you must also include in calculations.
D-Sub cable R = 50 mm (minimum bending radius)
Degree of Protection According to IEC 60529
For equipment in the surface-mounting housing IP5431 for front

For equipment in the flush-mounting housing IP5431 for front
For operator protection (back side) IP2x for current terminal (installed)
IP2x for voltage terminal (installed)
Degree of pollution, IEC 60255-27 2
Maximum operating altitude above sea level 2000 m (6561.68 ft)
UL Note
Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure.

When expanding the device with the 2nd device row, then they must be mounted completely inside an
enclosure.

31 The supplied plug-in strips must be used for expansion modules with LEDs.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Tightening Torques for Terminal Screws
Type of Line Current Terminal Voltage Terminal with Voltage Terminal with
Spring-Loaded Terminals Screw Connection
Stranded wires with ring- 2.7 Nm No ring-type lug No ring-type lug
type lug
Stranded wires with boot- 2.7 Nm 1.0 Nm 0.6 Nm
lace ferrules or pin-type
lugs
Solid conductor, bare 2.0 Nm 1.0 Nm –
(2 mm2)
Blank stranded wire Not permitted 1 Nm 0.6 Nm
NOTE
i For current and voltage terminals, the maximum speed of the tool must not exceed 640 rpm.
NOTE
i Use copper cables only.
Torques for Other Screw Types
Screw Type Torque

M4 x 20 1.2 Nm
M4 x 8 1.2 Nm
M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 8 0.39 Nm
Collar screw, M4 x 20 0.7 Nm
12.1.5 Influencing Variables for Measured Values
Auxiliary voltage 0.8 Var to 1.2 Var ≤ 0.2 %

Ambient temperature -10 °C to 55 °C ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency: 45 Hz to 65 Hz ≤1%
Harmonics ≤1%
• Up to 10 % of 3rd harmonics ≤1%
• Up to 10 % of 5th harmonics
Warmup ≤ 0.3 %
Transient excess pickup in fundamental component measurement ≤5%
method for τ > 100 ms (with complete unbalance)
EMC interference32 ≤ 1.5 %
32 Exception: Magnetic field at operating frequency and 1000 A/m ≤ 5 %

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.1.6 SDHC Memory Card
NOTE
i You can use only Siemens SDHC memory cards.
Capacity 16 GB33
Performance class ≥ Class 10
Temperature range -40 °C to +85 °C
Flash type SLC
Dimensions
Width x Height x Depth (in Inches)

SDHC memory card 24 mm x 32 mm x 2.1 mm (0.94 x 1.26 x 0.08)
33 Usable capacity: Approx. 15 GB

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data

Date format DD.MM.YYYY (Europe)
MM/DD/YYYY (USA)
YYYY-MM-DD (China)
Time source 1, time source 2 None
IRIG B
DCF77
PI
SNTP
Time zone 1, time zone 2 Local
UTC
Failure indication after 0 s to 3600 s
Time zone and daylight saving time Transfer of PC settings
Manually setting the time zones
Time zone offset with respect to GMT -720 min to 840 min
Switching over to daylight saving time Active
Inactive
Beginning of daylight saving time Input: Day and time
End of daylight saving time Input: Day and time
Offset daylight saving time -120 to 120 [steps of 15]

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.3 Phasor Measurement Unit
12.3 Phasor Measurement Unit

Accuracy
IEEE Standard for Synchrophasor
Measurements
IEEE Std C37.118.1aTM-2014
Data Transfer
IEEE Standard for Synchrophasor
Data transfer
IEEE Std C37.118.2TM-2011

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.4 Recorder Functions
12.4.1 Fast-Scan Recorder
Setting Values
Fast-Scan Recorder Setting Range Increment

Memory capacity 0.200 GB to 15.000 GB Increments of 1
Maximum record time 1.0 s to 90.0 s Increments of 0.1
Pre-trigger time 0 s to 3.0 s Increments of 0.1
Post-trigger time 1.0 s to 90.0 s Increments of 0.1
Manual record time 1.0 s to 90.0 s Increments of 0.1
Sampling frequency 1 kHz to 16 kHz Increments of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
Retrigger blocking time 0.0 s to 3600 s Increments of 0.1
Number of Recorder Instances
Fast-scan recorder 1 (fix)
Signals to be Recorded
Refer to Number of Routable Measured Values (MV) and Binary Tracks (SPS), Page 579
Trigger
Frequency trigger
Power trigger
Voltage trigger
Current trigger
12.4.2 Slow-Scan Recorder
Setting Values
Slow-Scan Recorder Setting Range Increment

Maximum record time 1 min to 90 min Increments of 1
Pre-trigger time 0 s to 90 s Increments of 1
Post-trigger time 1 min to 90 min Increments of 1
Manual record time 1 min to 90 min Increments of 1
Averaging time 1 to 3000 periods Increments of 1
Retrigger blocking time 0 min to 240 min Increments of 1
Slow-scan recorder 0 to 2

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Trigger
Frequency trigger
Power trigger
Voltage trigger
Current trigger
12.4.3 Continuous Recorder
Setting Values
Continuous Recorder Setting Range Increment

Averaging time 1 s to 900 s
Continuous recorder 0 to 5
12.4.4 Trend Recorder
Setting Values
Trend Recorder Setting Range Increment

Trend recorder 0 to 2
12.4.5 Measured Values and Binary Inputs
Binary Inputs
Sampling 4 kHz34
Resolution 1 ms
Refresh rate Event-driven
Number of Routable Measured Values (MV) and Binary Tracks (SPS)
Recorder Measured Values (MV) Binary Tracks (SPS)

Fast-scan recorder 75 200
Slow-scan recorder 75 100
34 Toggle rates applied permanently greater than 10 Hz are not recommended.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Recorder Measured Values (MV) Binary Tracks (SPS)

Continuous recorder 75 –
Trend recorder 100 200
Routable Measurands
Measurands
Frequency
Voltage
Current
Power
PQ 10/12 cycles
PQ trend
PQ flicker (according to IEC 61000-4-15, Class F3)
Single harmonic from the splitter functions
• Splitter Harm function:

If you instantiate the FB Splitter Har, you can route the measured values of the 1st to the 51st
harmonics in DIGSI.
• Splitter IntHarm function:
If you instantiate the FB Splitter IntH, you can route the measured value of the interharmonics in DIGSI.
Measuring-transducer measurands (I/O modules)
Measuring-transducer measurands (measuring-transducer module, for example, ANAI-CA-4EL)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.5 Supervision Functions
12.5.1 Voltage-Balance Supervision
Setting Values
Release threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Threshold min/max 0.58 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01
Delay failure indication 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Overvoltage dropout ratio Approx. 0.97

Undervoltage dropout ratio Approx. 1.05
Times
Tripping time Approx. 500 ms

Dropout time Approx. 500 ms
12.5.2 Voltage-Sum Supervision
Setting Values
Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.97
Times

12.5.3 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision
Setting Values
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s

Phase-rotation direction ABC
ACB
Times


C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.5.4 Broken-Wire Detection
Setting Values
Value Setting Range Increment

Mode of blocking Blocking -
Automatic blocking
No blocking
Delta value for autoblock 0.004 I/Irated to 5.000 I/Irated 0.001
12.5.5 Current-Balance Supervision
Setting Values
Release threshold Irated= 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Irated= 5 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Threshold min/max 0.10 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01
Dropout Ratio
Overcurrent dropout ratio Approx. 0.97

Undercurrent dropout ratio Approx. 1.05
Times

12.5.6 Current-Sum Supervision
Setting Values
Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01

Threshold 1 A @ 50 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
and100 Irated
5 A @ 50 0.15 A to 50.00 A Increments 0.01 A
and100 Irated
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.97
Times


C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.5.7 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
Setting Values
Release threshold 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Phase sequence ABC
ACB
Dropout Ratio
Release-threshold dropout ratio Approx. 0.97
Times

12.5.8 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum
Times
Pickup times Approx. 2 ms (faster than the fastest protection function)

12.5.9 Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Supervision
Setting Value for the FB Auxiliary Direct-Voltage Measurement
Measuring window 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms, 80 ms, 100 ms
Setting Values for the Stages
Threshold 10.0 V to 295.0 V Increments of 0.1 V

Dropout ratio for the Overvoltage stage 0.90 to 0.99 Increments of 0.01
Dropout ratio for the Undervoltage stage 1.01 to 1.10 Increments of 0.01
Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Operate delay
Dropout
Dropout differential is derived from the parameter Dropout ratio.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Times
Pickup time (1 to 2) ⋅ Measuring window + OOT35

Example for Measuring window of 20 ms:
Pickup time = 20 ms to 40 ms + OOT
Dropout time (1 to 2) ⋅ Measuring window + OOT
Example for Measuring window of 20 ms:
Dropout time = 20 ms to 40 ms + OOT
Tolerances
Direct voltage 0.2 % of the setting value or 50 mV

Operate delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
35 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional delay of the output medium used, see chapter 12.1.3 Relay Outputs

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.6 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values

The following applies to the tolerances of the currents and voltages:
• The values apply both to the RMS values and the absolute value and phase angle of the fundamental
components.
• These values were determined for pure sinusoidal signals – without harmonics.
• All measured values also have a tolerance of 1 DIGIT.
Voltages
VA, VB, VC V secondary

Voltage range < 200 V secondary
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V
Measuring range 0.1 Vrated to 2 Vrated
Frequency range 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance 0.2 % of the measured value in the above mentioned
measuring range
Frequency range (expanded) 45 Hz to 55 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
measuring range
VAB, VBC, VCA V secondary
Voltage range < 200 V
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V AC
measuring range
measuring range
V1, V2, V0 V secondary
Voltage range < 200 V
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V AC
Tolerance 0.25 % of the measured value in the above
mentioned measuring range or 0.05 V
mentioned measuring range or 0.05 V

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Currents, Instrument Transformers
IA, IB, IC, 3I0 A secondary

Current range < 1.6 Irated
Rated currents 1 A, 5 A
Measuring range 0.1 Irated to 1.6 Irated
mentioned measuring range or 0.001 Irated
measuring range or 0.002 Irated
I1, I2, I0 A secondary
< 1.6 Irated
Current range
Currents, Protection-Class Current Transformer
IA, IB, IC, 3I0 A secondary

< 100 Irated
Current range
Measuring range 0.1 Irated to 5 Irated
I1, I2, I0 A secondary
< 100 Irated
Current range

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Measuring range 0.1 Irated to 5 Irated
Currents, Sensitive Ground-Current Transformer
3I0 A secondary
Current range < 1.6 Irated
Phase Angle
ΦV °
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance ΦV 0.2° at rated voltage
ΦI °
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance ΦI 0.2° at rated current
Power Values
Active power P W secondary

Voltage range 0.8 Vrated to 1.2 Vrated
Current range 0.1 Irated to 2 Irated
|cosφ| ≥ 0.707
Power factor
Tolerance 0.5 % of Srated in the above mentioned measuring
range
Reactive power Q var secondary

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data

|cosφ| ≤ 0.707
Power factor
range
0.7 % of Srated in the above mentioned measuring
range
Apparent power S VA secondary
range
Power Factor

Tolerance 0.02 in the above mentioned measuring range
Frequency
Frequency f Hz
Range frated - 0.20 Hz ≤ f ≤ frated + 0.20 Hz
Tolerance ± 2 mHz at V = Vrated or at I = Irated
Range frated - 3.00 Hz ≤ f < frated + 3.00 Hz
Range 25 Hz to 80 Hz; operational measured values
10 Hz to 90 Hz; functional measured values, system
frequency
Statistical Values, Device
Device operating hours h

Range 0 to 9999999 h
Tolerance 1h
Statistical Values, Circuit Breaker
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None
∑I Off (sum of the primary currents switched off) A, kA, MA, GA, TA, PA primary

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
Range 0 to 9.2e+15
Operating hours h
Tolerance 1h
Circuit breaker open hours h
Tolerance 1h
Statistical Values, Disconnector
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value ΣIx-method stage 0 to 10 000 000 Increments of 1

2P-method stage 0 to 10 000 000 Increments of 1
I2t-method stage 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21 400 000.00 I/Ir*s Increments of 0.01
CB opening time 0.001 s to 0.500 s Increments of 0.001 s
CB break time 0.001 s to 0.600 s Increments of 0.001 s
CB make time 0.001 s to 0.600 s Increments of 0.001 s
Exponent for the ΣIx method 1.0 to 3.0 Increments of 0.1
Switching cycles at Irated 100 to 1 000 000 Increments of 1
Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc 10 to 100 000 Increments of 1
Switching cycles at Isc 1 to 1000 Increments of 1
Level of warning 1 1 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
Level of warning 2 1 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
Operating 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
current threshold 5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Delay correction time -0.050 s to 0.050 s Increments of 0.001 s
Tolerances
Tolerance of the measured value make time ± 2 ms

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.8 CFC
12.8 CFC
Typical response times and maximum number of ticks of the CFC task levels:
Task Level Time (in ms) Max. Number of Ticks CP300
High priority Event-trig- <1 1500
gered
Event-triggered <5 (<10 ms) 12 397
Low priority Event-trig- <5 (<10 ms) 28 656 in total
gered
Measurement 250
The times describe the response time of a typical CFC chart at the respective task level. The maximum number
of ticks applies to a typical load for the device based on the application template Fault recorder N6: 1/1, 43
BI, 33 BO, 20I, 20V.
The task level Measurement runs in cycles every 500 ms. All other task levels are event-triggered.
In order to estimate the tick consumption of a CFC chart, you can use the following formula:
TChart = 5 ∙ nInp + 5 ∙ nOutp + TTLev + ∑i Tint + ∑j TBlock
Where:
nInp Number of indications routed as input in the CFC chart
nOutp Number of indications routed as output in the CFC chart
TTLev 101 Ticks in the High priority Event-triggered level
104 Ticks in the Event-triggered level
54 Ticks in Measurement level
74 Ticks in the Low priority Event-triggered level
Tint Number of internal connections between 2 CFC blocks in one chart
TBlock Used ticks per CFC block (see Table 12-1)
Table 12-1 Ticks of the Individual CFC Blocks
Element Ticks
ABS_D 2.3
ABS_R 1.5
ACOS_R 6.9
ADD_D4 3.4
ADD_R4 3.3
ADD_XMV 6.4
ALARM 1.8
AND_SPS 1.1
AND10 2.9
APC_DEF 1.2
APC_EXE 1.0
APC_INFO 3.9
ASIN_R 1.3
ATAN_R 1.2
BLINK 1.3
BOOL_CNT 2.0
BOOL_INT 1.5
BSC_DEF 1.3

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.8 CFC
Element Ticks
BSC_EXE 1.1
BSC_INFO 2.7
BUILD_ACD 2.9
BUILD_ACT 2.2
BUILD_BSC 1.2
BUILD_CMV 2.3
BUILD_DEL 2.1
BUILD_DPS 1.4
BUILD_ENS 1.3
BUILD_INS 0.5
BUILD_Q 0.8
BUILD_SPS 0.6
BUILD_WYE 3.2
BUILD_XMV 2.9
BUILDC_Q 3.0
CHART_STATE 5.9
CMP_DPS 1.5
CON_ACD 0.7
CON_ACT 0.5
CONNECT 0.4
COS_R 2.5
CTD 1.8
CTU 1.6
CTUD 2.3
DINT_REAL 3.0
DINT_UINT 3.0
DIV_D 2.9
DIV_R 1.6
DIV_XMV 2.2
DPC_DEF 0.4
DPC_EXE 0.4
DPC_INFO 1.1
DPC_OUT 1.3
DPS_SPS 1.0
DRAGI_R 1.7
ENC_DEF 3.6
ENC_EXE 3.8
EQ_D 1.0
EQ_R 1.9
EXP_R 1.5
EXPT_R 2.7
F_TRGM 0.3
F_TRIG 0.3
FF_D 0.9
FF_D_MEM 1.4
FF_RS 0.7
FF_RS_MEM 1.2

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.8 CFC
Element Ticks
FF_SR 0.8
FF_SR_MEM 1.1
GE_D 0.9
GE_R 1.1
GT_D 0.9
GT_R 1.2
HOLD_D 1.1
HOLD_R 1.0
INC_INFO 0.9
LE_D 1.1
LE_R 1.1
LIML_R 1.5
LIMU_R 1.5
LN_R 3.3
LOG_R 1.2
LOOP 1.5
LT_D 0.9
LT_R 0.9
MAX_D 0.9
MAX_R 1.4
MEMORY_D 0.9
MEMORY_R 1.1
MIN_D 0.7
MIN_R 1.3
MOD_D 1.5
MUL_D4 2.5
MUL_R4 2.7
MUL_XMV 2.8
MUX_D 1.2
MUX_R 0.9
NAND10 3.5
NE_D 0.9
NE_R 0.9
NEG 1.2
NEG_SPS 0.8
NL_LZ 3.8
NL_MV 5.6
NL_ZP 2.7
NOR10 3.2
OR_DYN 1.1
OR_SPS 1.3
OR10 2.6
R_TRGM 0.4
R_TRIG 0.4
REAL_DINT 3.0
REAL_SXMV 3.0
SIN_R 0.8

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Technical Data
12.8 CFC
Element Ticks
SPC_DEF 0.4
SPC_EXE 0.4
SPC_INFO 0.4
SPC_OUT 0.4
SPLIT_ACD 3.4
SPLIT_ACT 1.0
SPLIT_BSC 1.3
SPLIT_CMV 2.2
SPLIT_DEL 2.0
SPLIT_DPS 1.0
SPLIT_INS 0.5
SPLIT_Q 0.7
SPLIT_SPS 0.8
SPLIT_WYE 2.6
SPLIT_XMV 2.1
SQRT_R 0.6
SUB_D 1.3
SUB_R 1.6
SUB_XMV 2.4
SUBST_B 1.0
SUBST_BQ 1.5
SUBST_D 1.0
SUBST_R 1.0
SUBST_XQ 1.4
SXMV_REAL 3.0
TAN_R 1.1
TLONG 2.2
TOF 1.0
TON 1.1
TP 2.5
TSHORT 1.9
UINT_DINT 3.0
XOR2 2.6

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
A Appendix
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options 596

A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions 597
A.3 Standard Variants for 7KE85 600
A.4 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 604
A.5 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 607
A.6 Application Examples of the Fault Recorder 610
A.7 Shielding Concept 613
A.8 SDHC Memory Card 614
A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card 616

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options

Order Configurator
The order configurator assists you in the selection of SIPROTEC 5 products. The order configurator is a Web
application that can be used with any browser. The order configurator can be used to configure complete
devices or individual components, such as communication modules, expansion modules, or other accessories.
At the end of the configuration process, the product code and a detailed presentation of the configuration
result are provided. The product code unambiguously describes the selected product and also serves as an
order number.
Ordering Options
The following ordering options are possible for SIPROTEC 5 products:
• Device
• Single part
• DIGSI 5
• Functional enhancement
NOTE
i To order single parts in the order configurator, use the Single part link.
Individual parts are:
• Expansion module
• Plug-in module
• Sensors for arc protection
• Operation panel
• Terminal
• Accessories

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions

The following typefaces are used to characterize parameters in the text:
Mode Parameter name
_:661:1 Parameter address
_ stands for the address combination from function
group:function
661, for example, stands for the address of the
setting parameter
off Parameter state
The following symbols are used in drawings:

Icon Description
Parameter
Parameters with setting values

The default setting is in the 1st position and is
displayed in italics.
Parameters with application-dependent setting values
Dynamic settings:
State logic
Health of a function, stage, or function block
External binary input signal with indication number
External output signal with indication number and

additional information
External output signal without indication number
Measured output value

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
Icon Description
Binary input signal derived from an external output
signal
Internal input signal
Internal output signal
Analog input signal
Reset/block a logic element
AND gate
OR gate
XOR gate
Negation
Threshold stage exceeded
Threshold stage exceeded with

reset of input
Threshold stage shortfall
Threshold stage shortfall with

reset of input

dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input

dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input
Comparators
Pickup delay
Dropout delay
Pickup and dropout delay

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
Icon Description
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a positive signal
edge
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a negative signal

edge
SR-flip-flop, RS-flip-flop, D-flip-flop
Characteristic curve
Minimum operate time

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
A.3 Standard Variants for 7KE85

Standard Variant N1: 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4I, 4V (Example with 1 x IO202)
[Sv7KE-Typ1-200314-01, 2, en_US]
Figure A-1 Standard Variant N1: 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4I, 4V (Example with 1 x IO202)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
[Sv7KE-Typ2-190314-01, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
Standard Variant N2: 1/3, 11 BI, 3 BO, 8V (Example with 1 x IO211)
[Sv7KE-Typ3-260314-01, 1, en_US]
Figure A-3 Standard Variant N2: 1/3, 11 BI, 3 BO, 8V (Example with 1 x IO211)

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
[Sv7KE-Typ4, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
A.4 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[ti_3-phase_1, 4, en_US]
Figure A-5 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers (Zero-Sequence Current to be Calculated)
Figure A-6 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers and a Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Conductor)
NOTE
i The switchover of the current polarity at the 3-phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction
of electric current for current input I4 (IN)!

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
Figure A-7 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers and a Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensi-
tive Ground-Fault Detection
NOTE
of electric current for current input I4 (IN-sep)!
[tileite4-260313-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure A-8 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers and a Measured Ground Current from a Complete
Holmgreen Connection

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
NOTE
Figure A-9 Connection to a 2 Phase Current Transformers – for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems
Only
Figure A-10 Connection to 2 Phase Current Transformers and a Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensi-
tive Ground-Fault Detection – for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems Only
NOTE

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
A.5 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices
[tvvolta1-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-11 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers
Figure A-12 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
Figure A-13 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding of a
Separate Voltage Transformer (for Example Busbar)
Figure A-14 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Transformer)
and Connection to the Phase-to-Phase Voltage of a Busbar Voltage Transformer

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
NOTE
i When using the connection type 3-phase-to-phase voltage, the zero-sequence voltage cannot be detected.
Figure A-15 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Transformer)
and Connection to the Broken-Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
A.6 Application Examples of the Fault Recorder

Application Example: Fault Recorder
[dwanwsto-031212-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure A-16 Application Example: Fault Recorder
FG Function group
MP Measuring point
CFC Continuous Function Chart
QA Circuit breaker
QB Disconnector

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
Application Example: Fault Recorder for Several Feeders
[dwrecfee-031212-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure A-17 Application Example: Fault Recorder for Several Feeders
FG Function group
MP Measuring point
QA Circuit breaker
QB Disconnector

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
Application Example: Fault Recorder with PMU
[dwrecpmu-031212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure A-18 Application Example: Fault Recorder with PMU
FG Function group
MP Measuring point
QA Circuit breaker
QB Disconnector
PMU Phasor Measurement Unit

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
A.7 Shielding Concept
A.7 Shielding Concept

The measuring accuracy of the fault recorder can only be maintained if the voltage and current signals are
connected to the device using shielded lines (1).
Siemens recommends stopping the cable shield at a maximum of 10 cm before the device terminals (1) and
connecting the cable shields near the device with low impedance via the shield terminals (4) to ground poten-
tial (2).
[dwbackvi-130213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure A-19 Shielding Concept
(1) Shielded lines

(2) To the main grounding busbar, cross-section at least 16 mm2
(3) Protective-conductor carrier rail
(4) Shield terminal
(5) Protective-conductor terminal of the device
• Recommended control line for voltage signals: 4•2•0.75 mm2 stranded shielded pair, for example,
LiYCY 4x2x0.75
• Recommended control line for current signals: 4•2•2.5 mm2 stranded shielded pair, for example,
LiYCY 4x2x2.5
NOTE
i Make sure not to damage the cable shield!

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
A.8 SDHC Memory Card

The SDHC memory card (Secure Digital High Capacity) is used to store records from the 7KE85 fault recorder.
[dw_SDHC, 1, --_--]
Figure A-20 SDHC Memory Card
NOTE
i Reading the data of the SDHC memory card with a PC is not intended.
Avoid too frequent insertion cycles!
NOTE
i Use only the original SDHC memory card (ACCESAR) approved by Siemens for the 7KE85 fault recorder.
Replacing the SDHC Memory Card

² De-energize the device.
² Remove the sealing cap.
² Unlock the card by pressing the turquoise eject lever.
[le_Remove_cap_and_SDHC, 1, --_--]
Figure A-21 Removing the Sealing Cap and SDHC Memory Card

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
(1) Push the holder, push the sealing cap to the back and remove it
(2) Unlock the eject lever
(3) Remove the SDHC memory card
² Unpack the new SDHC memory card.

Do not touch the contacts of the SDHC memory card with your fingers.
² Insert the new SDHC memory card.
When inserting, make sure that the SDHC memory card is properly aligned: The side with the contacts
must be facing up, the side with the sticker facing down.
[dw_insert_SDHC, 1, --_--]
Figure A-22 Inserting the SDHC Memory Card into the Device
! CAUTION
Exercise caution when removing the SDHC memory card from a defective device.
If you want to remove the SDHC memory card from a defective device and to insert the card into another
healthy device and if the data must be kept, note the following:
Noncompliance with the specified measures can result in loss of data.
² To avoid a reformatting of the SDHC memory card, you must first import the parameters of the defec-
tive device to another device.
² You can insert the SDHC memory card in the other device and use it only then.
² The recordings on the SDHC memory card from the defective device can still be read in the other
device.
² Insert the sealing cap back again.

² Resume operation of the device.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Appendix
A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card
A.9 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card

Troubleshooting
In the following table, the possible malfunctions of the SDHC memory card and their causes and remedies are
listed.
Table A-1 Troubleshooting SDHC Memory Card
Defect Cause Indication

7KE85 device does not start in The SDHC memory card is SDHC memory card read/write
Process mode and switches to Fall- defective. error. Insert a new Siemens
back mode SDHC memory card.
The user does not use an Invalid or defective SDHC
original Siemens SDHC memory card found. Insert a
memory card. new Siemens SDHC memory
card.
No SDHC memory card is No SDHC memory card found or
inserted. memory card read/write
error. Insert a new Siemens
SDHC memory card.
In the function block General Infor- The SDHC memory card is No SDHC memory card found or
mation, the health state of the either defective or the card memory card read/write
recorder ((_:2701:53) Health) has been removed during error. Insert a new Siemens
switches to alarm mode. operation. SDHC memory card.
Remedy: Switch off the device auxiliary voltage and insert a Siemens SDHC memory card.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Literature
/1/ Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Overcurrent Protection for 3-Pole Tripping – 7SA82,
7SD82, 7SL82, 7SA84, 7SD84, 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86, 7SJ86
C53000-G5040-C010
/2/ Distance and Line Differential Protection, Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping – 7SA87,
7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
C53000-G5040-C011
/3/ Overcurrent Protection – 7SJ82/7SJ85
C53000-G5040-C017
/4/ Overcurrent Protection – 7SJ81
C53000-G5040-C079
/5/ Motor Protection – 7SK82/85
C53000-G5040-C024
/6/ Transformer Differential Protection – 7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
C53000-G5040-C016
/7/ Generator Protection – 7UM85
C53000-G5040-C027
/8/ Busbar Protection – 7SS85
C53000-G5040-C019
/9/ High-Voltage Bay Controller – 6MD85/86
C53000-G5040-C015
/10/ Paralleling Device – 7VE85
C53000-G5040-C071
/11/ Universal Protection – 7SX85
C53000-G5040-C607
/12/ Merging Unit 6MU85
C53000-G5040-C074
/13/ Fault Recorder – 7KE85
C53000-G5040-C018
/14/ Compact Class – 7SX800
C53000-G5040-C003
/15/ Hardware Description
C53000-G5040-C002
/16/ Communication Protocols
C53000-L1840-C055
/17/ Process Bus
C53000-H3040-C054
/18/ DIGSI 5 – Software Description
C53000-D5040-C001

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Literature
/19/ SIPROTEC 5 – Security

C53000-H5040-C081
/20/ PIXIT, PICS, TICS, IEC 61850
C53000-G5040-C013
/21/ Operation
C53000-G5040-C003
/22/ Engineering Guide
C53000-G5040-C004

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
ACD
IEC 61850 data type: Directional protection activation information
ACT
IEC 61850 data type: Protection activation information
Back-up battery
The back-up battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, times and counters are kept retentive.
BCR
IEC 61850 data type: Binary counter reading
CB
Circuit breaker
Chatter blocking
A rapidly intermittent input (for example, owing to a relay contact fault) is disconnected after a parameteriz-
able monitoring time and therefore cannot generate any more signal changes. The function prevents the
system from overloading in the event of an error.
Combination matrix
In an inter-device communication (IDC) group, up to 16 SIPROTEC devices suitable for this can communicate
with one another. The combination matrix specifies which devices exchange which information.
Common format for Transient Data Exchange

Fault record format - COMTRADE
COMTRADE
See the Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
Container
If an object contains other objects, this is referred to as a container. The object Folder for example is such a
container.
Continuous Function Chart (CFC)

The Continuous Function Chart (CFC) is a programming language. It is used for programmable logic control-
lers. The programming language Continuous Function Chart is not defined in the standard IEC 61131-3, but
represents a current extension of IEC programming environments. CFC is a graphic programming language.
Function blocks are linked to one another. This represents an essential difference from conventional program-
ming languages, where sequences of commands are entered.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
Continuous Recorder
The continuous recorder is not a triggered recorder, runs constantly and has large averaging times. The
continuous recorder saves the arithmetic average value of the process quantities (power, frequency, RMS
values of the fundamental component of currents, voltages and symmetric components).
The continuous recorder is organized as a ring buffer. When the memory is filled completely, the oldest data
are overwritten automatically.
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
Data type
The data type is a value set of a data object, together with the operations allowed on this value set. A data
type contains a classification of a data element, such as the determination whether it consists of integers,
letters, or similar.
Data unit
Information item with a joint transmission source. Abbreviation: DU = Data Unit
Data window
The right area of the project window visualizes the content of the area selected in the navigation window. The
data window contains for example, indications or measured values of the information lists or the function
selection for parameterization of the device.
DB
See Double Command.
DC
Double Command – See Double Command.
DCF77
The precise official time is determined in Germany by the Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt PTB in Bruns-
wick. The atomic clock unit of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time signal transmitter in Main-
flingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1500 km from
Frankfurt/Main.
DCP
See Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol
DEL
Phase-to-phase related measurements of a 3-phase system
DIGSI
Configuration software for SIPROTEC
Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol

The DCP protocol is used to detect devices without IP addresses and to assign addresses to these devices.
DM
See Double-point indication

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
Double command
Double commands (DC) are process outputs, which the on and off command can give separated on different
binary outputs.
Double-point indication
Double-point indications (DI) are process indications which visualize 4 process states at 2 inputs: 3 defined
states (for example, On/Off and disturbed position) and 1 undefined state (00).
DP
See Double-point indication
DPC
IEC 61850 data type: Double point control
DPS
IEC 61850 data type: Double-point status
Drag and drop

Copying, moving and linking function, used in graphic user interfaces. The mouse is used to highlight and
hold objects and then move them from one data area to another.
DU
See Data Unit
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) means that an item of electrical equipment functions without error in a
specified environment. The environment is not influenced in any impermissible way here.
ENC
Enumerated Status Controllable
ENS
Enumerated Status
Fast-Scan Recorder
A fast-scan recorder records individual current and voltage sampled values with a sampling rate that is high
enough for the display of network events and transients. Recording starts once the value of an analog quantity
exceeds or drops below a specified limit. High-speed fault recording is used for acquiring brief transient events
of 1-2 seconds.
FG
See Function Group
Fleeting Indication
Fleeting indications are single-point indications present for a very short time, in which only the coming of the
process signal is logged and further processed time-correctly.
Floating
Floating means that a free potential not connected to ground is generated. Therefore, no current flows
through the body to ground in the event of touching.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
Folder
This object type helps when structuring a project hierarchically.
Function block
A block that can perform one specific task or function.
Function group
Functions are brought together into function groups (FG). The assignment of functions to current and/or
voltage transformers (assignment of functions to measuring points), the information exchange between the
function groups via interfaces as well as the generation of group indications are important for this bringing
together.
General interrogation
The state of all process inputs, of the status and of the error image are scanned on system startup. This infor-
mation is used to update the system-side process image. Likewise, the current process state can be interro-
gated after data loss with a general interrogation (GA).
Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event

GOOSE. Protocol of IEC 61850 for communication between bay units.
GI
See General Interrogation
Global Positioning System

Satellites with atomic clocks orbit the earth twice a day at a height of about 20 000 km. They emit signals
which contain the GPS universal time with other data. The GPS receiver determines its own position from the
signals received. It can derive the propagation runtime of a satellite's signal from this position and hence
correct the emitted GPS universal time.
GOOSE
See Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event.
GPS
See Global Positioning System
Ground
The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to 0 at every point. In the area of grounding
conductors, the ground can have a potential diverging from 0. The term reference ground is also used for
this situation.
Grounding
The grounding is the entirety of all means and measuring for grounding.
Hierarchy level
In a structure with superordinate and subordinate objects, a hierarchy level is a level of equal-ranking objects.
HSR protocol
Like PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol), HSR (High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol) is specified in
IEC 62439-3. Both protocols offer redundancy without switching time. The principal function can be found in
the definition of PRP. With PRP, the same message is sent via 2 separated networks. In contrast to this, in the

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
case of HSR the message is sent twice in the 2 directions of the ring. The recipient receives it correspondingly
via 2 paths in the ring, takes the 1st message and discards the 2nd (see PRP).
IEC
See International Electrotechnical Commission
Input Data/Input Direction

Data is sent from the protocol slave to the protocol master.
International Electrotechnical Commission

See IEC.
Internet protocol
The Internet protocol (IP) enables the connection of participants which are positioned in different networks.
Inter-Range Instrumentation Group B

See IRIG B
IP
See Internet protocol
IRIG B
The IRIG time code is an abbreviation of Inter-Range Instrumentation Group time code and is a set of a group
of time codes used primarily in the military area for video recording, telemetry and other data recording
purposes. The Inter-Range Instrumentation Group (IRIG) is an organization of the United States Air Force
located at White Sands Missile Range and defines various standards for the testing of missiles, among other
purposes. The IRIG time code is divided into the following subgroups: IRIG A (1000 second pulses), IRIG B (100
second pulses), IRIG D (1 pulse per minute), IRIG E (10 second pulses), IRIG G (10 000 second pulses), IRIG H (1
second pulse). The subgroups are differentiated by the number of synchronization pulses per second, the data
formats and the modulation techniques used.
Link Address
The link address indicates the address of a SIPROTEC device.
Metered value
Metered values are a processing function, used to determine the total number of discrete similar events
(counter pulses), for example, as integral over a time span. In the power supply utility field, electrical energy is
often recorded as a metered value (energy import/delivery, energy transport).
Navigation window
Left area of the project window, which visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the
form of a hierarchical tree structure.
Object
Each element of a project structure is designated as an object in DIGSI 5.
Offline
If there is no communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is offline. The PC program executes in
Offline mode.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
Online
If there is a communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is online. The PC program executes in
Online mode.
Order Configurator
One or more appropriate modules are suggested in the order configurator corresponding to the desired
protocol on a module. You will also find the available standard variants in the order configurator.
OSM
See Optical Switch Module.
Output data/output direction

Data is sent from the protocol master to the protocol slave.
Output Indication
Indications can be information provided by the device on events and states. The events and states are
provided via binary outputs, for example, startup of the processor system (event) or fault in a device function
(state). These are designated as output indications.
Parameterization
Comprehensive term for all setting work on the device. You can parameterize the protection functions with
DIGSI 5 or sometimes also directly on the device.
Parameter set
The parameter set is the entirety of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC device.
Participant
In an inter-device communication group, up to 16 SIPROTEC devices suitable for this can communicate with
one another. The individually involved devices are referred to as participants.
Participant Address
A participant address consists of the name of the participant, the international dialing code, the local dialing
code and the participant-specific telephone number.
PDC
See Phasor-Data Concentrator
Phasor-Data Concentrator
PDC. This component collects the information of the PMU devices and makes it available to both other compo-
nents.
Phasor Measurement Unit

The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) is a measuring device for power systems. It is capable of taking phasor
measurements of voltages and currents in large, widely distributed networks.
Pinst (Perceptibility, instantaneous)

Perceptibility sensitivity as per flicker measurement according to IEC 61000-4-15

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
PLC
See Programmable Logic Controller
Plt (Perceptibility, long-term)

Long-term flicker strength according to IEC 61000-4-15
PMU
See Phasor Measurement Unit
PQDIF
PQDIF is a binary file format in the IEEE Standard 1159.3-2003 that is used to exchange the measured values
of current, voltage, power, energy between software applications.
PQDIF means Power Quality Data Interchange Format.
Product code
Compilation of product features in readable form
PROFIBUS
PROcess Feld BUS, German Process and Fieldbus standard (EN 50170). The standard specifies the functional,
electrical and mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial fieldbus.
PROFIBUS Address
A unique PROFIBUS address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within a PROFIBUS network. A total of
254 PROFIBUS addresses per PROFIBUS network are available.
Programmable Logic
The programmable logic is a function in Siemens devices or station controllers, enabling user-specific func-
tionality in the form of a program. This logic component can be programmed by various methods: CFC (=
Continuous Function Chart) is one of these. SFC (Sequential Function Chart) and ST (Structured Text) are
others.
Programmable Logic Controller

Programmable logic controllers (PLC) are electronic controllers whose function is saved as a program in the
control unit. The construction and wiring of the device do not therefore depend on the function of the control.
The programmable logic controller has the structure of a computer; it consists of CPU with memory, installa-
tion/extension groups (for example, DI, AI, CO, CR), power supply (PS) and rack (with bus system). The periph-
erals and programming language are oriented towards the circumstances of the control system.
Project
In terms of content, a project is the replication of a real energy supply system. In graphic terms, a project is
represented as a number of objects which are incorporated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project
consists of a series of directories and files containing project data.
Protection Device
A protection device detects fault states in distribution networks, taking into account various criteria, such as
fault distance, fault direction or fault duration, triggering a disconnection of the defective network section.
PRP
PRP is a redundancy protocol for Ethernet networks that is specified in IEC 62439-3. Unlike conventional
redundancy procedures, such as RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, IEEE 802.1D-2004) PRP offers uninter-
ruptible switching, which avoids any down time in the event of a fault, and thus the highest availability.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
Pst (Perceptibility, short-term)

Short-term flicker strength according to IEC 61000-4-15
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a standardized redundancy process with a short response time. In
the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP protocol), structuring times in the multidigit second range apply in the case of
a reorganization of the network structure. These times are reduced to several 100 milliseconds for RSTP.
Real Time
Real time
Reorganize
The frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas which are no longer used. The reorgani-
zation of projects allows these memory areas to be freed up again. The reorganization also leads to VD
addresses being reassigned. This results in all SIPROTEC devices having to be reinitialized.
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
Sampling rate
The sampling rate describes the number of samples taken per period. For protection applications, typical
sampling rates are between 16 and 80. A widely used value is 20 samples per period For power quality appli-
cations, the sampling rate must be considerably higher because of the evaluation of harmonics. A typical value
is 256. If sampling-frequency tracking is used, a constant sampling rate per current power frequency period
can always be assumed regardless of the current power frequency.
SBO
Select before operate
SC
See Single Command
SC
See Single Command
SCD
See Substation Configuration Description
SDHC
Secure Digital High Capacity
Standard for SD memory cards with up to 32 GB capacitance
Service Interface
Device interface for interfacing DIGSI 5 (for example, through a modem)
SI
See Single-Point Indication.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
SICAM PAS
Power Automation System – Substation automation system, modular in design and based on the Substation
Controller SICAM SC and the HMI system SICAM WinCC.
SICAM PQ Analyzer
The SICAM PQ Analyzer is used for the following purposes:
- Displaying data measured by a PQ device
- Assessment of these data according to power quality criteria by the SICAM PQS System (...).
The various views of the SICAM PQ Analyzer provide the means for evaluation of archived PQ measured data
and system incidents.
- Incident explorer
- PQ Inspector
- PQ Explorer
- Report browser
- Grid code viewer
SICAM PQS
With SICAM PQS, all fault records and power quality data in a system can be analyzed.
SICAM SCC
The HMI system SICAM SCC (serial communications channel) graphically displays the state of your network.
SICAM SCC visualizes alarms and messages, archives the network data, provides the option of intervening
manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employees.
SIGRA
The SIGRA component supports you in analyzing failures in your power system. It graphically conditions infor-
mation recorded during the failure and calculates additional supplemental quantities such as impedances or
RMS values, from the supplied measured values making evaluation of the fault record easier for you. The
quantities can be shown as desired in the diagrams of the following views: time signals, phasor diagrams,
locus diagrams and harmonic components. In addition, you may add more fault records to the failure evalua-
tion, for example, from the opposite end of a line, and synchronize these. SIGRA is also suited to evaluate fault
records of devices from other manufacturers.
SIGUARD PDP
SIGUARD PDP (Phasor Data Processing) is software for monitoring the status of power transmission in exten-
sive power systems. When critical states are approached (frequency stability, voltage stability, transmission
stability, and power swing), this is detected early and displayed. The threshold at which a critical state is
reached and requires intervention can be defined and subsequently changed at any time. In addition,
SIGUARD PDP supports you in the analysis of the power system. Weak points and fault sources can be identi-
fied and eliminated early on. SIGUARD PDP works together with PMUs (phasor measurement units). These
measuring devices are installed in the power distribution systems and connected to the current and voltage
transformers. Time synchronization via GPS having an accuracy of < 5 μs enables the PMUs to acquire the
measured values with amplitude and phase as phasors (indicator values) with high precision and to transmit
them via the communication interface. These time-synchronized measured values from regionally widely
distributed measuring points can be collected and evaluated using SIGUARD PDP.
SIMEAS R
SIMEAS R is a digital fault recorder (like the 7KE85) used primarily in power plants, transformer substations,
medium-voltage systems, high-voltage systems, systems for very high voltages and in industrial complexes for
quality assurance and for monitoring secondary and primary facilities. It measures and documents indicators
defined in international standards (EN 50160). Weak points can be reliably and quickly identified due to its
high degree of functionality. In the event of a fault, all relevant signals are recorded with pre-event history,

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
defect trend and post-event behavior and transmitted for valuation and archiving – via Ethernet or a remote
data transmission system. This makes quick decisions possible and errors can be remedied in a timely manner.
SIMEAS R-PMU
SIMEAS R-PMU is a device that contains triggered fault recorders and continuous recorders as well as an inte-
grated Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). The PMU measures phasors and makes them available in a database.
This is a high-precision measurement of the vector quantities of voltage and current in terms of amplitude,
phase angle, and time synchronization.
Simple Network Management Protocol

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet standard protocol and serves for the admin-
istration of nodes in an IP network.
Simple Network Time Protocol

The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is a protocol for the synchronization of clocks via the Internet. With
SNTP, client computers can synchronize their clocks via the Internet with a time server.
Single command
Single commands (EB) are process outputs which visualize 2 process states (for example, On/Off) at an output.
Single-point indication
Single-point indications (SI) are process indications which visualize 2 process states (for example, On/Off) at
an input.
SIPROTEC
The registered trademark SIPROTEC designates the product family of protection devices and fault recorders.
SIPROTEC 5 device
This object type represents a real SIPROTEC device with all the contained setting values and process data.
SIPROTEC 5 variant
This object type represents a variant of an object of the SIPROTEC device type. The device data of this variant
can differ from the device data of the original object. However, all variants derived from the original object
have its VD addresses. Therefore they always correspond to the same real SIPROTEC device as the original
object. In order to document different working states during parameterization of a SIPROTEC device, you can
use objects of the type SIPROTEC variant, for example.
Slave Device
A slave may only exchange data with a master after its has been requested to do so by this master. SIPROTEC
devices work as slaves. A master computer controls a slave computer. A master computer can also control a
peripheral device.
Slow-Scan Recorder
The Slow-scan recorder is, just like the Fast-scan recorder, a triggered recorder. It records measured values
with the set averaging time. SPS indications can still be recorded. Longer record times are possible using the
Slow-scan recorder.
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
SNTP
See Simple Network Time Protocol.
SOE
See Sequence of Events.
SP
See Single-Point Indication.
SPC
IEC 61850 data type: Single Point Control
SPS
IEC 61850 data type: Single point status
SST
See System Interface.
Station Description
A station description is an IEC 61850-compliant file for data exchange between the system configurator and
the IED configurator. The station description contains information on the network structure of a substation.
The station description contains for example, information on the assignment of the devices to the primary
equipment, as well as on the station-internal communication.
System Interface
Device interface for linking to the control and protection system via various communication protocols
TC
Tap-position command – see Transformer Tap Position Command
TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol.
Time jump
A step change in the device clock due to user action (setting the time) or automatically (GPS time synchroniza-
tion unit). A time jump may occur, for example, in the event of a failure when changing the time synchroniza-
tion source.
Time stamp
A time stamp is a value in a defined format. The time stamp assigns a point in time to an event, for example,
in a log file. Time stamps ensure that events can be found again.
Topological view
The Topological View is oriented to the objects of a system (for example, switchgear) and their relation to one
another. The Topological View describes the structured layout of the system in hierarchical form.
Transmission Control Protocol

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a transmission protocol for transport services in the Internet. TCP is
based on IP and ensures connection of the participants during the data transmission. TCP ensures the correct-
ness of the data and the correct sequence of the data packets.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Glossary
Tree view
The left area of the project window visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a hierarchical tree structure. This area is referred to as a tree view.
Trend recorder
Trend recorders are used for long-term recording and monitoring of the process of voltage change within
settable tolerance ranges. The flicker measurement can also be determined and stored in the trend recorder.
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol.
Unbuffered Report Control Block

Unbuffered Report Control Block (URCB) is a form of report controlling. Internal events trigger the immediate
sending of reports based on best effort. If no association exists or if the transport data flow is not fast
enough, events can be lost.
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

UDP is a protocol. The protocol is based on IP as TCP. In contrast to this, however, UDP works without a
connection and does not have any safety mechanisms. The advantage of UDP in comparison to IP is the higher
transmission rate.
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
Value Indication
Value indications are single-point indications in which a further value is transferred in addition to the actual
indication (example: Fault locator : Here, the distance to the fault location is also indicated in addition to the
fault statement Yes/No.)
Virtual Bay Device

A virtual bay device comprises all communication objects, as well as their properties and states, which a
communication user can utilize in the form of services.
Virtual Device
A VD (virtual device) comprises all communication objects, as well as their properties and states, which a
communication user can utilize in the form of services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device or
a software module.

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Index
A Command Checks 450
ACD 105
Acquisition blocking 112
D
ACT 104
Application Examples 610
Deleting recorders 298, 304
Application templates
Deleting Recorders 309, 312
Function key 133
Device driver 272
Averaging time 304
Device-Diagnosis Log 63
Averaging Time 309, 312
Dimensions 571, 575
Disconnection and recovery of supply voltage 303, 308
Disconnection and Recovery of Supply Voltage 298, 312
B DNP 287
DPC 104
Battery fault 524 DPS 103
Bay unit 128
Binary tracks: 579
Broken-wire detection
E
Application and setting notes 498
Broken wire suspected 496
ENC 106
Broken-wire check 497
Overview of functions 494
Protection blocking 497
Structure of the function 495 F
Busbar 613
Fast-Scan Recorder 296
Fault record 290
Recordings 283
C
SICAM PQS 286
SIGRA 285
Channel-name length 279
Fault recorder
Circuit breaker
Continuous recorder 307
Circuit-breaker failure protection 185
Slow-scan recorder 301
Circuit-breaker test 185
Fault Recorder
Trip logic 189
Fast-Scan Recorder 296
Trip-circuit supervision 185
Trend Recorder 311
Trip-command reset 189
Fault recording 304
Client 128
FG Analog Transformers
Communication Log 60
Overview 20-mA Unit Serial 238
COMTRADE 279
FG Analog units
COMTRADE format 283, 289
20-mA Unit. Ether. 232
Continuous recorder 307
Application and setting notes for the RTD unit
Control functions
serial 262
Command logging 461
Application and setting notes for the RTD-Unit
Controllables 428
Ether. 257
User-defined objects 101
Application and setting notes MT fast input 249
Control Functions
Communication with 20-mA Unit. Ether. 231

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Index
Communication with an RTD unit 256 M

Function-group structure 228
Measuring transducer with fast inputs 247 Manual record time 298, 304
Overview 228 Manual updating 112
Overview 20-mA Unit Ether. 230 Maximum record time 298, 304
Overview of RTD Unit Ether. 255 Measurands 410, 410
Overview RTD unit serial 262 Measured values 579
Temperature sensor 258 Memory capacity 298, 312
FG Analog Units Memory size 304, 312
Application and Setting Notes 20 mA Unit. Merging Unit 128
Serial 239 Mode 40
Flash-memory size 298, 304 MV 104
Flash-Memory Size 309
Flicker 410
Function group recorder
Application and setting notes – General settings 293 O
Function group VI 1-phase
Overview 172 Online access 327
Structure of the function group 172 Operation Mode 280
Function group VI 3-phase Operational log 51
Overview 177 Operational measured values 411, 534
Structure of the function group 178 Order configurator 596
Function key 136, 328 Ordering
Function-Group Connections 279 Individual components 596
Other functions
Acquisition blocking 108
Chatter blocking 108
I Manual updating 108
Persistent commands 108
IEC 60529 573 Stored outputs 108
IEC 61850 286
INC 104
Indications 46
Displays 49 P
Reading 46
INS 103, 104 Positive-sequence overcurrent protection 507
Instantiate Function Group 277 Post-trigger time 298, 304
Introduction to DIGSI PQ 10/12 cycles 410
Creating a new project 272 PQ trend 410
Recorder Interaction 282 PQDIF 279
Routing 275 PQDIF Format 287
IO212 247, 249 Pre-trigger time 298, 304
Protective-conductor carrier rail 613
Protective-conductor terminal 613
L
LiYCY 613 Q
Log
Delete 64 Quality processing for GOOSE Later Binding 81
Save 64
Logs 50
Administering 50
Configuring 50 R
Record time 298, 304
Recorder routing 410, 418, 420, 421
Recorder Routing 283
indications 417

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
Index
Recorder routing VI 417, 420, 421 Trigger 324

Retrigger blocking time 298, 304 Binary trigger 326
Ring Buffer 307, 311 CFC Chart 330
Route Measuring Points 276 Current trigger 338, 374
Routing the Signals 283 External Trigger 329
Fault record sequence control 313
Fault Record Sequence Control 314, 316
Frequency trigger 346, 393
S GOOSE Trigger 330
Gradient trigger 325
Sampled values (SAV) 410 Level trigger 325
Sampled Values (SAV) 296 Manual trigger 326
Sampling frequency 298, 304 Power trigger 350, 397
SAV 104 Voltage trigger 332, 358
SDHC memory card Triggers on Indications
Correction of defects 616 SPS messages 330
Data 575 Troubleshooting 616
Replacement 614
Secure Digital High Capacity 614
Security Log 61
Select the Application Template 274 U
SEQ 106
Sequence of events 56 Umlauts 279
Sequence of Events 313 User-defined log 53
Setting the threshold value 119 UTC 308
Setting-history Log 58
Shield Terminal 613, 613
Shielding
Shielded lines 613
SIPROTEC 5 device
Embedding of functions 34
Function control 40
Reference number for parameters and indica-
tions 42
SIPROTEC 5 Device
Adjustment of application templates/functional
scope 38
Slow-scan recorder 301
SPC 103, 104
Special characters 279
SPS 102
SPS unsaved 102
State control 40
State Control 280
Storage capacity 309
Stored Indications 66
Synchronization 95
T
T103 287
T104 287
Test flag 323
Time jump 295
Tolerance trend 418, 420, 421
Transformer ratios 119
Trend Recorder 311

C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022
C53000-G5040-C018-A, Edition 04.2022

SIP5 7KE85 V09.20 Manual C018-A en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7KE85 V09.20 Manual C018-A en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7KE85 V09.20 Manual C018-A en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of the Manual

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 3

• Communication protocol manual

• Process bus manual

4 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

• DIGSI 5 online help

• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

IND. CONT. EQ.

Customer Support Center

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 5

Humboldtstraße 59 E-mail: poweracademy@siemens.com

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

6 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:

• Proper storage, setup and installation

• Proper operation and maintenance

Selection of Used Symbols on the Device

No. Symbol Description

1 Direct current, IEC 60417, 5031

2 Alternating current, IEC 60417, 5032

3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417, 5033

4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417, 5017

5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417, 5019

6 Caution, risk of electric shock

7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000, 0434

8 Protective Insulation, IEC 60417, 5172, Safety Class II devices

9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices

10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market

11 Mandatory Conformity Mark for Electronics and Electrotechnical Products in Morocco

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 7

2 Basic Structure of the Function.................................................................................................................. 33

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 9

3.4 Processing Quality Attributes.............................................................................................79

10 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

5.10.2 Function Description..................................................................................................163

6 Function-Group Types.............................................................................................................................. 167

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 11

6.4.9.4 Information List................................................................................................... 203

12 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

6.6.9 Communication with RTD Unit................................................................................... 265

7 Fault Recorder.......................................................................................................................................... 271

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 13

7.2.13.3 Triggering With the Retrigger Blocking Time......................................................... 316

14 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

7.5.1.8 Application and Setting Notes - V2 Trigger (Negative-Sequence System)............... 368

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 15

7.6.5 V/I Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs.......................................................... 424

8 Control Functions..................................................................................................................................... 427

9 Supervision Functions.............................................................................................................................. 475

16 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

9.3.2.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 486

SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual 17

9.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware................................................................................ 513

10 Measured and Energy Values................................................................................................................... 531

18 SIPROTEC 5, Fault Recorder, Manual

10.7.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 556

12 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 565